2238c

8/12/2019 2238c

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2238c 1/982

B147/B149/B190

SERVICE MANUAL

001892MIUMIU

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


B1 4 7 / B1 4 9

/ B1 9 0

S E RV I C E MAN UAL

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

®

®

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190

SERVICE MANUAL

001892MIU

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information containedwithin this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the bestinterest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANYFASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR

PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, includingdesktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registeredtrademarks or the property of their respective companies.They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashiononly and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of

any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.

2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


The Service Manual contains informationregarding service techniques, procedures,

processes and spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this

manual should be either service trained ocertified by successfully completing a RicohTechnical Training Program.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual torepair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personalinjury, damage to property or loss of warrant

protection.

Ricoh Corporation

WARNING

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


LEGENDPRODUCT CODE COMPANY

GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN

B147 DSc332 LD232c Aficio 2232C C3224



DOCUMENTATION HISTORY

REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS

* 01/2004 Original Printing

1 09/2004 B190 Addition

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM i B147/B149/B190

B147/B149/B190TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTALLATION

1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-11.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1

1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-11.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL.............................................................................1-11.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT.................................................1-21.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2

1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ..........................................................1-3

1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS........................................................................1-31.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS................................................................1-3

1.3 COPIER.....................................................................................................1-41.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................1-41.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................1-5

1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION........................................................................1-61.4.1 COPIER............................................................................................1-6

Accessory Check ..................................................................................1-6Installation Procedure ...........................................................................1-7Settings Relevant to Contract .............................................................1-11

1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE........................................................................1-121.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE.......................................................... 1-13

1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT.....................................................................................1-151.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ....................................................1-15

Accessory Check ................................................................................1-15Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-16

1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT.................................................... 1-19 Accessory Check ................................................................................1-19Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-20

1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY.............................................................. 1-23 Accessory Check ................................................................................1-23

Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-241.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER ...................................... 1-27 Accessory Check ................................................................................1-27Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-27

1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER...................................................................1-30 Accessory Check ................................................................................1-30Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-30

1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT .................................................................................1-33 Accessory Check ................................................................................1-33Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-34

1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ...........................................................1-37

Accessories Check List.......................................................................1-37

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 ii SM

Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray.....................................................1-381.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER.....................................................................1-39

Accessory Check ................................................................................1-39 Adjusting the Height............................................................................1-40

Main Body...........................................................................................1-41Optional Punch Unit ............................................................................1-441.5.9 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT (FOR ASIA MODEL ONLY)................1-48

Accessory Check ................................................................................1-48Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-48

1.5.10 POSTSCRIPT 3............................................................................ 1-511.5.11 256 MB MEMORY ........................................................................1-521.5.12 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER ......................................................1-531.5.13 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)................................................................1-54

Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-54UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-55

SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-551.5.14 USB 2.0 ........................................................................................1-56

Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-56USB SP Settings.................................................................................1-57

1.5.15 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) .................................................1-58Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-58UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN...................................................1-60

SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11B WIRELESS LAN.........................1-611.5.16 BLUETOOTH................................................................................1-621.5.17 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ......................................................1-641.5.18 KEY COUNTER HOLDER............................................................1-65

1.5.19 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER................................................1-671.5.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER................................................1-69

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-12.1 SETTINGS.................................................................................................2-1

New Unit Set.........................................................................................2-1Counter Reset.......................................................................................2-1

2.2 PM TABLES ..............................................................................................2-2

2.3 OTHERS ...................................................................................................2-5

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-13.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................3-1

3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................3-23.2.1 SCANNING.......................................................................................3-2

Scanner sub-scan magnification...........................................................3-2Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration..............................3-2

Main scan dot position correction .........................................................3-3

8/12/2019 2238c


SM iii B147/B149/B190

3.2.2 ARDF................................................................................................3-4 ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration .................................3-4

3.2.3 REGISTRATION...............................................................................3-5Image Area ...........................................................................................3-5

Leading Edge........................................................................................3-5Side to Side ..........................................................................................3-5 Adjustment Standard ............................................................................ 3-5Paper Registration Standard.................................................................3-5 Adjustment Procedure ..........................................................................3-6

3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION.................................................................3-6Line Position Adjustment ......................................................................3-6 Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper............................................3-6

3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION .................................................. 3-7Copy Mode ...........................................................................................3-7Printer Mode .......................................................................................3-11

3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT......................................................................3-133.3.1 TOP COVER ..................................................................................3-133.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD .........................................................3-133.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1.....................................................3-143.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH .............................3-153.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR..................3-153.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2 .................................................................3-15

3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ..............................................................................3-163.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD................................................................3-163.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR ................................................................3-163.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR...............................................................3-17

3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS..............................................................................3-183.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES..............................................3-183.5.2 LEFT SIDE .....................................................................................3-203.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS...........................3-21

3.6 SCANNER UNIT......................................................................................3-223.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-223.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR ..........................................3-223.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU).......................................................3-233.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER ...................................................3-243.6.5 XENON LAMP ................................................................................3-243.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSU) ....................................3-253.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-253.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE .............................................................. 3-263.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE.................................................................3-293.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT.................................3-32

3.7 LASER OPTICS ......................................................................................3-333.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS.....................................................3-333.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT .................................................. 3-34

Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit............... 3-393.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR........................................................3-403.7.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ........................3-40

3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...........................................................3-41

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 iv SM

3.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-423.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS .......................... 3-42

Tray 1 and Tray 2 ...............................................................................3-42By-pass Tray.......................................................................................3-42

3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD ...........................................3-433.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR...............................................3-443.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT .......................................................................3-443.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS.....................3-453.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES............................................................. 3-453.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH.............................................................. 3-463.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .......................................................................3-463.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR...................................................................3-47

3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT .....................................3-483.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT.........................................................................3-483.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT............................................3-49

3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER ...........................3-503.10.4 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-523.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR...............................................3-54

3.11 ID SENSORS ........................................................................................ 3-553.12 FUSING.................................................................................................3-56

3.12.1 FUSING UNIT............................................................................... 3-563.12.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT AND UPPER COVER....................................3-573.12.3 CLEANING UNIT..........................................................................3-583.12.4 HEATING ROLLER LAMP............................................................ 3-593.12.5 FUSING BELT UNIT.....................................................................3-603.12.6 HOT ROLLER...............................................................................3-61

3.12.7 HEATING ROLLER ......................................................................3-613.12.8 PAPER GUIDE PLATES AND STRIPPER PAWLS......................3-623.12.9 THERMISTOR AND FUSE...........................................................3-633.12.10 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP .......................................3-643.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................3-653.12.12 FUSING UNIT FAN.....................................................................3-673.12.13 WASTE OIL BOTTLE .................................................................3-683.12.14 PAPER EXIT ..............................................................................3-68

3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-693.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY ............. 3-693.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C,

B OUT OF THE WAY ...................................................................3-703.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU ...................................................3-703.13.4 HDD..............................................................................................3-723.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE.....................................3-72

NVRAM on BCU .................................................................................3-72NVRAM on Controller .........................................................................3-73

3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B .......3-743.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT .......................................................3-743.13.8 PSU ..............................................................................................3-753.13.9 DRIVER BOARD .......................................................................... 3-75

8/12/2019 2238c


SM v B147/B149/B190

3.14 DRIVE UNIT ..........................................................................................3-763.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-763.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-763.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY ................................................. 3-77

3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K .3-793.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K...........................................3-803.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-81

M Toner Supply Unit ...........................................................................3-81C and Y Toner Supply Units ...............................................................3-85K Toner Supply Unit............................................................................3-86

TROUBLESHOOTING

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-14.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS .........................................4-1

4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT .........................................4-14.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT...............................4-34.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT .......................................4-4

4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE...........................................................................4-74.2.1 VPU TEST MODE ............................................................................ 4-7

SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R ..........................................................4-7SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G ..........................................................4-7SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B ..........................................................4-7

4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE..............................................................................4-7SP4-904-1 Register Write/Read Check Result ....................................4-7

SP4-904-2 Image Path Check Result .................................................. 4-74.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-9

4.3.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-9SC Code Classification .......................................................................4-10

4.4 SC TABLE ...............................................................................................4-114.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................4-55

4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-55Work-flow............................................................................................4-55

4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................4-574.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-57

Detailed Explanation...........................................................................4-61

Copy Image processing ......................................................................4-664.6.2 COLOR SHIFT ...............................................................................4-68

Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 mm..................................................4-70How to measure the gap between color lines .....................................4-76

4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT .........4-78Check the color shift level ...................................................................4-78Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment ...................................4-78

4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT.....................................................................4-81Black Over Print Disabled...................................................................4-81Black Over Print Enabled....................................................................4-81

4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-82

4.7.1 SENSORS......................................................................................4-82

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 vi SM

4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-844.9 LEDS (BCU) ............................................................................................4-84

SERVICE TABLES

5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-15.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1

5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE...........5-1Entering SP Mode.................................................................................5-1Exiting SP Mode ...................................................................................5-1

5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES....................................................................5-2SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-3Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ...........5-4Selecting the Program Number.............................................................5-4Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-5

5.1.3 REMARKS........................................................................................5-5Display on the Control Panel Screen ....................................................5-5Others...................................................................................................5-6

5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE............................................................................ 5-75.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..................................................................5-7

SP1-XXX (Feed) ...................................................................................5-7SP2-XXX (Drum).................................................................................5-15SP3-XXX (Process) ............................................................................5-27SP4-XXX (Scanner)............................................................................5-35SP5-XXX (Mode) ................................................................................5-42

SP6-XXX (Peripherals) .......................................................................5-64SP7-XXX (Data Log)...........................................................................5-67SP8-xxx: Data Log2............................................................................5-78

5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE.................................................................5-114 ARDF Input Check: SP6-007............................................................5-116Table 1: Paper Height Sensor...........................................................5-117Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) .................................................5-117Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ................................................5-117Table 4: Original Size Detection .......................................................5-118

5.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE.............................................................5-1195.2.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997) .........................................................5-123

5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ..................................................................5-124SP1-XXX (Service Mode) .................................................................5-124

5.4 SCANNER SP MODE ........................................................................... 5-126SP1-xxx (System and Others) ..........................................................5-126SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) .................................................. 5-127

5.5 REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET ................................................5-1375.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET ....................................................................5-1375.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET...................5-137

System Setting Reset .......................................................................5-137Copier Setting Reset.........................................................................5-138

5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE ...........................................................................5-139

5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE.................................................................. 5-139

8/12/2019 2238c


SM vii B147/B149/B190

5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN… .............................................................. 5-1405.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE...............................................................5-1405.6.3 VERIFYING A SUCCESSFUL UPDATE ...................................... 5-1475.6.4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL............. 5-150

5.6.5 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA .................................................. 5-1515.6.6 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................ 5-152Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ...................................5-152Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM................................................5-152

5.6.7 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE .........................................5-1535.6.8 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS...............................5-156

5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE........................................................................5-1575.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-1575.7.2 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................5-1585.7.3 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................5-159

5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS .................................................. 5-160

5.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-1605.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ................................................ 5-161

5.9 USER PROGRAM MODE .....................................................................5-1625.9.1 MENU...........................................................................................5-1625.9.2 DISPLAY ...................................................................................... 5-166

Selecting Menu.................................................................................5-166Inquiry...............................................................................................5-166

5.10 DIP SWITCHES...................................................................................5-167Controller Board................................................................................5-167BCU Board........................................................................................5-167

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS....................................... 6-16.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................................6-16.1.2 PAPER PATH...................................................................................6-26.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-36.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4

Overview...............................................................................................6-4Descriptions ..........................................................................................6-5

6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS......................................................................6-66.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-8

6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-86.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-8

Overview...............................................................................................6-8Process Control Self Check ..................................................................6-9

6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-10Step 1: VSG Adjustment .....................................................................6-10Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11

Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment .........................6-12

Rev. 06/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 viii SM

Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation .................................6-13Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection...........................................6-13Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection ........................................................6-13

6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB..........................6-14

Highlight Pattern .................................................................................6-14 Adjustment Process............................................................................6-146.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .........................................................6-15

Overview.............................................................................................6-15Toner Supply Control Modes ..............................................................6-15

6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION............................6-16Introduction .........................................................................................6-16Toner Near End Detection 1 ...............................................................6-17Toner Near End Detection 2 ...............................................................6-17Toner End Detection...........................................................................6-18Toner End Recovery...........................................................................6-18

6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION ......................................................6-196.3 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-20

6.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-206.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE..........................................................................6-216.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-226.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER.................................................. 6-23

6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-246.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-246.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM ................................................................. 6-25

Signal Processing...............................................................................6-25 A/D Conversion...................................................................................6-25

White Level Correction........................................................................6-25Others.................................................................................................6-25Black Level Correction........................................................................6-26 Adjustments ........................................................................................6-26VPU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-26

6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM...................................................................6-27Shading Correction .............................................................................6-27Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction ..........................................6-28Scan Line Correction ..........................................................................6-28Image Separation................................................................................6-28 ACS (Auto Color Select) .....................................................................6-29Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .....................6-30Filtering...............................................................................................6-31 ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) .................................................. 6-31Color Conversion................................................................................6-32Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-33Printer Gamma Correction..................................................................6-34Error Diffusion.....................................................................................6-36IPU Board Test ...................................................................................6-36

6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH................................................................................6-37Copier Application...............................................................................6-37

Printer Application...............................................................................6-37Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits) ........................................................6-37

8/12/2019 2238c


SM ix B147/B149/B190

Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)..........................................6-376.6 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-38

6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-386.6.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-39

6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR ........................................ 6-40Overview.............................................................................................6-40Main Scan Start Detection ..................................................................6-40Clock Frequency Adjustment ..............................................................6-40

6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-41Dual Beam Mechanism.......................................................................6-41Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism...............................................6-41Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position ..........................................6-42

6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH.....................................................................6-43Error Messages ..................................................................................6-44

6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..............................6-45

Overview.............................................................................................6-45Summary of Each Adjustment ............................................................6-46 Adjustment Conditions........................................................................6-47Main Scan Skew Adjustment ..............................................................6-48

6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES ...............6-486.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT ...................................................................6-49

6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-496.7.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-506.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS .............................................6-51

Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51Initialization Process and SC Codes...................................................6-52

6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING .............................................6-536.7.5 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-546.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION .....................................................6-55

Waste Toner Path...............................................................................6-55Waste Toner Vibrator..........................................................................6-56

6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION...............................6-576.8 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-58

6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-586.8.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-596.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION .............................................................6-606.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-616.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-62

Overview.............................................................................................6-62Toner Agitation and Attraction ............................................................6-62 Air Flow and Toner Flow.....................................................................6-63Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................6-63Toner Transport ..................................................................................6-64

6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION ...............................................6-656.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................6-66

6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-666.9.2 DRIVE – TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY ......................... 6-67

6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2..........................................................6-686.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2....................................6-69

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 x SM

6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2 ..............................6-706.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2 .................................... 6-706.9.7 REGISTRATION.............................................................................6-716.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED...........................................................6-72

6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM ....................................... 6-736.10 DUPLEX UNIT....................................................................................... 6-746.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-746.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION .................................................................6-75

Up to A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF ............................................................6-75Larger than A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF...................................................6-75

6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT...........................................................6-766.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE) ........6-776.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT...................................................6-786.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER ....6-79

With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...........................................6-79

With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...............................6-796.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................................6-80

Drive ...................................................................................................6-80Feed-in and feed-out...........................................................................6-80

6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION.................................6-816.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-816.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ............................................................6-82

Drive Motor .........................................................................................6-82Rotation Encoder ................................................................................6-83

6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT................................................................ 6-846.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING .....................................................6-85

6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT......................................................6-86Mechanism .........................................................................................6-86Transfer Belt Sensor ...........................................................................6-87Copier ACS.........................................................................................6-87Printer ACS.........................................................................................6-88

6.12 FUSING.................................................................................................6-896.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-896.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE...................................................................6-90

Belt and Rollers ..................................................................................6-90Fusing Clutch......................................................................................6-90

6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................6-91Fusing Temperatures..........................................................................6-91Temperature Corrections ....................................................................6-92Overheat Protection............................................................................6-92

6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY AND CLEANING.....................................................6-93Oil Supply Pad and Roller...................................................................6-93Oil Supply Mechanism ........................................................................6-94

6.12.5 WASTE OIL ..................................................................................6-95Bottle Set Sensor ................................................................................6-95Waste Oil Sensor ................................................................................6-96

6.12.6 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION.......................... 6-96

6.12.7 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...........................................................6-97Overview.............................................................................................6-97

8/12/2019 2238c


SM xi B147/B149/B190

Panel Off Mode...................................................................................6-98 Auto Off Mode.....................................................................................6-99

6.13 PAPER EXIT ....................................................................................... 6-1006.13.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-100

6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ............................................6-1016.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS.......................................................................6-1026.14.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-1026.14.2 HARD DISK ................................................................................6-104

Overview...........................................................................................6-104Data Transfer....................................................................................6-104

6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING ..................................................... 6-105RPCS Driver .....................................................................................6-105PCL5c Driver ....................................................................................6-105PS3 Driver ........................................................................................6-106CMS (Color Management System) ................................................... 6-106

Gray Correction ................................................................................6-106BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)..........................6-106Gamma Correction............................................................................6-106Toner Limitation ................................................................................6-107Dither Processing and ROP/RIP.......................................................6-107

6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS .....................................................6-108Sample Print .....................................................................................6-108Locked Print......................................................................................6-108

6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING.........................................................................6-109Related SP Modes............................................................................6-109Paper Source Selection ....................................................................6-110

Auto Continue ...................................................................................6-111Paper Output Tray ............................................................................6-112Stapling.............................................................................................6-112Punching...........................................................................................6-113

6.15 ETHERNET BOARD ........................................................................... 6-1146.15.1 ETHERNET BOARD LAYOUT ...................................................6-1146.15.2 ETHERNET BOARD OPERATION.............................................6-115

6.16 IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)..........................................................6-1166.16.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-116

6.17 USB.....................................................................................................6-1186.17.1 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................6-1186.17.2 USB 1.1/2.0 ................................................................................6-1186.17.3 USB CONNECTORS.................................................................. 6-1196.17.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT.....................................................................6-1196.17.5 REMARKS ABOUT USB ............................................................6-120

Related SP Mode..............................................................................6-1206.18 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) ........................................................6-121

6.18.1 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................6-121LED Indicators ..................................................................................6-121

6.18.2 TRANSMISSION MODES ..........................................................6-122 Ad Hoc Mode ....................................................................................6-122

Infrastructure Mode...........................................................................6-1226.18.3 SECURITY FEATURES .............................................................6-123

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 xii SM

Using the SSID in Ad hoc mode .......................................................6-1236.18.4 WIRELESS LAN TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES.......................6-124

Communication Status......................................................................6-124Channel Settings ..............................................................................6-124

Troubleshooting Procedure...............................................................6-1256.19 BLUETOOTH.......................................................................................6-1266.19.1 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................6-1266.19.2 BLUETOOTH PROFILES...........................................................6-1276.19.3 BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES....................................... 6-127

6.20 SCANNER FUNCTIONS.....................................................................6-1286.20.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE.........................6-128

Image Data Path...............................................................................6-1286.20.2 SCANNER ACS (AUTO COLOR SELECTION) ......................... 6-129

6.21 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)...................................................6-130

SPECIFICATIONS

7. SPECIFICATIONS1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................7-1

1.1 BASIC..................................................................................................7-11.2 PRINTER.............................................................................................7-31.3 SCANNER...........................................................................................7-4

2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES......................................................................7-52.1 PAPER FEED......................................................................................7-52.2 PAPER EXIT .......................................................................................7-6

PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ....................................7-73. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .....................................................................7-8

3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS............................................................................7-83.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE..........................................................................7-8

Scanner ................................................................................................7-9Scanner Drivers ....................................................................................7-9Scanner Utilities....................................................................................7-9

4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION...................................................................7-105. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT..........................................................................7-12

5.1 ARDF.................................................................................................7-125.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT .......................................................7-13

5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ......................................................7-135.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY...........................................7-135.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT ...........................................7-145.6 BOOKLET FINISHER........................................................................7-155.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY .............................................................. 7-16

ARDF B597

SEE SECTION B597 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

8/12/2019 2238c


SM xiii B147/B149/B190

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601


TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598


LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600


TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599


BOOKLET FINISHER B602


FAX OPTION B603


INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

SEE SECTION IFAX FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694

SEE SECTION B692/B694 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

Rev. 05/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


IIMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.

2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.

3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit aresupplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.

4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers offor open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrifiedor mechanically driven components.

5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands awayfrom the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier startsmaking copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.

6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot whilethe copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components withyour bare hands.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.

2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specifiedintervals.

3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyesby accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eyedrops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by acustomer service representative who has completed the training course onthose models.

2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which canexplode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identicalone. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do notrecharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordancewith local regulations.

8/12/2019 2238c


1. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignitesuddenly when exposed to an open flame.

2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors inaccordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)

3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.

4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do notput more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or notsealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

5. Dispose of used fusing oil in accordance with local regulations.

LASER SAFETY

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair oflaser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repairedin a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem isreplaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is notrepairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return allchassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement ofthe optical subsystem is required.

WARNING

Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other thanthose specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

WARNING

WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of theprocedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damageyour eyes.

CAUTION MARKING:

8/12/2019 2238c


Trademarks

Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation in the United States and /or other countries.

PostScript®

is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business MachinesCorporation.

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may betrademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involvedwith those marks.

Symbols and Abbreviations

This manual uses several symbols.

Symbol What it means

Refer to section number

See Core Tech Manual for details

Screw

Connector

E-ring Clip ring

Long Edge Feed (LEF)Short Edge Feed (SEF)

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


INSTALLATION

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B597

FAX OPTION B603INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600

TROUBLESHOOTING TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599BOOKLET FINISHER B602

SERVICE TABLES


SPECIFICATIONS ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694

T A B

P O S I T I O N

2

T A B

P

O S I T I O N

1

T A

B

P O S I T

I O N

3

T A B

P O S I T I O N

4

T A B

P O S I T I O N

6

T A B

P O S I T I O N

5

T A B

P O

S I T I O N

8

T A B

P O S I T I O N

7

Rev. 05/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


INSTALLATION

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

SM 1-1 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1. INSTALLATION

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT

1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH

3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)

4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more

5. Avoid exposing the machine to sudden temperature changes, which include:1) Direct cool air from an air conditioner2) Direct heat from a heater

6. Avoid installing the machine in areas that might be exposed to corrosive gas.

7. Install the machine at a location lower than 2,500 m (8,200 ft.) above sea level.

8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no

more than 5 mm.)

9. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be subjected to strong vibration.

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")

Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")

B146I935.WMF

Ambient Humidity (%RH)

80%

70%

54%

30%

10°C 15°C 30°C 32°C

15%

Recommended conditions:

15 to 25°C30 to 70 %RH

8/12/2019 2238c


INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

B147/B149/B190 1-2 SM

1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.

A: Over 10 mm (0.39")B: Over 100 mm (3.9")C: Over 550 mm (22")D: Over 75 mm (3.0")

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION

1. Insert firmly the plug in the outlet.2. Avoid using an outlet extension plug or cord.

3. Ground the machine.

1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A

2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 %

3. Do not put or place anything on the power cord.

B146I927.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

SM 1-3 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS

No. Options Remarks1 1-tray paper feed unit

2 2-tray paper feed unit

3 Large capacity tray

One from the three

4 Platen cover

5 ARDFOne from the two

6 Multi-bin output tray One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9

7 Two-tray finisher One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9

8 Punch kit (3 types) No. 7 required; One of the three types

9 Booklet Finisher One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9

10 Punch unit (4 types) No. 9 required; One of the four types

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

No. Options Remarks

11 Printer/scanner

12 256 MB memory

13 NIB

For Asia model only

14 IEEE 139415 IEEE 802.11b

16 USB 2.0

17 Bluetooth

One from the four

18 PostScript 3

19 File Format Converter

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

8/12/2019 2238c


COPIER

B147/B149/B190 1-4 SM

1.3 COPIER

1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS

CAUTION Rating voltage for peripherals.

Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.

B146I932.WMF

1. ARDF

Rating voltage outputconnector for accessoryMax. DC24V

2. Duplex unit


3. Finisher


8/12/2019 2238c


COPIER

SM 1-5 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

The following flow chart shows the flow of the installation procedures.

The finisher requires an optional paper tray unit or the LCT. A punch unit is dedicated to the two-tray finisher or the booklet finisher.

Start

Will the paper feed unit or LCT installed?

Place the copier on the paper feed unit or LCT, and install it.

Install the controller options. Install the platen cover or ARDF.

Install the punch unit.

Install the copier.

Yes

Yes

No

No

Select the language. Set the date and time.

Perform ACC.

Check magnification and registration.

Adjust the operation panel display if necessary.

Specify the settings relevant to the contract (see section 1.4.1).

Unpack the copier.

End

A

A

No

Yes

Yes

Install the finisher. No

Will the controller options installed?

Will the two-tray finisher or booklet finisher installed?

Will the punch unit installed?

B146I901.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


MACHINE INSTALLATION

B147/B149/B190 1-6 SM

1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.4.1 COPIER

CAUTION Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before moving themachine, otherwise the transfer belt and the black PCU may be damaged.

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories.

Description Q’ty

1. Operating Instructions–System Setting................................1

2. Operating Manual–Copy Reference ....................................1

3. Operating Manual–Printer Reference*.................................1

4. CD-ROM–Printer/Scanner Driver* .......................................1

5. CD-ROM–Operating Instructions*........................................1

6. Ferrite Core*........................................................................1

7. Paper Size Decal.................................................................1

8. Model Name Decal ..............................................................1

9. Operation Panel Indication Decal ........................................1

10. Energy Star Sticker............................................................1

11. Decal–Inkjet Caution..........................................................1

12. Decal–Copy Prohibition .....................................................1

13. Oil Supply Unit...................................................................1

14. External Tray .....................................................................1

15. Power Cord........................................................................1

16. Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth.........................................1

17. Cloth Holder.......................................................................1

18. NECR (New Equipment Condition Report) ........................1

* The Asia model does not include these accessories.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 1-7 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n Installation Procedure

CAUTION

Remove the tape from the development units (see step 2) before you turn

the main switch on. The development units may be severely damaged ifthey operate with the tape attached.

If you install an optional paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time, placethe copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install the copier and otheroptions.

NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. You may needthem (in the future) to transport the machine to another location.

1. Remove the tape and padding on the copier. To remove the tapes from thedeveloper units follow the procedure below:

a) Turn the transfer belt release levercounterclockwise.

b) Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate.Then lift the plate until you hear a click.

B146I945.WMFB146I944.WMF

[A]

⇒

Rev. 10/2004

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 1-8 SM

c) Hold the development unit. At thesame time, slowly pull out the tapehorizontally.

d) Push in each development unit

e) Lower the drum plate. Then tightentwo screws that hold the plate (theupper left one first, then the lowerright one). Return the transfer beltrelease lever to its operational position. (See Step a).

2. Remove the pin [A]. (As shown on the previous page.)

NOTE: Keep the pin. You may need it to transport the machine in the future( 1.4.3).

3. Remove the tape from the oil supply unit.

B146I913.WMF

B146I914.WMF

Rev. 10/2004

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 1-9 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 4. Install the oil supply unit to the fusing

unit.

5. Install the fusing unit [A] to the copier.

6. Shake the toner cartridge five or sixtimes.

7. Install the toner cartridges to the copier.

8. Check that the hooks [B] hold thecartridge correctly.

9. Install the external tray [C].

B146I912.WMF

B146I915.WMF

B146I916.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

Rev. 10/2004

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 1-10 SM

10. Attach the cloth holder [A] to the left side of thescanner unit.

11. Place the contact glass cleaning cloth [B] in theholder.

12. Remove the guide cover [C].

13. Attach the duplex inverter guide [D].

14. Re-attach the guide cover.

15. Attach the appropriate model name decal [A] tothe front cover.

16. Pull each paper tray out, and adjust the sideguides and end guide to match the paper size.

NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull outthe tray fully, then push down the green

lock at the rear inside the tray.

17. Attach the appropriate paper tray numberdecals [B] to the paper trays.

NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also usedfor the optional paper tray or theoptional LCT. Keep any remainingdecals for use with these optional units.

18. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platencover.

B146I003.WMF

B146I936.WMF

B146I928.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][A]

[B]

Rev. 10/2004

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 1-11 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 19. Plug in the machine and turn the main power switch on. The machine

automatically starts the initialization procedure. After this has finished, the Start

button LED () turns green.

20. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).

21. Perform the Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) as follows:

1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode > Maintenance > ACC > Start).2) Place the printout on the exposure glass.3) Place 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.5) Press “Start Scanning” on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.

22. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.

23. Check that the circuit breaker works normally.

Settings Relevant to Contract

If the customer has a service contract, change the settings of the following SPs inaccordance with it.

NOTE: You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) inaccordance with the contract ( SP5-045-001).

Item SP No. Function Default

Countingmethod

SP5-045-001 Specifies whether the counting methodused in meter charge mode is based ondevelopments or prints.

NOTE: You can specify this setting onlyone time. After you have specifiedit, you cannot change the setting.

“0”:Developments

A3/11" x 17"doublecounting

SP5-104-001 Specifies whether the counter is doubledfor A3/11" x 17" paper.

“No”: Singlecounting

Serivice Tel.No. Setting

SP5-812-001through 004

Programs the service station fax number.

The number is printed on the counter listwhen the meter charge mode is selected,so that the user can fax the counter data tothe service station.

Rev. 10/2004

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 1-12 SM

1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE

CAUTION

Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before moving the

machine, otherwise the transfer belt and the black PCU may be damaged.

This section assumes that you will manually move the machine from one floor toanother floor. When using any transport equipment, see section 1.4.3,“Transporting Machine.”

The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper trayor LCT installed. You can remove them as necessary.

1. Check that the transfer belt is in itscorrect position.

2. Remove all trays from the optionalpaper feed unit or LCT.

3. Remove the front stand [A]

( x 2).

4. Remove the rear stand [B]

( x 2, 2 brackets).

CAUTION: After moving the machine to it’s new location, reinstall the machinestands. Without them, the machine may tip over when you pull out apaper tray or while you work on the machine.

G080I910.WMF

G080I911.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 1-13 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE

CAUTION

Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before moving the

machine, otherwise the transfer belt and the black PCU may be damaged.

1. Check that the transfer belt is in its correct position.

2. Remove the machine stands ( 1.4.2)

3. Remove the toner cartridges to prevent toner from flowing into the toner supplytube due to vibrations experienced during transport. This may cause the tube tobe clogged with toner.

4. Put air packing into the toner cartridge holder to shield the toner supplyentrance. This prevents toner from flowing out to the toner cartridge holder.

5. Set the lock pin [A] (which comeswith the machine) in the transfer beltunit.

NOTE: The lower end of the transferbelt moves. The surfaces ofthe belt and PCU may bedamaged by the frictionbetween them if youtransport the machinewithout locking the belt.

6. Make sure there is no paper left inthe paper trays and fix down thebottom plates with a sheet of paperand tape.

7. Empty out the waste toner bottle andattach securing tape to prevent thebottle from falling out.

8. Empty out the waste oil bottle andattach securing tape to prevent thebottle from falling out.

9. Turn the release lever [B]counterclockwise to its lowermostposition. (The lever does not stay inthis position if you do not hold it.)Fasten the lever in this position withtape.

NOTE: The release lever lifts the transfer belt up and holds it against the blackPCU. The surfaces of the belt and PCU may be damaged by thefriction between them if you transport the machine with the two units in

this position.

B146I911.WMF

B146I939.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 1-14 SM

10. Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors, or shrink-wrap the machinetightly.

NOTE: 1) If pre-installing machines for actual test prints at a service depot, use a jig oil supply unit, and not the oil supply unit enclosed as an accessory.

This is because the toner supply system uses a touch-and-releasemechanism, which can cause the unit to move freely up and downduring transport if shipping the mainframe with the oil supply unitinstalled. This in turn may cause damage to the white holder on thefusing unit. However if simply moving the machine from floor to floor, theoil supply unit can be left installed.

2) If shipping a used machine to a new location, dispose of the used oilsupply unit and install a new one, due to the reason explained above.This is not necessary when simply moving the machine from floor tofloor.

3) After having moved the machine to a new location, be sure to perform Auto Adjust (User Program mode) or forced Line Position Adjustment(SP5-993-002) to optimize color line alignment.

4) Make sure that the side fences in the trays are properly positioned toprevent color shifting.

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-16 SM

Installation Procedure

CAUTION

1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug its power cord beforestarting the installation procedure.

2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highlyunstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury orproperty damage.

3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle andgrips may be damaged.

1. Remove all tape on the paper trayunit.

2. Remove the paper tray andremove all tape and padding.

3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).

B146I919.WMF

B146I920.WMF[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-17 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n

4. Install the rear stand [A].

5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]

( x 1 for each).

6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] ofthe copier.

7. Lift the copier and install it on thepaper feed unit [F].

B146I921.WMF

B146I004.WMF

[D]

[E]

[F]

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-18 SM

8. Remove tray 2 of the copier.

9. Fasten the knob screw [A].

10. Re-install tray 2.

11. Open the right cover.

12. Install the link bracket [B](1 knob screw).

13. Turn on the main switch.

14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality.

B146I922.WMF

B146I923.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-19 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories.

Description Q’ty

1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1

2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1

3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1

4. Front Stand..........................................................................1

5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1

6. Screw M4 x 10.....................................................................47. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2

B146I929.WMF

1 2 3 6 7

54

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-20 SM


CAUTION



3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle andgrips may be damaged.

1. Remove all tape on the paper trayunit.

2. Remove the paper trays andremove all tape and padding.

3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).

B456I002.WMF

B456I103.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-21 B147/B149/B190




( x 1 for each).


7. Lift the copier and install it on thepaper feed unit [F].

B598I901.WMF

B146I004.WMF

[D]

[F]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-22 SM








B146I902.WMF

B146I903.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-24 SM


CAUTION



3. Do not lift the copier with the LCT installed. The handle and grips may bedamaged.

1. Remove all tape.

2. Press the stopper [A] and pull outthe tray [B].

3. Install the front stand [C] ( x 2).

B457I001.WMF

B457I003.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-25 B147/B149/B190




( x 1 for each).


7. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT[F].

B598I901.WMF

B600I901.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[F]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-26 SM








B146I917.WMF

B146I918.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-27 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty

1. Left stopper bracket ......................................................................1

2. Right stopper bracket....................................................................1

3. Knob screw ...................................................................................4

4. Stud screw....................................................................................2

5. Screw M4 x 10 ..............................................................................2

6. Screwdriver Tool...........................................................................1

7. Decal.............................................................................................1

8. Decal.............................................................................................1


CAUTION

Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug its power cord beforestarting the installation procedure.

1. Remove all tape.

B146I924.WMF

G564I122.WMF

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-28 SM

2. Install the two stud screws [A].

3. Mount the ARDF on the copier, and slide it to the front as shown.

NOTE: To avoid damaging the ARDF, grasp it as shown.

4. Fasten the two screws [B] to secure the ARDF.

5. Attach the left [C] and right [D] stopper brackets (Knob screw x 2 for each).

6. Connect the cable [E] to the copier.

7. Fasten the cable with the clamp [F].

B146I930.WMF

B146I937.WMF

B597I901.WMF

[E]

[F]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-29 B147/B149/B190


8. Remove the platen sheet [A] and placeit on the exposure glass [B].

9. Align the rear left corner (of the platensheet) flush against the corner [C] onthe exposure glass.

10. Close the ARDF.

11. Open the ARDF and check that the

platen sheet is correctly attached.

12. Attach the decal [D] with the arrow (onthe decal) pointing at the ARDFexposure glass.

13. Attach the decal [E] on the top.

14. Turn the main switch on, and check

the operation.

15. Make a full size copy, and check thatthe registrations (side-to-side andleading edge) and image skew arecorrect. If they are not, adjust theregistration and image skew with SPmode.

G564I102.WMF

B146I931.WMF

G564I105.WMF

G564I106.WMF

[E]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-31 B147/B149/B190


3. Set the link rail [A] on the link-railholder [B].

4. Install the link-rail holder (with thelink rail) to the copier [C] ( x 2).

5. Install the duplex-unit support [D] to

the copier ( x 3).

B146I906.WMF

B146I907.WMF

[C]

[A]

[B]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-32 SM

6. Adjust the position of the connection

bracket [A] as necessary ( x 2):

•Upper position for the copier with thetwo-tray paper feed unit or LCT.

• Lower position for the copier with theone-tray paper feed unit.

7. Connect the finisher [B] with the copier

( x 1).

8. Connect the finisher cable to theconnector of the copier.

9. Install the two trays [C] ( x 1 for each).

10. Extend the external tray of the copier(see step 2).

11. Turn the main switch on and check the

operation.

B146I908.WMF

B146I909.WMF

B146I910.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-33 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty

1. Punch unit............................................................................1

2. Sensor arm..........................................................................1

3. Spring ..................................................................................1

4. Screw M3 x 6.......................................................................2

5. Step screw...........................................................................2

6. Hopper.................................................................................17. Spacer (2 mm).....................................................................1

8. Spacer (1 mm).....................................................................2

B146I933.WMF

2 1

3

6

4

5 7

8

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-34 SM


CAUTION

Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord. If the two-trayfinisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.

1. Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.

2. Open the front door of the finisher and remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).

3. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 2) and paper guide [C] (stepped x 1).

B377I102.WMF

B377I103.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-35 B147/B149/B190


4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2).

5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped x 1).

6. Install the spring [C].

7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D].

8. Install the punch unit [E] ( x 2, stepped x 1).

B377I101.WMF

B377I104.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-36 SM

9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp it as shown.

10. Slide in the hopper [B].

11. Fasten the two 1-mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment.NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the punch

holes.

12. Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation.

B377I200.WMF

B377I106.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-37 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY

Accessories Check List


Description Q’ty

1. Front Tray Holder.................................................................1

2. Rear Tray Holder .................................................................1

3. Tray .....................................................................................2

4. Screw (M3 x 14)...................................................................4

5. Discharge Brush ..................................................................2

6. Ground Plate for Left Cover.................................................17. Ground Plate for Upper Exit.................................................1

8. Ground Plate for Lower Exit.................................................1

B146I934.WMF

1 2 3 43

5 6 7 8

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-38 SM

Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray

NOTE: Before installing the multi-bin output tray, install the duplex unit.

1. Open the left cover [A] of the duplexunit.

2. Install the ground plate [B] behind themagnet.

3. Install the ground plate [C] on the rearof the left cover.

4. Attach the ground plate to the topcover, aligning the bottom edges of

the plate [D] and cover [E].

5. Attach the discharge brushes [F][G] tothe upper edges of the paper exits, sothat the ends of the brushes [H][I]touch the ground plates [C][D]respectively.NOTE: Make sure the brushes do not

obstruct paper coming fromthe exits.

6. Install the front [A] and rear [B] tray

holders on the top cover ( x 2 foreach).

7. Install the upper [C] and lower [D]

trays.

8. Turn the main switch on; select the SPmode menu, SP6–901–1; and changethe multi-bin output tray setting.

NOTE: The multi-bin output tray is notautomatically recognized by theprinter mainframe. The multi-binoutput tray cannot be used untilyou have changed this SP mode setting.

G306I101.WMF

G306I102.WMF

G306I103.WMF

[B][C]

[D][E]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I]

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-39 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty

1. Regular tray ..................................................................................1

2. Rail holder.....................................................................................1

3. Magnet catch–rear........................................................................1

4. Magnet catch–front .......................................................................1

5. Duplex-unit support.......................................................................1

6. Rail joint ........................................................................................1

7. Screw M4 x 12 ..............................................................................6

8. Screw M4 x 6 ................................................................................8

9. Screw M3 x 14 ..............................................................................4

10. Rail..............................................................................................1

11. Stapler unit..................................................................................1

12. Staple cartridge...........................................................................1

13. Pad .............................................................................................3

NOTE: Make sure that you retain the pads. The pads are white and made ofstyrofoam.

B602I912.WMF

10

1

5

2 3 4

6

7

9

811

1213

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-40 SM

Adjusting the Height

1. Check the type of optional paper tray installed:

• If the optional two-tray paper feed unit or the optional LCT is installed, go tostep 2.

• If either of them is not installed, go to “Main Body.”

2. Tape the pads [A] to the right-hand side of the machine.

3. Lay the finisher on its right-hand side.

4. Remove the adjuster plates [B] ( x 2).

5. Change the height [C].

6. Reinstall the adjuster plates [D].

7. Take out the finisher from the box and stand it up.

8. Check that the height is correct, and remove the pads.

B602I901.WMF

B602I008.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-41 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n Main Body

1. Remove all tape and padding.

2. Remove the screw cover [A].3. Install the rail joint [B] ( x 4).

4. Reinstall the screw cover.

5. Install the regular tray [C] ( x 4).

B602I001.WMF

B602I902.WMF

B602I903.WMF

[C]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-42 SM

6. Remove 2 screws [F] and install the

magnet catches [A][B] ( x 2 for each).

7. Install the duplex-unit support [C] ( x 3).

8. Slide the rail [D] through the rail holder[E].

9. Install the rail holder (with the rail) to the

copier ( x 2).

B602I004.WMF

B602I904.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D] [E]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-43 B147/B149/B190


10. Connect the booklet finisher unit to

the copier ( x 1).

11. Install the stapler unit [A].

12. Turn the knob [B] clockwise until thestaple-cartridge holder [C] reaches thefront-most position.

13. Install the staple cartridge [D] firmly tothe staple-cartridge holder.

14. Turn on the main switch and check the operation.

B602I905.WMF

B602I907.WMF

B602I908.WMF

[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-44 SM

Optional Punch Unit


Description Q’ty

1. Punch unit............................................................................1

2. Decal ...................................................................................1

3. Screw M4 x 6 (with the base) ..............................................1

4. Cable ...................................................................................2

1. Remove the front lower cover

[A] ( x 2).

B647I001.WMF

B602R988.WMF

2

4

1

[A]

3

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-45 B147/B149/B190


2. Remove the joint guard [A] ( x 2).

3. Open the front door [B].

4. Release the stopper and remove the knob [C].

5. Remove the front cover [D] ( x 2).

6. Remove the rear cover [E] ( x 3).NOTE: Do not damage the mylar when you remove the screw.

7. Remove the right top cover with the paper entrance cover [G] ( x 4).

B647I002.WMF

[C]

[B]

[A][D]

[E]

[G]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-46 SM

8. Remove the right top cover [A] fromthe paper entrance cover [B].

9. Install the punch unit [C] ( x 2,1 screw with the base [D])

10. Install the right top cover [E] ( x 2).

B647I003.WMF

B647I901.WMF

B647I005.WMF

[A]

[B]

[E]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-47 B147/B149/B190


11. Install the cable to the connectors as follows:

• J1003 (punch unit) [A] to CN12 (booklet finisher unit) [D]

• J1004 (punch unit) [B] to CN14 (booklet finisher unit) [C]

12. Fasten the cable with the clamps.

13. Reassemble the booklet finisher unit.NOTE: Check that the side guide and the front cover correctly join with each

other [E].

14. Attach the decal [F].

15. Turn on the main switch and check the punch operation.

B647I006.WMF

B602I911.WMF

B647I903.WMF

[A][B]

[D][C]

[E] [F]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-48 SM

1.5.9 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT (FOR ASIA MODEL ONLY)

The printer scanner unit is a standard unit for the models other than the Asia model.

Accessory Check

Check the accessories in the box against the following list:

Description Q’ty

1. Key Tops – Printer (English: 1 set, Universal: 1 set)............2

2. Key Tops – Scanner (English: 1 set, Universal: 1 set).........2

3. NIB.......................................................................................1

4. IEEE 1284 Interface Board ..................................................1

5. SD Card...............................................................................16. Ferrite Core (For LAN cable) ...............................................1


CAUTION

Switch the main switch off and unplug the power cord before starting anyprocedure described in these instructions.

CAUTION: When installing an SD card, push thecard into the slot until you hear a click. Ifyou release it too early, the SD card maybe pushed out of the slot.

You need to install the optional 256 MB memory withthe printer/scanner unit.

B612I901.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-50 SM

5. Remove the slot cover [A] from SD

Card Slot 1 ( x 1).

6. Turn the SD-card face [B] to the rearof the machine, and push it slowly intothe slot until you hear a click.

7. Attach the slot cover ( x 1).

8. Remove the dummy keys [C] andinstall one of the printer keys [D][d]and one of the scanner keys [E][e].

9. Attach the ferrite core [F] to the LAN cable.

10. Connect the LAN cable.

B612I004.WMF

Printer Scanner

B612I902.WMF

B603I904.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D] [d] [E] [e]

[F]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-51 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.10 POSTSCRIPT 3

CAUTION

Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the followingprocedure.

1. Remove the slot cover [A] from SD

Card Slot 2 ( x 1).

2. Turn the SD-card face [B] to the rearof the machine, and push it slowlyinto the slot until you hear a click.

3. Attach the slot cover ( x 1).

4. Attach the “Adobe PostScript 3” decal [C] to thefront cover.

G369I901.WMF

G369I902.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-52 SM

1.5.11 256 MB MEMORY

CAUTION

Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following

procedure.

1. Remove the controller board [A] ( x 3).

2. Install the expansion memory [B].

3. Reinstall the controller board ( x 3).

B612I001.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-53 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.12 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER

CAUTION


procedure.

1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).

2. Install the file format converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

B609I901.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-54 SM

1.5.13 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)


CAUTION


You can install one of the following network interfaces: IEEE 802.11b (WirelessLAN), USB 2.0, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth. (For the information on the Asiamodel, see section 1.5.9.)

1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot D [A] ( x 2).

2. Make sure that the jumper [B] is set on “TB2.”

3. Install the FireWire board [C] (Knob-screw x 2).

B581I901.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-55 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interfacesettings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine ispowered on.

1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.

2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.

3. Press Interface Settings.

4. Press the corresponding key to enter the following settings:

• IP Address

• Subnet Mask

• IP Over 1394. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enablesIP Over 1394 as the default setting for the printing method.

• SCSI Print. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enablesSCSI Print as the default setting for the printing method.

• SCSI Print Bi-directional. Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print.

SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.

SP No. Name Function

5-839 004 Host Name Sets the name of the device used on the network.

Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX

5-839 007 Cycle Master Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE1394 standard bus.

5-839 008 BCR Mode Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting forthe Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 busfor when IRM is not in use. The following three settingsare available: “Standard,” “IRM Color Copy,” and“Always Effective.”

5-839 009 IRM 1394aCheck

Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a isconducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.

5-839 010 Unique ID Enables the “Node_Unique_Id” setting for enumerationon the standard IEEE 1394 bus.

5-839 011 Logout Determines how successive initiator login requests are

handled during login in for SBP-2.5-839 012 Login Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.

5-839 013 Login MAX Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range:1 ~ 62.

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-58 SM

1.5.15 IEEE 802.11b (WIRELESS LAN)


CAUTION




2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

B582I901.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-59 B147/B149/B190


3. Pull off the edge connector protector [A] off the card and discard it.

4. With the card label facing left, insert the card [B] into the PCI slot.

5. Use the Velcro pads to install the antennas [C] on the left rear corner of themachine.NOTE: The antennas should be separated by at least 40 ~ 60 mm (1.5~2.5").

Always detach the antennas from the corners of the machine anddisconnect them before moving the machine.

6. Connect the antennas to the terminals [D].

7. Wrap the cables [E] and hang them over the antennas as shown.

8. Attach the cover [F] ( x 2).

9. If reception is poor, you may need to move the machine:

• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type ofequipment that can generate a strong magnetic field.

• Position the machine as close as possible to the access point.

B582I902.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-60 SM

UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interfacesettings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine ispowered on.

NOTE: The wireless LAN cannot be used if Ethernet is being used.

1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.

2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or

wireless LAN.

3. Select Interface Settings → Network (tab) → Network I/F Settting

4. Select either “Ethernet” or “IEEE 802.11b”.

5. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options are displayed.6. Transmission Mode. Select either “Ad Hoc Mode” or “Infrastructure Mode”.

7. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)

8. Channel. This setting is required when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different

countries.

9. WEP (Privacy) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting isdesigned to protect wireless data transmission. In order to unlock encodeddata, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. There are 64 bit and128 bit WEP keys.

Range of Allowed Settings:

64 bit 10 characters128 bit 26 characters

10. Bandwidth Status. This setting is enabled only for the Infrastructure Mode.Press here to display the current status of the bandwidth. One of the followingis displayed to reflect the reception status of the wireless LAN:

Good 76 ~ 100%

Fair 41 ~ 75%Poor 21 ~ 40%Unavailable 0 ~ 20%

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-61 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 11. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to display more settings, then

select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between theclosest machine or access point, depending on which mode is selected.

NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine andthe closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is thedistance between the machine and the closest access point.

11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)

12. To initialize the wireless LAN settings, use page 2/2. Press Execute to initializethe following settings:

•

Transmission mode• Channel

• Transmission Speed

• WEP

• SSID

• WEP Key

SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 802.11b

SP No. Name Function5-840-004 SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.

5-840-006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for thecountry.

5-840-007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settingsallowed for your country.

5-840-010 WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.

5-840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).

5-840-020 WEP Mode Used to display the maximum length of the string thatcan be used for the WEP Key entry.

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-62 SM

1.5.16 BLUETOOTH

CAUTION


procedure.



2. Install the Bluetooth board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

B582I901.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-63 B147/B149/B190


3. Insert the Bluetooth card [A] into the slot.

4. Press the antenna [B] to extend it.

5. Attach the antenna cap [C].

G377I901.WMF[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-64 SM

1.5.17 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS

1. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch.

2. Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page.

User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page

NOTE: The same data can also be printed by executing SP1-004 – PrintSummary. All installed options are listed in the “System Reference”column.

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-65 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.18 KEY COUNTER HOLDER

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).

2. Cut a 15-mm (0.6") piece [B] off thetape.NOTE: You do not need the smaller

piece for the installation.

3. Remove the scanner right cover

[A] ( x 2).

4. Clean the area [B] with alcohol.

5. Attach the tape.

B146R102.WMF

A674I901.WMF

A674I902.WMF

[B]15 mm(0.6")

[A]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-66 SM

The view from the back The view from the top

6. Attach the key counter holder as follows.

• The bottom end of the key counter holder [B] is 62 mm (2.4") below thebottom end of the scanner right cover [A].

• The bracket on the back of the key counter holder [C] is aligned to the rearend of the scanner cover [D].

7. The CN227 connector on the BCU has 8 pins. Pins # 1 to 4 are used for theKey Counter, pins # 5 and 6 are used for the mechanical counter and pins # 7and 8 are not used for US models. The intermediate harness [E] for the key

counter is connected to CN 227. The connector for this harness is locatedinside the rear cover by the lower rear. (As shown in the illustration below).Please connect the harness for Key Counter to this connector.

8. Reassemble the covers.

9. Set SP 5-113-1 to 8.

A674I904.WMF A674I903.WMF

B178I547.WMF

[A]

[B]

62 mm(2.4")

[C]

[D]

⇒

[E]

⇒

Rev. 09/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-67 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.19 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (SCANNER)


2. Remove the scanner right cover [B]

( x 2).

3. Remove the rear scale [C] ( x 3).

4. Remove the exposure glass [D] with

the left scale [E] ( x 2).

NOTE: You do not have to remove the ARDF exposure glass. If theglass is removed, position theglass marker [F] at the rear-leftcorner when reattaching.

B146R102.WMF

B146I940.WMF

[A]

[C]

[D]

[E][B]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-68 SM

5. Install the anti-condensation heater [A]in the rear-left corner of the scanner

unit (

x 2).6. Pass the cable through the opening

[B] in the rear.

7. Attach the clamps [C] to the rearframe.

8. Fasten the cable with the clamps.

9. Connect the connector [D].

10. Reassemble the copier.

B146I942.WMF

B146I943.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-69 B147/B149/B190

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (PAPER TRAY)

CAUTION

1. Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following

procedure.2. After cutting the lower-most rectangular piece off the right-bottom corner

of the rear cover, file the edges to smooth them. Rough edges may hurtthe user. The user pushes the tray-heater switch through thisrectangular opening.


2. Remove the switch bracket [B] ( x 2).

3. Remove tray 1 and tray 2.

4. Cut the lower-most rectangularpiece [C] off the right-bottom corner (viewedfrom the rear) of the rear cover.

5. File the edges to smooth them.

6. Make sure that the heater switch [D]is not upside down. The “ –” sign [E]

is on the upper end and the “” sign[F] is on the lower end.NOTE: The “ –” sign means “on.” The

“” sign means “off.”

7. Install the switch to the bracket [G].

8. Make sure that the heater switch isoff.

B146I947.WMF

B146I946.WMF

B146I948.WMF

[C]

[A]

[B]

[D]

[F]

[G]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


OPTIONAL UNIT

B147/B149/B190 1-70 SM

9. Install the switch bracket (with theheater switch) to the original place. Do

not fasten the screws yet.10. Connect the white connectors to the

switch.

11. Insert the red connector [A] into theopening on the frame [B].

12. Fasten the two screws on the switch bracket.

13. Align the caution decal [E] with themark [F] on the front of the heatercover [G], and attach the cautiondecal there.

14. Align the tray heater [H] with themarks [I][J] on the back of theheather cover, and attach the trayheater there.

15. Connect the tray heater connector[K] (from the front side of thecopier) to the red connector [A].

16. Insert the heater cover to theopenings [C][D] from the front side

( x 1).NOTE: The connectors [A][K] are

under the heater-tray cover.

17. Reassemble the copier and installtray 1 and tray 2.

18. Attach the “On/Stand by” decal onthe left-hand side of the main switch

(not the tray heater switch).

B146I949.WMF

B146I950.WMF

B146I951.WMF

B146I952.WMF

[A][B]

[C] [D]

[E]

[G]

[H]

[F]

[I] [J]

[K]

On

Stand by

8/12/2019 2238c


PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


PM TABLES

B147/B149/B190 2-2 SM

2.2 PM TABLES

On the B190, there is a wider gap between sheets of paper. Since the PM intervalis based on the number of motor revolutions, increasing the paper interval means

shortening the PM interval by 10% (motor revolutions are more frequent, makingthe PM timing sooner).

Chart: A4 (LT)/5%Mode: 3 copies/original (prints/job)Environment: Normal temperature and humidityYield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.

Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect

Copier

Item 20K18K

40K36K

60K54K

120K

108K

140K

126KEM Remarks

Scanner

1st/2nd/3rd mirrors C Optics cloth

Front and Rear Rails C Dry cloth

Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth; alcohol

ADF Exposure Glass C C Dry cloth; alcohol

Exposure Lamp I Dry cloth; alcohol

APS Sensor C Dry cloth

Development

Dev. Unit–K R 2.1

Dev. Unit–C R 2.1

Dev. Unit–M R 2.1

Dev. Unit–Y R 2.1

PCU R 2.1 See NOTE below.

Transfer

Waste Toner Bottle R

Fusing

Fusing Unit R 2.1

Oil Supply Unit R

Paper Path

Registration Sensor C Blower brush

Duplex Unit

Inverter Roller C Damp cloth

Transport Roller C Damp cloth

Inverter Sensor C Blower brushMiscellaneous

Dust Filter R Distributed with development unit-K

Breaker I

NOTE: The yield of the PCU was increased from 40K to 60K. Refer to TSBB147/B149/B190 – 008 Reissue for more information.

Rev. 05/2005

B147/B149

B190

⇒

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


PM TABLES

SM 2-3 B147/B149/B190

P r e v e n t i v e

M a i n t e n a n c e

ARDF

Item240K

216KEM Remarks

Pick-up Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol

Feed Belt R C Damp cloth; alcohol

Separation Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol

Sensors C C Blower brush

Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)

White Plate C Dry or damp cloth

Drive Gear L Grease G501

Transport Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol

Exit Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol

Inverter Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol

Idle Rollers C Damp cloth; alcohol

NOTE: 240k copies (= 80k originals x 3 copies/original) (B147/B149)216k copies (= 72k originals x 3 copies/original) (B190)

One-Tray Paper Feed Unit

Item 240K EM Remarks

Feed Roller C Damp cloth

Pickup Roller C Damp cloth

Separation Roller C Damp cloth

Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

Item 240K EM RemarksFeed Rollers C Damp cloth

Pickup Rollers C Damp cloth

Separation Rollers C Damp cloth

LCT


Relay Roller C Damp cloth

Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth

Two-Tray FinisherItems 240K EM Remarks

Rollers C Damp cloth

Discharge Brush C Dry cloth

Sensors C Blower brush

Jogger Fences I Replace if required.

Two-Tray Finisher Punch Kit


Punch Chad C Discard chad.

B147/B149B190

Rev. 09/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


PM TABLES

B147/B149/B190 2-4 SM

Booklet Finisher

Item 60K EM Remarks

Rollers C Damp cloth

Shafts C Damp cloth

Sensors C Blower brush

Jogger fences I

Booklet Finisher Punch Kit

Item 60K EM Remarks

Punch Chad C C Discard chad.

8/12/2019 2238c


OTHERS

SM 2-5 B147/B149/B190

P r e v e n t i v e

M a i n t e n a n c e

2.3 OTHERS

NOTE: These units are considered as EM parts since their expected lifetimes arerelatively long.

CopierItem 150K 500K 1000K Remarks

Transfer

Transfer Unit R 2.1

Belt Cleaning Unit R 2.1

Bypass Tray

Feed Roller R 2.1

Pickup Roller R 2.1

Separation Roller R 2.1

One-Tray Paper Feed Unit

Item 150K 500K 1000K Remarks

Feed Roller R Damp cloth

Pickup Roller R Damp cloth

Separation Roller R Damp cloth

Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit


Feed Rollers R Damp cloth

Pickup Rollers R Damp cloth

Separation Rollers R Damp cloth

LCT


Relay Roller R Damp cloth

Bottom Plate Pad R Damp cloth

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIAL TOOLS

SM 3-1 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION

Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any ofthe procedures in this section.

NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.

: See or refer to : Screw : Connector

: Clip ring : E ring

3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS

Part Number Description Q’ty

B6455010 SD Card 1

B6456700 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1

B6456800 USB Reader/Writer 1

A029 9387 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 1

G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel 1

C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope 1

A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1

52039501 Silicon Grease G-501 1

A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1

A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set) 1

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B147B149/B190 3-2 SM

3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3.2.1 SCANNING

Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printingregistration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.

NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to perform the following adjustments.

Scanner sub-scan magnification

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass andmake a copy from one of the feed stations.

2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 toadjust if necessary.

Standard: ±1.0%.

Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and makea copy from one of the feed stations.

2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration,and adjust them with the following SP modes if

necessary. Standard: 0 ± 2mm.

SP mode

Leading Edge Registration SP4-010-001

Side-to-Side Registration SP4-011-001

A

B146R962.WMF

B

A

B146R963.WMF

A: Sub-scan magnification

A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-3 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

Main scan dot position correction

NOTE: Before adjusting the scanner, adjust the printer registration.

1. Enter the SP mode and open SP4-010 and SP4-011.

2. Check that each value corresponds to the factory-set value.

3. Press the “COPY Window” key and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photomode.NOTE: Be sure to copy in the photo mode. This is because color displacement

cannot be checked properly in text mode.

4. Check the yellow and cyan vertical lines. (Use a Magnification Scope to dothis.) If they exactly overwrite the black line at the edges of the copy, exit theSP mode to end the adjustment. If the yellow and cyan lines significantlyextend beyond the black line, proceed to the next step.

5. Press the “SP Mode” key to return to the SP mode and open SP4-932.Compare the current values against the table.

SP4-932-1 Dot correction R left edge

SP4-932-2 Dot correction R right edge

SP4-932-3 Dot correction B left edge

SP4-932-4 Dot correction B right edge

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B147B149/B190 3-4 SM

3.2.2 ARDF

ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration

Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT (11 x 17 inch) paper.

1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF and make a copy from one of thefeed stations.

2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.

SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range

SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Registration ± 3.0 mm

SP6-006-002 Leading Edge Registration (Simplex) ± 42 stepsSP6-006-003 Buckle: Duplex Front ± 42 steps

SP6-006-004 Buckle: Duplex Rear ± 45 steps

B146R964.WMF

B

A

B146R965.WMF

A: Leading edge registrationB: Side-to-side registration

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-5 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.2.3 REGISTRATION

Image Area

The image area shown in the

illustration must be accurate. So makesure that the registration is adjustedwithin the adjustment standard rangeas described below.

Leading Edge

Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.

Side to Side

Adjusts the side to side registration for each paper feed station. The side to sideregistration for the optional paper feed unit, LCT, and duplex unit can be adjustedwith SP mode (SP1-002).

Adjustment Standard

• Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 3 ± 0 mm

• Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 ± 0 mm

Paper Registration Standard

The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions may fluctuate within thefollowing tolerance.

1st side

• Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 1.5 mm• Main-scan direction: 0 ± 2 mm

2nd side in duplex

• Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 3 mm

• Main-scan direction: 0 ± 4 mm

A

B

C

B146R966.WMF

Feed direction

Image Area

A = B = C = 4.2mm (1.6")

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B147B149/B190 3-6 SM

Adjustment Procedure

1. Enter SP mode and access SP5-997.

2. Print out the pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP5-997.

NOTE: Registration may change slightly print by print as shown above.Therefore print a few pages of the trimming pattern for step 3 and 4,and average the leading edge and side-to-side registration values andadjust each SP mode.

3. Perform the leading edge registration adjustment.1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).

3) Input the value then press the key.4) Check the leading edge adjustment by generating the trim pattern.

4. Perform the side to side registration adjustment.

1) Check the side to side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).

3) Input the value then press the key.4) Check the side to side adjustment by generating the trim pattern.

3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION

Line Position Adjustment

Normally, the automatic line position adjustment is executed under a specifiedcondition to optimize the color prints. If color registration shifts, execute “Auto

Adjust” with the user tools (Maintenance menu – Color registration) or SP5-993-2to do the forced line position adjustment. In addition, it is recommended to performthe line position adjustment under the following conditions:

• After transporting or moving the copier (If copier are pre-installed at theworkshop and transported to the user location, forced line position adjustmentshould be done after copier installation is completed at the user location.)

• When opening the drum positioning plate

• When removing or replacing the motors, clutches, and/or gears related to thedrum/development/transfer sections

•

When removing or replacing the transfer belt or laser optical housing unit

Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper

You must adjust the line speed of the fusing unit (the speed of development motor-K) under the following conditions:

• The color registration shifts more on the trailing edge than on the leadingedge.

• This problem has not been solved by the line position adjustment.

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-7 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION

NOTE: Normally, the ACC is enough to adjust the color balance to achieve theoptimum print output. The printer gamma correction is only required forfine-tuning to meet user requirements.

The printer gamma curve created during ACC can be modified using SP modes.The gamma data for highlight, middle, shadow areas, and IDmax can be adjusted.The adjustable range is from 0 to 15 (16 steps).

Copy Mode

KCMY Color Balance Adjustment

The adjustment uses only “Offset” values.

NOTE: Never change “Option” values (default value is 0).

Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale

Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale

Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale

ID maxLevel 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire imagedensity.)

OffsetThe higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.

There are four adjustable modes (SP4-918-009):

• Copy Photo mode

• Copy Letter mode• Copy Letter (Single Color) mode

• Copy Photo (Single Color) mode

B146R967.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B147B149/B190 3-8 SM


1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you are going to adjust.

2. Enter the SP mode.

3. Select “Copy SP.”

4. Select SP4-918-009.

5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard ( thetable below).

NOTE: 1) Never change “Option” value (default value is 0).2) Adjust the density in order from “ID Max,” “Middle,” “Shadow,” and then

“Highlight.”

- Photo Mode, Full Colour -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard

1ID max:(K, C, M, and Y)

Adjust the offset value so thatthe density of level 10 matchesthat of level 10 on the C-4 chart.

2Middle (Middle ID)(K, C, M, and Y)


3Shadow (High ID)(K, C, M, and Y)

Adjust the offset value so thatthe density of level 8 matches

that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.

4

Highlight (Low ID)(K, C, M, and Y)

Adjust the offset value so thatdirty background is not visible onthe copy and the density of level3 is slightly lighter that of level 3on the C-4 chart.

5

K Highlight (Low ID)(C,M, and Y)<on the full colorcopy>

Adjust the offset value so thatthe color balance of black scalelevels 3 through 5 in the copy isseen as gray (no C, M, or Yshould be visible). If the blackscale contains C, M, or Y, redostep 1 to 4.

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-9 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

- Photo Mode, Single Colour -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard

1ID max:(K)



2Middle (Middle ID)(K)


3Shadow (High ID)(K)


4

Highlight (Low ID)(K)


- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Colour -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard

1ID max:(K, C, M, and Y)


2Middle (Middle ID)(K, C, M, and Y)


3Shadow (High ID)(K, C, M, and Y)



4

Highlight (Low ID)(K, C, M, and Y)


8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B147B149/B190 3-10 SM

- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Colour -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard

1ID max:(K)


2Middle (Middle ID)(K)


3Shadow (High ID)(K)


4

Highlight (Low ID)(K)


NOTE: After adjusting ‘shadow’ as explained above, text parts of the test patternmay not be printed clearly. If this happens, check whether the 5 line/mmpattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of‘shadow’ again until it is.

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-11 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

Printer Mode

There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):

• 1200 x 1200 photo mode

•600 x 600 text mode

• 1800 x 600 text mode



• 1200 x 1200 text mode

K C M Y

HighlightMiddleShadowIDmax

SP1-104-1

SP1-104-2

SP1-104-3

SP1-104-4

SP1-104-21

SP1-104-22

SP1-104-23

SP1-104-24

SP1-104-41

SP1-104-42

SP1-104-43

SP1-104-44

SP1-104-61

SP1-104-62

SP1-104-63

SP1-104-64


1. Do ACC for the printer mode.

2. Turn the main power off and on.

3. Enter SP mode.

4. Select “Printer SP”.

5. Select SP1-102-001 and select the print mode that you are going to adjust.

6. To review the image quality for these settings, choose SP1-103-1 to print out atone control test sheet.

7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown below comparing the tonecontrol test sheet with the C4 test chart.NOTE: Adjust the density in order from “ID Max”, “Shadow”, “Middle”, and then

“Highlight”.

8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1-105-001.

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B147B149/B190 3-12 SM

Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction

The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. Thetables show the level of the color scale on the C4 test chart and on the tone controltest sheet printed in the printer SP mode. For example, for K at text mode, grade12 on the tone control test sheet should be the same as grade 7 on the C4 chart.

Normally, it is not necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. The fine-tuning of color balance bygamma data adjustment will be required only when the result from ACC and ColorCalibration does not meet the customer’s requirements.

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -

1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 16 -Photo

1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 16600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -

1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 16 -

K Testsheet

Text

1200 x 1200 - 1 3 5 6 9 11 12 15 16

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 13 14

1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 12 13Photo

1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13

600 x 600 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13

1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 12 14

C Testsheet

Text1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

600 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 14 16 -

1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 15 16 -Photo

1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -

600 x 600 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -

1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 13 14 16 -

M Testsheet

Text

1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 13 16 -

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

600 x 600 1 3 4 9 11 12 14 15 16 -

1800 x 600 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -Photo

1200 x 1200 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -

600 x 600 1 2 5 8 10 11 1414/15

15 16

1800 x 600 1 3 6 9 10 12 14 15 16 -

Y Testsheet

Text

1200 x 1200 1 2 4 7 9 10 13 15 16 -

8/12/2019 2238c


DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

SM 3-13 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

3.3.1 TOP COVER

1. External tray [A]2. Open the duplex left cover [B].

3. Top cover [C] ( x 4)

3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD

1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)

2. Duplex control board [A] ( x 4, x 7)

B146R985.WMF

B146R925.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



B147B149/B190 3-14 SM

3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1

1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)

2. Exit tray [A]

3. Duplex unit [B] ( x 1, x 1)

4. Inner cover [C] ( x 2)

5. Duplex control board bracket [D]

( x 2, x 7)

6. Duplex inverter motor 1 [E]

( x 2, 1 timing belt)

B146R955.WMF

B146R986.WMF

B146R500.WMF

[E]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 3-15 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH

1. Duplex control board bracket ( 3.3.3)

2. Duplex inverter unit switch [A]

( x 1, x 1)

3. Duplex inverter motor 2 [B]

( x 2, 1 timing belt)

3.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR

1. Open the duplex inverter unit [A]

2. Exit sensor 3 [B] ( x 1)

3. Duplex inverter sensor [C]

( x 1, x 2)

3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2

1. Top cover (

3.3.1)2. Open the duplex unit.

3. Exit sensor 1 [A]

( x 1, x 1, 1 bracket)

4. Exit sensor 2 [B] ( x 1)

B146R501.WMF

B146R134.WMF

B146R135.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[B]

[A]

[A][B]

8/12/2019 2238c


DUPLEX FEED UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-16 SM

3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT

3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD

1. Open the front cover

2. Duplex feed unit [A] ( x 1)

3. Inner cover [B] ( x 1)

4. Duplex drive board [C] ( x 2, x 3)

3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR

1. Duplex feed unit ( 3.4.1)

2. Inner cover [A] ( x 1)

3. Duplex feed motor [B]

( x 1, x 1, 1 timing belt)

B146R136.WMF

B146R114.WMF

B146R137.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


DUPLEX FEED UNIT

SM 3-17 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR


2. Duplex feed sensor [A] ( x 1)

B146R138.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


EXTERIOR COVERS

SM 3-19 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

4. Open the by-pass tray [A].

5. Right cover [B] ( x 2)

6. Upper right cover [C] (1 strap)

7. Upper front cover [D] ( x 2)

CAUTION: Do not put anything on the operation panel. After you remove the upperfront cover, the operation panel may become unstable.

8. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3)

9. Rear right cover [E]

( x 4, 1 hook)

B146R918.WMF

B146R905.WMF

[A]

[D][C]

[B]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


EXTERIOR COVERS

B147B149/B190 3-20 SM

3.5.2 LEFT SIDE

1. Duplex unit ( 3.3.3)

2. Duplex unit base cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Duplex inverter guide [B]

4. Duplex unit base [C] ( x 6)

5. Left cover [D] ( x 6, 1 hook)

6. Rear cover ( 3.5.3)

7. Open the upper left cover [E]

8. Scanner left cover ( 3.5.3)

9. Rear left cover [F] ( x 4)

B146R921.WMF

[A]

[C]

[E]

[F]

[D]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


EXTERIOR COVERS

SM 3-21 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS

1. ARDF or platen cover (if installed)


3. Upper front cover ( 3.5.1)

4. Operation panel [A] ( x 4, x 1)

5. Scanner left cover [B] ( x 2, 1 hook)6. Scanner right cover [C] ( x 2)

7. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 1)

B146R919.WMF

[B]

[A]

[D]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-22 SM

3.6 SCANNER UNIT

3.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS

1. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)

2. Exposure glass with left scale [B]

( x 2)

3. ARDF exposure glass [C]

NOTE: When reattaching the exposureglass and ARDF exposure glass,position the glass marker [D] atthe rear-left corner.

3.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR

1. Exposure glass with left scale

( 3.6.1)2. Original length sensors [A]

( x 2, x2)

3. Original width sensor 1 [B]

( x 1, x1)

B146R987.WMF

B146R927.WMF

[A]

[B][D]

[A][B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

SM 3-23 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU)


2. Exposure glass ( 3.6.1)

3. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3)

4. Inner cover [A] ( x 4)

5. Sensor board unit

[B] ( x 4, x 4)

6. After replacing the sensor board unit, adjust the following SP modes ( 3.3.12):

• SP4–008 (Scanner leading edge magnification)

• SP4–010 (Scanner leading edge registration)• SP4–011 (Scanner side-to-side registration)

B146R127.WMF

B146R128.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-24 SM

3.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER

1. Exposure glass with left scale( 3.6.1)

2. Sensor board unit ( 3.6.3)

3. Exposure lamp stabilizer [A]

( x 2, x 2)

3.6.5 XENON LAMP


2. Operation panel and scanner covers( 3.5.3)

3. Exposure glass with left scale( 3.6.1)

4. Left frame [A] ( x 2)

5. Front frame [B] ( x 5)

6. Xenon-lamp cover [C] ( x 5)

7. Xenon lamp [D] (2 clamps)

B146R129.WMF

B146R130.WMF

B146R131.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

SM 3-25 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

Reassembling

1. Take up the cable slack.

2. Adjust the cable clamp position [A] if

necessary.

3.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSU)


2. Scanner power supply unit [A]

(all's, x 6)

3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR

1. Scanner PSU ( 3.6.6)

2. Scanner motor [A] ( x 2, Spring x 1)

3. Timing belt [B]

Reassembling

1. Install the motor.

2. Install the timing belt.

3. Install the spring.

4. Fasten the screws.

B146R139.WMF

B146R132.WMF

B146R133.WMF

[A]

[A]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-26 SM

3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE

1. Front frame ( 3.6.5)

2. Front scanner wire clamp [A]

3. Front scanner wire bracket [B]

( x 1)

4. Front scanner wire and scanner

drive pulley [C] ( x 1)

Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire

1. Position the center ball [A]in the middle of the forkedholder.

2. Pass the right end (withthe ring) [B] through thesquare hole, and the leftend (with the ball) [C]

through the notch.

3. Wind the right endclockwise (viewed from themachine’s front) threetimes; wind the left endcounterclockwise fivetimes.

NOTE: The two red marks [D] meet when you have done this. Stick the wire tothe pulley with tape, so you can handle the assembly easily duringinstallation.

B146R140.WMF

B146R141.WMF

[B]

[C]

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

SM 3-27 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

4. Install the drive pulley onthe shaft [A].

NOTE: Do not secure thepulley to the shaftwith the screw yet.

5. Insert the left end into theslit [B], with the end goingvia the rear track of the leftpulley [C] and the reartrack of the movable pulley[D].

6. Hook the right end ontothe front scanner wirebracket [E], with the endgoing via the front track ofthe right pulley [F] and thefront track of the movable

pulley [G].

NOTE: Do not secure thescanner wire bracketwith the screw yet.

B146R142.WMF

B146R143.WMF

[A]

[B] [C] [D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-28 SM

7. Remove the tape from the

drive pulley.

8. Insert a scanner positioningpin [A] through the 2ndcarriage hole [B] and the leftholes [C] in the front rail.Insert another scannerpositioning pin [D] throughthe 1st carriage hole [E] andthe right holes in the front rail[F].

9. Insert two more scannerpositioning pins in the holesin the rear rail.

10. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [G].

11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [H].

12. Install the scanner wire clamp [I].

13. Pull out the positioning pins.

NOTE: After removing the positioning pins, make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages

move smoothly. If they do not, repeat steps 8 through 13.

B146R144.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

SM 3-29 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE

CAUTION: Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagrambelow. Image adjustment may become difficult if these screws areremoved.


2. Operation panel and scanner covers ( 3.5.3)

3. Exposure glass with left scale ( 3.6.1)

4. Left frame ( 3.6.5)

5. Scanner PSU ( 3.6.6)6. Five screws on the right-hand side (viewed from the front) [A]

7. Two screws on the left-hand side (viewed from the front) [B]

8. Pivot brackets [C][D] ( x 1 for each)

B146R928.WMF

[B]

[C]

[S1]

[S2]

[A]

[S3]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-30 SM

9. Rear frame [A] ( x 2, x 7)

NOTE: To remove the screw [B] on the bottom-right corner (viewed from thefront), lift the right-hand side (viewed from the front) of the scanner unit.

10. Rail frame [C] ( x 5)

NOTE: When reassembling, make sure that the home position sensor [D] isnot damaged by the sensor blade near the rear end of the xenon lamp.

11. Rear scanner wire clamp [E]

12. Rear scanner wire bracket [F]

( x 1)

13. Loosen the two screws on thescanner-motor bracket ( 3.6.7)

14. Scanner motor gear [G] ( x 1)15. Rear scanner wire and scanner

drive pulley [H] ( x 1)

B146R929.WMF

B146R145.WMF

[E][F]

[G] [H]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

SM 3-31 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire

1. Position the center ball [A]in the middle of the forked

holder.2. Pass the left end (with the

ball) [B] through the drivepulley notch, and the rightend (with the ring) [C]through the drive pulleyhole.

3. Wind the left endcounterclockwise (viewedfrom the machine’s front)

five times; wind the rightend clockwise three times.

NOTE: The two red marks [D] meet when you have done this. Stick the wire tothe pulley with tape, so you can handle the assembly easily duringinstallation.

4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.

NOTE: Do not secure the pulley on the shaft with the screw yet.

5. Install the wire.

NOTE: The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scannershould be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front,except that it should appear as a mirror image.Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley withthe three windings should face the front of the machine. At the rear ofthe machine, it should face the rear.

6. Perform steps 7 through 13 in the “Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire”Section.

B146R146.WMF

[A]

[B] [C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-32 SM

3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: It is necessary to calibrate touch panel in the following cases:

• When the operation panel is replaced.

• When the controller board is replaced.• When the touch panel detection function is not working correctly

Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items arefor design use only.

1. Press, press, and then press 5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics menu.

2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press).

3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .

4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.

5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker (+) appearsexactly where the screen is touched.

If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel andrepeat from Step 2.

6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press).

7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save thecalibration settings.

B146R147.WMF

B146R148.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER OPTICS

SM 3-33 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.7 LASER OPTICS

WARNING

Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any ofthe procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.

3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Caution decals are placed as shown below.

WARNING

Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from thepower outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laserunit. This printer uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nmand an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.

B146R900.TIF

B146R107.WMF

B146R901.TIF

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER OPTICS

B147B149/B190 3-34 SM

3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT

CAUTION: Before installing a new laser optics housing unit, remove the spongepadding and the tag from the new unit.

Steps 1 through 4 refer to theprocedure for a newly supplied unitthat replaces the old one.

1. Top cover of the laser optics

housing unit [A] ( x 4)

2. Sponge padding [B]

3. Tag [C]

4. Reinstall the top cover.

5. ARDF or platen cover (if installed)

6. Rear cover (

3.5.1)7. Open the duplex inverter unit [D].

8. Open the front cover [E].

10. Right cover, upper right cover, and upper front cover ( 3.5.1)

11. Operation panel, scanner left cover, scanner right cover, and scanner rearcover ( 3.5.3)

B146R149.WMF

B146R922.WMF

[B]

[C]

[A]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER OPTICS

SM 3-35 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

12. Remove the support [A] on the front ofthe scanner unit.

CAUTION: 1) Before going to the next step, make sure that the cables on the rearof the scanner unit are safe. The whole function (not only thescanner unit) may be disabled if some of the cables are damaged.

2) Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagrambelow. Image adjustment may become difficult if these screws areremoved.

13. Lift the scanner unit [B] ( x 7) andprop the unit with the support [C].

NOTE: Remove screw [D] andscrew [E].

CAUTION: Do not lift the scanner unitany higher after setting thesupport under the scannerunit. The support may comeoff the opening [F].

B146R920.WMF

B146R924.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[S1]

[S2][D]

[E]

[F]

[S3]

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER OPTICS

B147B149/B190 3-36 SM

14. Securing screws for the paper exit tray

[A] ( x 2)

NOTE: Do not remove the paper exittray yet.

15. Securing screws for the toner supply

unit [B] ( x 4)

16. Securing screws for the laser optics

housing unit [C] ( x 2)

17. Hold the toner supply unit [D] up andlower it, so the pins [E] on the front

and rear shafts hold the unit.

B146R912.WMF

B146R910.WMF

2

1

B146R914.WMF

[E]

[D]

[C]

[A]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER OPTICS

SM 3-37 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

18. Paper exit tray [A]

19. Connector cover [B] ( x 3)

20. Four flat cables [C]

21. Connector [D]

22. Flat cable bracket [E] ( x 1)

23. Release the cable from the clamps [F].

B146R923.WMF

1 2

B146R909.WMF

B146R913.WMF

[B]

[D]

[C]

[F]

[E]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER OPTICS

B147B149/B190 3-38 SM

24. Duct [A]

25. Securing screws for the laser optics

housing unit [B] ( x 2)NOTE: When reassembling, attach the

ground cable [C].

26. Palace a sheet of paper [D] between thelaser optic housing unit and the machinerear frame.NOTE: This ensures that the cables are

not caught by the brackets whenyou lift the laser optics housingunit.

27. Hold the unit with both hands and slowlylift it up, making sure that the flat cablesfrom the laser diode board are not caughtby the brackets.NOTE: If you roughly remove the unit, the cables can be caught by the

brackets and the laser diode board may be damaged.

28. After reinstalling the laser optics housing unit, do adjustments ( theprocedures on the following page).

After installing the laser optics housing unit, execute the forced line positionadjustment (SP5-993-2 or User Tools > Maintenance > Colour Registration > AutoColour Registration > OK).

B146R911.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER OPTICS

SM 3-39 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit

1. Enter SP mode.

2. Input the values printed on three decals on the new laser optics housing unit

into the following SPs. Each decal contains two values.

Value on the left Value on the right Function

Decal 1 SP2-109-3 SP2-109-2 Laser beam pitch

Decal 2 Not used Not usedMain-scan registrationcorrection for black and cyan

Decal 3 Not used Not usedMain-scan registrationcorrection for magenta andyellow

NOTE: The values on decals 2 and 3 do not need to be input, as the machineperforms the main scan registration correction for each color duringautomatic line position adjustment.

3. Print out the following test pattern (Cross Stitch M) with SP5-997.

4. Check these test patterns. If the laser beam pitch is not correct, vertical blackstrips seem to appear.

• Cross-stitch pattern: The thin lines should be of uniform thickness (nostriping effect should appear on the printout).

5. Adjust the laser beam pitch values in SP2-109-2 and -3 until the printout iscorrect, as shown below.

6. Execute SP5-993-2 or “Auto Colour Registration” in the User Tools(Maintenance > Colour Registration > Auto Colour Registration > OK).

Jp:xxxxx KC:-2,-2

CK

B146R150.WMF

Jp:xxxxx MY:-2,-2

YM

B146R151.WMF

Jp:xxxxx P:46,41

1200dpi600dpi

B146R152.WMF

B146R153.WMF

Decal 1 Decal 2 Decal 3

Feed direction

Adjustment not completed Adjustment completed

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER OPTICS

B147B149/B190 3-40 SM

3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

1. Laser optics housing unit ( 3.7.2)

2. Cover [A] ( x 4)

3. Polygon mirror motor [B]

( x 1, x 4)

3.7.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS

1. Laser optics housing unit ( 3.7.2)

2. Synchronizing detector boards [A]

( x 1 for each, x 1 for each)

B146R915.WMF

B146R916.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT

SM 3-41 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT

NOTE: Do not touch the PCU drum. Do not let any metal object touch thedevelopment sleeve.

1. Start the SP mode and execute theNew Unit Set:

• PCU: SP5-999-001 ∼ 004

• Development unit: SP5-999-005 ∼ 008

2. Turn the main switch off.

3. Open the front cover [A].

4. Loosen the 2 screws [B1][B2] (on thedrum positioning plate).

NOTE: When reassembling, fastenscrew [B1] first, and screw [B2]second.

5. Turn the release lever [C] counter-clockwise.

6. Lift the drum positioning plate.

7. Pull a development unit [D] out.

8. Check that the development units areinstalled in the proper color order

(black → yellow → cyan → magentafrom left to right).

9. Release the lever and pull a PCU [E]out until the handle appears.

10. Grasp the handle [F] and pull the PCUout of the machine.

11. Turn the main switch on. The machinestarts the initialization for the new unit.

B146R930.WMF

B146R154.WMF

B146R155.WMF

[A]

[B1]

[C]

[E]

[F]

[B2]

[D]

Rev. 05/2005

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

B147B149/B190 3-42 SM

3.9 PAPER FEED

3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

Tray 1 and Tray 21. Tray 1 and Tray 2

2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)

3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)

4. Separation roller [C] ( x 1)

By-pass Tray

1. Open the right door.

2. By-pass tray cover [A] (1 hook, x1)

3. Raise the paper end sensor actuator[B].

4. Pick-up roller [C] (1 hook)

5. Feed roller [D] ( x 1)

6. Vertical transport cover [E] ( x 4)

NOTE: To have easier access tothe four screws, remove theright rear cover ( 3.9.4).

7. Separation roller [F] ( x 1)

B146R961.WMF

B146R932.WMF

B146R156.WMF

[C][A]

[B]

[D]

[F]

[E]

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

SM 3-43 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD

1. Open the by-pass tray.

2. Center the side fences [A].3. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 2, 2 hooks)

NOTE: There is a square opening [C] on each side. Release the hooks bypushing them through these openings.

4. Paper width detection board [D] ( x 1)

NOTE: To remove the connector,open the bottom cover [E].

B146R933.WMF

B146R157.WMF

[B][A]

[D]

[C]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

B147B149/B190 3-44 SM

3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR


2. Vertical transport cover [A] ( x 4)

NOTE: To have easier access to the four screws, remove the right rear cover( 3.9.4).

3. Vertical transport sensor [B] ( x 1)

3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT

1. Rear right cover ( 3.5.1)

2. Open the right door [A].

3. Lift the vertical transport unit [B] to remove it from its hinges ( x 3, x 1).

B146R158.WMF

B146R159.WMF

B146R160.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A] [B]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

B147B149/B190 3-46 SM

3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH

1. Right door unit ( 3.9.4)

2. By-pass tray cover [A]

( x 1, 1 hook)

3. Loosen the screw on the rightdoor latch [B].

4. Turn the latch in the oppositedirection.

5. Upper guide plate [C]

( x 4, x 1)

6. Support plate [D] ( x 2)

7. Relay gear [E] (1 hook)8. By-pass feed clutch [F] ( x 1)

3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR


2. Rear cover (

3.5.1)3. Swing out the high voltage supply

unit ( 3.13.2).

4. Sub power supply unit [A]

( x 2, x 3)

5. Tray lift motors (tray 1 [B], tray 2 [C])

( x 2, x 1)

B146R162.WMF

B146R122.WMF

B146R163.WMF

[A]

[E]

[D]

[F]

[B]

[C]

[B]

[C]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

SM 3-47 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR


2. Sub power supply unit ( 3.9.8)

NOTE: This step is necessary to release the cable.

3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)

NOTE: The connector is CN604 on the driver board [B].

B146R164.WMF[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-48 SM

3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT

NOTE: When removing or installing the transfer unit, grasp the central areas of thefront and rear frame. Do not touch the transfer belt [A]. Do not damage theentrance mylar [B].

After replacing the transfer unit, reset the maintenance counter, SP7-804-16, andconduct the output check, SP5-804-74.


2. Turn the release lever counterclockwise. ( 3.8)

3. Pull out the transfer unit [C] until the entire unit is visible ( x 2).

4. Grasp the transfer unit grips as shown above. Lift the unit to remove it.

NOTE: Grasp the front grip. Use caution not to damage the actuator on the rear.

After replacing the transfer unit:

• Perform forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or > Maintenance >Color Registration).

• Print the 1-dot grid pattern on A3/11" x 17" paper and check the color shift level( 4.6.3).

B146R958.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 3-49 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT

NOTE: After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, reset the maintenancecounter, SP7-804-17.

While pushing the lever, pull out the transfer belt cleaning unit [A] ( x 1).

NOTE: 1) The blade [B] may damage the belt if you do not keep pushing the lever.

2) When reassembling, check that the transfer unit release lever is putback to the original position ( 3.8).

After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, perform forced line position

adjustment (SP5-993-002 or > Maintenance > Color Registration).

B146R165.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



B147B149/B190 3-50 SM

3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER

1. Transfer belt cleaning unit ( 3.10.2)

2. Cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)

3. Tension spring [B]

4. Lever [C]

5. 3 gears [D] ( x 1)

6. Gear box [E] ( x 1)

B146R166.WMF

B146R167.WMF[C]

[D]

[E]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c



B147B149/B190 3-52 SM

3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT

NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt during handling. When replacing the belt,hold the belt at its end.


2. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1)

3. Transfer entrance guide [A] ( x 3)

4. Right bracket [B] ( x 2)

5. Left bracket [C] ( x 2)

6. Tension roller [D] ( x 2, Spacer [E] x 1)NOTE: When reassembling, attach the spacer [E] to the original position.

B146R169.WMF

B146R936.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D] [E]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 3-53 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

7. Lay the transfer unit on its side.

8. Grasp the upper end of the transfer belt and pull the transfer belt [A] up and out.

NOTE: If the drive rollers are dirty, clean them with a damp cloth.

After replacing the transfer belt, perform forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-

002 or > Maintenance > Color Registration).

B146R170.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



B147B149/B190 3-54 SM

3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR


2. Pull out the transfer unit ( 3.10.1).

3. Release lever [A] ( x 1)

4. Front cover [B] ( x 3)

5. Front plate [C] ( x 5, x 2, Timing belt x 1)

6. Transfer unit drive motor [D] ( x 2)

B146R171.WMF

B146R937.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


ID SENSORS

SM 3-55 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.11 ID SENSORS

1. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1)

2. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)

3. Black PCU ( 3.8)

4. ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

When reassembling, check that the ID sensor bracket receives the drum-

positioning plate correctly.

B146R172.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147B149/B190 3-56 SM

3.12 FUSING

CAUTION

1. Be careful when handling the fusing unit. It is very hot.2. Take care not to spill silicone oil.

3.12.1 FUSING UNIT

CAUTION: Do not tilt the fusing unit [A] while handling it. The oil supply unit [B] canfall off the fusing unit after the grip [C] is released from the oil supplyunit.

1. Start the SP mode and execute the New Unit Set (SP5-999-009).


3. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed.

4. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.5. Push the heat insulator [D]. The grip [C] is released from the oil supply unit.

6. Fusing unit [A]

7. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts initialization for the new unit.

After replacing the fusing unit, if the customer uses thick paper, make some testprints on a sample of the paper used by the customer. If there are any colorregistration problems, adjust the line speed for thick paper with the following SP:

• SP1-004-007 (Development Motor Speed–[K] 62.5 Thick)

B146R173.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 3-57 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.12.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT AND UPPER COVER

1. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed.

2. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.

3. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)

4. Oil supply unit [A]

5. Upper cover [B] ( x 4)

B146R174.WMF

[B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147B149/B190 3-58 SM

3.12.3 CLEANING UNIT

1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)

2. 2 handle guides [A][B] ( x 2 for each)

3. Handle [C] (Spring x 1)

4. Gear [D] and collar [E] (Retaining ring x 1)

5. Cleaning unit [F] ( x 2)

NOTE: When reattaching, make sure that you set the cleaning unit [F] in place firstand then attach the gear [D] and collar [E].

B146R175.WMF

B146R176.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 3-59 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.12.4 HEATING ROLLER LAMP


2. Heating roller lamp [A] ( x 2)NOTE: When reinstalling, make sure the front [B] and rear [C] ends of the lamp are

on the correct terminals.

B146R177.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147B149/B190 3-60 SM

3.12.5 FUSING BELT UNIT

1. Cleaning unit ( 3.12.3)

2. Heating roller lamp ( 3.12.4)

3. Upper paper guide plate ( 3.12.8)

4. Pressure roller gear [A] (C ring x 1)

5. 2 pressure brackets [B][C] (Spring x 1 for each)

6. Knob [D] ( x 1)

7. Fusing belt unit [E] ( x 1, x 1)

B146R178.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 3-61 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.12.6 HOT ROLLER

1. Fusing belt unit ( 3.12.5)

2. Hot roller [A] (Bushing x 2)

3.12.7 HEATING ROLLER

1. Pressure roller ( 3.12.6)

2. Heating roller [A]

B146R179.WMF

B146R180.WMF

[A]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147B149/B190 3-62 SM

3.12.8 PAPER GUIDE PLATES AND STRIPPER PAWLS


2. Lower paper guide plate [A] ( x 2)

3. Upper paper guide plate [B] ( x 2)

4. 5 stripper pawls [C]

B146R181.WMF

B146R182.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 3-63 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.12.9 THERMISTOR AND FUSE

1. Lower right cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Thermistor [B] ( x 1, x 1)

B146R183.WMF

B146R184.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147B149/B190 3-64 SM

3. Fuse [A] ( x 3)

3.12.10 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP

1. Fusing belt unit ( 3.12.5)

2. Pressure roller fusing lamp [A] ( x 2)

B146R185.WMF

B146R186.WMF

[A]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 3-65 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER

1. Pressure roller fusing lamp ( 3.12.10)

2. Lower paper guide plate ( 3.12.8)

3. Drive gear holder [A] ( x 1)

4. Drive gear [B] ( x 1)

5. Lower right cover ( 3.12.9)

6. Pressure roller unit [C] ( x 5, x 2)

B146R187.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147B149/B190 3-66 SM

7. Pressure roller gear [A] (C ring x 1, Bushing x 1)

8. Pressure roller holder [B] ( x 1)

9. Pressure roller [C] (C ring x 1)

B146R188.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 3-67 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.12.12 FUSING UNIT FAN

CAUTION

When reinstalling, make sure that the fan faces to the correct direction. The

arrow on the fan [D] and the arrow on the duct [D] must face to the samedirection.


2. Left cover, rear left cover ( 3.5.2)

3. Connector cover (on the top of thecontroller box) (3.13.1)

4. Fusing fan duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)

5. Release the hooks and remove theupper cover [B].

6. Fusing fan [C]

B146R116.WMF

B146R939.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147B149/B190 3-68 SM

3.12.13 WASTE OIL BOTTLE

1. Open the front cover [A].

2. Release the hook [B].

3. Waste oil bottle [C]

4. Close the bottle with the lid [D].

5. Dispose of the bottle (with wasteoil in it) in accordance with yourlocal regulations.

NOTE: 1) The message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full,” is cleared when thefront cover is closed. You do not need to turn the main switch off andon.

2) The message, “Waste Oil Bottle Setting Error,” indicates that the bottleis not in position. Check that the bottle is correctly reinstalled if thismessage is displayed.

3.12.14 PAPER EXIT

1. Lift the scanner unit ( 3.7.2).

2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Exit upper limit sensor [B]

4. Paper exit sensor [C]

B146R189.WMF

B146R938.WMF

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

SM 3-69 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY


2. Connector cover [A] ( x 3)

3. Four flat cables [B]

4. Connector [C]

5. Ground cable [D] ( x 1)

6. Duct [E] ( x 1, x 2)

7. Ground cable [F] ( x 1)

8. Two connectors [F]

9. Swing out the controller box [G]

( x 5).

1 2

B146R959.WMF

B146R960.WMF

[B]

[C]

[A]

[E]

[G]

[F]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c



B147B149/B190 3-70 SM

3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, B OUTOF THE WAY


2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit

[A] ( x 2).

3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU

NOTE: 1) Before replacing the BCU or controller, print out the SMC reports (“SPMode Data” and “Logging Data”).

2) After replacing the BCU or controller, remove the NVRAM on the oldboard and install it on the new board.

1. Controller [A] ( x 3)

2. IPU [B] ( x 2, x 2)

3. Option bracket [C] ( x 2)

4. Rear cover [D] ( 3.5.1)

B146R190.WMF

B146R954.WMF

[D]

[C]

[A]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 3-71 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

5. Connector cover ( 3.13.1)

6. Cover bracket [A] ( x 4)

7. Inner bracket [B] ( x 2)

8. BCU [C] (Flat cables x 4,

All's, x 8)

CAUTION: 1) When handling NVRAMs, keep them away from any objects that cancause static electricity. The data in NVRAMs may be corrupted bystatic electricity.

2) Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the board. A half-disk[D] is engraved on one side of the NVRAM, while a guide mark [E] is

on one side of the NVRAM slot. Install the NVRAM so that the half-disk and the guide mark are on the same side.

3) When replacing the BCU, make sure that the DIP-switch settings onthe old board and on the new board are the same ( 5.10).

NOTE: 1) Before replacing the NVRAM, make sure the SMC reports (“SP ModeData” and “Logging Data”) has been printed out.

2) After replacing the BCU or controller, remove the NVRAM on the oldboard and install it on the new board. If the NVRAM on the old board is

defective, replace the NVRAM (

3.13.5).

B146R942.WMF

B146R943.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E]

8/12/2019 2238c



B147B149/B190 3-72 SM

3.13.4 HDD

You cannot separate the hard-disk drive into two different hard-disk drives. If youshould separated it into two and replace one of them, the controller does not

recognizes the hard-disk drive.1. Controller ( 3.13.3)

2. HDD [A] ( x 4, Shoulder-screw x 3)

3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

NVRAM on BCU

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings) that comes with thecopier.

2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.

3. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card ( SP5-824) if possible.

4. Turn off the main switch and unplug the power cord.

5. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.

6. Select a paper-size type ( SP5-131-001).

7. Specify the device number and destination code of the machine.

NOTE: 1) Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the devicenumber and destination code.

2) SC 999 or “Fusing Unit Setting Error” may be displayed until thedevice number and destination code is properly programmed.

B146R191.WMF[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 3-73 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

8. Turn the main switch off and on.

9. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have

successfully copied them to the SD card.

10. Reset the settings for meter charge ( SP5-930-002).

11. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.

12. Execute the process control self-check.

13. Perform ACC for the copier application program.

14. Perform ACC for the printer application program.

NVRAM on Controller

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings) that comes with thecopier.

2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.

3. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card ( SP5-824) if possible.

4. Enter SP mode and print out the SMC reports ( SP5-990-001) if possible.

5. Turn off the main switch and unplug the power cord.

6. Replace the NVRAM on the controller and reassemble the machine.7. Turn the main switch on.

8. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you havesuccessfully copied them to the SD card.

9. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.

10. Perform ACC for the copier application program.

11. Perform ACC for the printer application program.

8/12/2019 2238c



B147B149/B190 3-74 SM

3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B


2. High voltage supply board [A] (All's, x 6)

3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT


2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit ( 3.13.2)

3. Sub power supply unit [A] ( x 2, x 3)

B146R121.WMF

B146R122.WMF

[A]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 3-75 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.13.8 PSU

1. Left cover ( 3.5.2)

2. PSU [A] (All's, x 5)

NOTE: Check that the interlock switches on the PSU work normally afterreinstalling the PSU (open/close the left and front doors).

3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD


2. Swing out the controller box ( 3.13.1).

3. Driver board [A] (All's, x 4)

B146R192.WMF

B146R193.WMF

[A]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


DRIVE UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-76 SM

3.14 DRIVE UNIT

3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH


8. Swing out the controller box ( 3.13.1).

9. Registration clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)

3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES

1. Drum gears ( 3.14.3).

2. Development clutch assembly [A]

( x 1, x 1)

3. Clutch holder [B]

4. Clutch shaft [C] (1 bushing, x 1)

B146R944.WMF

B146R945.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


DRIVE UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-78 SM

5. 4 drum gears [A] ( x 2 for each)

NOTE: 3) Do not move the drum-gear shafts after removing the drum gears.4) The print quality may be affected if any of the teeth on the drum

gears are damaged. Make sure they are intact.

6. Timing belt gear [B] (Timing belt x 1, Bushing x 1)

7. Idle gear [C]

8. 4 gear drive holders [D]∼[G] ( x 1 for each)

9. Development clutch securing plate [H] ( x 8, x 6)

NOTE: Two of the six connectors are on the rear side.

B146R948.WMF

B146R949.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G][H]

8/12/2019 2238c


DRIVE UNIT

SM 3-79 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

10. Development drive motor - CMY [A] ( x 5, x 1, Spring x 1)

NOTE: When reassembling, remove the three bushings [B] and install thedevelopment drive motor first. After this, install the bushings.

3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K

1. Development clutch securing plate( 3.14.3)

2. Drum drive motor - CMY [A] ( x 2)

3. Drum drive motor - K [B] ( x 2)

B146R950.WMF

B146R194.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


DRIVE UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-80 SM

3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K

1. Fusing fan duct ( 3.12.12)

2. Development clutch securing plate( 3.14.3)

3. Solenoid cover [A] ( x 2)

4. Development clutch securing plate ( 3.14.3)

5. Development drive motor – K [B] (with the fusing clutch [C]) ( x 4, x 2)

NOTE: When reassembling, remove the bushing [D] and install thedevelopment drive motor–K (with the fusing clutch) first. After this,install the bushing.

B146R951.WMF

3

2

1 B146R952.WMF

[B]

[C]

[A]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


TONER SUPPLY UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-82 SM

7. Development unit left guide [A] ( x 1)


9. Registration upper stay [B] ( x 4)

CAUTION: 1) When you remove the toner path cover and a toner supply pipe, thetoner spills out. Before removing them, place some paper or clothbeneath the toner supply unit and waste toner collection path.

2) After removing a pipe, close it with a paper clip or tape.

10. Toner path cover [C] ( x 2)

11. Toner supply pipe [D]

12. Toner supply unit [E] ( x 2, x 1)

B146R195.WMF

B146R196.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C] [D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


TONER SUPPLY UNIT

SM 3-83 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

Reinstalling the M Toner Supply Unit

1. Wind the harness [A] on the shaft.

2. Insert the toner collection pipe [B].

NOTE: Check that the pipe does not come off the unit.

3. Remove the toner supply unit bushing [C].

B146R197.WMF

B146R198.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


TONER SUPPLY UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-84 SM

4. Install the unit [A] and secure it with the screws.

5. Unwind the harness and connect it.

6. Install the bushing.

7. Connect the toner supply pipe and the waste toner collection pipe [B].

8. Check that the pipes [C] do not comeoff the unit.

9. Attach the toner path cover andsecure it with screws.

10. Reassemble the machine.

B146R199.WMF

B146R200.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


TONER SUPPLY UNIT

SM 3-85 B147/B149/B190

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

C and Y Toner Supply Units

1. Development drive motor - CMY ( 3.14.3)

2. Development unit plates ( M Toner Supply Unit)

NOTE: To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the C and M

development unit plates. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove theY and C development plates.

3. Development unit left guide ( M Toner Supply Unit)

4. PCU 3C guide rail [A] ( x 2)

NOTE: 1) To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the M PCU guide. Toreplace the Y toner supply unit, remove the Cyan PCU guide.

2) Pull the front plate [B] slightly.

B146R201.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


TONER SUPPLY UNIT

B147B149/B190 3-86 SM

5. Toner path cover [A] ( x 2)

6. Branch toner path covers [B][C] ( x 1)

NOTE: To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the cover on the right-

hand side [B]. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the cover onthe left-hand side [C].

7. Toner supply pipe and toner supply unit ( M Toner Supply Unit)

K Toner Supply Unit

1. K and Y development unit plates ( M Toner Supply Unit)

2. Development unit left guide ( M Toner Supply Unit)

3. PCU 3C guide rail ( C and Y Toner Supply Units)NOTE: Remove the Y PCU guide.

4. Toner supply unit ( M Toner Supply Unit)

B146R202.WMF

[B][A]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


TROUBLESHOOTING

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

SM 4-1 B147/B149/B190

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT

SP-3-005-006 (Developer Initialization Result)

No. Result Description Possible Causes Action

0

Notperformed

Developerinitialization is notperformed.

When initializing onlythe black developer, theinitialization resultbecomes “1000”.

When done in SP mode, dothe developer initializationagain. If the result is thesame, reinstall the enginemain firmware.

When done at unitreplacement:

• Check if a new unit isinstalled

• Check if the unit detectionsystem is working

• Check if SP2-223-001 (autoinitialization at unitreplacement) is enabled.

1

Successfullycompleted

Developerinitialization issuccessfullycompleted.

- -

2

Forced

termination

Developer

initialization wasforcibly terminated.

A cover was opened or

the main switch wasturned off during theinitialization.

When done in SP mode, do

the developer initializationagain. If the result is thesame, reinstall the enginemain firmware.

When done at unitreplacement, turn the mainswitch off and on.

3

Vt error Vt is less than 0.5Vand a SC370,SC371, SC372, orSC373 is

displayed.

1. Check if the drum stay is properly set and secured.

2. Check if the development unit is properly set.

3. If the problem is still the same, check the following:

• Poor connection of connectors

• TD sensor defective• Harness damage

• BCU board failure

• Firmware problem (engine main or MUSIC)

⇒

Rev. 05/2005

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 4-2 SM


8

Toner supplyerror

During toner fill-upmode, Vt does notreach the targetvalue.

1. Check if the toner cartridge is properly set.

2. Check if the amount of toner left in the toner cartridgeis insufficient.

3. Check if toner is coagulated. (If yes, shake the toner

cartridge well.)4. Check if the connectors of the following parts are

properly set, and/or replace the parts.Toner attraction pump / Air Pump / Valves

5. Check if the toner supply tube is bent, caught, ordamaged.

1. Shielding tape is notremoved.

1. Remove the shielding tapeto supply developer to theunit.

2. Development unit isnot firmly installed,causing poor

connection of the TDsensor connector.

2. Reinstall the developmentunit.

9

Failure Vt cannot beadjusted within 3.0

± 0.1V.

SC370 - 373 willbe displayed.Turning the main

switch off and onclears this SCcode. 3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace the development

unit.

NOTE: After you set "Enable" in SP5-999-005, 006, 007, or 008, the machinestarts developer initialization. If an error other than Error 8 occurs,developer initialization is automatically resumed by opening and closing thefront door or turning the main switch off and on.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-3 B147/B149/B190

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT

SP3-975-001 (Process Control Self-check Result)


0 Notperformed

Process control self-check is not done.

- Do the process controlself-check again.

1Successfullycompleted

Process control self-check successfullycompleted.

- -

1. Dirty ID sensor (toner,dust, or foreign material)

1. Clean the ID sensor.

2. Dirty transfer belt 2. Check the beltcleaning, and clean orreplace the transferbelt.

3. Scratched or damagedtransfer belt

3. Replace the transferbelt.

2

ID sensoradjustmenterror

Vsg cannot be

adjusted within 4.0 ± 0.5V.

4. Defective ID sensor 4. Replace the IDsensor.

3

Vmin error Vmin is not withinthe specified range.

Vmin is calculated during the self-check. Even whenthe calculated Vmin value is out of the specified range,an optimum value is automatically used instead.Therefore, this error code does not usually occur.

If no problem is observed with image density and/ordevelopment gamma, nothing needs to be done.

If an image problem such as low image density isobserved, check the following points:

Transfer belt / Belt guide plate / ID sensor

4

Sampling

data error

Not enough data can

be sampled.

5

Gammaerror

Gamma is out ofrange.

0.3 > Gamma, or6.0 < Gamma

6

Vk error Vk is out of range.

-150 > Vk or 150 <Vk

1. ID sensor pattern

density is too high orlow.

2. Residual image ontransfer belt

3. Toner dropped fromdevelopment unit

4. Scratched or damagedtransfer belt

1. Check the image

development processand correct tonerdensity if necessary.

2. Check the transfer beltcleaning unit.

3. Clean the developmentunit and correct tonerdensity.

4. Replace the transferbelt.

1. Development unit notproperly installed.

1. Check.

2. Toner density is too lowor high.

2. Check and/or correcttoner density.

7

Vt error Vt is out of range.

0.5 > Vt or 4.8 < Vt

3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace developmentunit.

8

Samplingdata errorduring LDpowercorrection

Not enough data canbe sampled duringthe LD powercorrection (if "LDPower" is set in SP3-125-002).

See the possible causes and action for error codes 4,5, and 6.

9Forcedtermination

Process control self-check was forciblyterminated.

A cover was opened or themain switch was turned offduring the self-check.

Do the process controlself-check again.

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 4-4 SM

4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT

SP5-993-007 (Line Position Adjustment Result)

No. Result Description Note

01 Successfullycompleted

Data sampling was correctly done and line positionadjustment was successfully completed.

02

Out of adjustmentrange

(over ±2 mm)

The calculated result for line position correction is

greater than ±1.4 mm.

03 Calculation Error Distance between the lines is greater than ±1.4 mm.

04 Sampling Error Data sampling cannot be done properly.

05Descending slopeerror (See Note 1)

06 Ascending slopeerror

The ascending or descending slope of the ID sensorsignal wave is out of specification.

(See Note 1)

07

Pattern lines

mismatch(less than 64 lines)

The detected number of pattern lines is less than 64.

(See Note 1)

08Sampling time-out Data sampling cannot be done within the allocated

time.

09Sampling starterror

The start mark cannot be detected within theallocated time.

10Pattern lengthmismatch

The pattern length is shorter or longer than specified.

(See Note 1)

11Pattern linesmismatch(over 64 lines)

The detected number of pattern lines is over 64.

12

Magnification

mismatch

The calculated magnification value does not match

any data in the laser power frequency adjustmentdata table.

13Toner condition The machine is in the toner near-end or toner end

condition.

17Not executed The machine is not ready to do the line position

adjustment manually from the user menu.

18Potential controlerror

Line position adjustment cannot be done due tofailed potential control.

19Cyan line error The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the

adjustment range (cyan only).

29Magenta line error The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the

adjustment range (magenta only).

39 Cyan & Magentaline error

The necessary mirror angle correction is outside theadjustment range (cyan and magenta).

49Yellow line error The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the

adjustment range (yellow only).

59Cyan & yellow lineerror

The necessary mirror angle correction is outside theadjustment range (cyan and yellow).

69Magenta & yellowline error

The necessary mirror angle correction is outside theadjustment range (magenta and yellow).

79Cyan, magenta, &yellow line error

The necessary mirror angle correction is outside theadjustment range (cyan, magenta, and yellow).

Note 1: Concerning the error codes (05, 06, 07 or 10) which stop sampling datawhen either the front, center, or rear ID sensor detect an error, the machinemay display the error code for both ID sensors in some cases.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-5 B147/B149/B190

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

Possible causes of errors in the line position adjustment

Possible CausePossible

Error CodeAction

The pattern does not reach the proper density.

1. Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, orforeign material)

1. Clean the ID sensors.

2. Incorrect toner densityLow: ID sensor cannot detect thepattern lines.High: Lines may be partially blankdue to improper toner densityand/or paper transfer current.

2. Correct the toner density.

1

3. Incorrect transfer current

04, 05, 06, 07,08, 09, 10

3. Correct the transfer current.

The ID sensors are affected by electrical noise or dirt/damage on the transfer belt.

1. Scratched or damaged OPC drum 1. Replace PCU

2. Scratched or damaged transfer belt 2. Replace transfer belt

3. Dirty transfer belt 3. Clean or replace transfer belt4. High voltage leak in transfer unit 4. Fix the high voltage leak

5. Residual image on transfer belt 5. Check transfer belt cleaning andclean the belt

6. Toner dropped from developmentunit

6. Clean the development unit andadjust the toner density

2

7. Carrier dropped from developmentunit

02, 03, 04, 05,06, 10, 11, 12

7. Clean the development unit andadjust the toner density

The transfer belt is covered with toner.3

Development does not work properly. All error codes Check all units and high voltagecable connectors.

None of the patterns are developed.4

Development does not work properly. 09, 04 Check all units and high voltagecable connectors.

Some of the patterns are not developed;5

Development does not work properly. 07, 08 Check all units and high voltagecable connectors.

The machine is not in the condition to execute the line position adjustment;

The machine is in the toner near endor end condition.

13 Replenish toner.

The machine is not ready to do theline position adjustment manually fromthe user menu.

17 Wait until machine becomes theready condition from the energysaver or auto off mode.

6

Line position adjustment cannot be

done due to failed potential control.

18 Fix the problem causing the potential

control error.The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (1)7

No error code is displayed. However,the machine keeps displaying“execution” on the screen.In addition, the green LED on theBICU stays on or off under thefollowing condition.

1. The MUSIC CPU resets due toelectrical noise generated by a highvoltage leak on a damaged OPCdrum.

-

1. Fix the bias leak and/or replacePCU

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 4-6 SM

Possible CausePossible

Error CodeAction

The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (2)8

No error code is displayed. However,the machine keeps displaying

“execution” on the screen.The green LED on the BICU keepsblinking faintly (this is normal) evenunder one of the following conditions.

1. Poor connection between the tonercartridge detection board and thememory chip on the toner cartridge

2. The memory chip on the tonercartridge fails.

-

1. Check the connection betweenthe detection board and memorychip.

2. Replace the toner cartridge.

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER TEST MODE

SM 4-7 B147/B149/B190

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE

4.2.1 VPU TEST MODE

To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test patternwith SP4-907. After you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key,the VPU test pattern is printed out.

SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R

SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G

SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B

• If the copy is abnormal and the VPU test pattern is normal, the CCD on the SBUboard may be defective.

• If the copy is normal and the VPU test pattern is abnormal, the harness may notconnected properly between SBU and IPU, or the IPU or SBU board may bedefective.

4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE

You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2.

If no error is detected, the test ends, and the completion code appears in theoperation panel display. If an error is detected, the test is interrupted and an error

code is displayed. The table below lists the completion and error codes.

SP4-904-1 Register Write/Read Check Result

Code Defective ASIC

Normal end 00 —

11

12

ASIC 1

13 ASIC 2

14 ASIC 3

Abnormal end

15 Ri 10

SP4-904-2 Image Path Check Result

Code Error detected in the image data path

Normal end 00 —

21 ASIC 1 → ASIC 2

22 ASIC 1 → ASIC 3 → ASIC 1 → ASIC 2

23 ASIC 2 → ASIC 1 → ASIC 3 → ASIC 1 → ASIC 2

24 ASIC 3 → Ri 10

Abnormal end

25 Scanner ASIC → ASIC 1

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER TEST MODE

B147/B149/B190 4-8 SM

Errors may be caused by the following problems:

1) Short circuit on the signal lines

• When the IPU board is installed, a pin or two on the ASIC is damaged.

• Some conductive matter or object is trapped among the pins.

• Condensation2) Destruction of circuit elements

• Overcurrent or a defective element has broken the circuit.3) Abnormal power supply

• The required voltage is not supplied to the devices.4) Overheat/overcooling

• The board (the scanner unit) is in an inappropriate environment.5) Static electricity

• Static electricity of a high voltage occurred during the test.6) Others

• Error code 25 may be detected if the scanner and IPU are incorrectlyconnected.

When you have conducted a check, turn the main switch off and on beforeconducting another check. When you have conducted all necessary checks, turnthe main switch off and on.

8/12/2019 2238c


SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SM 4-9 B147/B149/B190

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.3.1 SUMMARY

Section 4.4 classifies the SC codes into the controller errors and other errors. Thelatter (the errors other than the controller errors) are classified into four types bytheir reset procedures. The table lists the classification of the SC codes.

Key Definition Reset Procedure

Controllererrors

CTLThe error has occurred in thecontroller.

See "Troubleshooting Procedure" inthe table.

AThe error involves the fusing unit.The machine operation is disabled.The user cannot reset the error.

Turn the main switch off and on.Reset the SC (set SP5-810 to 1).Turn the main switch off and on.

B

The error involves one or somespecific units. The machineoperates as usual, excluding the

related units.

Turn the operation switch off andon.

CThe error is logged. The SC-codehistory is updated. The machineoperates as usual.

The SC will not be displayed. Onlythe SC history is updated.

Othererrors

D

The machine operation is disabled.You can reset the machine byturning the operation switch or mainswitch off and on. If the errorrecurs, the same SC code isdisplayed.

Turn the operation switch or mainpower switch off and on.

After you turn the main switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the

main switch on ( SC 672). All SCs are logged. Printing logging data (SP5-990-004) in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counterswhen the SC code is detected.

NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect, thenreconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.

2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical loadbefore replacing motors or sensors.

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 4-10 SM

SC Code Classification

The table lists the classification of the SC codes:

Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section

100 - Scanner1XX Scanning 190 - Unique for a specific model

200 - Polygon motor

220 - Synchronization control

230 - FGATE signal related

240 - LD control

260 - Magnification

2XX Laser exposure

280 - Unique for a specific model

300 - Charge

330 - Drum potential

350 - Development3XX Image development 1


400 - Image transfer

420 - Paper separation430 - Cleaning

440 - Around drum

460 - Unit

4XX Image development 2

480 - Others

500 - Paper feed

515 - Duplex5XX Paper feed / Fusing

520 - Paper transport

530 - Fan motor

540 - Fusing

560 - Others5XX Paper feed / Fusing


600 - Electrical counters620 - Mechanical counters

630 - Account control

640 - CSS

650 - Network

670 - Internal data processing

6XX Communication


700 - Original handling

720 - Two-tray finisher7XX Peripherals

740 - Booklet finisher

800 - Error after ready condition

820 - Diagnostics error

860 - Hard disk8XX Controller


900 - Counter

920 - Memory9XX Others

990 - Others

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-11

4.4 SC TABLE

SC No. Item Definition Possible CauseRelated

SCsTrouble

SC 101 Exposure lamp

error

• The standard white level is

not properly detected whenscanning the shading plate.(The shading data peakdoes not reach the specifiedthreshold.)

• Exposure lamp

defective• Lamp stabilizer

defective

• Exposure lampconnector defective

• Standard white platedirty

• Scanner mirror orscanner lens out ofposition or dirty

• SBU defective

1. Turn the ma

2. Turn the po3. Check and

mirror(s) an4. Check and 5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the

scanner len8. Replace the

SC 120 Scanner homeposition error 1

• The scanner home position

sensor does not detect theon condition duringscanning.

• Scanner I/O board or

SBU defective• Scanner motordefective

• Harness betweenscanner I/O boardand scanner motordisconnected

• Scanner HP sensordefective

• Harness betweenSBU and HP sensordisconnected

• Scanner wire, timing

belt, pulley, orcarriage defective

SC 121and 122

1. Turn the ma2. Check the c

the scannermotor.

3. Check the cthe SBU an

4. Replace theboard.

5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the

pulley, or ca

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-12


SCsTrouble


• The scanner home positionsensor does not detect theoff condition during

scanning.

• Scanner I/O board orSBU defective

• Scanner motor

defective• Harness between

scanner I/O boardand scanner motordisconnected


• Harness betweenSBU and HP sensordisconnected

• Scanner wire, timingbelt, pulley, orcarriage defective

SC 120and 122


the scanner

motor.3. Check the cthe SBU an



pulley, or ca


• The scanner home positionsensor does not detect thehome position duringinitialization.

• Scanner I/O board orSBU defective

• Scanner motordefective

• Harness betweenscanner I/O boardand scanner motordisconnected


• Harness betweenSBU and HP sensor

disconnected• Scanner wire, timingbelt, pulley, orcarriage defective

SC 120and 121


the scannermotor.

3. Check the cthe SBU an



pulley, or ca

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-13


SCsTrouble

SC 142 White leveldetection error

• The white level cannot beadjusted within the targetduring auto gain control.

• Dirty exposure glassor optics section

• SBU board defective

• IPU board defective• Exposure lamp

defective

• Lamp stabilizerdefective

1. Turn on the2. Clean the e

mirrors, an

3. Check if theduring init4. Check the h

between S5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the

SC 144 SBUcommunicationerror

• The SBU hardware isinconsistent with thesoftware.

• Defective SBUhardware

• Incorrect software

1. Turn the ma2. Replace the3. Update the

SC 161 IDU error • After the command iswritten into the DFID self-diagnosis startup register,

the correct value is notstored in the register in thespecified duration.NOTE: This error isdetected when the mainswitch is turned on.

• After the negate interruptionof FGATE occurs, IDU is notrecognized in the specifiedduration.NOTE: This error isdetected during scanningoperations.

• IPU board defective(defective connectionbetween ASIC and

DFID, or DefectiveLSYNC)

1. Turn the ma2. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-14


SCsTrouble

SC 195 Serial NumberMismatch

• Serial number stored in thememory does not consist ofthe correct code.

• NVRAM defective

• BCU replaced withoutoriginal NVRAM

• Incorrect DIP-switchsetting

Open the fronmain switch. Cwith SP5-811-

If the stored secontact your pdetails of how For DIP-switch5.10.

SC 201 Polygon motorerror

• The polygon mirror motordoes not reach the targetedoperating speed within 10seconds after turning on.

• The lock signal does notbecome high within 10seconds after turning off thepolygon motor.

• The lock signal does notbecome low within 0.2second after the polygonmotor reaches the targetedoperating speed.

• Polygon mirror motorerror

• Abnormal GAVDbehavior

• Cable disconnection

1. Turn the ma2. Check the c3. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-15


SCsTrouble

SC 220 Synch.detection signalerror 1

220-001: Y220-002: M220-003: C220-004: K0220-005: K1

The front (for K&Y) or rear (forC&M) laser synchronizingdetector board, which is used

to determine the start timing oflaser writing, does not send asignal while the polygon motoris operating normally and theLD is on.

• Disconnection of thecable between front(K&Y) or rear (C&M)

synchronizingdetector board andthe LD unit

• Incorrect installationof front (K&Y) or rear(C&M) synchronizingdetector board (thebeam does not targetthe photo detector.)

• Defective LD unit

• Defective BCU

• Defective +5VLDcircuit


front (for K&

synchroniziLD unit.3. Check or re

or rear (for detector bo

4. Replace the(for C&M) sboard.


8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-16


SCsTrouble

SC 221 Synch.detection signalerror 2

221-001: Y221-002: M221-003: C221-004: K

Main scan length detection isnot properly completed tenconsecutive times.

The front (for C&M) or rear (forK&Y) laser synchronizingdetector boards are used forthe main scan lengthdetection, which automaticallycorrects the main-scanmagnification.

• Damaged ordisconnected cablebetween front (C&M)

or rear (K&Y) lasersynchronizingdetector board andthe LD unit

• Incorrect installationof front (C&M) or rear(K&Y) synchronizingdetector board (thebeam does not targetthe photo detector.)

• Defective front (C&M)or rear (K&Y)synchronizing

detector board• Defective LD unit

After doing an jobs or more tis displayed:

1. Turn the ma2. Check or reconnecting K&Y) synchand the LD

3. Check or reor rear (for detector bo

4. Replace the(for K&Y) syboard.

5. Replace the6. Replace the

If a synch. detreplaced, do thtemporary me

• Disable ma(SP 2-919-0

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-17


SCsTrouble

SC 230 FGATE error230-001: Y230-002: M

230-003: C230-004: K

The BCU generates theFGATE signal based on theregistration sensor ON timing.

Then, it sends the signal to theLD units. The LD units send afeedback signal to the BCU.When the LD units startemitting laser beams, thefeedback signal changes fromHigh to Low.

The SC code is generatedwhen the BCU receives nofeedback signal (stays High)from the LD unit 1 second afterpaper reaches the position

where the laser should startwriting.

• Poor connectionbetween BCU and LDunits

• Defective BCU• Defective LD unit


units and th


SC 231 FGATE timeout231-001: Y231-002: M231-003: C231-004: K

When LD units emit laserbeams to print a job, thefeedback signal stays Low andbecomes High after laserexposure for a page iscompleted. The SC code isdetected in the followingcases:

• When the feedback signalstays Low 7 seconds aftercompleting the laserexposure, or

• When the feedback signalstays Low until the laserexposure timing for the nextpage in multi-page printmode.

• Poor connectionbetween BCU and LDunits

• Defective BCU

• Defective LD unit


units and th3. Replace the4. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-18


SCsTrouble

SC 240 LD over240-001: Y240-002: M

240-003: C240-004: K

The power supply for the LDunit exceeds 67 mA.

• LD worn out(current/light outputcharacteristics have

changed.)• LD broken (shortcircuit)


SC 260 LD HP sensornot switched on(for K only)

During homing, it takes morethan five seconds to switch theHP sensor on (the sensoractuator does not cover thesensor).

• Defective motor

• Defective sensor

• Mechanical problemwhen switching theactuator

• Brown fuse (FU81) onthe Power supply unit

1. Turn the ma2. Check the s

the LD posi3. Replace the4. Replace the

sensor.5. Check and/

SC 261 LD HP sensornot switched off(for K only)

After the laser beam pitch waschanged, it takes more thanfive seconds for the HP sensor

to switch off.

• Defective motor


• Mechanical problemwhen switching theactuator

• Brown fuse (FU81) onthe Power supply unit


the LD posi



8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-19


SCsTrouble

SC 285 Line positionadjustment(MUSIC) error

Line position adjustment failsthree consecutive times.

• Pattern samplingerror due toinsufficient image

density of patternsused for theadjustment

• Inconsistency in thesampling line positionadjustment patterndue to dust on thepattern, damage tothe OPC drum,damage or tonerdropped on thetransfer belt, or a dirtyor defective ID sensor

1. Turn the ma2. Check and

causes low

3. Clean or reand/or the I4. Replace the

developmendrop on the

SC 370 TD sensor [K]: Adjustmenterror

SC 371 TD sensor [Y]: Adjustmenterror

SC 372 TD sensor [C]: Adjustmenterror

SC 373 TD sensor [M] : Adjustmenterror

During the developerinitialization, the output valueof the TD sensor is without the

adjustment range (3.0 ± 0.1V).

• Poor connection (TDsensor outputs is lessthan 0.5V.)

• Defective TD sensor

1. Turn the ma2. Reset the re

unit.3. Replace the

developmen

SC 374 Vt error [K]SC 375 Vt error [Y]

SC 376 Vt error [C]

SC 377 Vt error [M]

During the imagedevelopment, Vt value is lessthan 0.5V.

• Poor connection (TDsensor outputs is lessthan 0.5V.)

• Defective TD sensor

1. Turn the ma2. Reset the reunit.

3. Replace thedevelopmen

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-21


SCsTrouble

SC 390 DevelopmentBias outputerror

The high voltage supply board(C/B) monitors the circuit anddetects abnormal conditions

such as a voltage leak or nooutput condition. If thishappens, the high voltagesupply board sends an errorsignal (High to Low at CN204- A18) to the BCU.

The BCU monitors this signalevery 2 ms and generates thisSC code when the errorcondition occurs 250consecutive times.

• Loose connection

• Defective power packC/B output

• Damaged cable• Defective

development unit

• Defective BCU

1. Turn the ma2. Check if the

properly co

3. Disconnect cables fromhigh voltageMeasure thmulti-meter

• Replaceboard if

4. If the result the high voldevelopmen

• Replacecable if i

• Replace

damage5. Check the P

the high volthe BCU. Rharness betvoltage sup0.

SC391-01

Charge AC:output error391-01: K391-02: Y391-03: M391-04: C

The high voltage supply boardsends the feedback signal(CN228-2 to 5; MCYK). TheBCU monitors these feedbacksignals every 8 ms. If theaverage of the sampled data is

not within the control target 20consecutive times, this SCcode is generated.

• Power packdisconnected

• Charge receptacle orterminal

• Defective PCU biasinput terminal

• Incorrect power packB/C output

• Damaged cable

• Defective BCU

• PCU not found

1. Turn the ma2. Check the c3. Check that

installed.4. Check the P

(the spring/

replace the5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-22


SCsTrouble

SC393-001

TD sensor errorduring warmingup

393-001: K393-002: Y393-003: C393-004: M

The development-unit drivestarts. TD sensor signal is 0.78V or less.

• Loose cableconnection

• Positioning plate out

of place• Defective TD sensor

• Development unit notfound

1. Turn the ma2. Check that

correctly ins

3. Remove thecheck the c4. Check the p5. Replace the

SC440-001

Drum motorerror440-001: Black440-002: Color

No drum gear position sensorsignal is detected within 0.7second (185 mm/s), 1.0second (125 mm/s), or 2.0seconds (62.5 mm/s).

• Defective PCU

• Defective drum motor

• Defective drum gearposition sensor

1. Turn the ma2. Check and/3. Check and/

SC460-001

Thermistor 1error (opencircuit)

When the temperaturedetected by thermistor 1,which is at the left (fusing unit)side of the laser optics unit, is

less than -30°C for 10 secondsconsecutively, the BCUdetermines that the circuit isopened and displays this SCcode.

• Thermistor 1defective

• Cable connectionerror

• BCU defect

1. Turn the ma2. Check the c3. Replace the4. Replace the

SC460-002

Thermistor 1error (shortcircuit)

When the temperaturedetected by the thermistor 1,which is at the left (fusing unit)side of the laser optics unit, ishigher than 70°C for 10seconds consecutively, theBCU determines that thecircuit is shorted and displaysthis SC code



• BCU defect


8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-23


SCsTrouble

SC461-001

Thermistor 2error (opencircuit)

When the temperaturedetected by the thermistor 2,which is at the right (paper

feed section) side of the laseroptics unit, is less than -30°Cfor 10 seconds consecutively,the BCU determines that thecircuit is opened and displaysthis SC code.


• Cable connection

error• BCU defect


4. Replace the

SC461-002

Thermistor 2error (shortcircuit)

When the temperaturedetected by the thermistor 2,which is at the right (paperfeed section) side of the laseroptics unit, is higher than 70°Cfor 10 seconds consecutively,the BCU determines that the

circuit is shorted and displaysthis SC code



• BCU defect


SC 471 Transfer beltH.P. error

The transfer belt HP sensorsignal does not change fromLow to High (home position) orvice versa 1 second after thetransfer belt contact motorturns on.

• Transfer belt unit notset properly

• Defective transfer beltH.P. sensor and/ortransfer belt sensor

• Defective transfer beltcontact motor

• Transfer belt unitproblem

1. Turn the ma2. Reset the tr3. Clean or re

sensor.4. Replace the

motor.5. Check the c

mechanism

SC 481 Waste tonervibrator error

The waste toner vibrator doesnot operate.

• Loose connector

• Defective motor


8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-24


SCsTrouble

SC 490 Transfer bias /paper attractionroller bias leak

error

The high voltage supply board- Transfer monitors the circuitand detects current leaks. If

this happens, the high voltagesupply board sends a SCsignal (High to Low at CN213-8) to the BCU.

The BCU monitors this signalevery 2 ms and generates thisSC code when the errorcondition occurs 250consecutive times.

• Defective highvoltage supply board- Transfer

• Damaged transferbelt

• Transfer unit • Damaged high

voltage supply cables

• Damaged cablesbetween the BCU andhigh voltage supplyboard

• Defective BCU

1. Turn the ma2. Check the t

the belt and

damage is f3. Replace theboard - Tra

4. Check and/supply cabl

5. Check and/between thesupply boar

6. Replace the

SC 501 Paper Tray 1error

SC 502 Paper Tray 2error

When the tray lift motor isturned on, if the upper limit is

not detected within 10seconds, the machine asks theuser to reset the tray. If thiscondition occurs threeconsecutive times, the SC isgenerated.

• Defective paper liftsensor

• Defective tray liftmotor

• Defective bottomplate lift mechanism


moves up a3. Check and/


motor.

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-25


SCsTrouble

SC503-01

Tray 3 error

(Paper FeedUnit or LCT)

For the paper feed unit:

When the tray lift motor isturned on, if the upper limit is

not detected within 18seconds, the machine asks theuser to reset the tray. If thiscondition occurs threeconsecutive times, the SC isgenerated.

For the LCT:

This SC is generated underthe following conditions:

• If the upper or lower limit isnot detected within 15seconds when the tray lift

motor is turned on to lift upor lower the tray

• If the paper stack is nottransported within a specificnumber of pulses after thetray motor and stacktransport clutch turn on totransport the paper stack

• If the end fence homeposition sensor stays ON fora specific number of pulsesafter the tray motor andstack transport clutch turnon to transport the paperstack.


• Defective tray liftmotor or connector

disconnection• Defective lift sensoror connectordisconnection

For the LCT:

• Defective stacktransport clutch orconnectordisconnection

• Defective tray motoror connectordisconnection

• Defective end fencehome position sensoror connectordisconnection

• Defective upper limitsensor or connectordisconnection

• Defective tray liftmotor or connectordisconnection

1. Turn the ma2. Check the c3. Check and/

component

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-26


SCsTrouble

SC503-02

Tray 3 error

(Paper FeedUnit or LCT)

• If the following conditionoccurs 3 consecutive times,this SC is generated.


When the main switch isturned or when the tray is setand if the upper limit is alreadydetected, the lift motor turns onto lower the bottom plate untilthe lift sensor goes off.

If the motor turns on for 7seconds or more, the machineasks the user to reset the tray.

For the LCT:

When the main switch isturned on or when the LCT isset, if the end fence is not inthe home position (homeposition sensor ON), the traylift motor stops.


• Defective tray liftmotor or connector

disconnection• Defective lift sensoror connectordisconnection

For the LCT:

• Defective stacktransport clutch orconnectordisconnection

• Defective tray motoror connectordisconnection

• Defective end fencehome position sensoror connectordisconnection


component

SC504-01

Tray 4 error (3Tray PaperFeed Unit)

When the tray lift motor isturned on, if the upper limit isnot detected within 18seconds, the machine asks theuser to reset the tray. If thiscondition occurs three

consecutive times, the SC isgenerated.


• Defective lift sensoror connectordisconnection


component

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-27


SCsTrouble

SC504-02

Tray 4 error (3Tray PaperFeed Unit)

When the main switch isturned or when the tray is setand if the upper limit is already

detected, the lift motor turns onto lower the bottom plate untilthe lift sensor goes off.

If the motor turns on for 7seconds or more, the machineasks the user to reset the tray.If this condition occurs 3consecutive times, this SC isgenerated.


• Defective lift sensoror connectordisconnection


component

SC 530 Fusing fanmotor error

The BCU does not receive thelock signal (CN210-B5) 5seconds after turning on thefusing fan.

• Defective fusing fanmotor or connectordisconnection

• Defective BCU


the fusing fa3. Replace the

SC 541 Heating rollerthermistor error

The temperature measured bythe heating roller thermistordoes not reach 7 °C for tenseconds.

• Loose connection ofthe heating rollerthermistor

• Defective heatingroller thermistor

• Defective BCU

1. Check if theis firmly con


SC 542 Heating rollerwarm-up error

After the main switch is turnedon or the cover is closed, theheating roller temperaturedoes not reach the readytemperature within 60 secondsduring fusing unit warm-up.

• Heating roller fusinglamp broken


• Defective BCU



SC 543 Heating rollerfusing lampoverheat

The detected fusingtemperature stays at 210°C ormore for five seconds.

• Defective PSU• Defective BCU 1. Replace the2. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-28


SCsTrouble

SC 544 Heating rollerfusing lamphigh

temperatureerror

During stand-by mode or aprint job, the detected heatingroller temperature stays at

210 °C or more for 0.2 second.


• Defective PSU

• Defective BCU


SC 545 Heating rollerfusing lampconsecutive fullpower

When the fusing unit is notrunning in the Ready condition,the heating roller fusing lampkeeps on with full power for 30consecutive seconds.

• Heating rollerthermistor out ofposition

1. Replace the

SC 546 Heating rollerfusing lamptemperaturefluctuation

The heating roller temperature

changes by ±20°C or more inone second. This occurs threetimes in one minute or twoconsecutive times.

• Loose connection ofthe thermistor

• Loose connectionbetween the fusingunit and main frame

1. Check if theand connec

2. Check if theconnector is

3. Replace the

SC 551 Pressure roller

thermistor error

The measured pressure roller

temperature does not reach7°C for 30 seconds.

• Loose connection of

pressure rollerthermistor

• Defective pressureroller thermistor

• Defective BCU

1. Check that

thermistor i2. Replace the3. Replace the

SC 552 Pressure rollerwarm-up error

After the main switch is turnedon or the door is closed, thepressure roller temperaturedoes not reach the readytemperature within 180seconds during fusing unitwarm-up.

• Pressure roller fusinglamp broken

• Defective pressureroller thermistor

• Defective BCU



SC 553 Pressure rollerfusing lampoverheat

The detected pressure rollertemperature stays at 210°C ormore for five seconds.

• Defective PSU• Defective BCU


8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-29


SCsTrouble

SC 555 Pressure rollerfusing lampconsecutive full

power

When the fusing unit is notrunning in the Ready condition,the pressure roller fusing lamp

keeps ON with full power for100 consecutive seconds.

• Pressure rollerthermistor out ofposition

1. Replace the

SC 556 Pressure rollerfusing lamptemperaturefluctuation

The pressure rollertemperature changes by

±20°C or more in one second.This occurs three times in oneminute or two consecutivetimes.

• Loose connection ofthe pressure rollerthermistor

• Loose connectionbetween the fusingunit and main frame

1. Check if theand connec

2. Check if theconnector is

3. Replace the

SC 560 Zero cross error When the main switch isturned on, the machine checkshow many zero-cross signalsare generated during 500 ms.If the number of zero-cross

signal generated is either morethan 66 or less than 45 andwhen this condition is detected10 consecutive times, thiscode is displayed.

• Electrical noise in thesupply from thepower cord

1. Replace the

SC 620 ARDFcommunicationerror

• After the ARDF is detected,the break signal occurs orcommunication timeoutoccurs.

• Incorrect installationof ARDF

• ARDF defective

• IPU board defective

• External noise


ARDF.3. Shut out the4. Replace the5. Replace the

SC 621 Two-trayfinisher/bookletfinishercommunicationerror

SC 622 Bankcommunicationerror

While the BCU communicateswith an optional unit, an SCcode is displayed if one offollowing conditions occurs.

1. The BCU receives a signalwhich is generated by theperipherals only just afterthe main switch is turned

• Cable problems

• BCU problems

• PSU problems in themachine

• Main board problemsin the peripherals


properly co3. Replace the

supplied to 4. Replace the

peripherals

Rev. 06/2004

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-30


SCsTrouble

SC 623 Duplex unitcommunicationerror

on.

2. When the BCU does notreceive an OK signal from a

peripheral 100ms aftersending a command to it.The BCU resends thecommand. The BCU doesnot receive an OK signalafter sending the command3 times.

• Cable problems

• BCU problems

• PSU problems in the

machine• Duplex control board

problem


inverter uni

3. Replace thesupplied to 4. Replace the

the inverter

SC 630 CSScommunicationerror

An communication error hasoccurred duringcommunication with the CSS.

• Communication lineerror

Logging only.

SC 632 MF accountingdevice error 1

The controller sends data tothe accounting device, but thedevice does not respond. This

occurs three times.SC 633 MF accounting

device error 2 After communication isestablished, the controllerreceives the brake signal fromthe accounting device.

• Loose connectionbetween thecontroller and the

accounting device



The accounting device sendsthe controller the report thatindicates a backup RAM errorhas occurred.


The accounting device sendsthe controller the report thatindicates the battery voltageerror has occurred.

• Defective controller ofthe MF accountingdevice

• Battery error


accounting 3. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-31


SCsTrouble

SC 640 BCU -Controllercommunication

error (checksum error)

The check sum of the interfacebetween the BCU andcontroller is not the same.

• Defective controller

• Defective BCU

1. Turn the ma2. Replace the3. Replace the

SC 641 BCU –Controllercommunicationerror (noresponse)

The controller does not receiveany response from the BCUthree consecutive times whensending a signal every 100ms.



• Defective BCU


BCU and co3. Replace the4. Replace the

SC 670 No responsefrom BCU atpower on

When the main power isturned on or the machinestarts warming up fromenergy-saving mode, thecontroller does not receive acommand signal from the

BCU.



• Defective BCU


BCU and co3. Replace the4. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-32


SCsTrouble

SC 672 Controller-to-operation panelcommunication

error at startup

• After the machine ispowered on, thecommunication between the

controller and the operationpanel is not established, orcommunication withcontroller is interrupted aftera normal startup.

• After startup reset of theoperation panel, theattention code or theattention acknowledge codeis not sent from thecontroller.

• After the controller issues acommand to check the

communication line with thecontroller at 30-secondintervals, the controller failsto respond twice.

• Controller stalled

• Controller boardinstalled incorrectly

• Controller boarddefective

• Operation panelconnector loose ordefective

• The controller is notcompletely shutdownwhen you turn themain switch off.

1. Turn the m2. Check the

board.

3. Check the panel.4. Replace th5. Replace th6. Turn the m

second or mswitch on.

SC 680 BCU/ MUSICcommunicationerror

After the engine CPU sends amessage, the Music CPU doesnot respond within fiveseconds three consecutivetimes.

• Toner cartridgememory chip looseconnection

• Memory chip problem

• Memory chip cablewiring problem


installed co3. Replace the4. Check if the

damaged.5. Replace the

SC 685 SBU-IPUcommunication

error

• During data transfer, achecksum error occurs.

• During any operation exceptinitialization, the SBU sendsa hardware-resetacknowledgement to theIPU.

• Loose connectionbetween SBU and

IPU• SBU board defective


• External noise

1. Turn the ma2. Shut out the

3. Check the cscanner un


8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-34


SCsTrouble

SC 691 Scanner startuperror

• After the machine ispowered on or recoveringfrom the power save mode,

the scanner ready signal isnot verified.

• Board connectorbetween controllerand motherboard

loose• Board connectorbetween motherboardand IPU loose


• Controller boarddefective

• Motherboarddefective


controller a

3. Check the cmotherboar4. Replace the5. Replace the6. Replace the

SC 692 GAPCII2Ccommunicationerror

• The I2C bus device ID is notidentified duringinitialization.

• A device-status error occurs

during I2C buscommunication.

• The I2C bus communicationis not established due to anerror other than a buffershortage.


• Defective BCU

• Defective LDcontroller board


SC 700 ARDF originalpick-upmalfunction

• After the pick-up motor isturned on, the originalstopper HP sensor is notactivated.

• Original stopper HPsensor defective

• Pick-up motordefective (notrotating)

• Timing belt out of

position• ARDF main boarddefective

SC 701 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the3. Turn the ma4. Replace the5. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-35


SCsTrouble

SC 701 ARDF originalpick-up/paperlift mechanism

malfunction

• The original pick-up HPsensor is not activated afterthe pick-up motor is turned

on.

• Original pick-up HPsensor defective

• Pick-up motor

defective• ARDF main board

defective

SC 700 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the3. Replace the

4. Replace the

SC 722 Two-trayfinisher joggermotor error

• The jogger fences of thetwo-tray finisher donotreturn to home positionwithin a specific time.

• The two-tray finisher joggermotor does not leave homeposition within a given time.

• Defective jogger H.P.sensor


• Defective joggermotor


sensor and 3. Replace the4. Replace the

SC 724 Two-trayfinisher staplehammer motor

error

Stapling does not finish within150 ms after the staplehammer motor turns on.

• Staple jam


• Overload caused by

stapling too manypages

• Defective staplehammer motor


connector is

3. Check if the4. Replace the

SC 725 Two-trayfinisher stackfeed-out motorerror

The stack feed-out belt H.P.sensor does not activate withina specified time after the stackfeed-out motor turns on.

• Defective stack feed-out H.P. sensor


• Stack feed-out motoroverload

• Defective stack feed-out motor


feed-out H.properly co

3. Replace thesensor.

4. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-36


SCsTrouble

SC 726 Two-trayfinisher shifttray 1 lift motor

error

• The upper stack height 1sensor is activatedconsecutively (detecting

paper) for 15 seconds afterthe shift tray starts movingup.

• The upper stack heightsensor 1 is deactivatedconsecutively (not detectingpaper) for 15 seconds afterthe shift tray starts movingdown.

• When the upper tray movesfrom lower paper exit to theupper paper exit, the upperstack height 1 sensor is

activated.


• Defective upper stackheight 1 sensor

• Defective shift tray 1lift motor

• Motor overload


and motor a

3. Replace thesensor.4. Replace the

SC 727 Two-trayfinisher staplerrotation motorerror

The stapler cannot return to itshome position within aspecified time after the staplerrotation motor starts rotating.


• Defective staplerrotation motor

• Motor overload


connector is3. Replace the

SC 729 Two-trayfinisher punchmotor error

The punch home position isnot detected within 250 msafter the punch clutch turns on.


• Defective punch H.P.sensor

• Defective punchclutch

• Defective punch holemotor


clutch and/oconnected.


SC 730 Two-trayfinisher staplermotor error

The stapler home position isnot detected within a specifiedtime after the staple motorturns on.

• Loose connection• Defective stapler H.P.sensor

• Defective staplermotor

1. Turn the ma2. Check if theand motor a


8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-37


SCsTrouble

SC 731 Two-trayfinisher exitguide plate

motor error

The exit guide plate opensensor is not activated within aspecified time after the exit

guide plate motor turns on.


• Defective exit guideplate open sensor

• Defective exit guideplate motor


and motor a

3. Replace thesensor.4. Replace the

SC 732 Two-trayfinisher tray 1shift motor error

Tray 1 home position is notdetected within a specifiedtime after the tray 1 shift motorturns on.


• Defective tray shift 1sensor

• Defective tray 1 shiftmotor


and motor a3. Replace the4. Replace the

SC 733 Two-trayfinisher tray 2lift motor error

• The lower stack height 1sensor is activatedconsecutively (detectingpaper) for 15 seconds afterthe shift tray starts moving

up.• The lower stack height

sensor 1 is deactivatedconsecutively (not detectingpaper) for 15 seconds afterthe shift tray starts movingdown.


• Defective lower stackheight 1 sensor

• Defective tray 2 liftmotor

• Motor overload


and motor a3. Replace the

sensor.

4. Replace the

SC 734 Two-trayfinisher tray 2shift motor error

Tray 2 home position is notdetected within a specifiedtime after the tray 2 shift motorturns on.


• Defective tray shift 2sensor

• Defective tray 2 shiftmotor


and motor a3. Replace the4. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-38


SCsTrouble

SC 740 Booklet finishertransport motorerror

• The folder home positionsensor does not turn offwithin 2 seconds after the

folder rollers start to move.• The folder home positionsensor does not turn onwithin 2 seconds after thefolder rollers starttransporting the paper to thebooklet tray.

• Defective transportmotor


the transport motor• Defective folder home

position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe holder homeposition sensor


motor.

3. Check the chome positi4. Replace the

SC 741 Booklet finisherpaddle motorerror

• The paddle home positionsensor does not turn offwithin 2 seconds after thepaddles start to move.

• The paddle home positionsensor does not turn on

within 2 seconds after thepaddles start to operate.

• The stack-tray upper rollerhome position sensor doesnot turn off within 2 secondsafter the paddle motor startsto lower the roller.

• The stack-tray upper-rollerhome-position sensor doesnot turn on with in 2seconds after the paddlemotor starts to lower theroller.

• Defective paddlemotor

• Loose connection ofthe paddle motor

• Defective paddlehome position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe paddle homeposition sensor

• Defective stack-trayupper-roller home-position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe stack-tray upper-roller home-positionsensor


paddle mot3. Check the c

home positi4. Check the c

tray upper-rsensor.

5. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-39


SCsTrouble

SC 742 Booklet finisherstapler slidemotor error

• The stapler home positionsensor does not turn offwithin 1 second after this

same sensor turns on.• The stapler home positionsensor does not turn onwithin 1 second when thestapler is coming back to itshome position.

• Defective stapler slidemotor


the stapler slidemotor

• Defective staplerhome position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe stapler homeposition sensor


slide motor

3. Check the chome positi4. Replace the

sensor.5. Replace the

SC 743 Booklet finisherfront joggerfence motorerror

• The front-jogger-fencehome-position sensor doesnot turn off within 3 secondsafter the front-jogger-fencemotor starts.

• The front-jogger-fence

home-position sensor doesnot turn on within 3 secondswhen the front-jogger-fencemotor is driving the fence toits home position.

• Incorrect assemblingof the front joggerfence

• Loose connection ofthe front jogger fencemotor

• Defective front- jogger-fence home-position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe front-jogger-fencehome-position sensor


jogger fenc3. Check the c

jogger-fenc4. Replace the

position sen5. Replace the

SC 744 Booklet finisherrear joggerfence motorerror

• The rear-jogger-fencehome-position sensor doesnot turn off within 3 secondsafter the rear-jogger-fencemotor starts.

• The rear-jogger-fence

home-position sensor doesnot turn on within 3 secondswhen the rear-jogger-fencemotor is driving the fence toits home position.

• Incorrect assemblingof the rear joggerfence

• Loose connection ofthe rear jogger fencemotor

• Defective rear-jogger-fence home-positionsensor

• Loose connection ofthe rear-jogger-fencehome-position sensor


jogger fenc3. Check the c

jogger-fenc4. Replace the


8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-40


SCsTrouble

SC 745 Booklet finisherstack-tray exitmotor error

• The stack-tray-belt home-position sensor does notturn off within 394

milliseconds after the stack-tray exit roller starts to drive

the belts. → The stack-trayexit motor retries to drivethe belts, but the stack-tray-belt home-position sensorstill does not turn off withinanother 394 milliseconds.

• The stack-tray-belt home-position sensor does notturn on within 1,084milliseconds after the samehome-position sensor turns

off. → The stack-tray exitmotor retires to drive thebelts, but the stack-tray belthome-position sensor stilldoes not turn on withinanother 1,084 milliseconds.

• Defective stack-trayexit motor


the stack-tray exitmotor

• Defective stack-tray-belt home-positionsensor

• Loose connection ofthe stack-tray-belthome-position sensor


tray exit mo

3. Check the ctray-belt ho4. Replace the


8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-41


SCsTrouble

SC 746 Booklet finisherstapler/foldermotor error

• The stapler/folder motorstarts. But the controllerdoes not receive the signal

from the encoder sensorwithin 0.1 second.

• The stapler/folder motorstarts to drive the staplerunit, and the stapler switchis on. But the controllerdoes not receive the signalfrom the home positionsensor for 0.5 second.

• The stapler starts to staplethe paper. But the controllerdoes not receive any signalfrom the home position

sensor, and the staplerswitch is off.

• The stapler/folder motorstarts to drive the folderrollers. But the homeposition sensor does notturn off within 9.247seconds.

• The home position sensordoes not turn on within9.247 seconds after thissame sensor turns off.

• Malfunction of thestapler/folder motor


the stapler/foldermotor

• Loose connection ofthe encoder sensor

• Defective encodersensor

• Loose connection ofthe stapler switch

• Defective staplerswitch

• Loose connection ofthe stapler homeposition sensor

• Defective staplerhome position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe folder-rollerhome-position sensor

• Defective folder-rollerhome-position sensor


stapler/fold

3. Check the csensor.4. Check the c

switch.5. Check the c

home positi6. Check the c

roller home7. Replace the8. Replace the9. Replace the10. Replace th

sensor.

11. Replace thposition sen

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-42


SCsTrouble

SC 747 Booklet finisherlift motor error

• The upper limit sensordetects the regular traywhile the lift motor is lifting

the regular tray.• The paper height sensordoes not turn off within 10seconds after the lift motorstarts to lower the regulartray.

• The upper limit sensor doesnot turn off within 10seconds after the lift motorstarts to lower the regulartray.

• The paper height sensordoes not turn on within 10

seconds after the lift motorstarts to lift the regular tray.

• The controller does notreceive the signal from thelift motor encoder sensorwithin 50 milliseconds afterthe lift motor starts.

• Defective paperheight sensor


the paper heightsensor

• Defective upper limitsensor

• Loose connection ofthe upper limit sensor

• Defective lift motor

• Loose connection ofthe lift motor

• Incorrect assemblingof the lift motor

• Defective lift motorencoder sensor

• Loose connection ofthe lift motor encodersensor


height sens

3. Check the climit sensor4. Check the c

encoder se5. Check the c6. Replace the7. Replace the8. Replace the9. Replace the

SC 748 Booklet finisherbackup dataerror

The CPU tries to write data inthe EEPROM three times, butfails to write data.

• Defective EEPROM

• EEPROM notinstalled

1. Turn the ma2. Check that 3. Replace the

SC 749 Booklet finisherpunch-unitcommunicationerror

A communication-error alarmis not cleared for 3 seconds.

• The finisher controllercannot communicatewith the punch-unitcontroller.


finisher concontroller.

SC 750 Booklet finisherpunch-unitcontroller error

The checksum in the backupdata is inconsistent.

• Defective EEPROM(on the punch-unitcontroller)

• EEPROM notinstalled

1. Turn the ma2. Check that 3. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-43


SCsTrouble

SC 751 Booklet finisherpunch-unitsensor error 1

The paper edge and sizesensors receive the 2.5-voltlight or weaker light even when

the source emits 4.4-volt light.

• Defective sensors

• Dirty sensors

1. Turn the ma2. Clean the s3. Replace the

SC 752 Booklet finisherpunch-unitregistrationmotor error

• The registration motordrives the slide unit to therear side for 1 second. Butthe home position sensordoes not turn on.

• The registration motordrives the slide unit to thefront side for 1 second. Butthe home position sensordoes not turn off.

• Incorrect assembly ofthe registration motor

• Loose connection ofthe registration motor

• Defective homeposition sensor

• Loose connection ofthe home positionsensor


registration3. Check the c

position sen4. Replace the5. Replace the

SC 753 Booklet finisherpunch-unit

punch motorerror

• The punch motor starts todrive the punch cams. But

the controller does notreceive the encoder-locksignal for 60 milliseconds.

• The punch motor start todrive the punch cams. Butthe home positions sensordoes not turn on for 250milliseconds.

• Malfunction of thepunch motor

• Loose connection ofthe punch motor

• Defective homeposition sensor

• Loose connection ofthe home positionsensor

• Loose connection ofthe encoder sensor

• Defective encodersensor


punch moto3. Check the c

position sen4. Check the c

sensor.5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the

SC 754 Booklet finisher

punch-unitsensor error 2

The A/D inputs of the sensor

are not corrected by varyingthe D/A outputs.


• Dirty sensor

1. Turn the ma

2. Clean the s3. Replace the

SC 818 Watch-dogerror

While the system program isrunning, other processes donot operate at all.


• Software error

1. Turn the ma2. Replace the3. See NOTE

table

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-44


SCsTrouble

SC 819 Fatal error

[696E] Process error System completely down

[766D] Memory error Unexpected system memory

size

• Defective RAM DIMM

• Defective ROM DIMM

• Defective controller• Software error

1. Turn the ma2. Check and/

3. Check and/DIMM.4. Replace the5. See NOTE

table.

[4361] Kernel stoperror

The cache error trap occurs inthe CUP.

• CPU cache error 1. Replace the

Kernel stoperror

Any error in the operationsystem (An error message isoutput.)

• Defective CPU

• Defective memory

• Defective flashmemory

• Incorrect software


SC 820 Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code

[0001]

to

[06FF]

CPU error During the self-diagnostic, thecontroller CPU detects anerror. There are 47 types oferror code (0001 to 4005)depending on the cause of theerror. The CPU detects anerror and displays the specificerror code with the programaddress where the erroroccurs).

• System firmwareproblem


1. Turn the ma2. Reinstall the

firmware.3. Replace the

When the probthe above proinformation disneeds to be fesupport cente

• SC code• Detailed err

• Program ad

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-45


SCsTrouble

[0702]

[0709]

[070A]

CPU/MemoryError


• Defective RAM-DIMM



software.


[0801]

to

[4005]

CPU error Same as [0001]

[0B00] ASIC error The write-&-verify check errorhas occurred in the ASIC.

• Defective ASICdevice

1. Replace the

SC 821

[0D05]

Self-diagnosiserror: ASIC

The CPU checks if the ASICtimer works properly comparedwith the CPU timer. If the ASICtimer does not function in thespecified range, this SC codeis displayed.


• Defective RAM-DIMM



firmware.3. Replace the4. Replace the

SC 822 Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive) [XXXX]: Detailed error c

[3003] Timeout error

[3004] Command error

When the main switch isturned on or starting the self-diagnostic, the HDD staysbusy for the specified time ormore.


• Defective HDD



connected t3. Replace the4. Replace the

SC 823 Self-diagnostic error: NIB [XXXX]: Detailed error code

[6101] MAC addresscheck sum error

The result of the MAC addresscheck sum does not match thecheck sum stored in ROM.

[6104] PHY IC error The PHY IC on the controllercannot be properly recognized.

[6105] PHY IC loop-back error

An error occurred during theloop-back test for the PHY ICon the controller.

• Defective controller 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-46


SCsTrouble

SC 824

[1401]

Self-diagnosiserror: StandardNVRAM

The controller cannotrecognize the standardNVRAM installed or detects

that the NVRAM is defective.


• Defective standardNVRAM



inserted into


SC 826 Self-diagnostic error: RTC [XXXX]: Detailed error code

[1501] Self-diagnosticError: RTC/OptionalNVRAM

• An RTC device isrecognized, and thedifference between the RTCdevice and the CPUexceeds the defined limit.

• No RTC device isrecognized.

• RTC defective

• NVRAM without RTCinstalled

• Backup batterydischarged


NVRAM wit

[15FF] Self-diagnosticError: RTC/Optional

NVRAM

• The RTC device is notdetected.

• NVRAM without RTCinstalled

• Backup battery

discharged


NVRAM wit

SC 827 Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM [XXXX]: Detailed error

[0201] Verificationerror

Error detected during awrite/verify check for thestandard RAM (SDRAMDIMM).


• Defective SDRAMDIMM



[0202] Residentmemory error

The SPD values in all RAMDIMM are incorrect orunreadable.


• Defective SPD ROMon RAM DIMM

• Defective 12C bus

1. Replace the

SC 828 Self-diagnostic error : ROM [XXXX]: Detailed error code

[0101] Check sum

error 1

The boot monitor and OS

program stored in the ROMDIMM is checked. If the checksum of the program isincorrect, this SC code isdisplayed.

• Defective ROM DIMM


1. Turn the ma


8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-47


SCsTrouble

[0104] Check sumerror 2

All areas of the ROM DIMMare checked. If the check sumof all programs stored in the

ROM DIMM is incorrect, thisSC code is displayed.

SC 829 Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM [XXXX]: Detailed error code

[0302] Compositionerror (Slot 0)

The result of checking thecomposition data of the RAMin Slot 0 (CN5) on thecontroller is incorrect.

[0401] Verificationerror (Slot 1)

The data stored in the RAM inSlot 1 does not match the datawhen reading.

[0402] Compositionerror (Slot 1)

The result of checking thecomposition data of the RAMin Slot 1 (CN6) on the

controller is incorrect.

• Not specified RAMDIMM installed



SC 835 Self-diagnosis error: Centronics interface [XXXX]: Detailed error co

[1102] Verificationerror

The controller detects that theloop-back connector is notproperly connected.

[110C] DMAverification error

A DMA data abnormality isdetected even when the loop-back connector is properly set.

[1120] Loop-backconnector error

The loop-back connector is notset when starting the detailedself-diagnostics.


• Defective loop-backconnector

• Defective Centronicsconnector



Centronics connector.

3. Reconnect 4. Replace the

SC 840 EEPROM

access error

An error has occurred during

I/O processing.

Defective EEPROM 1. Replace the

controller.SC 841 EEPROM readerror

The EEPROM stores threedifferent data in mirroredareas.

Defective EEPROM 1. Replace thecontroller.

SC 850 Networkinterface error

The network is unusable. • Defective controller 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-48


SCsTrouble

SC 851 IEEE1394interface error

The 1394 interface isunusable.

• Defective IEEE1394

• Defective controller.


board.

3. Replace theSC 853 Wireless LANcard notdetected

The wireless LAN card is notdetected beforecommunication is established,though the wireless LAN boardis detected.

• Loose connection SC 854 1. Check the c

SC 854 Wireless LANcard notdetected

The wireless LAN card is notdetected after communicationis established, though thewireless LAN board isdetected.

• Loose connection SC 853 1. Check the c

SC 855 Wireless LANcard error

An error is detected in thewireless LAN card.


• Defective wireless

LAN card

1. Check the c2. Replace the

SC 856 Wireless LANcard error

An error is detected in thewireless LAN board.

• Defective wirelessLAN board



SC 857 USB interfaceerror

The USB interface cannot beused due to a driver error.

• Defective USB driver



SC 860 HDD:Initializationerror

The controller detects that thehard disk fails.

• HDD not initialized

• Defective HDD

1. Turn the ma2. Reformat th3. Replace the

SC 861 HDD: Rebooterror

The HDD does not becomeready within 30 seconds afterthe power is supplied to the

HDD.


• Defective cables

• Defective HDD



HDD and co

3. Check and 4. Replace the5. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-49


SCsTrouble

SC 862 Defective sectorerror

The 101st defective sector isdetected in the hard disk.

• Same as SC 863 (SC862 counts thenumber of SC 863

occurrence.)

1. Replace the

SC 863 HDD: Readerror

The data stored in the HDDcannot be read correctly.

• Defective HDD



SC 864 HDD: CRCerror

While reading data from theHDD or storing data in theHDD, data transmission fails.

• Defective HDD 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the

SC 865 HDD: Accesserror

An error is detected whileoperating the HDD.

• Defective HDD 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the

SC 866 SD cardauthenticationerror

A correct license is not foundin the SD card.

• SD-card data hascorrupted.

1. Store corre

SC 867 SD card error The SD card is ejected from

the slot.• The SD card is

ejected from the slot.

1. Install the S

2. Turn the ma

SC 868 SD card accesserror

243-252: Filesystem error

253: Deviceerror

An error report is sent from theSD card reader.

• An error is detected inthe SD card.

1. For a file sycard on you

2. For a devicswitch off a


SC 870 Address bookerror

An error is detected in the datacopied to the address bookover a network.

• Defective softwareprogram

• Defective HDD

• Incorrect path to thesever

1. Turn the ma2. Initialize the

846-050).3. Initialize the

832-006/00

4. Replace theSC 871 FCU flash ROM

error An error is detected in theflash ROM that stores theaddress-book data.

• Defective flash ROM 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-50


SCsTrouble

SC 872 HDD mail dataerror

An error is detected in theHDD at machine initialization.

• Defective HDD

• Power failure duringan access to the HDD


007).

3. Replace theSC 873 HDD mailtransfer error

An error is detected in theHDD at machine initialization.

• Defective HDD

• Power failure duringan access to the HDD


008).3. Replace the

SC 880 File formatconverter error

The file format converter doesnot respond.

• Defective file formatconverter


SC 900 Electric countererror

Abnormal data is stored in thecounters.

• Defective NVRAM



NVRAM an3. Replace the4. Replace the

SC 901 Mechanical

total countererror 1

SC 902 Mechanicaltotal countererror 2

The mechanical counter is not

connected.NOTE: This error is detected

by the North Americamodel only.

• The counter is

manually ejected.• Loose connection

• Defective counter

• Incorrect DIP-switchsetting

1. Make sure t

correctly ins2. Replace the3. Check that

correct ( 5

SC 920 Printerapplication error

An error is detected in theprinter application program.

• Defective software

• Unexpected hardwareresource (e.g.,memory shortage)

1. Turn the ma

SC 921 Printer fonterror

A necessary font is not foundin the SD card.

• A necessary font isnot found in the SDcard.

• The SD card data iscorrupted.

1. Check that data.

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-51


SCsTrouble

SC 925 Net file functionerror

The management area ormanagement file on the HDDis corrupted.

• Defective HDD

• Data inconsistency(e.g., caused by

power failure)

• When SC 861. Follow the t

procedures

• In other case2. Turn the ma3. Initialize the4. Initialize the5. Replace the

SC 990 Softwareperformanceerror

The software makes anunexpected operation.

• Defective software


• Software error


main firmwa3. See NOTE

table.

SC 991 Softwarecontinuity error

The software has attempted toperform an unexpectedoperation. However, unlike SC

990, the object of the error iscontinuity of the software.

• Software programerror

• Internal parameter

incorrect, insufficientworking memory.

This SC is not(logging only).

SC 992 Undefined error An undefined error hasoccurred.

• Defective softwareprogram

SC 995 BCU error The DIP witch on the BCU isincorrectly set.

• The DIP switch on theBCU is incorrectlyset.

1. Set the DIP2. Turn the ma

SC 997 Applicationfunctionselection error

• The application selected bythe operation panel keydoes not start or endsabnormally.

• Software (includingthe softwareconfiguration)defective

• An option required by

the application (RAM,DIMM, board) is notinstalled

SC 998 1. Check the dapplication devices havinstall them

2. Check that correctly co

3. Take necesspecific to tthe logs canoperation p

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-52


SCsTrouble

SC 998 Application starterror

No applications start within 60seconds after the power isturned on.

• Loose connection ofRAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM

• Defective controller• Software problem


DIMM are p

3. Reinstall thefirmware.4. Replace the

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 4-53


SCsTrouble

SC 999 Programdownload error

• The download (program,print data, language data)from the IC card does not

execute normally.

• Board installedincorrectly

• Engine board

defective• IC card defective

• Incorrect IC cardused (machinetype/model, cardversion)

• NVRAM defective

• Loss of power duringdownloadingNOTE 1: This error isnot logged becausethe error occurs in thedownload mode

(different from thenormal operationmode).NOTE 2: If themachine loses powerwhile downloading, orif the download doesnot normally end forsome other reason,this could damage thecontroller board or thetarget PCB of thedownloading and

prevent subsequentdownloading. If thisproblem occurs, thedamaged PCB mustbe replaced.

1. Turn the ma2. If you can d

programs, d

appropriate3. If you cannoprograms, utool for dowboard havinunsuccessf

8/12/2019 2238c


SC TABLE

B147/B149/B190 4-54

NOTE 1: If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the probleerror. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist.

• Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken

• Summary sheet (SP mode ‘1 Service/Printer SP’, SP1-004 [Print Summary])

• SMC - All (SP5-990-002)

• SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)• Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs

• All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logg

• Image file which causes the problem, if possible

8/12/2019 2238c


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

SM 4-55 B147/B149/B190

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY

Work-flowThe following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the considerableimage quality problems on this product.

No problem on patternPossible Symptoms

Start

Verification of

problem reported

from users

Ask customer to

duplicate it.No

Yes

Yes

Make copy in the

enlargement or

reduction mode.

Location of

the image problem

shifted?

Copy

Yes

Make a test pattern

in SP5-997.

Print

No

No

Yes

Troubleshoot using

the service manual

or technical bulletin.

No

Troubleshoot

depending on the

type of problem.

Image Quality?

Copy or Print?

Colour related?

A B

Vertical white dotted lines

Check the transfer bias or paper

condition.Vertical white lines on thick paper

Check the timing when the problem

occurs.

Dirty lines

Check the transfer belt cleaning section.

Poor fusing / Fusing offset

Check the paper types selected in the

printer driver.

Smeared image at trailing edge

Check the fusing unit speed.

Crow marks

Check the humidity condition and adjust

the transfer bias if necessary.

* Font problem

* Image data missing

Especially, problems

related to the above

symptoms and if no

problem is found on the

test pattern, it may be

related to the application

used or driver. Collect a

capture file for further

investigation (select

'Print to File' in the

driver).

Can the

problem beduplicated?

B146T901.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 4-56 SM

(From previous page)

Check the scanner section

(exposure glass, mirrors,

scanner movement, etc.)

Yes

NoYes

No

Faint image (K)

Check the image transfer unit position lever.

Cyan/Magenta jitter

Check if the registration roller speed is suitable for the type of paper used.

Toner blastingCheck which colour is blasting and adjust the toner limit or transfer bias.

Image density change

Check when the problem is reported and follow the necessary steps.

Dirty Background

Check in which condition the problem is reported, and follow the required procedure.

Colour vertical bands/lines/dirty background

Check the OPC drum and/or development unit.

Colour shift

Check the level of the colour shift and follow the troubleshooting guide if required.

Colour lines/bands/dirty background

When the PCU/development unit is close to its life end, the developer or the cleaning blade of the

PCU wears out, causing vertical colour lines, bands, or dirty background. Check the related colour

unit and replace it if necessary.

Considerable Symptom

A B

Problem is related to

the scanner section.

No

No

All colour?

Colour missing

Can the

problem beduplicated?

Possible Symptoms

Colour shift

Check the level of the

colour shift and follow

the troubleshooting

guide if required.

Check Points

Connection of flat cable

between the controller

and laser optic housing

unit.

Mirror position of related

colour located in the laser

optic housing unit. Controller or BCU board

defective

Yes

Yes

Make a test print

from SBU in SP4-

907 in each colour.

Make a test print

from IPU in SP4-417

by selecting related

colour.

Specify the colour

that caused the

image problem.

Check the image

processing area of

the colour specified

in the previous step

Check the connection

between the SBU/IPU or

replace the SBU.

Can the

problem be

duplicated?

Check connection

between the IPU/

Controller, or

replace the IPU.

B146T902.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 4-57

4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY

The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the following image problems.

• Smeared image for 4C thin lines or White lines in solid image areas

• Dirty background

• Fireflies

• Crow marks

• Image density change

• Toner blasting

Subject Symptom Cause

Smeared image for 4Cthin lines or white lines

in solid image areas

4C thin lines becomesmeared in the paper feed

direction or white linesappear in solid image areas.

Spurs are located just before the fusingsection to prevent paper from touching

the fusing unit. When paper touches thespurs and the spurs do not rotate, thespurs scratch the mage.

Clean the edgposition of the

If 4C thin lines

If white lines a

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 4-59


Crow marks When making duplex prints inlow temperature and humidityconditions, crow marks mayappear on black images,

especially in halftone areason the 2

nd side.

A charge is applied to the paper at eachcolor station in order to attract eachtoner onto the paper. Therefore, theinitial toner colors will receive multiple

charging as they pass each station,which increases the attractive forcebetween the toner and paper. Sinceblack is the last toner to be applied, theattractive force between it and the paperis lowest. Black toner moves on thepaper during transport to the fusingsection, due to discharge from the tonerto the surrounding guide plates.

Using SP2-30paper transferwhich the prob

NOTE: White if the trmuch.transfethe resimage

Image density change(1)

When the machine is tunedon in the morning (havingbeen unused for a while), theID of the initial outputs maybe relatively low or high, inwhich case the machineneeds to compensate byraising or lowering the IDduring machine operation.

When the machine is off, theenvironmental conditions can begin toaffect the machine’s developmentcapability. When the main switch istuned on, the machine starts a processcontrol self-check and adjusts thedevelopment parameters to achieve theproper development potential gapwithout adjusting the tonerconcentration. Over the course of theprint operation, the ID will then get closer

and closer to the target level.

If this is often particular abou Adjustment (S

NOTE: It takeself-ch

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-60



Image density is too low orhigh.

If the machine has never been turned offand Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) isdisabled, the machine has neverperformed the initial process control self-

check, causing the image density tobecome low or high.

Change the se

SP3-906-3 No0 (Default)

SP3-906-4 No30 (Default

• If Energy Sanon-use timfunction. ThSaver 1 is O

• With the abautomaticaprints have hours). Basvolume of 5performed f

settings areused duringstatus throumode shoulthe custome

Toner blasting Toner may blast, causingsmeared text charactersand/or lines in 2C or processblack mode (depending onthe PDL setting or type ofpaper used.)

An excessive amount of toner is used fordevelopment.

Change the to

• If toner blasin 2C, decreto 150 - 170

• If toner blasrecognized processed a

setting for PNOTE: If the to

may cabe not

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 4-61

Detailed Explanation

The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the considerable image problems.


Symptoms not related to color

Vertical white dottedlines

If the paper transfer bias isexcessive for the paper typeused in the low humiditycondition, vertical whitedotted lines may appear.

In the low humidity condition, theelectrical resistance of paper tends toincrease. Excessive paper transfer biasmay cause electrical leak, causingvertical white lines.

• Check if thein the pape

• Customize current for

Vertical white lines In high temperature andhumidity conditions, verticalwhite lines may appear inhalftone areas on thick paperafter multiple prints of thesame image.

In this condition, the drum sensitivitytends to drop. Since the image transferefficiency differs between plain and thickpaper, sensitivity drop may causechanges in image transfer efficiency onthick paper, causing vertical white lines.

The drum sendisappears aftthis symptom

Dirty lines/bands orbackground on 2ndside

The cleaning blade of the transfer beltcleaning may be worn away or damagedwhen the transfer belt cleaning unitbecomes close to its life (500KP).

Check and rep

Poor fusing / Fusingoffset

The type of paper selected in the printerdriver does not match the paper typeused for printing, causing the fusingtemperature not to be controlled for thepaper used.

Please instructype in the prin

Smeared image When making prints of anoriginal with a solid image

near the trailing, a smearedimage may appear.

The paper’s trailing edge tends to flip upand come very close to the fusing belt

after it passes the paper transfer unit.The static electricity built up on thefusing belt may cause toner to move,resulting in the smeared image.This is most noticeable with 600x600dpiprinting.

Please instruc

1200x1200dpi

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-62


Crow marks When making duplex prints inlow temperature and humidityconditions, crow marks mayappear on black images,

especially in halftone areason the 2

nd side.

A charge is applied to the paper at eachcolor station in order to attract eachtoner onto the paper. Therefore, theinitial toner colors will receive multiple

charging as they pass each station,which increases the attractive forcebetween the toner and paper. Sinceblack is the last toner to be applied, theattractive force between it and the paperis lowest. Black toner moves on thepaper during transport to the fusingsection, due to discharge from the tonerto the surrounding guide plates.

Using SP2-30paper transferwhich the prob

NOTE: White if the transfer cTherefore, aftenecessary to cor halftone ima

Symptoms related to color

Faint image (black) Only black becomes lighter. The transfer belt position is not in thecorrect position.

Check the trantransfer belt u

Magenta and/or cyan jitter

Magenta jitter may appear at67 mm and/or cyan jitter at165 mm from the trailingedge.

If the registration roller speed is too fastfor the paper types used, the shockwhen the trailing edge has just passedthe registration roller generatesvibration, causing the jitter.

This may appear especially when usingthick paper because of its stiffness.

Adjust the regthe paper type

SP1-004-4: NoSP1-004-5: NoSP1-005-3: Th

If SP1-005-3 csetting it to “-1

1. Set SP1-00

2. Print the sa100% (-0.2

After adjuquality alsmode. Relevel is acpaper if ne

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 4-63


Toner blasting (1) Toner may blast, causingsmeared text charactersand/or lines in 2C or processblack mode (depending on

the PDL setting or type ofpaper used.)

An excessive amount of toner is used fordevelopment.

Change the to

• If toner blasin 2C, decre

to 150 - 170• If toner blasrecognized processed asetting for P

NOTE: If the tomay cause thesmooth.

Toner blasting (2) Black toner may blast on the2nd side of paper under thelow temperature.

Black toner moves on the paper duringtransport to the fusing section, due todischarge from the toner to thesurrounding guide plates.

Increase the pfrom the defaudepending on

SP2-301-3 ([K

SP2-301-4 ([KSP2-301-16 ([SP2-301-17 ([

NOTE: If the tomay cause thesmooth.


When the machine is tunedon in the morning (havingbeen unused for a while), theID of the initial outputs maybe relatively low or high, inwhich case the machine

needs to compensate byraising or lowering the IDduring machine operation.

When the machine is off, theenvironmental conditions can begin toaffect the machine’s developmentcapability. When the main switch istuned on, the machine starts a processcontrol self-check and adjusts the

development parameters to achieve theproper development potential gapwithout adjusting the tonerconcentration. Over the course of theprint operation, the ID will then get closerand closer to the target level.

If this is often particular abou Adjustment (S

NOTE: It takeself-check.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-64



Image density is too low orhigh.

If the machine has never been turned offand Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) isdisabled, the machine has neverperformed the initial process control self-

check, causing the image density tobecome low or high.

Change the se

SP3-906-003 0 (Default)

SP3-906-004 30 (Default

• If Energy Sanon-use timfunction. ThSaver 1 is O

• With the abautomaticaprints have hours). Basvolume of 5performed f

settings areused duringstatus throumode shoulthe custome

Dirty background Dirty background maycontinuously appear on theleft side (relative to paperfeed) under very lowtemperature and humidityconditions.

When the developer has deteriorated orwhen prints are made in a very lowhumidity condition, dirty background mayappear continuously.

Perform forcedor 002).The machine afollowing sequcomplete this

4. Consumeswithout ton

5. Starts tone

6. Starts proc

NOTE: It takemode, to preve

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 4-65


Color Shift Color shift level is out of theadjustment standard.

The adjustment standard on this product

is “maximum 150 µm”.The color shift level may changedepending on a type of paper used.

Check the leveuser and followdescribed in s

Color missing Color(s) is missing on theoutputs.

• The position of 3rd mirror moves dueto the rough transportation of servicepart; and then, becomes out ofposition.

• Flat cable(s) is not properlyconnected to the BCU board.

• When repladue to anythe UP mounit and re

• Reconnect

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-66

Copy Image processing

Symptom Mode Cause

Black image is weakerwhen the ACS is on.

ACS The ACS Mode use K toner and CMY toner tocreate black images. CMY toner makes black

images weaker.

Specify "Black & Wh

> Copier/Docu

Color Image > ACS

Black ballpoint penimages are colored.

FC This symptom is caused by the characteristic ofballpoint pen ink.

Specify "Darker" leve

> Copy Quality

Generation copy makesless colorful images.

FC Generation copy is executed in the text mode.Photo images become less colorful.

Select "Photo" as the

Maps are incorrectlycolored.

FC The Map Mode uses CMYK toner to create blackletters. Sometimes black images are somewhatcolored.

• Specify "Darker" le

> Copy Quality

• Raise the "Sharp" l

> Copy Quality

The ACS does notcorrectly distinguishbetween color and black &white images.

ACS Darker images are sometimes incorrectly takenas black & white images.

Specify "Full Color" i

> Copier/Docu

Color Image > ACS

Color images areenclosed by black lines.Black letters are enclosedby while lines.

FC,Text/Photo

When the following originals are used, colorimages are sometimes incorrectly taken as blackletters, or black letters are incorrectly enclosedby white lines:

• Outputs from a printer (laser or ink-jet)

• Copied images

Raise the "Photo" lev

> Copy Quality

Black letters and blacklines are colored.

FC,Text/Photo

Black letters and lines are colored when thebackground of the original is not clear.

Raise the "Text" leve

> Copy Quality

NOTE: If you raise th

weaker images areMono color images arenot sharp enough.

B&W,Text/Photo,

ACS

This symptom is based on the copiercharacteristics.

Raise the "Soft" leve

> Copy Quality

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 4-67

Symptom Mode Cause

Letters are not clear whenthe background is shaded.

B&W,Text/Photo,

ACS

This symptom is based on the copiercharacteristics.


> Copy Quality

• Specify the full-colo

• Specify the text mo

originals.

Letters are not clear whenthe background is slightlyshaded.

B&W,Text/Photo,

ACS

This symptom is based on the copiercharacteristics. This symptom tends to occurwhen the background is shaded with a rough dotpattern.


> Copy Quality

• Specify the full-colo

• Specify the text mooriginals.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-68

4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT

The following briefly explain the factors causing color shifts and what to do on the machine to cor

• Temperature change causes the optical components in the laser

optics housing unit to contract, causing the main scanmagnification to change. To correct the line position, the machineautomatically does the line position adjustment when the

temperature changes by 5°C since the last position adjustment.If the line position adjustment functions properly, no color shiftoccurs. If the line position adjustment fails (result: SP5-993-007),color lines may shift anywhere on the outputs.

• The process speed at each stage (registration roller, transfer belt,and fusing belt/roller) affects the paper transport speed. If thepaper transport speed changes during image transfer of a color,the color line being transferred shifts with respect to the color line

already transferred to the paper. The registration roller speed(adjusted by color development motor speed) and fusingbelt/roller speed (adjusted by black development motor speed)are adjusted by the manufacturer.Paper speed may slightly change due to the type of paper used orafter replacing the parts related to the drive sections of theregistration section, transport unit, and fusing unit. (After replacingthe fusing unit, the speed adjustment should be done in the UserProgram mode.) Also, the position where color shift occursdepends on which section starts moving at the incorrect speed.

• Paper skew directly affects the color shift between the front andrear sides. There are several factors. One of them is the positionof the side fences.

The bfusingspeed

The transfer motor drivtransfer belt. The motois not adjustable.

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 4-69

As explained on the previous page, there are several types of color shift problem. The following tafactors, action required, and the page to see for details.

Symptom Factors Action Required

1 Color shift on entire image in

main-scan and/or sub-scandirections

• Line position adjustment does not

function properly.• Transfer belt unit has just been

replaced.

• Check the result of the line p

adjustment (SP5-993-007) aproblem if an error was detec

• Check which color lines are sblack line and adjust the SP m

registration and magnifica

2 Color shifts only at theleading edge area(sometimes causing shock jitter, magenta or cyan lines)

Registration roller speed is notappropriate.

Adjust the color development m(SP1-004-4, 5, and SP1-005-00on the process speed.

3 Color shifts only at the trailingedge area Fusing belt/roller speed is notappropriate. Adjust the black development m(SP1-004-001, 002, and 007, o Adjust” in the User Program moon the process speed.

4 Color shifts between the frontand rear sides

Paper skew on transfer belt

• Side fences are not properly set.

• Pressure between the paperattraction roller and transfer belt isnot even at the front and rearsides.

Reposition the side fences.

Reposition the paper attraction

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-70

Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 m

EndA

Start

Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).

SP2-103-055 (M: [K] 64.3 MHz) is ...

Execute the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002).

Less than 250

Less than 2 mm

Print out a pattern with the following settings:

SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"

SP5-997-004 "Full Color"

SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"

Set the factory settings in the followi

SP2-909-001, 002, and 003

SP2-103-055, 056, 057, and 058

Set the factory settings in the followi

SP2-909-001, 002, and 003

SP2-916-008, 009, and 010

SP2-103-056, 057, and 058

250 or higher

How much do the lines shift?

Has the SP ended normally?

2 mm or more

Yes

Print out a pattern with the following settings:

SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"


SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"

Do the lines shift?

Yes

No

No

Are the

transfer belt and ID sensors

clean?

Execute the forced toner-density

adjustment with the following SP:

SP3-126-002

Yes

Replac

transfe

ID sens

No

The flowchart illustrates the procedure to

NOTE: The allowance of color shift is 150µm. Ke

150µm.

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 4-71

Execute the line position adjustment with the

following SP:

SP5-993-002

Main-scan direction

Sub-scan direction

Print out a pattern with the following settings:SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"


SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"

Check the transfer-belt speed with

the following SPs:

SP5-993-031

SP5-993-033

Adju

regi

follo

SP5

SP5

SP5

SP5

SP5

SP5

A

How the lines shift?

Wh

thi

Are the black

lines and color lines parallel?Which part

of the lines shift?

Yes

Adjust the main-scan registration with the

following SPs:

SP5-993-010

SP5-993-011

SP5-993-012

Do the lines shift?

End

Yes

No

No

Adjust the magnification

with the following SPs:

SP5-993-013

SP5-993-014

SP5-993-015

Leading or trailing edge

W

Disable the transfer-belt feedback

feature with the following SP:

SP5-995-020

Leading or trailing edge

Whichedges of the color lines has

shifted?

Trailing edges Adjust the development-

motor speed with the

following SPs:

SP1-004-005

SP1-004-004

SP1-005-003

SP1-007-001

Adjust the development-motor speed

with the following SPs:

SP1-004-002

SP1-004-001

SP1-004-007

Prin

follo

SP5

SP5

SP5

and

Do the lines shift?No

Leading edges

Enable the transfer-belt feedback

feature with the following SP:SP5-995-020

Exe

adju

follo

SP5

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-72

Action RequiredDirection Area Symptom Possible Cause

Output Mode SP ModePro

Normal Paper1200 dpi

SP1-004-004

Normal Paper

600 dpi

SP1-004-005

Leadingedge Color shift,especially 100 mmfrom the leadingedge.

(Refer to pattern 1on page 4-57 for thesymptom.)

Registration rollerspeed is notsuitable for thepaper used.

Thick Paper

1200 dpi

(by-pass feed)

SP1-005-003

Check the magentaIf the registration roline appears above

Above: Speed is too

Below: Speed is too

When adjusting the steps, and check theThen, repeat this unblack is minimized.

NOTE: If the registrmay appear at 67 m

the trailing edge. Thshock when the trailregistration rollers.

Normal Paper

1200 dpi

SP1-004-001

Normal Paper

600 dpi

SP1-004-002

Sub-scan

Trailingedge

Color shift,especially 100 mmfrom the trailingedge.


Fusing rollerspeed is notsuitable for thepaper used.

Thick Paper

1200 dpi

(by-pass feed)

SP1-004-007

Check the magentaIf the fusing roller isappears above or b

Above: Speed is too

Below: Speed is too

When adjusting the steps, and check theThen, repeat this ste

and black is minimiz

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 4-73



Normal Paper

600 dpi

SP5-993-016 (Y)

SP5-993-017 (M)

SP5-993-018 (C)

Sub-scan Entireimage

Color shift on theentire image, and

the amount of shiftfrom leading totrailing edge isalmost the same.

SP mode settingis not suitable for

the paper used.

Normal Paper

1200 dpi

SP5-993-019 (Y)

SP5-993-020 (M)

SP5-993-021 (C)

Measure the gap becolors (YMC) using

Convert the measurfollowing formula. Tdot value in the SP

Correction [dots] = M

600 dpi mode: 1 dot

1200 dpi mode: 1 do

If color (YMC) has sabove value to the c

If color (YMC) has ssubtract the above v

Examples

• If the magenta lin

by 40µm in 600dpof SP5-993-017.Correction [dots]


black by 70µm incurrent setting of Correction [dots]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-74



Main-scan Entireimage

Color shifts on theentire image, and

the amount of shiftdiffers at front,center, and rear.


Main-scanmagnification is

not correctlyadjusted.

- SP5-993-013 (Y)

SP5-993-014 (M)

SP5-993-015 (C)


Convert the measurfollowing formula. Tvalue in the SP mod

Correction [%] = Me

If the color line is encorrection value to t

If the color line is rethe correction value

NOTE: Line position Adjust’ in User Progthe result after chan

data. This is becausposition adjustment

Examples

• If the magenta linthe black line, add993-014.Correction [%] = (

• If the magenta linto the black line, of SP5-993-014.Correction [%] = -

8/12/2019 2238c


B147/B149/B190 4-75



Entireimage

Color shifts on theentire image and

amount of shifts isalmost the same atfront, center, andrear sides.


Main-scanregistration is not

correctlyadjusted.

- SP5-993-010 (Y)

SP5-993-011 (M)

SP5-993-012 (C)


Convert the measurfollowing formula. Tdot value in the SP

Correction [dots] = M

If color (YMC) has sadd the above value

If color (YMC) has ssubtract the above v

Examples


add 4 to the curreCorrection [dots]

• If the magenta linsubtract 3 from thCorrection [dots]

Main-scan

Front orrear

The amount of colorshift at the front andrear sides becomesgradually biggertoward the trailingedge.

• Side fenceposition

• Transfer beltposition

- - • Check if the side properly positionepaper and the sidduring paper tran

• Check if the transtension springs aattraction roller is( 3.7.4 Transfe

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 4-76 SM

How to measure the gap between colorlines

Use a magnification scope to measure thegap [A] between two lines. Measure thedistance between the same sides of two lines.For example (see the illustration), measurebetween the left edges of the lines.

Pattern 1

Color shift in the sub-scan direction at theleading edge

This illustration shows that the colored(dotted) line is above the black line. Thismeans that the registration roller speed is toohigh for the paper used. Therefore, theregistration roller speed needs to be reducedby decreasing the setting (percentage) ofSP1-004-004, 005, and SP1-005-003depending on the mode selected.

• SP1-004-004 Normal paper,Color mode, 1200 dpi (62.5 mm/s)

• SP1-004-005 Normal Paper,Color mode, 600 dpi (125 mm/s)

• SP1-005-003 Thick Paper (62.5 mm/s)

Pattern 2

Color shift in the sub-scan direction at thetrailing edge

This illustration shows that the colored(dotted) line is above the black line. Thismeans that the fusing roller speed is too high

for the paper used. Therefore, the fusingroller speed needs to be slower bydecreasing the setting (percentage) of SP1-004-001, 002, or 007 depending on themode selected.

• SP1-004-001 Normal paper,Color mode, 1200 dpi (62.5 mm/s)

• SP1-004-002 Normal Paper,Color mode, 600 dpi (125 mm/s)

• SP1-004-007 Thick Paper (62.5 mm/s)

A A

B146T908.WMF

B146T909.WMF

B146T913.WMF

Magnificationscope

Blackline Color

line

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-77 B147/B149/B190

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

Pattern 3

Color shift (magnification change) in the main-scan direction

Fig. 1 and 2 show that the colored (dotted) line has shifted away from the black lineand the amount of shift differs at the front, center, and rear. Both Fig. 1 and Fig. 2show the color grid is larger than the black grid. Yellow becomes larger from left toright in Fig. 1, but cyan and magenta become larger from right to left. This isbecause the laser writing direction for B&Y is different from C&M.

Pattern 4

Color shift (registration) in the main-scan direction

Colored line shifts in the main-scan

direction and the amount of shift is thesame at left, center, and right.This is caused by incorrect colorregistration.

B146T910.WMFB146T911.WMF

B146T912.WMF

Fig. 2 (Cyan & Magenta)Fig. 1 (Yellow)

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 4-78 SM

4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT

If the color shift level is not within the target range (max 150µm) after replacing thetransfer unit and performing the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or

Auto Color Registration), follow the procedure explained below.

Check the color shift level

1. Make sure that OPC Refresh (SP3-920-005) has been done.2. Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).3. Print a 1-dot grid pattern using A3/11" x 17" paper. Refer to the following table

for detailed SP mode settings.

SP5-997 (Test Pattern) SettingMode Tray

selectionPattern Color mode Resolution

Paper size

(By-pass)

Normal, color, 600 dpi 2 05 Full Color 600x600 —

Normal, color, 1200 dpi 2 05 Full Color 1200x1200 —

NOTE: Each adjustment needs to be done by using the paper type which thecustomer normally uses.

4. Check the tendency of color shift in the grid pattern printed in step 3.Sometimes, a magnification scope must be used to measure the amount ofcolor shift between colors.

5. If the result is not within the target, go to the next step.

Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment

SP mode (sub-scan registration) reset

1. Make sure that the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002) have been printed out.

2. Reset the setting of SP5-993-016 to 021 to "0."

Transfer belt aging

1. Remove all PCUs. Place them on clean sheets of paper and cover the drumswith a few sheets of paper to prevent the drums from light fatigue. Then, securethe drum positioning plate (2 screws) and return the transfer unit release lever

to the original position.

2. Perform the transfer belt idling with SP5-804-074 (Drum M H CW) for about 3minutes. (This is to stabilize the transfer belt side-to-side movement.)

3. Reinstall the PCUs.

4. Perform the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or ‘Auto Adjust’ in UserProgram mode).

5. Print a 1-dot grid pattern using A3/11" x 17" paper in 600 dpi mode.

6. If the color shift in the main-scan direction is not within the adjustment standard,follow the troubleshooting guide.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-79 B147/B149/B190

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

Fusing roller speed adjustment


2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes using A3/11" x 17"paper.

(1) Normal, 600 dpi(2) Normal, 1200 dpi(3) Thick, 1200 dpi

3. If the color has shifted within 100 mm from the trailing edge, follow thetroubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Trailing edge).

Registration roller speed adjustment (for color mode)


2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes using A3/11" x 17"paper.

(1) Normal, 600 dpi(2) Normal, 1200 dpi

3. If the color has shifted within 100 mm from the leading edge, follow thetroubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Leading edge).

NOTE: The registration roller speed for by-pass paper feed is the same as for

normal 1200 dpi mode.

Line position fine adjustment for sub-scan

1. Print a 1-dot grid pattern each for each of the following modes using A3/11" x17" paper.


selectionPattern

Colormode

ResolutionPaper size(By-pass)

Normal, color, 600 dpi 2 05 Full Color 600x600 -

Normal, color, 1200 dpi 2 05 Full Color 1200x1200 -

Thick paper 0 05 Full Color 1200x1200 A3 / 11x17

2. Check if there is any color which has shifted from the black line by the sameamount all the way down the page from leading to trailing edge. If there is,follow the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Whole image).

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 4-80 SM

Registration roller speed adjustment (For B&W mode)

1. Input the following values in the SP modes.

SP1-004-006 = (Value of SP1-004-005)SP1-005-002 = – 0.2%

2. Print a 2-dot pattern (pattern 12) using A3/11" x 17" paper.


selectionPattern

SingleColor

Color Mode Resolution

Normal color 600 dpi 2 12 6 (Black) Single Color 600x600

3. Depending on the paper used, a horizontal band may appear at 60 mm (2.76")from the leading edge on A3 (11" x 17") paper. If the horizontal band is

observed on the 2-dot pattern, decrease the setting of SP1-004-006 in 0.05%steps until the problem is solved.

⇒

Rev. 05/2005

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 4-81 B147/B149/B190

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT

Black Over Print prevents unexpected white lines from appearing when blackletters or lines are printed with color background. You can enable or disable this

feature from the printer driver (default: disabled).When it is enabled, Black Over Print has the following unpleasant side effects:

• Crispness may deteriorate because the black toner spreads out.

• More toner is consumed.

• The background color may be seen through black letters or lines.

Black Over Print Disabled

Black lines and color background areprinted as follows:

1. The color toner (for example,magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)is transferred on the paper [C].Some space [D] is left blank forthe black toner.

2. The black toner [E] is transferredin the blank space.

If the line position of the black toneris not correct, an unexpected white

line [F] appears.

Black Over Print Enabled

Black lines and color background areprinted as follows:

1. The color toner (for example,magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)

is transferred on the paper [C].2. The black toner [D] is transferred

on the color toner.

Even if the line position of the blacktoner is not correct, an unexpectedwhite line does not appear.

1

11

K

K

Y Y

Y Y

Y Y

1 M M

M M

M M

B146T920.WMF

1

K

K

1

Y Y Y

Y Y Y

Y Y Y

M M M

M M M

M M M

B146T921.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[D]

[F]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

B147/B149/B190 4-82 SM

4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.7.1 SENSORS

Component CN Condition Symptom

Open SC121Scanner HomePosition

632-A2Shorted SC120

Open APS and ARE do not functionproperly.Platen Cover 648-2

Shorted No symptom

OpenCPU cannot detect the original sizeproperly. APS and ARE do notfunction correctly.

Original Width 632-A

Shorted

OpenCPU cannot detect the original sizeproperly. APS and ARE do not

function correctly.Original Length-1 632-BShorted

OpenCPU cannot detect the original sizeproperly. APS and ARE do notfunction correctly.

Original Length-2 632-B

Shorted

Open SC261LD H.P. sensor 220-B12

Shorted SC260

Open SC370/371/372/373

TD sensor

K: 210-A3C: 210-B9M: 209-A19Y: 210-A9

ShortedSC370/371/372/373 orSC374/375/376/377

OpenTransfer beltsensor

210-A12Shorted

SC471

Open

ID sensor

Rear: 228-3

Center: 228-4, 7

Front: 228-8Shorted

SC385

OpenThe Paper End indicator lights evenif paper is placed in the paper tray.

Paper end sensorTray1: 205-A5Tray2: 205-B9By-pass: 209-A15 Shorted

The Paper End indicator does notlight even if there is no paper in thepaper tray.

Open

The bottom plate of the paper feed

unit is not lifted up.Paper lift sensor Tray1: 205-A2Tray2: 205-B6Shorted SC501/502

OpenPaper Jam is detected whenever aprint is made.

Relay sensor 205-A8

ShortedPaper Jam is detected even if thereis no paper.


Vertical transportsensor

208-B11

Shorted

Paper Jam is detected even if thereis no paper.

8/12/2019 2238c


ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

SM 4-83 B147/B149/B190

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

Component CN Condition Symptom

OpenPaper Jam is detected whenever aprint is made.Registration

sensor209-B2



Fusing exit sensor 212-A7



Paper exit sensor 212-B4


Open

The paper overflow message is notdisplayed even when a paperoverflow condition exists, causing

paper jam.

Paper overflow

sensor

212-A2

ShortedThe paper overflow message isdisplayed.

OpenToner near end may not bedetected even when the toner nearend condition is satisfied.

Toner end sensor

K: 209-A2

Y: 206-A7

C: 206-A4

M: 206-A1 ShortedToner near end may be detectedeven when the toner near endcondition is not satisfied.

OpenDrum gearposition sensor

K: 213-13

CMY: 210-B12 Shorted

SC440

Open

Waste oil near full message is

displayed.

Waste oil sensor 212-A13

Shorted

Waste oil near full message is notdisplayed even when a waste oilnear full condition exists, causing awaste oil leak.

OpenThe message “Reset waste oilbottle correctly” is displayed evenwhen it is set correctly.Waste oil bottle

set sensor212-A16

ShortedThe message “Reset waste oilbottle correctly” is not displayedeven when it is not set correctly.

OpenWaste toner near full message isdisplayed, even when a waste tonernear full condition does not exist.

Waste tonersensor

213-A4

Shorted

Waste toner near full message isnot displayed even when a wastetoner near full condition exists,causing waste toner leak.

NOTE: The CN numbers are the connector numbers on the BCU.

8/12/2019 2238c


BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

B147/B149/B190 4-84 SM

4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

RatingFuse

115 V 220 - 240 V

Symptom when turning on themain switch

Power Supply Unit FU1 15A/125V —

CB1 — 8A/250V

No response (No power is suppliedto the electrical components.)

FU2 10A/125V 5 A/250VNo response (No DC power issupplied to the electricalcomponents.)

FU91 10A/125V 10A/125VOnly 24V DC power is not supplied.

The LED lights. But you see noother response.

High Voltage Power Supply Board–Transfer

IP101 1.5A/50V

SC285 (The electricity to thefollowing components is cut off: the

transfer roller, paper attraction roller,and transfer exit roller.)

4.9 LEDS (BCU)

StatusLED

Blinking Stays OFF or ON

LED 3 (Red) The Main CPU functionscorrectly.

The Main CPU does not functionproperly.

LED 2 (Green) The MUSIC CPU functionscorrectly.

The MUSIC CPU does not functionproperly.

LED 1 (Yellow) The DSP functions correctly. The DSP does not function properly.

8/12/2019 2238c


SERVICE TABLES

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

SM 5-1 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5. SERVICE TABLES

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

CAUTION

Before starting the SP mode, check that the data-in LED () is not on. This LEDindicates that some data is coming to the copier. When the LED is on, wait forthe copier to process the data.

5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only, sothat they can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used byanyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might bedeleted or settings might be changed. In this case, product quality cannotbe guaranteed any more.

Entering SP Mode

1. Press the Clear Mode key.

2. Use the keypad to enter “107”.

3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.

4. Enter the Service Mode.

Exiting SP ModeExit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c



SM 5-3 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.

Opens all SP groups and sublevels.

Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.

Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the SPmode screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window.

Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then

press. (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing. If not, just press the required SP Mode number.)

Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normaloperation.

Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.

Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.

Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display(page).

Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.

Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.

B146S911.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 5-4 SM

Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings

(paper size, etc.) for the test print.

3) Press Start to execute the test print.4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat

from step 1.

Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.

1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want toadjust.

2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SPthat you want to adjust.

3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display theSP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand thelist.

4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the itemthat you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated anddisplays the default or the current setting below.

NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.

5. To enter a setting:

• Press to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad toenter the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previoussetting.

• Press to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, thekey press is ignored.)

• When you are prompted to complete the selection, press “Yes.”

6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window

and select the settings for the test print. Press Start, and then press SPMode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.

7. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.

B146S912.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 5-5 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Exiting Service Mode

Press the Exit key on the touch-panel.

NOTE: To make the following settings effective, you must turn the main switch offand on after exiting service mode.

SP Modes Related to the Engine SP Modes Related to the Controller

SP2-208-009

SP2-213-001

SP2-224-001 to 004

SP5-150-001

SP5-994-001 and 002

SP5-998-001

SP5-999

SP5-302-002

SP5-801-003 to 013

SP5-824-001

SP5-825-001

SP5-832-001 to 011

NOTE: If the settings of SP modes 5-993-013 to 015 are changed, these changes

will affect the next line position adjustment.

5.1.3 REMARKS

Display on the Control Panel Screen

Since the maximum number of characters which can be displayed on the controlpanel screen is limited (20 characters), the description of SP modes displayed onthe screen needs to be abbreviated The following are the major abbreviations usedfor the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.

Paper TypeN: Normal paperTH: Thick paper

Color Mode [Color][K]: Black in B&W mode[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan[FC]: Full Color mode[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in fullcolor mode

Paper Feed StationP: Paper trayB: By-pass table

Fusing SectionH: Heating rollerP: Pressure roller

Print ModeS: SimplexD: Duplex

Process Speed

62.5, 125, 185

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 5-6 SM

As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the printmode (B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP modesettings depend on the process speed.

ModeResolution

(dpi)Line speed

(mm/s)Print speed

(ppm)

600 x 6001,800 x 600

185 38B/W

1,200 x 1,200 125 28

600 x 6001,800 x 600

125 28Color

1,200 x 1,200 62.5 14

OHP/Thick600 x 600

1,800 x 6001,200 x 1,200

62.5 10

The process speed (mm/s) depends on the print mode (B&W or Color), resolution,and/or type of paper selected. Some SP mode settings depend on the processspeed.

Others

The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.

FA: Factory setting

(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factorysetting sheets enclosed, which is located underneath the jammed paper removaldecal.)

DFU: Design/Factory Use onlyDo not touch the SP mode in the field.

A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the mainswitch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.

An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that thismode is stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to

the default value. “BCU” and “CTL” indicate which NVRAM contains the data.• BCU: NVRAM on the BCU board

• CTL: NVRAM on the controller board

The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SPtable in the following manner.

[ Adjustable range / Default setting / Step ] Alphanumeric

NOTE: If “Alphanumeric” is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, thesetting of the SP mode is displayed on the screen using alphanumericcharacters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in

the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-7 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE

5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE

SP1-XXX (Feed)[Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration(Paper Type, [Color ], Process Speed), Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP, TH: Thick

1-001

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operationtiming for each mode.

1-001-1 Normal [K] 62.5 *BCU

1-001-2 Normal [K] 125 *BCU

1-001-3 Normal [K] 185 *BCU

1-001-4 Normal [FC] 62.5 *BCU

1-001-5 Normal [FC] 125 *BCU

1-001-6 Thick [K] *BCU

1-001-7 Thick [FC] *BCU

1-001-8 OHP [K] *BCU1-001-9 OHP [FC] *BCU

[ -10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

[Side to Side Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration 1-002

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position foreach mode.

1-002-1 By-pass Table *BCU

1-002-2 Paper Tray 1 *BCU


[ -10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA



1-002-6 Duplex *BCU

[ -10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle(Paper Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed), Paper Type: N: Normal, TH:Thick

1-003

Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paperfeed timing.

1-003-1 Paper Tray 62.5 *BCU



1-003-4 By-pass N 62.5 *BCU

1-003-5 By-pass N 125 *BCU

1-003-6 By-pass N 185 *BCU1-003-7 By-pass TH *BCU

1-003-8 By-pass OHP *BCU

[ -5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-8 SM

[Dev. Motor Speed] Development Drive Motor Speed([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick

1-004

Adjusts the development drive motor speed for correcting color shifts at the leading

edge or trailing edge area.Black Motor [K]: Adjusts fusing roller speed for the trailing edge area.Color Motor [YMC]: Adjusts registration roller speed for the leading edge area.NOTE:

• SP1-004-002 and 005 is for color mode. Fine adjustment for B&W mode can bedone with SP1-005-001 and 002.

• SP1-004-004 is for normal paper. Fine adjustment for thick paper can be done withSP1-005-003.

1-004-1 [K] 62.5 Normal *BCU [ 96.0 to 104.0 / 97.8 / 0.1 %/step ]

1-004-2 [K] 125 *BCU [ 96.0 to 104.0 / 97.6 / 0.1 %/step ]

1-004-3 [K] 185 *BCU [ 96.0 to 104.0 / 98.1 / 0.1 %/step ]

1-004-4 [YMC] 62.5 *BCU

1-004-5 [YMC] 125 *BCU

1-004-6 [YMC] 185 *BCU1-004-7 [K] 62.5 Thick *BCU

[ 96.00 to 104.00 / 100.00 / 0.05 %/step ] FA

1-005 [Dev. Motor Speed2] Development Drive Motor Speed 2([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> TH: Thick

[K] *BCU [ -0.2 to +1.0 / +0.2 / 0.1 %/step ]1-005-1

Adjusts the black development drive motor speed for the B&W 125mm/s processspeed. The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-002 (see the notefor SP 1-004). At the 125mm/s process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than forcolor mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport quality, causing thepaper to flip up at the fusing section if the same speed as color mode is used for B&Wmode. To minimize the occurrence of paper flipping up, which causes smearedimages in the trailing area, this SP mode can change the motor speed in B&W mode.

[YMC] *BCU [ -1.00 to 1.00 / 0 / 0.05 %/step ] FA 1-005-2

Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for the B&W 125mm/s processspeed. The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-005 (see the notefor SP 1-004). At the 125mm/s process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than forcolor mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport speed slightly. ThisSP mode can adjust the motor speed for B&W mode.

[YMC] Thick *BCU [ -0.30 to 0.30 / 0 / 0.05 %/step ]1-005-3

Adjust the color development drive motor speed for thick paper in by-pass mode. Thevalue stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-004 (see the note for SP 1-

004).Normal and thick paper are different types of paper, and this sometime causes colorshift due to paper slippage. This SP mode can change the motor speed for thickpaper.

[Dev. Motor Speed3] Development Drive Motor Speed 3([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> SP: Special

1-006

Adjusts the development motor speed for special paper.

1-006-1 [K] 62.5 Special *BCU

1-006-2 [K] 125 Special *BCU

[ -4.0 to 4.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step ]

1-006-3 [YMC] 62.5 Special *BCU

1-006-4 [YMC] 125 Special *BCU

[ -4.00 to 4.00 / -0.1 / 0.05 %/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-9 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Dev. Motor Speed4] Development Drive Motor Speed 41-007

Adjusts the development motor speed for postcards.

1-007-1 [CL] Mail TH *BCU [ -1.00 to 0.00 / -0.40 / 0.05%/step]

[Drum STM Speed] Drum STM Speed Adjustment1-008

Adjusts the drum speed of each line-speed mode (62.5 mm/s and 125 mm/s); thisadjusts drum speed but not transfer belt speed.

1-008-1 [CL] 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 7 / 1 /step ] DFU

1-008-2 [CL] 125 *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 7 / 1 /step ] DFU

1-008-3 [Bk] 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 5 / 1 /step ] DFU

1-008-4 [Bk] 125 *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 3 / 1 /step ] DFU

1-008-5 OHP *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 3 / 1 /step ] DFU

1-008-6 MUSIC *BCU [ 0 to 10/ 3 / 1 /step ] DFU

1-104 [Fusing Control]Control Method *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric

0: ON/OFF Control1: Phase Control

1-104-1

Selects the fusing control method.NOTE: This mode can be used only for N. America models

Process Speed *BCU [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: Color 62.5 mm/s (temperature specified bySP 1-105-8 and 19)1: Color 125 mm/s (temperature specified bySP 1-105-9 and 20)2: Thick / OHP (temperature specified by SP 1-105-13 and 24)3: K 125 mm/s (temperature specified by SP 1-105-4 and 15)4: K 185 mm/s (temperature specified by SP 1-105-5 and 16)

1-104-25

Selects the power-on default target fusing operation temperature.The target operating fusing temperature depends on the process speed. When themachine is switched on, it starts warming up for the process speed specified in thisSP mode.

1-105 [Fusing Temperature]

(Heating or Pressure roller: Paper Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex, Process Speed)

Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP. TH: Thick, SP: SpecialSome settings of fusing temperature depend on the destination (US or Europe/Asia).US: Setting for US, EU: Setting for Europe/Asia

H: Ready *BCU [ 10 to 100 / 10 / 1oC/step ]1 105-1

Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing ready condition. After the main switch has been turned on, the machine enters the print readycondition when the heating roller temperature reaches the temperature specified inthis SP mode.When the machine is in the recovery mode from the energy saver or auto off mode,the machine becomes ready when both heating and pressure roller temperaturesreach the specified temperature.Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-3 to 28) –Temperature specified in this SP mode.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-10 SM

1-105 [Fusing Temperature]

P: Ready *BCU [ 10 to 100 / NA: 10, EU: 20 / 1oC/step ]

Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing ready condition.Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-3 to 28) –Temperature specified in this SP mode

1-105-2

The following SPs set the target operating temperatures of the heating and pressurerollers in various modes. (The default settings are different for N. America andEur./Asia)

1-105-4 H:N [K] S 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 180, EU: 175 / 5°C/step]

1-105-5 H:N [K] S 185 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 180, EU: 180 / 5°C/step]

1-105-6 H:N [K] D 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 165 / 5°C/step] **

1-105-7 H:N [K] D 185 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 175 , EU: 175 / 5°C/step]

1-105-8 H:N[FC] S 62.5 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5°C/step]

1-105-9 H:N[FC] S 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / 180 / 5°C/step]

1-105-10 H:N[FC] D 62.5 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 145, EU: 145/ 5°C/step]

1-105-11 H:N[FC] D 125 *BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 170 / 5°C/step] **

1-105-13 H:OHP *BCU [ 100 to 190 / 165 / 5°C/step]

1-105-15 P:N [K] S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 160, EU: 155 / 5°C/step]1-105-16 P:N [K] S 185 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 155, EU: 160 / 5°C/step]

1-105-17 P:N [K] D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 145 / 5°C/step] **

1-105-18 P:N [K] D 185 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 145, EU: 155 / 5°C/step]

1-105-19 P:N[FC] S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 125, EU: 130 / 5°C/step]

1-105-20 P:N[FC] S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 160 / 5°C/step]

1-105-21 P:N[FC] D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 120, EU: 125 / 5°C/step]

1-105-22 P:N[FC] D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5°C/step] **

1-105-24 P:OHP *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 150 / 5°C/step]

1-105-26 H:TH *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 175 / 5°C/step]

1-105-28 P:TH *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5°C/step]

1-105-29 H:Envelop *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 175 / 5°C/step]

1-105-30 P:Envelop *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5°C/step]

H: Slow Down *BCU [ 1 to 20 / 5 / 1°C/step]1-105-31

Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing theprocess speed.Fusing temperature must be decreased when the machine changes to a processspeed that is slower than the current process speed (for example, when the speedchanges from 185 mm/s to 62.5 mm/s). The machine idles while reducing the fusingtemperature. When the fusing temperature becomes lower than the readytemperature, the machine starts printing.Ready Temperature = Target temperature + Temperature specified in this SP mode.

P: Slow Down *BCU [ 1 to 20 / 10 / 1°C/step]1-105-32

Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the

process speed.1-105-33 H:SP 62.5 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]

1-105-34 H:SP 125 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]

1-105-35 H:SP 185 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]

1-105-36 P:SP 62.5 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]

1-105-37 P:SP 125 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1°C/step]

1-105-38 P:SP 185 *BCU [ -20 to +30 / +20 / 1°C/step]

** Requires Engine firmware 1.09C or later.

[Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)1-106

Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.

1-106-1 Heat Roller

1-106-2 Pressure Roller

[ 0 to 200 / - / 5°C/step]

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

Rev. 06/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-11 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

1-902 [Paper Size] Tray Paper Size

Tray 1 A4/LT *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: A4 sideways, 1: LT sidewaysTray 1 can only use these two sizes.US: 1 FA

1-902-1

Specifies the paper size for tray 1.

Tray 2 B4/LG *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: B4 lengthwise, 1: LG lengthwiseThis specifies which size is detected for asensor output of 1101 (see section 6 fordetails).US: 1 FA

1-902-2


Tray 2 A4/LT *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: A4 lengthwise, 1: LT lengthwiseThis specifies which size is detected for a

sensor output of 0110 (see section 6 fordetails).US: 1 FA

1-902-3


Tray 2 B5/LT *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: LT, 1: B5 lengthwiseThis specifies which size is detected for asensor output of 1011 (see section 6 fordetails).

1-902-4


[Fusing Idling Time] 1-910

Specifies the timer for deciding whether to do fusing idling when receiving a printcommand.When receiving a new job within the time specified in this SP mode after the last jobis completed, fusing idling is not done because the fusing section was alreadywarmed up during the last job.

1-910-1 Idling Time *BCU [ 0 to 180 / 1 / 1 minute/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-12 SM

[Machine Temp. Cor.] Machine Temperature CorrectionTh: Threshold, Heating or Pressure roller

1-912

Corrects the fusing temperature depending on the temperature inside the machine.

If the temperature inside the machine is too high or low, this may cause hot or coldoffset image at the fusing section. To avoid the offset image, the fusing temperature iscorrected depending on the temperature inside machine, which is monitored by thethermistor located on the right side of the laser optics housing unit.

If the temperature inside the machine is detected as high or low (based on thesettings of SP1-912-001 or 002), the fusing temperature is decreased or increased bythe temperature specified in SP1-912-003 to 006. Also see SP 1-917-1.

Th:High Temp *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 30 / 1°C/step]1-912-1

Sets the threshold for entering the high temperature condition.

Th:Low Temp *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 17 / 1°C/step]1-912-2

Sets the threshold for entering the low temperature condition.

H:High Temp *BCU [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1°C/step]1-912-3 Sets the fusing temperature decrease for the high temperature condition.

1-912-4 P:High Temp *BCU [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1°C/step]

H:Low Temp *BCU [ 0 to 15 / 5 / 1°C/step]1-912-5

Sets the fusing temperature increase for the low temperature condition.

1-912-6 P:Low Temp *BCU [ 0 to 15 / 5 / 1°C/step]

[Temperature. Cor. 1] Fusing Temperature Correction (Correction Timing)1-913

Specifies the number of sheets to determine whether or not to apply the fusingtemperature correction.During a multi print job, the fusing temperature tends to slightly overshoot around the10th sheet and then stabilize. Temperature overshooting may cause the glossiness toincrease.To minimize the overshooting, both fusing and pressure roller temperatures aredecreased by the amount specified in SP1-914 at the number of sheets specified inthis SP mode, until the end of the job.The temperatures are decreased in two steps.Example: 125 mm/s line speedFirst step (also called 'Mode 1'): After 5 sheets (SP 1-913-2), temperature drops by5C (SP 1-914-2).Second step (also called 'Mode 2'): After 20 sheets (SP 1-913-7), temperature dropsby 10C (SP 1-914-7).Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or lessWide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF

1-913-1 Mode 1 185 *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]


1-913-3 Mode 1 62.5 *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]

1-913-4 Mode 1 OHP narrow *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]

1-913-5 Mode 1 185 wide *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]



1-913-8 Mode 2 62.5 *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step ]

1-913-9 Mode 2 185 narrow *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]

1-913-10 Mode 2 185 wide *BCU [ 1 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-13 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Temperature Cor. 2] Fusing Temperature Correction (Temperature Setting)1-914

Specifies the temperature to be subtracted from the targeted temperatures specifiedin SP1-105-4 to-24.

Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or lessWide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF

1-914-1 Temp 1 185 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step ]

1-914-2 Temp 1 125 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5°C /step ]

1-914-3 Temp 1 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step ]

1-914-4 Temp 1 OHP narrow *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5°C /step ]

1-914-5 Temp 1 OHP wide *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5°C /step ]

1-914-6 Temp 2 185 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 5°C /step ]

1-914-7 Temp 2 125 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 5°C /step ]

1-914-8 Temp 2 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 5°C /step ]

1-914-9 Temp 2 OHP narrow *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5°C /step ]

1-914-10 Temp 2 OHP wide *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5°C /step ]

1-915 [Stand-by Time]

Job Receiving *BCU [ 0 to 180 / 60 / 10 seconds/step ]0: The machine does not shift to the stand-bymode.

1-915-1

Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode when not receiving aprint start command after receiving a print preparation command.

Job End *BCU [ 0 to 180 / 30 / 10 seconds/step ]0: The machine does not shift to the stand-bymode.

1-915-2

Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode after the last job iscompleted.

1-916 [Idling Mode]

Mode Set *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]0: Off1: On

1-916-1

Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready just after themain switch has been turned on.

Idling Time *BCU [ 10 to 120 / 30 / 10 sec/step ]1-916-2

Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed.

PreJob Mode *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]0: Off

1: On

1-916-3

Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready when a print job arrives at the copier.

Idling Time *BCU [ 0 to 360 / 0 / 1 sec/step ]1-916-4

Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed when special paper is usedand the line speed is 185 mm/s.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-14 SM

1-996 [OHP/TH Fusing] OHP/Thick Paper Fusing Temperature Correction(Heating or Pressure Roller)

Specifies the temperature for starting a print job.

The fusing section is already warmed up when the last print job was completed. Ifprints are made on OHP or thick paper at this time, the fusing temperature tends tobe higher than the target, causing exit roller marks or a paper jam in the fusingsection.To prevent this, the print job will not start if the heating and pressure rollertemperatures are higher than the following:(Target temperature specified by SP1-105-12, -13, -23, -24) - (Temperature specified

by this SP mode (default: 5°C for heating roller, 10°C for pressure roller))

1-996-4 H:Print Temp *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 1°C /step ]

1-996-5 P:Print Temp *BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 1°C /step ]

PreJob Mode *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]0: Off1: On

1-996-6

This SP enables or disables the 30-second fusing unit idling at the start of an OHPprint job. When enabled, idling is done even if the machine is in the ready condition.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-15 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP2-XXX (Drum)

2-001 [Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (DC or AC component: [Color], Process Speed)U: Upper, L: Lower

Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.

Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3-125 Default: ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode with SP3-125,the values in these SP modes are used for printing.

2-001-1 DC:[K] *BCU

2-001-2 DC:[Y] *BCU

2-001-3 DC:[M] *BCU

2-001-4 DC:[C] *BCU

[ 300 to 1000 / 700 / 10 volts/step ] DFU

• Displays the AC component of the charge roller bias adjusted during machineinitialization or process control self-check.

• Sets AC bias in the various print modes for test purposes.If the optimum AC bias cannot be selected because of the upper and lower limits(SP2-001-10 and 11 for K, SP 2-001-21 and 22 for YMC), this may cause white spots

on images and black spots on background. (In particular, spots may appear if theroom temperature is very low.)Check the printouts after changing the AC bias with these SP modes (SP2-001-12 to20) and exiting SP mode. If increasing or decreasing the AC bias for relevant colorsolves the spot problem, shift the AC upper and lower limits (SP2-001-10 and 11 forK, SP 2-001-21 and 22 for YMC) by the value increased or decreased during the test.NOTE: The AC upper and lower limits have been optimized by the manufacturer;

therefore, these settings should not be adjusted in the field.

2-001-5 AC:[K] 62.5 [ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-6 AC:[K] 125 [ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-7 AC:[K] 185 [ 0 to 255 / 159 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-8 AC:[Y] 62.5 [ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-9 AC:[Y] 125 [ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-10 AC:[M] 62.5 [ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-11 AC:[M] 125 [ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-12 AC:[C] 62.5 [ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-13 AC:[C] 125 [ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU

Sets the upper limit of the AC component adjustable range for black.During machine initialization and process control self-check, the AC component of thecharge roller bias is automatically adjusted within the range specified by SP2-001-014through 017.

2-001-14 AC Target [K] *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 86 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-15 AC Target [Y] *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 83 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-16 AC Target [M] *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 86 / 1/step ] DFU

2-001-17 AC Target [C] *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 83 / 1/step ] DFU

[TrimAdjust] Trimming Adjustment 2-101

This program adjusts the trimming area (the area in which no image is created).

2-103-1 front *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

2-103-2 back *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

2-103-3 lead *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

2-103-4 trail *BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-16 SM

2-103 [LD Control] LD Power Control([Color Mode, Color], Process Speed, K or Color mode) P: Power, M: Magnification

Adjusts the laser power by changing the current applied to LD.

Laser power is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjustingthese data has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default : ON) is activated. After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes areused for printing.

2-103-1 P:[K] 62.5 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-2 P:[K] 125 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-4 P:[Y] 62.5 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-5 P:[Y] 125 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-7 P:[M] 62.5 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-8 P:[M] 125 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-10 P:[C] 62.5 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-11 P:[C] 125 C *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-13 P:[K] 62.5 K *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-14 P:[K] 125 K *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU 2-103-15 P:[K] 185 K *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 601 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-26 P:[0 1] 125 K *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-27 P:[0 1] 185 K *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 601 / 1/step ] DFU

Main Scan Magnification ([Color], Laser Exposure Frequency)

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects themain scan magnification; however, this will be automatically corrected at the nextline position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-013 to 015 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will beeffective from the next line position adjustment).NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position canbe adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case, theline position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.

2-103-55 M:[K] 64.3MHz *BCU

2-103-56 M:[Y] 64.3MHz *BCU

2-103-57 M:[M] 64.3MHz *BCU

2-103-58 M:[C] 64.3MHz *BCU

2-103-59 M:[K] 47.6MHz *BCU

[ 0 to 280 / 140 / 1 dot/step ] 1 dot = 20µ DFU

2-103-101 CF:[K,K] 1 *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 604 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-102 CF:[K,K] 2 *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 604 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-103 CF[FC,K] *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-104 CF:[FC:Y] *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-105 CF:[FC,M] *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-106 CF:[FC,C] *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-107 CF:[K] OHP/TH *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-108 CF:[Y] OHP/TH *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-109 CF:[M] OHP/TH *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU

2-103-110 CF:[C] OHP/TH *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-17 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[LD Beam Pitch] LD Beam Pitch 2-109

Sets the beam pitch for black in 1200 dpi or 600 dpi mode.NOTE: After replacing the laser optics housing unit, the data printed on the decal

attached to the new unit must be input with this SP mode.2-109-2 Pitch 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 50 / 50 pulse/step ] FA

2-109-3 Pitch 600 *BCU [ 0 to 255 / 42 / 50 pulse/step ] FA

2-109-5 Display 1200 [ 0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step ]

2-109-6 Display 600 [ 0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step ]

2-112 [Polygon OFF Timing 1] Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing

Warming-up *BCU [ 0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step ]0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode

2-112-1

The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print start command forthe time specified in this SP mode after receiving the print preparation command.

Job End *BCU [ 0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step ]

0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode

2-112-2

The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print job for the timespecified in this SP mode after the previous job was completed.

2-113 [Polygon OFF Timing 2]Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]0: Enable, 1: Disable

2-131-1 The polygon mirror motor does not turn on until the copier enters the ready conditioneven after receiving the print start command.NOTE: When a user complains about high frequency noise, enabling this mode canminimize the noise.

[Dev. Bias] Development Bias ([Color], Process Speed)2-201

Adjusts the development bias.Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default: ON) isactivated. After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes areused for printing.

2-201-1 [K] 62.5 *BCU

2-201-2 [K] 125 *BCU

2-201-3 [K] 185 *BCU

2-201-4 [Y] 62.5 *BCU

2-201-5 [Y] 125 *BCU

2-201-6 [M] 62.5 *BCU2-201-7 [M] 125 *BCU

2-201-8 [C] 62.5 *BCU

2-201-9 [C] 125 *BCU

[ 200 to 800 / 500 / 10 V/step ] DFU

[Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color]) 2-207

Forces toner to be supplied to the development unit.The toner supply clutch turns on for 0.7 s and off for 1.3 s.

2-207-1 [K]

2-207-2 [Y]

2-207-3 [M]

2-207-4 [C]

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]0: Not execute1: Execute

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-18 SM

[Toner Supply Mode] Toner Supply Mode ([Color]) 2-208

Selects the toner supply method.

2-208-1 [K] *BCU

2-208-2 [Y] *BCU

2-208-3 [M] *BCU

2-208-4 [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: Fixed supply (with the supply rates stored

with SP2-208-5 to 8)1: Fuzzy control supply2: Proportional control supply (using the Vref

values stored with SP2-224-5 to 8)

Sets the toner supply rate used when the toner supply method (SP2-208-1 to 4) is setto ‘0’ (fixed supply mode).

2-208-5 Fixed Rate [K] *BCU

2-208-6 Fixed Rate [Y] *BCU

2-208-7 Fixed Rate [M] *BCU

2-208-8 Fixed Rate [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step ]

Specifies the maximum possible toner supply, expressed as a percentage of themaximum amount of toner that can possibly be supplied for a sheet of paper.

If too much toner is supplied to the development unit especially for black or in the lowhumidity condition, this may cause dirty background due to insufficient agitation. ThisSP mode limits the maximum possible toner supply for black and only in the lowhumidity condition for color.NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.

2-208-9 Upper Limit *BCU#

[ 0 to 100 / 63 / 1 %/step ] DFU

Adjusts the toner supply amount (fixed rate) when making multiple prints of pageswith low image ratio (coverage).When printing with a low image ratio, toner concentration is controlled only with Vtoutputs since pixel count is not done for low image ratios. This may cause theattraction force between toner and carrier to increase, resulting in low image densityon outputs. To prevent this, the machine counts the number of pixels and supplies a

fixed amount of toner if the accumulated number of pixels becomes greater than thespecified level.

2-208-10 LowCoverage[K]

2-208-11 LowCoverage[Y]

2-208-12 LowCoverage[M]

2-208-13 LowCoverage[C]

*BCU [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %/step ] DFU

Specifies each constant to adjust the toner supply amount. The optimum value isspecified before shipment.

2-208-14 Vt Coeff[Bk]

2-208-15 Vt Coeff[Y]

2-208-16 Vt Coeff[M]

2-208-17 Vt Coeff[C]

*BCU [ 0 to 10.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU


2-208-18 Img Coeff[Bk]

2-208-19 Img Coeff[Y]

2-208-20 Img Coeff[M]

2-208-21 Img Coeff[C]

*BCU [ 0 to 10.0 / 0.7 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU


2-208-22 ImgCrctCoef[Bk]

2-208-23 ImgCrctCoef[Y]

2-208-24 ImgCrctCoef[M]

2-208-25 ImgCrctCoef[C]

*BCU [ 0 to 10.0 / 0.1 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-19 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Toner Supply Counter] Toner Supply Counter ([Color])2-210

Displays the total time that the toner supply clutch has been on.This data is stored in the memory chip on each toner cartridge.

2-210-5 [K] *BCU

2-210-6 [Y] *BCU

2-210-7 [M] *BCU2-210-8 [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 second/step ]

2-212 [Toner Near/End] Toner Near End / End Detection Threshold ([Color])

When the amount of toner amount left in the cartridge becomes less than this value,the machine starts monitoring the Vt values for toner near end detection.

2-212-1 Start [K] *BCU

2-212-2 Start [YMC] *BCU

[ 0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 g/step ]

Specifies the threshold for toner near-end detection.The machine detects toner near-end when the following happens 10 timesconsecutively.

Vt > Vref + Threshold

2-212-5 Near [K] *BCU

2-212-6 Near [YMC] *BCU

[ 0 to 5.0 / 0.4 / 0.1 V/step ]

Specifies the threshold for toner end detection.The machine detects toner end when the following happens 10 times consecutively.Then, the machine stops printing, even during a print job.

Vt > Vref + Threshold

2-212-7 End [K] *BCU

2-212-8 End [YMC] *BCU

[ 0 to 5.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 V/step ]

Specifies the number of sheets with full image coverage that can be printed aftertoner near-end has been detected.When near-end is detected, the pixels in the images are counted. The machinedetects toner end when the following happens, and the machine stops printing even

during a print job.Pixel count = 5 A4/LT sheets with full image coverage

NOTE: The setting of SP2-212-11 has priority for deciding when to stop printing.

2-212-9 Pixel [K] *BCU

2-212-10 Pixel [YMC] *BCU

[ 0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step ]

Specifies the minimum number of sheets that can be printed after toner near-end hasbeen detected.However, when the following happens 10 consecutive times, the machine stopsprinting even during a print job or if this guaranteed minimum has not been met.

Vt > Current Vref value + 1.2V or Vt > 4.8V

2-212-11 Min. Print *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]

Displays the average signal value of the toner end sensor. Printed images can beweak when the value is larger.

Each toner sensor detects the toner that is falling through the toner path beneath thetoner cartridge. Each sensor outputs “0” when it detects toner in the toner path, oroutputs “1” when it does not detect toner. The signal is “1” if toner is not passingthrough the path even though the toner cartridge contains toner. These signals, “0”and “1”, are periodically checked and used to calculate the signal average. Whenenough toner is in the cartridge, the signal average is a smaller value (“0” or itsvicinity). When toner is insufficient, the average is a larger value (“1” or its vicinity).

2-212-12 sensor avg [K]

2-212-13 sensor avg [Y]

2-212-14 sensor avg [M]

2-212-15 sensor avg [C]

*BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-20 SM

[Toner End ON/OFF] Toner End Detection ON/OFF 2-213

Enables or disables toner near-end and end detection (if disabled, the toner supplyclutch on time is still counted).

Use this SP only when tests are necessary under the toner end or toner near endcondition. Specify the default value after the tests.NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.

2-213-1 T End ON/OFF *BCU#

[ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step] Alphanumeric, DFU 0: Both sensors disabled1: Both sensors enabled2: Toner end sensor disabled and TD sensor

enabled

2-223 [TD Vcnt Control] TD Sensor Vcnt Control

Initialization *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric, DFU 0: Disabled

1: Enabled

2-223-1

Enables or disables the Vcnt Auto Adjustment when detecting a new developmentunit.When the machine detects a new development unit, developer initializationautomatically starts. During the developer initialization, Vcnt is automatically adjusted

so that Vt is within 3.0 ± 0.1V.

Humidity *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Enabled

2-223-2

Enables or disables the Humidity Auto Correction. This corrects the Vcnt value for thecurrent humidity. This correction is applied to both the Vcnt values automaticallyadjusted during developer initialization and manually adjusted with SP2-224-1 to 4.If this correction does not work well under certain environmental conditions or due to

a defective humidity sensor, deactivate the Humidity Auto Correction and adjust theVcnt value in SP2-224-1 to 4 (by trial and error).

Toner Fill Up *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric, DFU 0: Deactivate1: Activate

2-223-3

Activates or deactivates the Toner Fill Up mode, which fills up the toner supply tubewith toner during developer initialization.This function is required only at machine installation. Although the default is “0”, thefactory setting is “1”. After toner fill-up occurs during machine installation, the settingis changed to “0” automatically.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-21 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

2-224 [Vcnt / Vref] Vcnt / Vref ([Color])

Adjusts the Vcnt value manually.The value in this SP mode is effective until after the next process control self-check.

To always use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply modewith SP2-208-1 to 4.NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.

2-224-1 Vcnt [K]

2-224-2 Vcnt [Y]

2-224-3 Vcnt [M]

2-224-4 Vcnt [C]

*BCU#

[ 0 to 22.0 / 10.0 / 0.1 V/step ] FA

Adjusts the Vref value manually.The value in this SP mode is effective until the next process control self-check. Toalways use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode withSP2-208-1 to 4.

2-224-5 Vref [K] *BCU

2-224-6 Vref [Y] *BCU

2-224-7 Vref [M] *BCU2-224-8 Vref [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 5.0 / 2.8 / 0.1 V/step ]

2-301 [Transfer Current] ([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper

Adjusts the transfer current for each color and each print mode.

NOTE: If the transfer current is increased too much, image offset may occurespecially in halftone areas.

2-301-1 [K]P S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-2 [K]P S 185 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 22 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-3 [K]P D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 16 / 1 µ A/step ]2-301-4 [K]P D 185 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-5 [K]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-6 [K]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-7 [K]B S 185 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 22 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-8 [FC,K]P S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-9 [FC,K]P S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-10 [FC,Y]P S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-11 [FC,Y]P S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-12 [FC,M]P S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-13 [FC,M]P S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-14 [FC,C]P S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-15 [FC,C]P S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-16 [FC,K]P D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 9 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-17 [FC,K]P D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-18 [FC,Y]P D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-19 [FC,Y]P D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-20 [FC,M]P D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-21 [FC,M]P D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-22 [FC,C]P D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-23

[FC,C]P D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-

24

[FC,K]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-25 [FC,K]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 µ A/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-22 SM

2-301 [Transfer Current] ([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper

2-301-26 [FC,Y]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-27 [FC,Y]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-28 [FC,M]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]2-301-29 [FC,M]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-30 [FC,C]B S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-31 [FC,C]B S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-32 [K]OHP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-33 [FC,K]OHP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-34 [FC,Y]OHP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 11 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-35 [FC,M]OHP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-36 [FC,C]OHP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 9 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-37 [K]TH R62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-38 [FC,K]TH R62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-39 [FC,Y]TH R62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-40 [FC,M]TH R62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-41 [FC,C]TH R62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-42 [K]SP S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 8 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-43 [K]SP S125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-44 [K]SP S185 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 22 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-45 [FC,K]SP S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-46 [FC,Y]SP S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-47 [FC,M]SP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-48 [FC,C]SP 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-49 [FC,K]SP 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-50 [FC,Y]SP 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-51 [FC,M]SP 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]2-301-52 [FC,C]SP 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-57 [K]TH S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-58 [FC,K]TH S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-59 [FC,Y]TH S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-60 [FC,M]TH S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-61 [FC,C]TH S62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-62 [K]SP D62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-63 [K]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 16 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-64 [K]SP D185 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-65 [FC,K]SP D62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 9 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-66 [FC,Y]SP D62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-67 [FC,M]SP D62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]2-301-68 [FC,C]SP D62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-69 [FC,K]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-70 [FC,Y]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-71 [FC,M]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-301-72 [FC,C]SP D125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-23 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Current Paper Size] Transfer Current - Paper Size CorrectionPaper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, OHP

2-309

Corrects the transfer current for paper size.

When small paper is used for printing, the transfer current flows to the drum at thenon image areas where the transfer belt touches the OPC drum. This may cause anabnormal image due to insufficient current at the image areas.NOTE: Increase only when an abnormal image (insufficient image transfer) occurs on

a small paper size. However, increasing the current too much may causeimage offset.

2-309-5 N LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step ]

2-309-6 N A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.8 / 0.1/step ]

2-309-7 TH LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step ]

2-309-8 TH A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step ]

2-309-9 OHP LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step ]

2-309-10 OHP A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 4.0 / 0.1/step ]

2-402 [Transfer Ctrl] Transfer Control

C Mode Posit *BCU [ 0 to 500 / 170 / 10/step ] DFU 2-402-1

Adjusts the transfer belt position for color printing.SP2-402-1 is valid only when auto correct (SP2-402-2) is disabled ( 6.7.5).

Auto Correct *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step ] DFU 0: Disabled1: Enabled

2-402-2

Enable or disable the auto-adjustment of the transfer belt position.

• When SP2-402-2 is enabled, the transfer belt position for color printing is decided inaccordance with the result of the initialization processing ( 6.7.5).

• SP2-402-2 validates the setting of SP2-402-1, but does not affect the setting of

SP2-402-3.

Bk Mode Posit *BCU [ 0 to 500 / 130 / 10/step ] DFU 2-402-3

Adjusts the transfer belt position for monochrome printing.SP2-402-3 is always valid regardless of the setting in SP2-402-2.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-24 SM

2-801 [PA Roller Current] Paper Attraction Roller Current([Color], Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed): Current Adjustment(Paper or By-pass): Paper Size Correction

Adjusts the paper attraction roller current for color printing.If paper misfeeds occur at the transfer unit in color mode, check and/or adjust thepaper attraction roller current.NOTE: The magenta development section is close to the paper attraction roller.

Decreasing the current may not cause paper misfeed.If the current is increased too much, the following image problems may occurdepending on the humidity.High humidity:Insufficient image transfer in magenta due to current flow to the magenta OPC drumLow humidity:Offset image in magenta halftone areas due to paper charged positive too muchWhen adjusting the current with this SP mode, the value should be lower than transfercurrent.

2-801-6 [FC] S 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 1 / 1 µ A/step ]2-801-7 [FC] S 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 1 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-801-8 [FC] D 62.5 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-801-9 [FC] D 125 *BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µ A/step ]

2-801-14 [K] B TH S *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 5 / 0.1/step ]

2-801-15 [FC] B TH S *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]

2-801-16 [K] B OHP *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 5 / 0.1/step ]

2-801-17 [FC] B OHP *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]

2-801-18 [K] B TH D *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 5 / 0.1/step ]

2-801-19 [FC] B TH D *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]

2-801-20 [K] SP S *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 8 / 0.1/step ]

2-801-21 [K] SP D *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 12 / 0.1/step ]

2-801-22 [FC] SP S 62.5 *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]2-801-23 [FC] SP S 125 *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]

2-801-24 [FC] SP D 62.5 *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]

2-801-25 [FC] SP D 125 *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]

[PA Current Paper Size] Paper Attraction Roller Current - Paper Size CorrectionPaper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, OHP

2-802

Adjusts the correction, depending on the paper size.When small-width paper is used for printing, the paper attraction roller current flows tothe non-image areas of OPC drum where the transfer belt touches the drum. Thismay cause paper misfeed due to insufficient current.To increase the current by 1.5 times, set the SP mode to “1.5.”

NOTE: Adjust only when a paper misfeed occurs with a small paper size. Increasingthe current too much may cause image offset in magenta halftone areas.

2-802-1 N LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step ]

2-802-2 N A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step ]

2-802-3 TH LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step ]

2-802-4 TH A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step ]

2-802-5 OHP LT SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.4 / 0.1/step ]

2-802-6 OHP A5 SEF *BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 4.0 / 0.1/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-25 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Mirror Motor] Mirror Positioning Motor ([Color]) 2-908

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects themirror position, which corrects the optically skewed image; however, this will be

automatically corrected at the next line position adjustment.NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can beadjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.

2-908-2 [C] *BCU

2-908-3 [M] *BCU

2-908-4 [Y] *BCU

[ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 pulse/step ] DFU

2-909 [Main-scan Reg.] Main-scan Registration ([Color])

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects themain scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next lineposition adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-010

to 012 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from thenext line position adjustment.NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be

adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.

1 dot = 20µ

2-909-1 [Y] *BCU

2-909-2 [M] *BCU

2-909-3 [C] *BCU

2-909-4 [K] *BCU

[ -500 to 500 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] DFU

2-916 [Sub-scan Reg.] Sub-scan Registration ([Color Mode, Color], Resolution)

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the subscan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line positionadjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-016 to 021(this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the nextline position adjustment.NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be

adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.

600 dpi: 1 dot = 40µ, 1200dpi: 1 dot = 20µ

2-916-1 [K] 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 7510 / 1 dot ] DFU

2-916-2 [FC,K] 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 15038 / 1 dot ] DFU

2-916-3 [FC,Y] 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 10402 / 1 dot ] DFU

2-916-4 [FC,M] 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 1136 / 1 dot ] DFU 2-916-5 [FC,C] 1200 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 5762 / 1 dot ] DFU

2-916-6 [K] 600 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 3755 / 1 dot ] DFU

2-916-7 [FC,K] 600 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 7519 / 1 dot ] DFU

2-916-8 [FC,Y] 600 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 5201 / 1 dot ] DFU

2-916-9 [FC,M] 600 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 568 / 1 dot ] DFU

2-916-10 [FC,C] 600 *BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 2881 / 1 dot ] DFU

[Main Scan Lgth Det] Main-scan Length Detection 2-919

Enables or disables the main-scan length detection.

2-919-1 MScan Lgth D *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Disable1: Enable

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-26 SM

2-994 [Main Scan Reg Cor] Main-scan Registration Correction ([Color])Not used. DFU

2-994-1 [Y] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] DFU

2-994-2 [M] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 1 / 1 dot/step ] DFU

2-994-3 [C] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 1 / 1 dot/step ] DFU

2-994-4 [K] *BCU [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] DFU

[Motor Reset] Mirror Positioning Motor Reset2-995

Rotates the mirror position motors (CMY) by 250 pulses clockwise; then by 125pulses counterclockwise. This moves the mirrors back to the initial position. Then, thesettings of SP2-908-002 to 004 are reset to 0.When the line position adjustment fails, it is one of possible causes when the mirrorposition motor locks. Performing this SP mode can move the mirrors back to theoriginal position if it locks. Then, do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002).

2-995-1 Motor Reset *BCU

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-27 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP3-XXX (Process)

3-005 [TD Initial] TD Sensor Initialization ([Color])

3-005-1 [K]

3-005-2 [Y]

3-005-3 [M]3-005-4 [C]

3-005-5 [All Color]

Initializes the developer. DFU

Result *BCU [ 1 to 9 / - / - ]1: Success2 to 9: Failure

3-005-6

Displays the developer initialization result. All colors are displayed. Values is displayed in the order K Y C M.e.g., 1 1 2 1: Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeededSee the troubleshooting section for details.

[Vcnt Initial] Vcnt Initial Setting Display ([Color]) 3-006

Displays the initial Vcnt value.3-006-1 [K] *BCU

3-006-2 [Y] *BCU

3-006-3 [M] *BCU

3-006-4 [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 240 / 100 / 0.1/step ]

[Vcnt Current] Vcnt Current Value Display ([Color]) 3-007

Displays the current Vcnt value.

3-007-1 [K] *BCU

3-007-2 [Y] *BCU

3-007-3 [M] *BCU

3-007-4 [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 240 / - / 0.1/step ]

3-008 [Humidity]

Humidity *BCU [ 0 to 100 / - / 1/step ]3-008-1

Displays the humidity measured by the humidity/temperature sensor.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-28 SM

3-107 [Vsg Display] Vsg Display (Front or Rear)

Vsg Front *BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]3-107-1

Displays the Vsg value of the front ID sensor.

Vsg is normally 4.0 ± 0.5 V.If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this is detected 3 times consecutively, itleads to SC385.

LED Current Front *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]3-107-2

Displays the ID sensor LED current adjusted during Vsg adjustment.

Vsg Center *BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]3-107-3

Displays the Vsg value of the center ID sensor.

Vsg is normally 4.0 ± 0.5 V.If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this is detected 3 times consecutively, itleads to SC385.

LED Current Center *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]3-107-4


Vsg Rear *BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]3-107-5

Displays the Vsg value of the rear ID sensor.Vsg is normally 4.0 ± 0.5 V.If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this is detected 3 times consecutively, itleads to SC385.

LED Current Rear *BCU [ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]3-107-6


Vsg avg bk *BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]3-107-7

Displays the average black Vsg value of the center ID sensor.

3-120 [Dev. Gamma Target] Development Gamma Target ([Color])

Adjusts the development gamma by changing the Vref value used for toner density

control.Vref is automatically corrected so that the gamma measured during the process

control self-check becomes “the value set with this SP mode ± 0.15”

3-120-1 [K] *BCU [ 1.00 to 3.00 / 1.90 / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step ] DFU

3-120-2 [Y] *BCU

3-120-3 [M] *BCU

3-120-4 [C] *BCU

[ 1.00 to 3.00 / 1.65 / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step ] DFU

3-121 [Dev. Gamma Display] Development Gamma Display ([Color]) Displays the development gamma measured during the process control self-check.

3-121-1 [K] *BCU

3-121-2 [Y] *BCU

3-121-3 [M] *BCU3-121-4 [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 10 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV /step ]Normal Range: 1.00 to 2.00

[Vk Display] Vk Display ([Color]) 3-122

Displays the current Vk value.

3-122-1 [K] *BCU

3-122-2 [Y] *BCU

3-122-3 [M] *BCU

3-122-4 [C] *BCU

[ -255 to 255 / - / 1 V/step ]Normal Range: -50 to 50

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-29 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Vref Display] Current Vref Display ([Color]) 3-123

Displays the current Vref value.

3-123-1 [K] *BCU

3-123-2 [Y] *BCU3-123-3 [M] *BCU

3-123-4 [C] *BCU

[ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]

3-125 [Process Control]

ON/OFF *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: OFF (Use the fixed values for VD, VL andVB set with SP2-001, SP2-103, and SP2-201.)1: ON

3-125-1

Enables or disables process control.

LD Control *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: Fixed (at the value in SP2-103)

1: Controlled by process control2: Controlled by LD power selection

3-125-2

Selects the LD control mode.

Auto TD Adj.

NOTE: The words seen onthe display are indicated inItalics.

*BCU [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: Disable 1: Initial & Non-use self-check2: Job End & Non-use self-check3: Initial & Job End & Non-use self-check

3-125-3

Specifies when to perform the Auto Toner Density Adjustment. When performing the Auto Toner Density Adjustment, the machine supplies or consumes toner so that the

development gamma is within ± 0.15 of the gamma target.Change if the customer complains of toner density fluctuations. Before changing thesetting away from 0, check whether the forced TD adjustment (3-126-2) is effective. Ifthe problem is persistent, then change to 1, 2, or 3. However, the machine takesseveral minutes to do this adjustment.

ACC *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step ]0: Disable1: Process Control Self-check2: Auto TD Adjustment & Process Control Self-check

3-125-4

Enables or disables the process control self-check before printing the ACC pattern.NOTE: If color balance changes during multi-copy runs after ACC is performed, select1 or 2. Setting 2 can precisely adjust the image density; however, it takes about 6minutes. Select 1 or 2 depending on the customer’s requirement.

TD Adj. Cndtn *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: Unconditional1: Conditional

3-125-5

Specifies whether temperature and humidity are taken into account when deciding thetiming of the auto toner density adjustment (described in SP 3-125-3).Timing for the auto toner density adjustment is determined by the setting of SP3-125-003. In addition, if SP 3-125-5 is set to 1, the auto toner density adjustment is donewhen the temperature and humidity meet specified conditions (same conditions asused for transfer current correction).Specify “1” when both temperature and humidity are both high or low.

⇒

⇒

Rev. 01/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-30 SM

3-125 [Process Control]

TD Adj. Times *BCU [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]3-125-6

Limits the number of auto toner density adjustments.The auto toner density adjustment consists of three steps: detecting the developmentgamma, supplying or consuming toner, and detecting the development gamma again.

When these three steps are all complete, it means a single auto toner densityadjustment is complete.

3-126 [Forced Self Check] Forced Self-check

3-126-1 Forced Self Check Performs a forced process control self-check.

3-126-2 Forced TD Adj. Performs a forced auto toner densityadjustment.

[Pointer Display] Pointer Table Display ([Color]) 3-902

Displays the number in the pointer table that was selected during the latest processcontrol self-check.

3-902-1 Printer [K] *BCU

3-902-2 Printer [Y] *BCU

3-902-3 Printer [M] *BCU

3-902-4 Printer [C] *BCU

3-902-5 CF [K] *BCU

3-902-6 CF [Y] *BCU

3-902-7 CF [M] *BCU

3-902-8 CF [C] *BCU

[ 1 to 30 / - / 1/step ]

3-903 [M/A Target] M/A Target ([Color])

Adjusts the M/A (Mass per Area, mg/cm2) value used during the process control self-

check. Adjusting this changes the development bias. This causes the solid ID to increase ordecrease. If developer capability causes an ID problem, toner density needs to beadjusted with SP3-120-1 to 4, depending on the color.

3-903-1 Printer [K] *BCU




3-903-5 CF [K] *BCU

3-903-6 CF [Y] *BCU

3-903-7 CF [M] *BCU

3-903-8 CF [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 1.50 / 0.60 / 0.05 mg/cm2 /step ] DFU

[M/A for LD] M/A Target for LD Correction ([Color]) 3-904

Adjusts the M/A value used during the LD correction mode. This value is effectivewhen SP3-125-2 “LD Control Selection” is set to “2”. Adjusting this data effects the image reproduction especially in highlight areas.

3-904-1 Printer [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 0.10 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU




[ 0 to 1.00 / 0.12 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU

3-904-5 CF [K] *BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 0.13 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU

3-904-6 CF [Y] *BCU

3-904-7 CF [M] *BCU

3-904-8 CF [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 1.00 / 0.14 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-31 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

3-905 [M/A Target]

Adjusts the target amount of each toner on paper sheets.These values are optimized before shipment. Do not change the values. Changingthese values does not affect toner density on paper sheets.

3-905-1 Intrvl [K] *BCU

3-905-2 Intrvl [Y] *BCU

3-905-3 Intrvl [M] *BCU

3-905-4 Intrvl [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 1.50 / 0.30 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU

Displays the amount of each toner on the paper. A problem may have occurred in the copier engine if the value is high or low (i.e., if

the difference between SP3-905-1/2/3/4 and SP3-5/6/7/8 is larger than ±0.03mg/cm

2).

Possible problems: Defective TD sensor, defective ID sensor, toner near-end (if thevalue is lower than the target), defective toner supply mechanism

3-905-5 Intrvl [K] *BCU

3-905-6 Intrvl [Y] *BCU

3-905-7 Intrvl [M] *BCU3-905-8 Intrvl [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 1.500 / - / 0.001 mg/cm2 /step]

3-906 [PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks

Job End *BCU [ 0 to 999 / 200 / 1 print/step ]3-906-1

Specifies the execution timing of the job end process control self-check.The job end process control self-check is automatically done after a job is completedwhen 200 prints have been made since the last self-check.The counter for the job end process control self-check resets when one of thefollowing process control self-checks is done.

• Initial

• Interval: Interrupt

• Non-use Time

• During Toner EndWhen K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient inSP3-906-5.

Interrupt *BCU [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step ]3-906-2

Specifies the execution timing of the interrupt process control self-check.The interrupt process control self-check is automatically done if the number of printsin the job exceeds the number set in this SP mode. When the print job is completed,the counter is reset, even if the interrupt self check did not occur.When K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient inSP3-906-5.

Non-use Time 1 *BCU [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step ]

0: Disable

3-906-3

Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.The non-use time process control self-check is automatically done after the number ofprints set with this SP mode have been made and no prints have been made for thetime set with SP mode 3-906-4 since the last print job.If the conditions are met, the self-check will be done after the print job is completed.The counter is reset when the initial process control self-checks is done or when aprint is made.

Non-use Time 2 *BCU [ 0 to 2550 / 480 / 10 minutes/step ]0: Disable

3-906-4

Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-32 SM

3-906 [PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks

K Coefficient *BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step ] DFU 3-906-5

Sets the coefficient to calculate the counter value for black-and-white prints.With the default setting (100), counters used for process control count up by 1 when 1black-and-white print has been made.

3-910 [Vmin Display] Vmin Display ([Color])

[K] *BCU [ 0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01/step ]3-910-1

Displays the current Vmin value for K

[Color] *BCU [ 0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01/step ]3-910-2

Displays the lowest current Vmin value for the colors (CMY).

[Vt Current Display] Vt Current Display ([Color]) 3-911

Displays the current Vt value.

3-911-1 [K] *BCU

3-911-2 [Y] *BCU3-911-3 [M] *BCU

3-911-4 [C] *BCU

[ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]

[Vt Average Display] Vt Average Display ([Color]) 3-912

Displays the average Vt value.

3-912-1 [K] *BCU

3-912-2 [Y] *BCU

3-912-3 [M] *BCU

3-912-4 [C] *BCU

[ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]

[Tonver Supply Time] Toner Supply Time Display ([Color]) 3-913 Displays the toner supply clutch on time for the most recent page.

3-913-1 [K] *BCU

3-913-2 [Y] *BCU

3-913-3 [M] *BCU

3-913-4 [C] *BCU

[ 0 to 5000 / - / 10 ms/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-33 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

3-920 [OPC Refresh]

Temperature *BCU [ 10 to 30 / 25 / 1°C /step ]3-920-1

This SP determines the temperature threshold for determining whether refresh mode

is done just after the machine is switched on.The charge roller generates NOx (nitrogen oxides), and these contaminate the OPCdrum surface and may cause a smeared image.Just after the main switch is turned on, if the temperature measured by both thethermistor located at the right side on the laser optics housing unit and thetemperature/humidity sensor is greater than the temperature specified in this SPmode, refresh mode is done before initial process control.During refresh mode, toner is developed on the OPC with 50V development potentialand cleaned to remove NOx. This cycle is repeated a few times.

Humidity *BCU [ 10 to 90 / 75 / 1%/step ]3-920-2

This SP determines the humidity threshold for determining whether refresh mode isdone just after the machine is switched on.Just after the main switch is turned on, if the humidity measured by the

temperature/humidity sensor is greater than the humidity specified in this SP mode,refresh mode is done before the initial process control self-check.

Prints *BCU [ 10 to 2550 / 200 / 10 prints/step ]3-920-3

Specifies how often refresh mode is done.When the total number of prints since the last refresh mode exceeds the numberspecified in this SP mode, refresh mode is done before the job end process controlself-check.

Mode Set *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Done at power on and toner end recovery2: Done at power on, toner end recovery, andafter the specified number of prints.

3-920-4

Enables/disables refresh mode.

NOTE: Refresh mode is done during the toner end recovery self-check after a newtoner cartridge is installed.

Forced3-920-5

Executes a forced refresh mode.Use this mode when the image is smeared. It takes about 1 minute. Also use after replacing the components of the transfer unit (see section 3).

Auto Toner Refresh(Auto Toner Refresh)

*BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]0: Disabled1: Enabled

3-920-6

Performs a toner refresh during the OPC refresh mode by changing the developmentbias from 50V to 400V.Enable this SP mode when dirty background and/or firefly spots appear intermittentlyon prints with a low image area ratio.While making prints with a low image area ratio, developer is agitated with less tonersupplied. This may cause the toner-carrier attraction force to increase or toner tocoagulate.This sometimes causes firefly spots or dirty background when a large amount of toneris supplied.NOTE: When enabling this SP mode, the following SP modes should be changed.SP3-906-001 Job End Process Control Self-check

200 (Default) -> 100SP3-920-003 OPC Refresh Mode / Prints

200 (Default) -> 100

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-34 SM

3-921 [Forced Toner Refresh] Forced Toner Refresh

Perform forced toner refresh mode.When the developer has deteriorated or when prints are made in a very low humidity

condition, dirty background may appear continuously.When this kind of dirty background appears, check whether or not the developmentgamma is within the target (SP3-120 and 121). If the development gamma is notwithin the target, do this SP mode.The machine automatically does the toner refresh mode in the following sequence.1. Consumes toner in the development unit without toner supply until toner end is

detected2. Starts toner recovery mode.3. Starts process control self-check.

NOTE: If toner is drastically consumed for a short time, this may cause carrier to flowout. To prevent this, toner is consumed over a long period of time. (It takes about 20minutes to complete this toner refresh mode).

3-921-1 K

3-921-2 All Color

[OPC Refresh2]3-922

Specifies when the OPC refresh is executed for CMY drums, which forcibly creates atemporary 15mm-wide toner line on the drum surface by applying the developmentbias (200V) and turning on the development clutch at the end of a job.Note that this OPC refresh is a separate process from the one controlled by SP 3-920and 3-921.

3-922-1 Mode Set *BCU [ 0 ∼ 2 / 1 / 1 /step ]0: Disable (OPC refresh is not executed.)1: Low coverage (OPC refresh is executed

after an output of low coverage ratio.)2: Every time (OPC refresh is executed afterevery job.)

[P Control Result] Process Control Self-check Result3-975

Displays the result of the latest process control self-check. All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “K Y C M”e.g., 1 1 9 1: The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were successfulSee the troubleshooting section for details

3-975-1 P Ctrl Result *BCU [ 0 to 9999 / - / 1/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-35 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

[SubScanMagnification] Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment4-008

Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.

4-008-1 SubScanMagnification *CTL [ -1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step ] FA

[Leading Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment4-010

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan direction.

4-010-1 Leading Edge Reg. *CTL [ -3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

[Side-to-Side Reg.] Side-to-Side registration Adjustment4-011

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the mainscan direction.

4-011-1 Side-to-Side Reg. *CTL [ -6.0 to 6.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

[Blank Margin] Blank Margin Adjustment4-012

Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gapbetween the original and the scale.

4-012-1 Leading Edge

4-012-2 Trailing Edge

4-012-3 Left

4-012-4 Right

*CTL [ 0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

[Scanner Free Run]4-013

Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT

4-013-1 Lamp: OFF

4-013-2 Lamp: ON

[Scan Operation]4-017

Makes one scan with generating an F-Gate signal and shading on or off in thefollowing mode.Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT

Uses this SP mode to check if the F-Gate signal is properly generated (F-Gate tellsthe engine to start printing data).

4-017-1 Shading ON

4-017-2 Shading OFF

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-36 SM

4-205 [Black ADS Level] DFU

4-205-1 Black ADS Level *CTL Do not change the setting. Use SP4-460.

[APS Operation Check]4-301

Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors.(See Input Check Table.)

4-301-1 APS Operation Check

[APS A5size Detection]4-303

Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are allOFF.

4-303-1 APS A5size Check *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: No original

1: A5 Lengthwise

4-305 [8K/16K Detection] *BCU

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: A/B

1: 8K/16K

4-305-1 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.

[IPU Test Pattern]4-417

Selects the IPU test pattern.

4-417-1 IPU Test Pattern [ 0 to 16 / 0 / 1/step ]0: Scanned image1: Grid pattern2: Slant grid pattern3: Gradation main scan14: Gradation sub scan15: Gradation RBGYMCK6: UCR pattern7: Color patch 16 (1)8: Color patch 16 (2)9: Color patch 6410: Grid pattern YMCK11: Color patch YMCK

12: Gray pattern (1)13: Gray pattern (2)14: Gradation main scan215: Scanned + Grid pattern16: Scanned + Gray scale

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-37 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Saturation Adj.] Saturation Adjustment4-440

Adjusts the level of saturation for copying.

4-440-1 Saturation Adj. *

CTL

[ 0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step ]

0: High1: Lowest2: Lower3: Default4: Higher5: Highest

4-460 [Digital Black ADS Level] *BCU [ 0 to 128 / 10 / 1 step]

4-460-1 Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode.

4-540 [Printer V] [ -127 to 128 / 1 / 1/step]

4-540-1 R:K4-540-2 R:C

4-540-3 R:M

4-540-4 R:Y

4-540-5 Y:K

4-540-6 Y:C

4-540-7 Y:M

4-540-8 Y:Y

4-540-9 G:K

4-540-10 G:C

4-540-11 G:M

4-540-12 G:Y

4-540-13 C:K4-540-14 C:C

4-540-15 C:M

4-540-16 C:Y

4-540-17 B:K

4-540-18 B:C

4-540-19 B:M

4-540-20 B:Y

4-540-21 M:K

4-540-22 M:C

4-540-23 M:M

4-540-24 M:Y

*CTL Specifies the printer vector correction value.

[R Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Red4-628

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.

4-628-1 R EVEN

4-628-2 R ODD

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-38 SM

4-629 [G Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Green

4-629-1 G EVEN

4-629-2 G ODD

4-629-3 G BK EVEN4-629-4 G BK ODD

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on thecontroller for Green.

4-630 [B Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Blue

4-630-1 B EVEN

4-630-2 B ODD

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on thecontroller for Blue.

4-661 [R Gain Display (Last Adjust)] Gain Adjustment Red (Last Adjustment)

4-661-1 R EVEN

4-661-2 R ODD

*BCU

This program displays the previous result ofSP4-628.

4-662 [G Gain Display (Last Adjust)] Gain Adjustment Green (Last Adjustment)

4-661-1 G EVEN

4-661-2 G ODD

*BCU


4-663 [B Gain Display (Last Adjust)] Gain Adjustment Blue (Last Adjustment)

4-661-1 B EVEN

4-661-2 B ODD

*BCU


4-685 [Reference Adj.: R] Reference Adjustment Red DFU4-685-1 Reference Adj.: R *BCU

Do not change the setting. Use SP4-885.

4-686 [Reference Adj.: G] Reference Adjustment Green DFU

4-686-1 Reference Adj.: G *BCU

Do not change the setting. Use SP4-886.

4-687 [Reference Adj.: B] Reference Adjustment Blue DFU

4-687-1 Reference Adj.: B *CTL Do not change the setting. Use SP4-887.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-39 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[DF: Density Adj.] DF Density Adjustment4-688

Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF. Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is

different.4-688-1 DF: Density Adj. *CTL [ 83 to 100 / 86 / 1 %/ step ]

[DF: Density Correction]4-800

Sets a coefficient to adjust the image density level when scanning an image with the ARDF.

4-800-1 R

4-800-2 G

4-800-3 B

*CTL [ -20 to 20 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU

4-885 [Level Convert Adj.: R] *BCU

[ -128 to 127 / 49 / 1/step]

4-885-1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of red.

4-886 [Level Convert Adj.: G] *BCU

[ -128 to 127 / 49 / 1/step]

4-886-1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of green.

4-887 [Level Convert Adj.: B] *BCU

[ -128 to 127 / 49 / 1/step]

4-887-1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of blue.

4-903 [Ver. Line Correct] *CTL [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]

4-903-1 This SP selects the level of the vertical line correction. The vertical line can occurwhile the ARDF is feeding the originals from the original tray.0: Deactivated1: Very low2: Low3: High4: Very highl

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-40 SM

4-904 [Scanner IPU Test]

Test1:Register Access 00: OK11, 12, 13, 14, 15: NG

4-904-1

Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the scanner IPU board and displaysthe result.

Test2: Image Path 00: OK21, 22, 23, 24, 25: NG

4-904-2

Performs an image path check on the scanner IPU board and displays the result.

[Dither Selection]4-905

Changes the parameters for error diffusion.

4-905-1 Dither Selection *CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU

4-907 [VPU Test Pattern]Test Pattern: R [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step ]

0: Default (Scanned Image)1: Cyan pattern2: White pattern3: Cyan Pattern 16 steps4: Line pattern

4-907-1

Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.

Test Pattern: G [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step ]0: Default (Scanned Image)1: Magenta pattern2: White pattern3: Magenta Pattern 16 steps4: Line pattern

4-907-2

Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.

Test Pattern: B [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step ]0: Default (Scanned Image)1: Yellow pattern2: White pattern3: Yellow Pattern 16 steps4: Line pattern

4-907-3

Selects the test pattern generated by the scanner IPU board.

4-918 [Manual Gamma Adj.]

4-918-9 Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.See ‘Replacement and Adjustment – Gamma Correction – Copy Mode’ for how touse.

Offset: Highlight

Offset: Middle

Offset: Shadow

Offset: IDmax

*CTL [ 0 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step ]

Adjusts the option data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.

Option: Highlight

Option: Middle

Option: Shadow

Option: IDmax

*CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-41 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Dot Position Cor.] Main Scan Dot Position Correction4-932

Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD.For details on this adjustment, see Replacement and Adjustment – Image Adjustment- Scanner

4-932-1 R: Left

4-932-2 R: Right4-932-3 B: Left

4-932-4 B: Right

*CTL [ 0 to 9 / 5 / 1 /step ]

[ADF Scan Glass Dust Check] 4-999

4-999-1 Check ON/OFF Change 0: OFF/1: ON)

4-999-2 Detect Level

*CTL

[ 0 to 8 / 5 / 1 /step ]

0: Lowest ←→ 8: Highest

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-42 SM

SP5-XXX (Mode)

[mm/inch Display Selection]5-024

Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.

5-024-1 mm/inch display *CTL 0: mm (Europe/Asia)

1: inch (USA)

[Counter Method]5-045

Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001.NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether thecounter value is negative or positive.

5-045-1 Counter Method *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Developments1: Prints

[Rom Update Display] 5-046

Enables or disables the ROM Update utility. When enabled, this utility will bedisplayed in the user program mode.

5-046-1 ROM Update *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 1 /- ] DFU 0: Enable1: Disable

[A3/DLT Double Count]5-104

Specifies whether the counter is double clicked for A3/DLT size prints.

5-104-1 Double Count *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Normal count1: Double count

5-113 [Optional Counter Type] *CTL

5-113-1 This program specifies the counter type.0: None 1: Key card (RK 3, 4) 2: Key card (down)3: Prepaid card 4: Coin rack 5: MF key card8: Key counter + Vendor 9: Bar-code Printer

5-118 [Disable Copying] *CTL [0: Not disabled/1: Disabled]

5-118-1 This program disables copying.

5-120 Mode Clear Opt. CounterRemoval

*CTL [0: Yes (removed)/1: Standby (installed but notused)/2: No (not removed)]

5-120-1 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install orremove an optional counter, check the settings.

5-121 Counter Up Timing *CTL [0: Feed/1: Exit]

5-121-1 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper feed”and “paper exit” respectively.

5-127 APS Mode *CTL [0: Not disabled/1: Disabled]

5-127-1 This program disables the APS.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-43 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5-128 Code Mode With Key/Card Option *CTL

5-128-1 DFU

5-131 Paper Size Type Selection *CTL [0: DOM (Japan)/1: USA /2: ERP (Europe)]

5-131-1 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the ABsystem (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).

5-150 By-Pass Length Setting *CTL 0: Off, 1: On

5-150-1 Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.

Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limitedto 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.

5-162 App. Switch Method *CTL [0: Soft Key Set/1: Hard Key Set]

5-162-1 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.

5-212 Page Numbering *CTL

This program adjusts the position of the page numbers.

5-212-3 Duplex Printout Right/Left Position [0 ∼99 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

5-212-4 Duplex Printout High/Low Position [0 ∼99 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

[Set Time]5-302

Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)

NA :-300 (New York)EU :+ 60 (Paris)CH :+480 (Peking)TW :+480 (Taipei) AS :+480 (Hong Kong)

5-302-2 Set Time *CTL#

[ -1440 to 1440 / 60 / 1 min./step ]

[User Code Counter Clear] 5-404

Clear all counters for users.

5-404-1 UCodeCtrClr [0 to 1 / 1 / 0/step]0: Not executed1: Executed

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-44 SM

5-501 PM Alarm *CTL

5501-1 PM Alarm Level Specifies the PM alarm level.

[0~9999 / 0 / 1 step]

0: Alarm off

1~9999: Specifies the PM alarm level. The PM alarm occurs when L x 1000 ≤ C, where L is thespecified level and C is the current PM counter value.

5501-2 Original Count Alarm 0: No alarm sounds

1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing

through the ARDF ≥ 10,000

5-504 Jam Alarm *CTL

5504-1 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are notincluded).

[0~3 / 3 / 1 step]

0: Zero (Off)1: Low (2.5K jams)

2: Medium (3K jams)

3: High (6K jams)

5-505 Error Alarm *CTL [0~255 / 50 / 100 copies per step] Japan only

5-507 Supply Alarm *CTL

5-507-1 Paper Supply Alarm 0: Off , 1: On, DFU

5-507-2 Staple Supply Alarm 0: Off , 1: On, Japan only

5-507-3 Toner Supply Alarm 0: Off , 1: On, DFU

5-507-128 Interval :Others5-507-132 Interval :A3

5-507-133 Interval :A4

5-507-134 Interval :A5

5-507-141 Interval :B4

5-507-142 Interval :B5

5-507-160 Interval :DLT

5-507-164 Interval :LG

5-507-166 Interval :LT

5-507-172 Interval :HLT

[00250 ~ 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step] DFU

5-508* CC Call *CTL

Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable5-508-1*

Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.

Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable5-508-2*

Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.

Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable5-508-3*

Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.

Low Call Mode 0: Normal mode, 1: Reduced mode5-508-4*

Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number ofcalls.

Jam Detection: Time Length [03~30 / 10 / 1]5-508-11*

Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper jam”. This

setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.

Rev. 05/2005

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-45 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Jam Detection: ContinuousCount

[02~10 / 5 / 1]5-508-12*

Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting isenabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.

Door Open: Time Length [03~30 / 10 / 1]5-508-13*

Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.

Jam Operation: Time Length 0: Automatic Call

1: Audible Warning at Machine

5-508-21*

Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended.

Jam Operation: ContinuousCount

0: Automatic Call

1: Audible Warning at Machine

5-508-22*

Determines what happens when consecutive paper jams occur.

Door Operation: Time Length 0: OFF, 1: ON5-508-23*

Determines what happens if the door remains open (15 min.).

Displays a warning if set to ON. Pressing the call button will contact the servicecenter. This setting is available for setting only if SP5508 004 is set for 1.

5-610 [ACC Factory Setting]

Recall5-610-4

Recalls the factory settings.

Overwrite5-610-5

Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.

Previous Setting5-610-6

Recalls the previous settings.

[Toner Ratio in 2C]5-611

Adjusts the color balance of a single color (blue, green, or red) by changing theproportion of color toner (C, M, and/or Y).

5-611-1 B-C [ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]

5-611-2 B-M [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]

5-611-3 G-C [ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]

5-611-4 G-Y [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]

5-611-5 R-M [ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1 %/step ]

5-611-6 R-Y

*CTL

[ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]

5-801 [Memory Clear]NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following this table.

5-801-1 All Clear

Resets all correction data for process control and all software counters, andreturns all modes and adjustments to their default values.

To execute, hold down for over 3 seconds, and then turn the copier off andon again.

Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the copier hasmalfunctioned due to a damaged NVRAM.

5-801-2 ENG All

Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below. 5-801-3 SCS

Clears the system settings.

IMH Memory Clr5-801-4

Clears IMH data. DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-46 SM

MCS5-801-5

Clears MCS data. DFU

Copier Application5-801-6

Clears the copy application settings.

Fax Application5-801-7

Clears the fax application settings.Printer Application5-801-8

Clears the printer application settings.

Scanner Application5-801-9

Clears the scanner application settings.

Network Application5-801-10

Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.

NCS5-801-11

Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also),SmartNetMonitor for Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.

5-801-12 R-FAXInitializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.

5-801-13 IPU

Clears the IPU settings

5-801-14 Clear DCS Settings

5-801-15 Clear UCS Settings

5-802 EngineFreeRun

EngineFreeRun5-802-1

Performs a free run on the copier engine.NOTE:

• The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LTprinting from the 1st tray. Therefore, paper should be loaded in the 1st tray, butpaper is not fed.

• The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for atest.

5-803 [Input Check] See section 5-3-2.

5-804 [Output Check] See section 5-3-3.

[Destination Code] Destination Code Display 5-808

Displays the destination code.5-808-1 Destination *BCU

[SC Detection ON/OFF] SC Detection ON/OFF 5-809

Enable or disables the service call detection (SC codes will be ignored if disablingthis SP mode).

5-809-1 All *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Enable1: Disable

5-809-2 Vib Motor

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-47 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[SC Reset]5-810

Resets a type A service call condition.NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.

5-810-1 SC Reset

[Machine Serial No.] Machine Serial Number Display5-811

Displays the machine serial number.

5-811-2 SN Display *BCU

5-812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]

Service *CTL

5-812-1

Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on

the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter” menu.This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can beinput).

Facsimile *CTL5-812-2

Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number isprinted on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter” menu ifthe Meter Charge mode is selected with SP5-930-1.This can be up to 13 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can beinput).

Supply *CTL5-812-3

Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter thenumber and press #.

Press the key to input a pause. Press the “Clear modes” key to delete thetelephone number.

Operation *CTL5-812-4

Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number andpress #.

Press the key to input a pause. Press the “Clear modes” key to delete thetelephone number.

5-816 [Remote Service]

5-816-1 I/F Setting

5-816-2 CE Call

5-816-3 Function Flag

5-816-4 Communication Test Call

5-816-5 Device Information Call

5-816-6 Device Information CallDisplay Setting

5-816-7 SSL Disable

5-816-8 RCG Connect Timeout

5-816-9 RCG Write Timeout

5-816-10 RCG Read Timeout

5-816-11 Port 80 Enable

*CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] DFU 0: Disable1: Enable

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-48 SM

5-821 [CSS-PI Device Co]

5-821-1 CSS-PI Device Co [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] DFU

5-821-2 RCG IP Address

*CTL

[NV-RAM Data Upload] 5-824

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) fromthe NVRAM to a flash memory card.

5-824-1 # [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]0: Not executed1: Executed

[NV-RAM Data Download] 5-825

Downloads the UP and SP mode data from a flash memory card to the NVRAM

5-825-1 NvramDownload # [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Not executed1: Executed

5-828 [Network Setting]

5-828-66 Job Spooling Clear: StartTime

Treatment of the job when a spooled job existsat power on.

0: Data is cleared

1: Automatically printed

5-828-69 Job Spooling (Protocol) Validates or invalidates the job spoolingfunction for each protocol.

0: Validates

1: Invalidatesbit0: LPR

bit1: FTP

bit2: IPP

bit3: SMB

bit4: BMLinkS

bit5: DIPRINT

bit6: (Reserved)

bit7: (Reserved)

5-828-74 Delete Password Deletes passwords.

5-828-84 Print Settings List Prints the NCS parameter list

5-828-90 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) Validates or invalidates the Telnet protocol.

5-828-91 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) Enables or disables the Web operation.5-828-115 SMB Computer Name Specifies the SMB computer name.

5-828-116 SMB Work Group Name

*CTL

Specifies the SMB workgroup name.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-49 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5-832 [HDD] HDD Initialization

5-832-1 HDD Formatting (ALL)

5-832-2 HDD Formatting (IMH)

5-832-3 HDD Formatting(Thumbnail)

5-832-4 HDD Formatting (Job Log)

5-832-5 HDD Formatting (PrinterFonts)

5-832-6 HDD Formatting (User Info)

5-832-7 Mail RX Data

5-832-8 Mail TX Data

5-832-9 HDD Formatting (Data for aDesign)

5-832-10 HDD Formatting (Log)

5-832-11 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)

Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode onlyif there is a hard disk error.

[Job Log On/Off]5-833

Saves the result of the jobs in the job log. If this mode is enabled, the result iswritten on the HDD. If no HDD is installed, this feature is disabled even if this SP isset to ‘enabled’.

5-833-7 JobLog ON/OFF *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Disabled1: Enabled

5-836 Capture Settings *CTL

Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable5-836-1

With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot beinitialized, displayed, or selected.

Panel Setting 0: Disable, 1: Enable5-836-2

Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated fromthe initial system screen. The setting for SP58361 has priority

5-836-71 to 5-836-76, Copier and Printer Document Reduction

The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to thedocument management server via the MLB. [0~2 / 2 / 1] Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed

5-836-71 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 2: 1/4

5-836-72 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 0: 1/4

5-836-73 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 0: 1/4

5-836-74 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 2: 1/45-836-75 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 0: 1/4

5-836-76 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: ½, 0: 1/4

5-836-77 Reduction for Printer Color 1200

5-836-78 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200

5-836-81 to 5-836-86, Stored document format

The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent tothe document management server via the MLB. Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-50 SM

5-836-081 Format for Copy Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

5-836-082 Format for Copy B&W Text 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,

2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR5-836-083 Format Copy B&W Other 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,

2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

5-836-084 Format for Printer Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

5-836-085 Format for Printer B&W 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

5-836-086 Format for Printer B&W HQ 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

Default for JPEG [5~95 / 50 / 1]5-836-091

Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document managementserver via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.

Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.

5-839 [IEEE1394]

5-839-4 Host Name DFU

5-839-7 Cycle Master DFU

5-839-8 BCR mode DFU

5-839-9 IRM 1394a Check DFU

5-839-10 Unique ID DFU

5-839-11 Logout DFU

5-839-12 Login DFU

5-839-13 Login MAX

*CTL

DFU

5-840 [IEEE 802.11b]

Current SSID *CTL5-840-4

Enters a unique ID (up to 32 characters long) to identify the device when it isoperating in an area with another wireless LAN network.

Channel Max *CTL [ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]Europe/Asia: 1 to 13USA: 1 to 11

5-840-6

Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via thewireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. Thedefault settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust theupper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU

Note: Do not change the settingChannel Min *CTL [ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]Europe/Asia: 1 to 13USA: 1 to 11

5-840-7

Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via thewireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. Thedefault settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust thelower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU Note: Do not change the setting

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-51 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

WEP key Select *CTL [00~11 / 00 / 1 binary]00: Key #101: Key #2 (Reserved)

10: Key #3 (Reserved)11: Key #4 (Reserved)

5-840-11

Selects the WEP key.

5-840-18* SSID Key Check

5-840-20 WEP mode *CTL [0~1/0/1]0: Max. 64-bit (10 characters)1: Max. 128-bit (10, 26 characters)Displayed only when the option 801.11b forwireless LAN is installed.

Determines the operation mode of the WEP key.

5-841 [Supply Name Setting]

5-841-1 Tone Name Setting: Black5-841-2 Tone Name Setting: Cyan

5-841-3 Tone Name Setting:Yellow

5-841-4 Tone Name Setting:Magenta

5-841-5 OrgStamp

5-841-7 OrgStamp

5-841-11 Staple Std1




*CTL Specifies supply names. These appear on thescreen when the user presses the Inquirybutton in the user tools screen.

5-844 [USB]

Transfer Rate *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]0: Auto Change1: Full speed

5-844-1

Adjusts the USB transfer rate.

5-844-2 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU

5-844-3 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU

5-844-4 Device Release Number *CTL Displays the development release versionnumber. DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-52 SM

Delivery Server Setting *CTL5-845

Provides items for delivery server settings.

FTP Port No. [0~65535 / 3670 / 1]5-845-1

Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.IP Address (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.2555-845-2

Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under thetransfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.

Delivery Error Display Time

Netfiles:

[0~999 / 300 / 1]5-845-6

Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayedwhen a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application andan external device.

5-845-8 IP Address (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255

Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as thesecondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP

address without reference to the DNS setting.5-845-9 Delivery Server Model [0~4/ 0 / 1]

Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.

0: Unknown

1: SG1 Provided

2: SG1 Package

3: SG2 Provided

4: SG2 Package

5-845-10 Delivery Svr Capability [0~255 / 0 / 1]

Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits

Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible

Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possibleBit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists

Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists

Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists

Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists

Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to “0”)

Changes thecapability ofthe registered

that the I/Odeviceregistered.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-53 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5-846 UCS Settings *CTL

Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID5-846-1

Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is

only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC orIEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.

Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID5-846-2

Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling themachine off and on.

Maximum Entries [2000~50000/ 2000 /1]5-846-3

Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.

If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared,and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.

Delivery Server Model 0: Not used, 1:SG1 Provided,

2: SG1 Package, 3: SG2 Provided4: SG2 Package

5-846-4

Changes the model of the transfer server registered for the I/O device.

Delivery Server Capability Bit 7 = 1 Comment information

Bit 6 = 1 Address direct entry possible

Bit 5 = 1 Mail Rx confirmation possible

Bit 4 = 1 Address book auto update

Bit 3 = 1 Fax Rx function

[0~255 / 0 / 2]

5-846-5

Changes the capability of the server registered for the I/O device.

Delivery Server Retry Timer [0~255/ 0 /1]5-846-6

Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the

delivery server address book.Delivery Server Retry Times [0~255/ 0 /1]5-846-7

Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire thedelivery server address book.

Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000~50000 / 2000 / 1]5-846-8

Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user informationmanaged by UCS.

5-846-10 LDAP Search Timeout [1~255 / 60 / 1]

Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.

5-846-50 Initialize All Directory Info. Clears all directory information managed by UCS,including all user codes.

5-846-70 LDAP Attribute (Name) Allows you to enter a search attribute other than

the default mail (cn) for the LDAP server search.5-846-71 LDAP Attribute (Mail) Allows you to enter a search attribute other than

the default mail address (mail) for the LDAPserver search.

5-846-72 LDAP Attribute (Fax) Allows you to enter a search attribute other thanthe default facsimile telephone number(FacsimileTelephoneNumber) for the LDAP serversearch.

5-846-73 LDAP Attribute (Organization) Allows you to enter a search attribute other thanthe default organization name (o) for the LDAPserver search.

5-846-74 LDAP Attribute (Organizational

Unit)

Allows you to enter a search attribute other than

the default organization unit name (ou) for theLDAP server search.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-54 SM

5-846-80 Backup FCU Backs up all directory information on the HDD tothe FCU ROM.

5-846-90 Plain Data Forbidden Allows you to prevent the address from plain data.This is a security function that preventsunauthorized access to address book data.

0: No check. Address book data not protected.1: Check. Allows operation of UCS without data

from HDD or SC card and without creatingaddress book information with plain data.

Net File Resolution Reduction *CTL 5-847

5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data transferredexternally by the Net File page reference function. [0~2 / 2 / 1]

5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile.

“Net files” are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and theDeskTopBinder software.

5-847-1 Rate for Copy Color5-847-2 Rate for Copy B&W Text

5-847-3 Rate for Copy B&W Other

5-847-4 Rate for Printer Color

5-847-5 Rate for Printer B&W

5-847-6 Rate for Printer B&W HQ

0: 1x1: 1/2x

2: 1/3x

3: 1/4x

5-847-7 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi

5-847-8 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi

Network Quality Default for JPEG5-847-21

Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. Thisfunction is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.

[5~95 / 50 / 1]

Web Service *CTL 5-848

5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.

5847 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default isequal to 1 gigabyte.

5-848-1 Access Control: NetfileProtocol

Bit switch settings.

0000: No access control

0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Routerhave no effect on capture.

5-848-2 Access Control: Repository(only Lower 4 bits)

0000: No access control0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.

5-848-3 Access Control: DocBox Print(only Lower 4 bits)

5-848-4 Access Control: User Directory(only Lower 4 bits)

5-848-5 Access Control: Delivery Input(only Lower 4 bits)

5-848-6 Access Control: Fax Control(only Lower 4 bits)

5-848-7 Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax(Lower 4 bits)

Switches access control on and off.

0000: OFF

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-55 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5-848-8 Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Scan(Lower 4 bits)

5-848-9 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4bits)

5-848-11 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Sys

(Lower 4 bits)5-848-12 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Copy

(Lower 4 bits)

5-848-13 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Fax(Lower 4 bits)

5-848-14 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Printer(Lower 4 bits)

5-848-15 Access Ctrl: Device CtrlScanner (Lower 4 bits)

5-848-21 Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4bits)

Switches access control on and off.

0000: OFF

5-848-100 Repository: max size of

download image

[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1/K]

5-849 Installation Date *CTL

5-849-1 Display DFU

5-849-2 Switch to Print DFU

5-850 Address Book Function *CTL Japan Only

Replacement of Circuit Classification5-850-3

The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all atonce to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason the

G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.

Stamp Data Download5-853

Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROMand copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. ThisSP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.

Note: This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.

[Remote ROM Update]5-856

Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable

5-856-2 Local Port *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]0: Disable1: Enable

5-857 Debug Log Save Function *CTL

On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: ON, 1: OFF5-857-1

Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured untilthis feature is switched on.

Debug Log Save Function *CTL

Target (2:HDD 3:SD) 2:HDD, 3:SD Card

5-857-2

Select “3” (SD Card) if the HDD unit is temporarily out of service

⇒

Rev. 05/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-56 SM

Save to HDD DFU 5-857-5

Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD.

A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SDCard. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied oneby one to each SD Card.

5-857-9 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)5-857-10 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)

5-857-11 Erase HDD Debug Data

5-857-12 Erase SD Card Debug Data

5-857-13 Free Space on SD Card

5-857-14 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)

5-857-15 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)

5-857-16 Make HDD Debug

5-857-17 Make SD Debug

Debug Save When *CTL5-858

These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to thedestination selected by SP5857 002.SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC errorcodes.

5-858-1 Engine SC Error Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors.

5-858-2 Controller SC Error Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors.

5-858-3 Any SC Error [0~65535 / 0 / 1]

5-858-4 Jam Stores jam errors.

5-859 Debug Save Key No. *CTL

5-859-1 Key 1

5-859-2 Key 25-859-3 Key 3

5-859-4 Key 4

5-859-5 Key 5

5-859-6 Key 6

5-859-7 Key 7

5-859-8 Key 8

5-859-9 Key 9

5-859-10 Key 10

These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files

for functions that use common memory on thecontroller board. (5.10)

[-9999999~9999999 / 0 / 1]⇒

Rev. 05/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-57 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5-860 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 *CTL

5-860-20 Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1~168 / 72 / 1]

Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception.

The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not receivedduring this prescribed time.

5-860-21 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0~1 / 1 /1]

Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

0: No

1: Yes

5-860-22 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0~1 / 0 / 1]

Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validatedaccount after the SMTP server is validated.

0: No. “From” item not switched.

1: Yes. “From item switched.

5-870 Common Key Info Writing *CTL

Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRSspecifications.

5-871 HDD Function Disable DFU *CTL [0~1 / 0 / 1] (0: OFF, 1: ON)

Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable thesetting.

Note: This SP is intended for use during the installation of the security DIMM, anoption that is not yet available.

5-873 SD Card Appli Move

5-873-1 Move Exec This SP copies the application programs from the SDcard in SD Card Slot 3.

5-873-2 Undo Exec This SP copies the application programs from the SDcard in SD Card Slot 3. Use this menu to

[Plug & Play Maker/Model Name] Plug & Play Name Selection5-907 Specifies the manufacturer and model name.

5-907-1 Plug/Play *BCU [ 0 to 11 / 0 / 1/step ] FA

MF Model Name NetBeui0 Ricoh Aficio 2232C Aficio2232C

1 Ricoh Aficio 2238C Aficio2238C

2 Savin C3324 C33243 Savin C3328 C3328

4 Gestetner DSc332 DSc332

5 Gestetner DSc338 DSc338

6 NRG DSc332 DSc332

7 NRG DSc338 DSc338

8 Infotec ISC 2432 ISC24329 Infotec ISC 2838 ISC2838

10 Lanier LD232c LD232c

11 Lanier LD238c LD238c

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-58 SM

5-913 Switchover Permission Time *CTL [3~30 / 3 / 1 s]

Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and theoperation panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain control

of the display.

Large Capacity Exit Mode *CTL 0: OFF, 1: ON5-961

Selects whether or not all stapled copies are sent to Shift Tray 1 when the Two-Trayfinisher is installed.

5-967 Copy Server Set Function *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF

Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that preventsimage data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing thissetting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.

[Cherry Server]5-974

Specifies which version of ScanRouter, “Lite” or “Full”, is installed.

5-974-1 Cherry Server Setting *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Lite1: Full

[Loop Back Test]5-989

Executes a communication test with peripherals by using a special tool (connector)which is unique for each peripheral.The machine checks if the communication with the peripherals is OK or NG; then

displays the result.DFU

5-989-1 Duplex

5-989-3 Finisher

5-989-4 PSU

5-989-5 ADF

[SP print mode]5-990

Prints out the SMC sheets.

5-990-1 All (Data List)

5-990-2 SP (Mode Data List)

5-990-3 User Program

5-990-4 Logging Data

5-990-5 Diagnostic Report

5-990-6 Non-Default

5-990-7 NIB Summary

5-990-8 Net File Log

5-990-21 Copier User Program

5-990-22 Scanner SP

5-990-23 Scanner User Program

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-59 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Jam OFF/ON] Jam ON/OFF5-991

Enables or disables jam detection.

5-991 1 Jam OFF/ON [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric

0: Enable1: Disable

[Line Position Adj.] Line Position Adjustment5-993

Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: MagnificationFor example: M Reg = Main scan registration

Mode Selection *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: Never done1: Done at a) all process control self checksexcept after toner end recovery and developerinitialization, b) new PCU detected, and c) the

temperature has changed by 5°C since the lastadjustment2: As for setting ‘1’, except it is not done duringself-checks. However, it is done at the initialprocess control self check.

5-993-1

Specifies when the automatic line position adjustment is done.

The size of the 5°C difference can be changed with SP5-993-3.

Execute5-993-2

Use to make a line position adjustment.

Temperature *BCU [ 3 to 15 / 5 / 1/oC]5-993-3

Specifies the temperature for starting the line positioning adjustment.The line position adjustment automatically starts when the temperature differs by theamount specified in this SP mode from the temperature when the last adjustment wasdone.There are two thermistors on the laser optics-housing unit. The thermistor close to thefusing unit monitors the temperature for this adjustment.

Interrupt *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Enabled

5-993-4

Enables or disables the line position adjustment during a print job when thetemperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature atthe last adjustment.

Stand-by *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Enabled

5-993-5

Enables or disables the line position adjustment during stand-by mode when thetemperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature atthe last adjustment.

Job Start *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]0: Disabled1: Enabled

5-993-6

Enables or disables the line position adjustment just before starting a color print jobwhen the temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from thetemperature when the machine woke up from energy saver mode.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-60 SM

Result *BCU5-993-7

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment in 4 digits.

First and second digits: Error detected on the rear ID sensorThird and fourth digits: Error detected on the center ID sensorFifth and sixth digits: Error detected on the front ID sensor

0 1 0 1 0 1

The 6th digit ↑ ↑ The 1st digitRefer to the Troubleshooting section for more details about the two-digit codes.

Exe. Counter *BCU5-993-8

Displays how many times the line position adjustment has been executed.Counts up by +1 normally. After a forced adjustment and a PCU replacement, it counts up +3 Also includes adjustments done at the factory.

5-993-9 Error Counter *BCU Displays how many times errors have beendetected during the line position adjustment.

The way that the auto line position adjustment is done can be adjusted using thefollowing SP modes (SP5-993-010 to 021). These are coefficients used for theadjustment.Normally, do not change except if the automatic adjustment gives poor resultsimmediately after installing a new optics housing unit. Change the value then do aforced line position adjustment (SP 5-993-2) to check the effects of the changes.Example: If magenta is always shifted one dot to the left, reduce 5-993-11 by 1.

5-993-10 M Reg. [Y] *BCU

5-993-11 M Reg. [M] *BCU

5-993-12 M Reg. [C] *BCU

A fine adjustment to the main-scan registration.[ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA

1 dot = 20µ

5-993-13 M Mag. [Y] *BCU

5-993-14 M Mag. [M] *BCU

5-993-15 M Mag. [C] *BCU

A fine adjustment to the main-scanmagnification.[ -100 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 %/step ] FANOTE: The setting changes in this SP mode

will be affect the next line positionadjustment.

5-993-16 S Reg. 600[Y] *BCU

5-993-17 S Reg. 600[M] *BCU

5-993-18 S Reg. 600[C] *BCU

5-993-19 S Reg. 1200[Y] *BCU

5-993-20 S Reg. 1200[M] *BCU

5-993-21 S Reg. 1200[C] *BCU

A fine adjustment to the sub-scan registrationfor each color (color registration).[ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA

600dpi: 1 dot = 40µ

1200 dpi: 1 dot = 20µ

Interrupt *BCU [ 10 to 250 / 100 / 10 sheets/step ]5-993-22

Specifies the number of sheets to be printed before a line position adjustment is doneduring a print job.

SP 5-993-4 must be set to ‘enabled’.When the temperature difference meets the conditions specified in SP5-993-3, themachine starts counting the number of prints in the job. The machine interrupts theprint job and does the line position adjustment if the number of prints exceeds thenumber specified in this SP mode.If the counted number of prints does not exceed the number specified, the machineresets the counter, then continues to monitor the temperature and does the lineposition adjustment next time.

Mscan Lgth Det *BCU [ 100 to 990 / 211 / 10 sec/step ]5-993-24

Performs the main scan length detection when the polygon motor has operatedconsecutively for the time specified in this SP mode.

Drm Gear Phase *BCU [ 0 to 345 / 0 / 15 degrees/step] DFU 5-993-25

Adjusts the phases of the black drum gear and the color drum gear.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-61 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Initialization *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]0: Disable1: Enable

5-993-26

Enables or disables the line position adjustment during initialization.

Toner Refresh *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: Disable1: Enable

5-993-27

Enables or disables the toner refreshing operation.Repetitive line position adjustments can cause abnormal outputs such as white spots.To prevent this, toner is consumed and supplied after line position adjustment.

5-993-31 PPS: 125 This SP checks the transfer PPS in the 125-mm/s mode.

PPS Set: 125 *BCU [6043 to 6166 / 6105 / 1 step]5-993-32

This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the 125-mm/s mode.

5-993-33 PPS: 62.5 This SP checks the transfer PPS in the 62.5-mm/s mode.

PPS Set: 62.5 *BCU [6043 to 6166 / 6105 / 1 step]5-993-34

This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the 62.5-mm/s mode.

Color Adj level *BCU [LOW, MID, HIGH ]5-993-35

This SP specifies the level of color adjustment. This SP sets the following SPs aslisted.

HI MID LOW

SP3-906-001 200 200 255

SP3-906-002 200 0 0

SP3-906-003 200 0 0

SP3-906-004 480 480 480

SP3-906-005 1.00 1.00 0.5

SP3-993-001 1 1 1

SP3-993-003 3 5 7

SP3-993-004 1 1 1SP3-993-005 0 0 0

SP3-993-006 1 1 0

SP3-993-022 100 100 250

SP3-993-024 105 211 422

SP3-993-026 1 0 0

5-994 [Unit Detection ON/OFF] Maintenance Unit Detection ON/OFF

Dev/PCU *BCU#

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric DFU0: Enable1: Disable

5-994-1

Enables or disables PCU and development unit detection.NOTE: If this mode is disabled, new unit detection also does not function. Use thismode as a temporary measure, only when the micro-switches are defective.

Oil Supply Unit *BCU#

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Enable1: Disable

5-994-2

NOTE: Use this mode as a temporary measure, only when the unit detectionmechanism is defective.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-62 SM

5-995 [ColorGapAdj2] Color Gap Adjustment 2

5-995-20 Trans Drv FB *BCU Enables or disables the transfer belt feedbackfeature.

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Enabled1: Disabled

5-997 [Test Pattern]

Tray Selection [ 0 to 4 / 1 / 1/step ]0: By-pass Table 1: Tray 12: Tray 2 3: Tray 34: Tray 4

5-997-1

Selects the tray for making a test print.NOTE: The machine makes a test pattern on the paper size loaded in the selected

paper tray.

Pattern [ 0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step ]0: None1: 1-dot sub-scan line2: 2-dot sub-scan line3: 1-dot main-scan line4: 2-dot main-scan line5: 1-dot grid pattern (Fine)6: 2-dot grid pattern (Fine)7. 1-dot grid pattern (Rough)8. 2-dot grid pattern (Rough)9. 1-dot slant grid pattern10. 2-dot slant grid pattern11. 1-dot pattern

12. 2-dot pattern13. 4-dot pattern14. 1-dot trimming pattern15. 2-dot trimming pattern16. Cross stitch: sub-scan17. Cross stitch: main-scan18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)19. Belt pattern (Vertical)20. Checkered Flag21. Grey scale (Vertical)22. Grey scale (Horizontal)23. Solid

5-997 2

Selects a test pattern.

Single Color [0 to 6 / 6 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: Red 1: Green2: Blue 3: Yellow4: Magenta 5: Cyan6: Black

5-997-3

Selects the color for making a test pattern.

Color Mode [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: Full Color 1: Single Color

5-997-4

Selects the color mode for making a test print.

Resolution [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: 600x600 1: 1800x6002: 1200x1200

5-997-5

Selects the resolution for making a test print.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-63 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

By-pass Paper Size [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: A4 LEF 1: LT LEF2: A3 3: DLT

5-997-6

Selects the paper size for making a test pattern from the by-pass table.

Print5-997-7

Prints the test pattern with the settings specified with SP5-997-001 to 006.NOTE: When exiting the SP mode, the test print mode is automatically canceled.

5-998 [Memory Clear]NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following this table.

5-998-1 ENG Setting Clears the engine settings except for counters.

5-998-2 ENG Counter Clears all counters.

5-999 New Unit Set *BCU

#

[0: Disable/1: Enable]

5-999-1 PCU: Bk5-999-2 PCU: Y

5-999-3 PCU: M

5-999-4 PCU: C

5-999-5 Dev. U: Bk

5-999-6 Dev. U: Y

5-999-7 Dev. U: M

5-999-8 Dev. U: C

5-999-9 Fuser

This program makes the machine to start theinitialization processing for a newly installedunit. You set “1: Enable” before installing anew unit.

⇒

Rev. 06/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-64 SM

SP6-XXX (Peripherals)

6-006 [DF Registration Adj.] DF Registration Adjustment

Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.

6-006-1 Side-to-Side [ -3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

6-006-2 Leading Edge

*CTL

[ -42 to 42 / 0 / 1 /step ] Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and rearsides.

6-006-3 Buckle: Duplex Front [ -42 to 42 / 0 / 1 /step ]

6-006-4 Buckle: Duplex Rear

*CTL

[ -45 to 45 / 0 / 1 /step ]

Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.

6-006-5 Rear Edge Erase *CTL [ -20 to 10 / -3 / 1 /step ]

[ADF Input Check]6-007

Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF.

6-007-1 Group 1

6-007-2 Group 2

6-007-3 Group 3

5.2.2

[ADF Output Check]6-008

Activates the electrical components for functional check.It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time.

6-008-1 Fee-in Motor Fwd.

6-008-2 Feed-in Motor Rev.

6-008-3 Drive Motor Fwd.

6-008-4 Reverse Motor Fwd.

6-008-5 Reverse Motor Rev.

6-008-6 Feed Clutch6-008-7 Inverter Solenoid

6-008-8 Pick-up Motor Fwd.

6-008-9 Pick-up Motor Rev.

[DF Free Run]6-009

Performs a DF free run in duplex mode or stamp mode.

6-009-1 Duplex Mode

6-009-2 Stamp Mode

[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment6-010

Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.

6-010-1 Stamp Position Adj. *CTL [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]

[Original Size Priority] Original Size Detection Priority6-016

Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since originalsensors cannot recognize all sizes.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-65 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

6-016-1 Original Size Priority *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Setting 11: Setting 2

Setting 1 Setting 2

Bit 7 A4 (L) LT (L)Bit 6 11" x 15" DLT (L)Bit 5 DLT (L) 11" x 15"Bit 4 LT (S) US Exec (S)Bit 3 LT (L) 8" x 10" (L)Bit 2 LG (L) F4 (L)Bit 1 A4 (L) 16K (L)Bit 0 8K (L) DLT (L)

Bits used for detection differ depending ondestination as shown below.Bit 7 to 6: Only for JapanBit 5 to 2: Only for USBit 1 to 0: Only for EU/AA

[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment6-017

Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.

6-017-1 DF Magnification Adj. *CTL [ -5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step ]

[Punch Position]6-110

Adjusts the punching position.Punch 1

US: 2 punch holesEurope: 2 punch holesNorth Europe: 4 punch holes

Punch 2US: 3 punch holesEurope: 4 punch holes

Increment: Holes move toward the paper center.Decrement: Holes move toward the paper edge.

6-110 1 MF Fin 1 *BCU

6-110 2 MF Fin 2 *BCU

[ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]

6-110 3 Booklet Fin [ -2.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]

[Staple Position]6-111

Adjusts the stapling position.Increment: Staple position moves toward the edge of paper.Decrement: Staple position moves toward the center of paper.

NOTE: Although the adjustable range is ±3.5 mm, the stapling position can bechanged only by 1.0 mm when stapling one position at the front or rear side evenwhen the input value is more than 1.0.

6-111-1 MF Fin *BCU [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]

6-111-2 Booklet Fin [ -3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step ]

6-112 [Fold Position] *BCU [ -3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-66 SM

6-111-1 A3/DLT

6-111-2 B4/LG

6-112-3 A4/LT

6-112-4 A3/DLT

6-112-5 B4/LG

6-112-6 A4/LT

Adjusts the folding positions of the optionalbooklet finisher.

[Multi Bin Set]6-901

Specifies whether or not the optional multi-bin output tray is installed. When installingthe multi-bin output tray, this SP mode should be set to “1”.

6-901-1 Multi Bin Set *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Not installed1: Installed

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-67 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

Working Time *BCU Display: 00000000~99999999 min7-001

The number of prints and drive time for drum revolutions can be obtained by countingthe main motor revolution time. If the amount of time required for the drum to revolve

to print 1 copy increases, this data combined with the number of copies can be usedto analyze problems and could be useful for future product development.

[Original Counter]7-002

Displays the total original count (number of originals fed) for the selected mode.

7-002-1 Total

7-002-2 Copy

7-002-3 Fax

7-002-4 Doc. Svr. Application

7-002-5 Scanner

7-002-6 Others

*CTL

7-003 [Print Counter] Meter Charge Counter(Print, Development)

Displays the values of the color counters.

7-003-1 Total Count

7-003-2 Copy: B&W

7-003-4 Copy: Full Color

7-003-5 FAX: B&W

7-003-7 Print: B&W

7-003-8 Print: Full Color

*CTL [ -9999 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ]

7-003-10 Development: CMY

7-003-11 Development: K

*CTL These SP modes are development counters forthe meter charge mode.

7-003-12 Copy: Single Color7-003-13 Copy: Twin Color

*CTL Displays the values of the color counters.

7-003-20 Total: Full Color

7-003-21 Total: B&W Single

7-003-22 Total: Single

*CTL These SP modes are used for Japanesemarket only.

7-003-23 Total: B&W *CTL This SP mode is print counters for the metercharge mode.

7-003-24 Copy: Full Color

7-003-25 Print: Full Color

*CTL These SP modes are used for Japanesemarket only.

7-003-26 Copy: Color

7-003-27 Copy: B/W

7-003-28 Print: Color

7-003-29 Print: B&W

7-003-30 Total: Color Total

*CTL These SP modes are print counters for themeter charge mode.

[Other Counter]7-007

Displays counter values.

7-007-1 Duplex

7-007-2 A3/DLT

7-007-3 Staple

*CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

[Print Count–Paper Size] Paper Size Counter 7-101

Displays the counter values for each paper size.

7-101-5 A4 LEF *CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-68 SM

7-101-6 A5 LEF

7-101-14 B5 LEF

7-101-38 LT LEF

7-101-44 HLT LEF

7-101-132 A3 SEF

7-101-133 A4 SEF7-101-134 A5 SEF

7-101-141 B4 SEF

7-101-142 B5 SEF

7-101-160 DLT SEF

7-101-164 LG SEF

7-101-166 LT SEF

7-101-172 HLT SEF

7-101-255 Other

[Print Count–Paper Size] Paper Size Counter 7-105

Displays the counter values for each paper size.7-105-1 Normal

7-105-2 Recycled

7-105-3 Special

7-105-4 Colour

7-105-5 Letterhead

7-105-6 Letterhead

7-105-7 Label

7-105-8 Thick

7-105-9 Used

7-105-11 Index

7-105-12 Others

*CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

[Total Scan Counter]7-201

Displays the total number of scans.

7-201-1 Total Scan Counter *CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 scan/step ]

[Print Counter–Paper Tray] Paper Feed Section Counter 7-204

Displays the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

7-204-1 Bypass

7-204-2 Tray 1

7-204-3 Tray 27-204-4 Tray 3

7-204-5 Tray 4

7-204-6 Duplex

*CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

[Total ADF Counter]7-205

Displays the total number of originals fed by the ARDF.

7-205-1 ADF Total Counter *CTL

7-206 [Staple Counter]

7-206-1 Normal Staple *CTL Displays the number of stapler operations.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-69 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

7-206-2 Binding Staple

[Punch Counter]7-209

Displays the number of times hole punching has been done.

7-209-1 Punch *CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ]

[Total SC Counter]7-401

Displays the number of SC codes detected.

7-401-1 SC Counter *CTL [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ]

[SC History]7-403

Logs the SC codes detected.The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can beseen on the SMC (logging) outputs.

7-403-1 Latest7-403-2 Latest 1

7-403-3 Latest 2

7-403-4 Latest 3

7-403-5 Latest 4

7-403-6 Latest 5

7-403-7 Latest 6

7-403-8 Latest 7

7-403-9 Latest 8

7-403-10 Latest 9

*CTL

[Total Paper Jam Counter]7-502

Displays the total number of jams detected.7-502-1 Total Jam *CTL [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

[Total Original Jam Counter]7-503

Displays the total number of original jams.

7-503-1 Original Jam counter *CTL [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step ]

[Paper Jam Location]D: Duplex, MB: Mail Box, F; Finisher, E: External, I: Internal

ON: On check, OFF: Off Check

7-504

Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected.

NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

7-504-3 Tray 1: ON *CTL

7-504-4 Tray 2: ON

7-504-5 Tray 3/LCT: ON

7-504-6 Tray 4: ON

7-504-8 Regist.: ON

7-504-9 External Tray: ON

7-504-10 Internal Tray: ON

7-504-11 Duplex: ON

7-504-12 Duplex Exit 1: ON


8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-70 SM


7-504-15 Duplex Feed: ON

7-504-51 Tray 1: OFF

7-504-52 Tray 2: OFF

7-504-53 Tray 3/LCT: OFF

7-504-54 Tray 4: OFF7-504-61 Registration: OFF

7-504-63 External Tray: OFF

7-504-64 Internal Tray: OFF

7-504-65 Duplex: OFF

7-504-66 Duplex Exit 1: OFF



7-504-69 Duplex Feed: OFF

7-504-100 Finisher Entrance

7-504-101 Finisher Shift Tray 1

7-504-102 Finisher Shift Tray 2

7-504-103 Finisher Staple7-504-104 Finisher Exit

7-504-105 Finisher Drive

7-504-106 Finisher Tray Up/Down

7-504-107 Finisher Jogger

7-504-108 Finisher Staple

7-504-109 Finisher Exit

7-504-110 Finisher Punch

7-504-111 Finisher Jam Clear

7-504-120 Finisher Entrance: ON

7-504-121 Finisher Entrance: OFF

7-504-122 Finisher STACK Exit

7-504-123 Finisher Folder: ON

7-504-124 Finisher Folder: OFF

7-504-125 Finisher Stapler

7-504-126 Finisher Punch

7-504-127 Finisher Transport Motor

7-504-128 Finisher Paddle Motor

7-504-129 Finisher Stapler Slide Motor / Stapler Folder Motor

7-504-130 Finisher Jogger Motor

7-504-131 Finisher Lift Motor

[Original Jam Detection]7-505

Displays the total number of original jams by location.

7-505-1 At Power On7-505-3 Skew Correction Sensor (On Check)

7-505-4 Interval Sensor (On Check)

7-505-5 Registration Sensor (On Check)

7-505-6 Relay Sensor (On Check)

7-505-7 Inverter Sensor (On Check)

7-505-53 Skew Correction Sensor (Off Check)

7-505-54 Interval Sensor (Off Check)

7-505-55 Registration Sensor (Off Check)

7-505-56 Relay Sensor (Off Check)

7-505-57 Inverter Sensor (Off Check)

*CTL

⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒

Rev. 11/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-71 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Jam Count by Paper Size]7-506

Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.

7-506-5 A4 LEF

7-506-6 A5 LEF7-506-14 B5 LEF

7-506-38 LT LEF

7-506-44 HLT LEF

7-506-132 A3 SEF

7-506-133 A4 SEF

7-506-134 A5 SEF

7-506-141 B4 SEF

7-506-412 B5 SEF

7-506-160 DLT SEF

7-506-164 LG SEF

7-506-166 LT SEF

7-506-172 HLT SEF

7-506-255 Others

*CTL [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

[Plotter Jam History]7-507

Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.

7-507-1 Latest

7-507-2 Latest 1

7-507-3 Latest 2

7-507-4 Latest 3

7-507-5 Latest 4

7-507-6 Latest 5

7-507-7 Latest 6

7-507-8 Latest 7

7-507-9 Latest 8

7-507-10 Latest 9

*CTL

[Original Jam History]7-508

Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.

7-508-1 Latest

7-508-2 Latest-1

7-508-3 Latest-2

7-508-4 Latest-3

7-508-5 Latest-4

7-508-6 Latest-57-508-7 Latest-6

7-508-8 Latest-7

7-508-9 Latest-8

7-508-10 Latest-9

*CTL

[ROM No./Firmware Version] 7-801

Displays the version of each firmware

7-80-255 Firmware Version

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-72 SM

7-803 [PM Counter]

(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color])Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Oil Supply: Oil Supply Unit, Fusing:

Fusing Unit, Transfer: Transfer UnitDisplays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed.Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot bedeactivated.When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit isinstalled. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PMCounter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 9) and is reset to “0”.The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked withSP7-906-1 to 9.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

7-803-1 Paper

7-803-2 S: PCU [K]

7-803-3 S: PCU [Y]7-803-4 S: PCU [M]

7-803-5 S: PCU [C]

7-803-6 S: Dev. [K]

7-803-7 S: Dev. [Y]

7-803-8 S: Dev. [M]

7-803-9 S: Dev. [C]

7-803-10 S: Oil Supply

7-803-11 PF By-pass

7-803-12 PF Tray 1

7-803-13 PF Tray 2

7-803-14 PF Tray 3

7-803-15 PF Tray 4

7-803-16 S: Fusing

7-803-17 S: Transfer

*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each currentmaintenance unit.[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit isinstalled. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PMCounter - Previous (SP7-906-10 to 20) and is reset to “0”. The total number ofrevolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-10 to 20.

7-803-18 R: PCU [K] Target Revolution: 300,000

7-803-19 R: PCU [Y] Target Revolution: 319,000

7-803-20 R: PCU [M] Target Revolution: 319,000

7-803-21 R: PCU [C] Target Revolution: 319,0007-803-22 R: Dev. [K] Target Revolution: 1,142,000

7-803-23 R: Dev. [Y] Target Revolution: 1,146,000

7-803-24 R: Dev. [M] Target Revolution: 1,146,000

7-803-25 R: Dev. [C] Target Revolution: 1,146,000

7-803-26 R: Oil Supply Target Revolution: 2,559,000

7-803-27 R: Fusing Target Revolution: 8,397,000

7-803-28 R: Transfer

*BCU

Displays the number of sheets printed until the waste toner bottle becomes full ortoner runs out.

7-803-29 S: Waste Toner

7-803-30 S: Toner [K]

7-803-31 S: Toner [Y]

7-803-32 S: Toner [M]

*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-73 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

7-803-33 S: Toner [C]

Displays the total operating time for the toner attraction pump.

7-803-34 Toner Supply[K]

7-803-35 Toner Supply[Y]

7-803-36 Toner Supply[M]

7-803-37 Toner Supply[C]

*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 s/step ]

Displays the value given by the following formula:

(Current revolution ÷ Target revolution) × 100, where “Current revolution” is thecurrent value for the counter of the part, and “Target revolution” is the values of SP7-803-17 through 27. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has beenused up.The R% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reachesthe limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime isreached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counteris still less than 100%.Oil supply unit: When the R% counter reaches 100%, it enters the near-end condition,not the end condition. The end condition occurs some number of rotations after this(not adjustable).

NOTE: The machine internally adjusts or compensates as necessary, depending onconditions of machine usage. Due to this, at the oil supply unit near-endcondition, the R% counter of the oil supply unit can be 100%, lower than100%, or higher than 100%.

7-803-38 R(%): PCU [K]

7-803-39 R(%): PCU [Y]

7-803-40 R(%): PCU [M]

7-803-41 R(%): PCU [C]

7-803-42 R(%): Dev [K]

7-803-43 R(%): Dev [Y]

7-803-44 R(%): Dev [M]

7-803-45 R(%): Dev [C]

7-803-46 R(%): Oil Spply7-803-47 R(%): Fusing

7-803-48 S: Trans Cln

7-803-49 R: Trans Cln

*BCU

7-804 [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear

(Unit, [Color])Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Transfer: Transfer Unit

Clears the PM counter.Press the Enter key after the machine asks “Execute?,” which will store the PMcounter value in SP7-906-1 to 25 (PM Counter – Previous), and reset the valueof the current PM counter to 0.

NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

7-804-1 Paper

7-804-2 PCU [K]

7-804-3 PCU [Y]

7-804-4 PCU [M]

7-804-5 PCU [C]

7-804-6 Dev. [K]

7-804-7 Dev. [Y]

7-804-8 Dev. [M]

7-804-9 Dev. [C]

7-804-10 Oil Supply

7-804-11 PF By-pass7-804-12 PF Tray 1

⇒

Rev. 06/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-74 SM

7-804-13 PF Tray 2

7-804-14 PF Tray 3

7-804-15 PF Tray 4

7-804-16 Fusing

7-804-17 Transfer

7-804-18 Trans Cln7-804-50 All

[SC/Jam Counter Reset] 7-807

Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.

7-807-1 SC/Jam Clear

[Counter Reset]NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following this table.

7-808

Clears all counters.

7-808-1 Counter Clear

[Access Code Clear]7-810

Use to clear the access code if the customer forgets the code (password).

7-810-1 Access Code Clear

7-811 [Original Counter Clear]

7-811-1 This program reset the original counter (SP7-002-001 through 006).

[Tray Clear] Paper Tray Counter Clear7-816

Clears the counters (SP7-204) for the number of sheets fed from the paper feedstations.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

7-816-1 Bypass Tray

7-816-2 Tray 1

7-816-3 Tray 2

7-816-4 Tray 3/LCT

7-816-5 Tray 4

7-816-6 Duplex

7-826 [MF Error Counter] Japan Only

7-826-1 Error Total7-826-2 Error Staple

7-827 [MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only

[Self-Diagnose Result Display] 7-832

Displays the result of the diagnostics.

7-832-1 Diag. Result *CTL

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-75 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Coverage] Pixel Coverage Ratio7-833

Displays the image coverage ratio for each color of the last output.This SP mode displays the “coverage ratio” of the output, i.e. the ratio of the total

pixel area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper. Note that thisvalue is not directly proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of courseit is one factor that affects this amount. The other major factors involved include: thetype, total image area and image density of the original, toner concentration anddeveloper potential.

7-833-1 Last [K]

7-833-2 Last [C]

7-833-3 Last [M]

7-833-4 Last [Y]

*BCU [ 0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step ]

Displays accumulated average value of image coverage ratio for each color.SP 7-833-5 to -8 vs SP 8-831-1 to –4The averages for K (SP 7-833-5 and SP 8-831-1) are the same.

For CMY, SP 8-831 does not include black-and-white pages in the middle of a colour

job. However, SP 7-833 does include these pages in the average. As a result, thereadings of SP 7-833 will be lower, because these averages include pages for whichthere is zero for CMY, but the averages calculated for SP 8-831 do not include thesepages.

7-833-5 Average [K]

7-833-6 Average [C]

7-833-7 Average [M]

7-833-8 Average [Y]

*BCU [ 0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step ]

Displays the total number of toner cartridges replaced.

7-833-11 Toner [K]

7-833-12 Toner [C]

7-833-13 Toner [M]

7-833-14 Toner [Y]

*BCU [ 0 to 65535 / - / 1 cartridge/step ]

NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001

through 004 are the same.

7-834 [Coverage Clr] Coverage/Toner Data Clear

7-834-1 Average This menu resets the data in SP7-833-005through 008.

7-834-2 Toner This menu resets the data in SP7-833-011through 014 and SP8-781-001 through 004.

7-834-3 S: PREV Toner This menu resets the data in SP8-901-001through 004.

7-834-4 S: Coverage 0-100 This menu resets the data in SP8-851-001through 004, SP8-861-001 through 004, SP 8-

871-001 through 004, and SP8-881-001through 004.

7-834-255 All This menu resets all the data listed above.

7-835 ACC Counter *CTL [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]

7-835-1 Copy ACC

7-835-2 Printer ACC

Displays the number of times ACC has beendone.

Total Memory Size7-836

Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-76 SM

ADF Scan Glass Dust Check Counter7-852

Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on thescanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4991 1 (ADF Scan Glass DustCheck) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to zeror

[Assert Info]7-901

Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored inthis SP is used for problem analysis. DFU

7-901-1 File Name

7-901-2 Number of Lines

7-901-3 Location

7-905 [Alert Display]

Wst Oil: Full *BCU [ 232 to 464 / 232 / 1 kilo-revolutions/step ]7-905-10

Specifies the number of revolutions the development drive motor-K can make afterthe message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full”, is displayed.The machine stops after the motor has made the specified number of revolutions.This SP specifies the interval from near end to end for the waste oil bottle. 232krevolutions equals 2.5k prints. If it is set to 464, the end condition is 5.0k prints afternear end.

Oil: Alert: Page *BCU [ 25.0 to 27.5 / 27.5 / 0.1 kilo-sheets/step ]7-905-14

Specifies the number of sheets to trigger the oil near-end condition.

NOTE: The target job volume for this SP mode is 5 pages/job.

⇒

Rev. 03/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-77 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

7-906 [PM Counter: Previous]

(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit

Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.

7-906-1 S:PCU [K]7-906-2 S:PCU [Y]

7-906-3 S:PCU [M]

7-906-4 S:PCU [C]

7-906-5 S:Dev. [K]

7-906-6 S:Dev. [Y]

7-906-7 S:Dev. [M]

7-906-8 S:Dev. [C]

7-906-9 S:Oil Supply

7-906-10 S:Fusing

*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previousmaintenance units.

7-906-11 R:PCU [K]

7-906-12 R:PCU [Y]

7-906-13 R:PCU [M]

7-906-14 R:PCU [C]

7-906-15 R:Dev. [K]

7-906-16 R:Dev. [Y]

7-906-17 R:Dev. [M]

7-906-18 R:Dev. [C]

7-906-19 R:Oil Supply

7-906-20 R:Fusing

*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]

Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or tonercartridge.

7-906-21 S:Waste Toner

7-906-22 S:Toner [K]7-906-23 S:Toner [Y]

7-906-24 S:Toner [M]

7-906-25 S:Toner [C]

*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

Displays the value given by the following formula:

(Current count ÷ Yield count) x 100, where “Current count” is the current values in thecounter for the part, and “Yield count” is the recommended yield.

7-906-26 R(%): PCU [K]

7-906-27 R(%): PCU [Y]

7-906-28 R(%): PCU [M]

7-906-29 R(%): PCU [C]

7-906-30 R(%): Dev [K]

7-906-31 R(%): Dev [Y]

7-906-32 R(%): Dev [M]

7-906-33 R(%): Dev [C]

7-906-34 R(%): Oil Supply

7-906-35 R(%): Fusing

*BCU [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 %/step ]

[Check Sum]7-907

Displays the check sum of the firmware.

7-907-1 Engine Main

7-907-2 Engine MUSIC

*BCU

⇒

Rev. 03/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-78 SM

SP8-xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codesthat when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.

SP Numbers What They Do

SP8-211~SP8-216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.

SP8-401~SP8-406 The number of pages printed from the document server

SP8-691~SP8-696 The number of pages sent from the document server

Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

• How is the document server actually being used?

• What application is using the document server most frequently?

• What data in the document server is being reused?

Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of

operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an ‘application’). Before readingthe Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixesmean.

Prefixes What it means

T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for allapplications (C, F, P, etc.)..

C: Copy application.

F: Fax application.

P: Print application.

S: Scan application.

Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for eachapplication when the job was not stored on thedocument server.

L: Local storage(document server) Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the documentserver. The L: counters work differently case bycase. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages storedon the document server; this can be indocument server mode (from the documentserver window), or from another mode, such asfrom a printer driver or by pressing the StoreFile button in the Copy mode window.Sometimes, they include occasions when theuser uses a file that is already on the documentserver. Each counter will be discussed case bycase.

O: Other applications(external networkapplications, forexample)

Refers to network applications such as WebImage Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK(Software Development Kit) will also be countedwith this group in the future.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-79 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity ofdisplaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the nameof an SP that you do not understand.

Key for Abbreviations

Abbreviation What it means

/ “By”, e.g. “T:Jobs/Apl” = Total Jobs “by” Application

> More (2> “2 or more”, 4> “4 or more”

AddBook Address Book

Apl Application

B/W Black & White

Bk Black

C Cyan

ColCr Color Create

ColMode Color Mode

Comb CombineComp Compression

Deliv Delivery

DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,Print) used to store the job on the document server, forexample.

Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.

Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides

Emul Emulation

FC Full Color

FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)

Full Bleed No Margins

GenCopy Generation Copy ModeGPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter

does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, thiscounter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)

IFax Internet Fax

ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.

K Black (YMCK)

LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.

LSize Large (paper) Size

Mag Magnification

MC One color (monochrome)NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to

monitor machines remotely. “NRS” is used overseas, “CSS”is used in Japan.

Org Original for scanning

OrgJam Original Jam

Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities thatallows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printerson the network, and allows files to moved around,combined, and converted to different formats. Currently notavailable.

PC Personal Computer

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-80 SM

Abbreviation What it means

PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count astwo pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.

PJob Print Jobs

Ppr PaperPrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam

PrtPGS Print Pages

R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This machine is under development and currentlynot available.

Rez Resolution

SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)

Scn Scan

Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.

S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail

SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8counters are recorded in the SMC report.

Svr Server

TonEnd Toner End

TonSave Toner Save

TXJob Send, Transmission

YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black

NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or theCounter Reset SP7 808.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-81 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

8-001 T:Total Jobs *CTL

8-002 C:Total Jobs *CTL

8-003 F:Total Jobs *CTL

8-004 P:Total Jobs *CTL8-005 S:Total Jobs *CTL

8-006 L:Total Jobs *CTL

8-007 O:Total Jobs *CTL

These SPs count the number of times eachapplication is used to do a job.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: The L: counter is the total number of times theother applications are used to send a job to thedocument server, plus the number of times a filealready on the document server is used.

• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number ofpages processed.

• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.

• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.

• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer

engineer using the SP modes are not counted.• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),

the job is counted at the time when either “Delete Data” or “Specify Output” isspecified.

• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.

• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:counter does not (the document server is not used).

• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in thebroadcast are not counted separately).

• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to theirdestinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not

be counted until the transmission has been completed.• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.

• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.

• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 alsoincrements.

• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: andL: counters both increment.

• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counterincrements.

• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on thedocument server, only the L: counter increments.

• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on thedocument server, only the L: counter increments.

• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counterincrements.

• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counterincrements. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the faxapplication, the F: counter increments.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-82 SM

8-011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL

8-012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL

8-013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL

8-014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL8-015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL

8-016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL

8-017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of jobs stored to thedocument server by each application, to reveal howlocal storage is being used for input.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored fromwithin the document server mode screen at theoperation panel.

• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counterincrements.

• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.

• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counterincrements.

• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counterincrements.

• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.

8-021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL

8-022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL

8-023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL

8-024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL

8-025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL

8-026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL

8-027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL

These SPs reveal how files printed from thedocument server were stored on the documentserver originally.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobsstored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel.

• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with anotherapplication, the C: counter increments.

• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored onthe document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, theC: and P: counters both increment.

• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,the L: counter increments.

• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another

application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from withindocument server mode, then the L: counter increments.

• When images stored on the document server by a network application (includingPalm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.

• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a networkapplication (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.

• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-83 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

8-031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8-032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8-033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8-034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL8-035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8-036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8-037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

These SPs reveal what applications were usedto output documents from the document server.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobsprinted from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel.

• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the countfor the application that started the print job is incremented.

• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, WebImage Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.

8-041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL8-042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8-043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8-044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8-045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8-046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8-047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

These SPs count the applications that storedfiles on the document server that were lateraccessed for transmission over the telephoneline or over a network (attached to an e-mail, oras a fax image by I-Fax).

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: Jobs merged for sending are countedseparately.The L: counter counts the number of jobsscanned from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel.

• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counterincrements.

• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.

8-051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8-052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8-053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8-054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8-055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8-056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL8-057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

These SPs count the applications used to sendfiles from the document server over thetelephone line or over a network (attached to ane-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobsmerged for sending are counted separately.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobs sentfrom within the document server mode screenat the operation panel.

• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,then the O: counter increments.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-84 SM

T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-061

These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified bythe application.

C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-062

These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method isspecified by the application.

F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-063

These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method isspecified by the application.

Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.

P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-064

These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method isspecified by the application.

S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-065

These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method isspecified by the application.

Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.

L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-066

These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the documentserver mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specifiedfrom the print window within document server mode.

O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-067

These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external

application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by theapplication.

8-06x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is setfor Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counterincrements. (See SP8 066 1)

8-06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.

8-06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.

8-06x 4 Booklet

Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staplemode, the Staple counter also increments.

8-06x 5 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet modeand set for folding (Z-fold).

8-06x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for aprint job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)

8-06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-85 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-071

These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pagesin the job, regardless of which application was used.

C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-072

These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based onthe number of pages in the job.

F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-073

These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on thenumber of pages in the job.

P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-074

These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based onthe number of pages in the job.

S:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-075

These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based onthe number of pages in the job.

L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-076These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within thedocument server mode window at the operation panel, by the number ofpages in the job.

O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-077

These SPs count and calculate the number of “Other” application jobs (WebImage Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.

8-07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21~50 Pages

8-07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51~100 Pages

8-07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101~300 Pages

8-07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301~500 Pages8-07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501~700 Pages

8-07x 6 6~10 Pages 8 07x 13 701~1000 Pages

8-07x 7 11~20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001~ Pages

• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed indocument server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.

• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).

• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.

• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.

• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job iscounted at the time the error occurs.

• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated bymultiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (Oneduplex page counts as 2.)

• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to thenumber of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).

• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, thepage is counted.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-86 SM

T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-111

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent byfax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on atelephone line.

Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.

F:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-113

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent byfax directly on a telephone line.


L:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-116

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent byfax on a telephone line using a file stored on the document server.Documents sent from fax memory are not counted.


8-11x 1 B/W

8-11x 2 Color

• These counters count jobs, not pages.

• This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application,including documents stored on the document server.

• If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started.

• If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destinationwhere both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x)also increments.

• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.

T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-121

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax imagesusing I-Fax.


F:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-123

These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (notstored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.


L:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-126 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent using afile stored on the document server , as fax images using I-Fax.


8-12x 1 B/W

8-12x 2 Color


• The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is notavailable at this time.

• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is

sent.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-87 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-131

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scannedand attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server wasused or not.

S:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL8-135

These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned andattached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.

L:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL8-136

These SPs count the number of (color or black-and-white) jobs using a filestored on stored on the document server, and attaching it to e-mail.

8-13x 1 B/W

8-13x 2 Color


• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined

to be color or black-and-white then counted.• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while thedocument is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.

• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, dependingon what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.

• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, orScan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send iscounted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Emailas well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and oncefor Scan-to-PC).

T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-141

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scannedand sent to a Scan Router server.

F:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL8-143

These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned infax mode and sent to a Scan Router server.

S:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL8-145

These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned inscanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.

8-14x 1 B/W

8-14x 2 Color


• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at theScan Router server cannot be confirmed.

• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job iscounted as a “Color” job.

• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while thedocument is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.


• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one

job.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-88 SM

T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-151

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scannedand sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).

Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL8-155

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scannedand sent with Scan-to-PC.

8-15x 1 B/W

8-15x 2 Color


• If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.

• If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.


• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.

8-161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL

8-163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL

These SPs count the number of PC Faxtransmission jobs. A job is counted from when itis registered for sending, not when it is sent.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: At the present time, these countersperform identical counts.

• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sendingthe data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.

8-191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL

8-192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL

8-193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL

8-195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL8-196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL

These SPs count the pages scanned by eachapplication that uses the scanner to scanimages.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

• SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the numberof physical pages.

• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts toadjust color.

• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.

• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.

• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-89 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Examples

• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but notstored, the S: count is 4.

• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using

the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:count is 6.

• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.

• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-201

These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner forscan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmissionare not counted.

Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the UserTools display.

S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-205

These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner forscan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission arenot counted.

Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the UserTools display..

8-211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8-212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8-213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL8-215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8-216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages scannedinto the document server .

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]The L: counter counts the number of pagesstored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel, and with theStore File button from within the Copy modescreen

• Reading user stamp data is not counted.

• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.

• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:count is 4.

• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do notchange.

• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:count is 6 and the L: count is 6.

• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-90 SM

ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-221

These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front andback side scanning.

8-221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning:With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Frontside count is the same as the number of pages fed for eithersimplex or duplex scanning.

With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Frontside count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex frontside scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the userloads face up.)

8-221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Backcount is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.

With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back

count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-sidescanning.

• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back countis 1.

• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid doublecounting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheetis output.

Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-231

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode todetermine the work load on the ADF.

8-231 1 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loadedin the ADF at one time.

8-231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF.

8-231 3 Mixed Size Selectable. Select “Mixed Sizes” on the operationpanel.

8-231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.

8-231 5 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the

original directly on the platen.

• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switchesfrom ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.

• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax applicationso if the original’s page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.

• If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Sizecount is enabled.

• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-91 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-241

These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless of which application was used.

C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-242

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.

F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-243

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.

S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-245

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.

L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-246

These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within thedocument server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store Filebutton from within the Copy mode screen

O:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-247These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type by Otherapplications.

8-241 8-242 8-243 8-245 8-246 8-247

8-24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

8-24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

8-24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

8-24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes

8-24x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes

8-24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No No

8-24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No No

8-24x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No No8-24x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No No

8-24x 10: Color Yes No No Yes No No

• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switchesfrom ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-92 SM

8-251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

8-252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

8-254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

8-256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL8-257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

These SPs show how many times Image Editfeatures have been selected at the operationpanel for each application. Some examples ofthese editing features are:

• Erase> Border

• Erase> Center

• Image Repeat

• Centering • Positive/Negative [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: The count totals the number of times theedit features have been used. A detailedbreakdown of exactly which features have beenused is not given.

The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.

8-261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL

8-262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL

8-26x 1 Color Conversion

8-26x 2 Color Erase

8-26x 3 Background

8-26x 4 Other

These SPs show how many times color creationfeatures have been selected at the operationpanel.

8-281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL8-285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scannedusing a TWAIN driver. These counters revealhow the TWAIN driver is used for deliveryfunctions.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Note: At the present time, these countersperform identical counts.

8-291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

8-293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

8-295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

8-296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages stampedwith the stamp in the ADF unit.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of pagesstored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel, and with theStore File button from within the Copy modescreen

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-93 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-301

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by allapplications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) andoutput (printing) page size [SP 8-441].

C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-302

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copyapplication. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) andoutput (printing) page size [SP 8-442].

F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-303

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Faxapplication. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) andoutput page size [SP 8-443].

S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-305

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scanapplication. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and

output page size [SP 8-445].L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-306

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored fromwithin the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with theStore File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals tocompare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].

8-30x 1 A3

8-30x 2 A4

8-30x 3 A5

8-30x 4 B4

8-30x 5 B5

8-30x 6 DLT

8-30x 7 LG

8-30x 8 LT

8-30x 9 HLT

8-30x 10 Full Bleed

8-30x 254 Other (Standard)

8-30x 255 Other (Custom)

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-94 SM

T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-311

These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned byapplications that can specify resolution settings.

S:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-315

These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned byapplications that can specify resolution settings.

Note: At the present time, 8 311 and 8 315 perform identical counts.

8-31x 1 1200dpi ~

8-31x 2 600dpi~1199dpi

8-31x 3 400dpi~599dpi

8-31x 4 200dpi~399dpi

8-31x 5 ~199dpi

• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

• The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no countis done for the Fax application.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-95 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-321

These SPs count by compression method the total number of pagesscanned.

S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-325These SPs count by compression method the total number of pagesscanned by the Scan application.

Note: At the present time, 8 321 and 8 325 perform identical counts.

8-32x 1 JPEG

8-32x 2 JPEG2000

8-32x 3 TIFF (Comp OFF)

8-32x 4 TIFF (Comp ON)

8-32x 5 PDF

8-32x 6 Other

8-381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8-382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8-383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8-384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8-385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8-386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8-387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printedby the customer. The counter for the applicationused for storing the pages increments.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]The L: counter counts the number of pagesstored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel. Pages storedwith the Store File button from within the Copymode screen go to the C: counter.

• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLTpage is counted as 2.

• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages storedare counted for the application that stored them.

• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:

• Blank pages in a duplex printing job.

• Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slipsheets.

• Reports printed to confirm counts.

• All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, enginemaintenance reports, etc.)

• Test prints for machine image adjustment.

• Error notification reports.

• Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-96 SM

LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-391

These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.

Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are

also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.

8-401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8-402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8-403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8-404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8-405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8-406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printedfrom the document server. The counter for theapplication used to print the pages isincremented.The L: counter counts the number of jobsstored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to theL: count.

• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:count.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-97 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

8-411 Prints/Duplex *CTL This SP counts the amount of paper (front/backcounted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.Last pages printed only on one side are not

counted.[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-421

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.

C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-422

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing by the copier application.

F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-423

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of

pages processed for printing by the fax application.P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-424

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing by the printer application.

S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-425

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing by the scanner application.

L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-426

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing from within the document server mode windowat the operation panel.

O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-427

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing by Other applications

8-42x 1 Simplex> Duplex

8-42x 2 Duplex> Duplex

8-42x 3 Book> Duplex

8-42x 4 Simplex Combine

8-42x 5 Duplex Combine

8-42x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)




8-42x 10 9> 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)

8-42x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)

8-42x 12 Booklet

8-42x 13 Magazine

• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers whoneed to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paperconsumption.

• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1page.

• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-98 SM

Booklet Magazine

OriginalPages

CountOriginalPages

Count

1 1 1 12 2 2 2

3 2 3 2

4 2 4 2

5 3 5 4

6 4 6 4

7 4 7 4

8 4 8 4

T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three featuresbelow, regardless of which application was used.

C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-432

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three featuresbelow with the copy application.

P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-434

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three featuresbelow with the print application.

L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-436

These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the documentserver mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.

O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-437

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three featuresbelow with Other applications.

8-43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. Thecount for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.

8-43x 2 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) orprinted as a book with booklet right/left pagination.

8-43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps wereapplied, including page numbering and date stamping.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-99 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-441

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by allapplications.

C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-442

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by thecopy application.

F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-443

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the faxapplication.

P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-444

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by theprinter application.

S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-445

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by thescanner application.

L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-446These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from withinthe document server mode window at the operation panel.

O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-447

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Otherapplications.

8-44x 1 A3

8-44x 2 A4

8-44x 3 A5

8-44x 4 B4

8-44x 5 B5

8-44x 6 DLT8-44x 7 LG

8-44x 8 LT

8-44x 9 HLT

8-44x 10 Full Bleed

8-44x 254 Other (Standard)

8-44x 255 Other (Custom)

• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-100 SM

PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-451

These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.

8-451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray

8-451 2 Tray 1 Copier8-451 3 Tray 2 Copier

8-451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)

8-451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)

8-451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)

8-451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.




T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-461

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by allapplications.

• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter isbased on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feedrollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.

• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.

• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and apage printed on one side counts as 1.

C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-462

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copyapplication.

F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-463

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the faxapplication.

P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-464

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printerapplication.

L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-466

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within thedocument server mode window at the operation panel.

8-46x 1 Normal

8-46x 2 Recycled

8-46x 3 Special

8-46x 4 Thick8-46x 5 Normal (Back)

8-46x 6 Thick (Back)

8-46x 7 OHP

8-46x 8 Other

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-101 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-471

These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.

8-471 1 ~49%

8-471 2 50%~99%8-471 3 100%

8-471 4 101%~200%

8-471 5 201% ~

• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operationpanel but performed remotely with an external network application capable ofperforming magnification adjustment as well.

• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such asExcel are also counted.

•Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored onthe document server are not counted.

• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlargecopying are counted.

• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automaticallyassigned a rate of 100%.

8-481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL

8-484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save featureswitched on.

Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Printapplication.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8-491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8-492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8-493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8-496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printedin the Color Mode by each application.

8-49x 1 B/W

8-49x 2 Single Color

8-49x 3 Two Color

8-49x 4 Full Color

8-501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8-504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printedin the Color Mode by the print application.

8-50x 1 B/W

8-50x 2 Single Color

8-50x 3 Full Color

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-102 SM

T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-511

These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pagesprinted.

P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-514These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pagesprinted.

8-514 1 RPCS

8-514 2 RPDL

8-514 3 PS3

8-514 4 R98

8-514 5 R16

8-514 6 GL/GL2

8-514 7 R55

8-514 8 RTIFF

8-514 9 PDF8-514 10 PCL5e/5c

8-514 11 PCL XL

8-514 12 IPDL-C

8-514 13 BM-Links Japan Only

8-514 14 Other

• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to thePrint application.

• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-103 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-521

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by allapplications.

C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-522

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by theCopy application.

F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-523

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by theFax application.

Note:

• Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.

P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-524

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by thePrint application.

S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-525

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by theScanner application.

L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-526

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed fromwithin the document server mode window at the operation panel.

8-52x 1 Sort

8-52x 2 Stack

8-52x 3 Staple

8-52x 4 Booklet

8-52x 5 Z-Fold

8-52x 6 Punch

8-52x 7 Other

NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,the unstapled pages are still counted.

2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted.

8-531 Staples *CTL This SP counts the amount of staples usedby the machine.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-104 SM

T:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-581

These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless ofthe application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, thesecounters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.

8-581 1 Total

8-581 2 Total: Full Color

8-581 3 B&W/Single Color

8-581 4 Development: CMY

8-581 5 Development: K

8-581 6 Copy: Color

8-581 7 Copy: B/W

8-581 8 Print: Color

8-581 9 Print: B/W

8-581 10 Total: Color

8-581 11 Total: B/W

8-582 C:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down bycolor output.

8-582 1 B/W

8-582 2 Single Color

8-582 3 Two Color

8-582 4 Full Color

8-583 F:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by coloroutput.

8-583 1 B/W


8-584 P:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down bycolor output.

8-584 1 B/W


8-584 3 Full Color

8-586 L:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by coloroutput.

8-582 1 B/W


8-582 3 Two Color

8-582 4 Full Color

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-105 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

O:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-591

These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pagesprinted, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)applications only.

8-591 1 A3/DLT

8-591 2 Duplex

8-591 3 Staple

T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-631

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to atelephone number.

F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-633

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to atelephone number.

8-63x 1 B/W

8-63x 2 Color

• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages arecounted separately as B/W or Color.

• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only soSP8631 and SP8633 are the same.

• The counts include error pages.

• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,the count is done for each destination.

• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each

destination.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-106 SM

T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-641

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as faximages using I-Fax.

F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-643These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as faximages using I-Fax.

8-64x 1 B/W

8-64x 2 Color

• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages arecounted separately as B/W or Color.

• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only soSP8641 and SP8643 are the same.

• The counts include error pages.

• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,the count is done for each destination.

• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.

• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for eachdestination.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-107 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-651

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.

S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-655

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for the Scan application only.

L:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-656

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for LS applications only.

8-65x 1 B/W

8-65x 2 Color

NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is storedon the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not

counted.2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).

3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, thecount is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTPserver).

4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may bedivided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document issent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations andthe count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-108 SM

T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-661

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a ScanRouter server by both Scan and LS applications.

S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-665These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a ScanRouter server by the Scan application.

L:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-666

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a ScanRouter server by LS applications.

8-66x 1 B/W

8-66x 2 Color

NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on theHDD of the Scan Router server.

2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,the counts are not done.

3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival atthe Scan Router server.

T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-671

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folderon a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.

S:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-675

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-

to-PC with the Scan application.L:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-676

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC function with the LS applications.

8-67x 1 B/W

8-67x 2 Color

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-109 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

8-681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL

8-683 F:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages sent by PCFax. These SPs are provided for the Faxapplication only, so the counts for SP8 681 andSP8 683 are the same.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PCthrough the copier to the destination.

• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)

8-691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL

8-692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL

8-693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL8-694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL

8-695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL

8-696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages sent fromthe document server. The counter for theapplication that was used to store the pages isincremented.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]The L: counter counts the number of pages storedfrom within the document server mode screen atthe operation panel. Pages stored with the StoreFile button from within the Copy mode screen goto the C: counter.

NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder areadded to the count.

2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages

stored are counted for the application that stored them.3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is

done for the number of pages sent to each destination.

TX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-701

These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used tosend them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations viaISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.

8-701 1 PSTN-1

8-701 2 PSTN-2

8-701 3 PSTN-38-701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)

8-701 5 Network

RX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 741

These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical portused to receive them.

8-741 1 PSTN-1

8-741 2 PSTN-2

8-741 3 PSTN-3

8-741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)

8-741 5 Network

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-110 SM

Dev Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-771

These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of thedevelopment rollers) for black and other color toners.

8-771 1 Total

8-771 2 K

8-771 3 Y

8-771 4 M

8-771 5 C

Toner Botol Info. *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-781

These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.

NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.

8-781 1 Toner [BK] The number of black-toner bottle

8-781 2

Toner [Y] The number of yellow-toner bottle8-781 3 Toner [M] The number of magenta-toner bottle

8-781 4 Toner [C] The number of cyan-toner bottle

8-791 LS Memory Remain *CTL This SP displays the percent of spaceavailable on the document server forstoring documents.

[0~100/ 0 / 1]

Toner Remain *CTL [0~100/ 0 / 10]8-801

These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. These SP’s

allow the user to check the toner supply at any time.8-801 1 K

8-801 2 Y

8-801 3 M

8-801 4 C

Coverage *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1]8-831

These SPs display the average coverage by color. (SP 7-833)

8-831 1 Average [BK]

8-831 2 Average [Y]

8-831 3 Average [M]

8-831 4 Average [C]

Coverage *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1]8-841

These SPs display the coverage of the last print by color. (SP 7-833)

8-841 1 Last [BK]

8-841 2 Last [Y]

8-841 3 Last [M]

8-841 4 Last [C]

Rev. 05/2005

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-111 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Coverage: 0-10% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-851

These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage ofeach color is from 0% to 10%.

8-851 1 S: BK

8-851 2 S: Y8-851 3 S: M

8-851 4 S: C

Coverage: 11-20% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-861


8-851 1 S: BK

8-851 2 S: Y

8-851 3 S: M

8-851 4 S: C

Coverage: 21-30% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-871


8-871 1 S: BK

8-871 2 S: Y

8-871 3 S: M

8-871 4 S: C

Coverage: 31%- *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-881

These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of

each color is 31% or higher.8-881 1 S: BK

8-881 2 S: Y

8-881 3 S: M

8-881 4 S: C

PM Counter *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-891

These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application.

8-891 1 S: Toner [BK]

8-891 2 S: Toner [Y]

8-891 3 S: Toner [M]

8-891 4 S: Toner [C]

PM Counter: Previous *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-901

These SPs display the number of sheet output by the scan application withthe previously replaced units.

8-901 1 S: Toner [BK]

8-901 2 S: Toner [Y]

8-901 3 S: Toner [M]

8-901 4 S: Toner [C]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-112 SM

Machine Status *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8-941

These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operationmode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machineoperation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.

8-941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time whilecontroller is saving data to HDD (while engine is notoperating).

8-941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controllersaves data to HDD. Does not include time spent inEnergy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.

8-941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performingbackground printing.

8-941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.Includes time while machine is performingbackground printing.

8-941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performingbackground printing. Does not include time machineremains powered off with the power switches.

8-941 6 Down Time/SC Total down time due to SC errors.

8-941 7 Down Time/PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.

8-941 8 Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.

8-941 9 Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.

AddBook Register *CTL8-951

These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data

registration.8-951 1 User Code User code registrations.

8-951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.

8-951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.

8-951 4 Group Group destination registrations.

8-951 5 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrationsfor relay TX.

8-951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8-951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations withthe Program (job settings) feature.

8-951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations withthe Program (job settings) feature.

8-951 9 Printer Program Printer application registrationswith the Program (job settings)feature.

8-951 10 ScannerProgram

Scanner application registrationswith the Program (job settings)feature.

[0~255 / 0 / 255]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-113 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

NOTE: Memory Clear (SP5-801 & 7-808)The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information,meter charge setting (SP5-930), and meter charge counters (SP7-003) are notcleared.

5-801 [Memory Clear]

5-801-3 SCS SP5-009, 101, 104, 305, 812, 833, 961, and 970SP7-101, 204, 209, 401, 502, 504, 506, and 507

5-801-4 IMH No SP modes are cleared. But, all files stored in theHDD are cleared.

5-801-5 MCS No SP modes are cleared.

5-801-6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.

5-801-7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RXsettings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.

5-801-8 Printer application The following service settings:

• Bit switches

• Gamma settings (User & Service)• Toner LimitThe following user settings:

• Tray Priority

• Menu Protect

• System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver

• I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)

• PCL Menu

5-801-9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and allthe scanner SP modes.

5-801-10 Netfile application Deletes the network file application management filesand thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.

5-801-11 NCS All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)5-801-12 IPU Clears the IPU settings

5-801-13 R-Fax Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.

5-998 [Memory Clear]

5-998-1 ENG Setting All engine related SP modes except for the following:

• Serial number information

• SP modes related to meter charge

• Counters and logging data

5-998-2 ENG Counter All counters and logging data related to engine

7-808 [Counter Clear]

7-808-1 Counter Clear SP7-101, 204, 209, 502, 504, 506, and 507

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-114 SM

5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Eachdigit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.

Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1

Reading5-803Bit Description

0 1

Paper Tray 1

0 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected

1 Paper Lift Sensor

Deactivated

Activated

(Actuator notinside sensor)

2 Paper Height Sensor 1

3 Paper Height Sensor 2 See Table 1.

5-803-1

4 Tray Set Not set Set

Paper Tray 2


1 Paper Lift Sensor

Deactivated

Activated

(Actuator notinside sensor)



See Table 1.

1: Activated(Actuator inside sensor)

4 Paper Size Switch 1

5 Paper Size Switch 26 Paper Size Switch 3

5-803-2

7 Paper Size Switch 4

See Table 2.1: Pushed

By-pass Table


1 Paper Size 1

2 Paper Size 2

3 Paper Size 3

5-803-3

4 Paper Size 4

See Table 3.

Doors

0 Front Door Switch Opened Closed

1 Left Door Switch Opened Closed

2 Right Door Switch Opened Closed

3 Vertical Transport Switch Opened Closed

4 Duplex Inverter Unit Switch Opened Closed

5-803-4

5 Right Door Switch (LCT/PFU) Opened Closed

Paper Feed

0 Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

1 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

2 Upper Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected

3 Lower Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected

4 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

5 Duplex Inverter Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

5-803-5

6 Duplex Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-115 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Paper Exit

0 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

1 Paper Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

2 Duplex Exit Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected



5-803-6

5 Exit Upper Limit Sensor Not full Full

Fusing Unit

0 Fusing Unit (Set) Not set Set

1 Fusing Unit (New) 0 to 1 : New unit installed

2 Oil Supply Unit (Set) Set Not set

3 Oil Supply Unit (New) 1 to 0 : New unit installed

4 European Version US Europe

5 Waste Oil Bottle Set Sensor Not Set Set

5-803-7

6 Waste Oil Sensor Not full Full

Motor Lock

0 Development Drive Motor - CMY Not locked Locked1 Development Drive Motor - K Not locked Locked

2 Fusing Fan Motor Not locked Locked

3 Air Pump Motor - MY Not locked Locked

5-803-8

4 Air Pump Motor - CK Not locked Locked

Dev. Unit/ PCU

0 Development Unit - K Not set Set

1 Development Unit - C Not set Set

2 Development Unit - M Not set Set

3 Development Unit - Y Not set Set

4 PCU - K Not set Set

5 PCU - C Not set Set6 PCU - M Not set Set

5-803-9

7 PCU - Y Not set Set

Toner End Sens

0 Black Toner Not end End

1 Cyan Toner Not end End

2 Magenta Toner Not end End

5-803-10

3 Yellow Toner Not end End

Others

0 LD H.P. Sensor Not H.P. H.P.

1 Transfer Belt Sensor Not contact Contact

2 - - -

3 Used Toner Sensor Not full Full4 Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor Not set Set

5 Drum Gear Position Sensor - K

Deactivated

Activated

(Actuator insidesensor)

5-803-13

6 Drum Gear Position Sensor - CMY

Deactivated

Activated

(Actuator insidesensor)

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-116 SM


0 1

Mail Box 1 (Not used)

0 Tray 1 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full1 Tray 1 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

2 Tray 2 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full

3 Tray 2 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected




5-803-15


Mail Box 2 (Not used)

0 Vertical Transport Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected

1 Vertical Transport Sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected

5-803-16

2 Door Safety Switch Opened Closed

ARDF Input Check: SP6-007


0 1

7 Original width sensor 4 Paper not detected Paper detected




3 Skew correction sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

2 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

1 Original length sensor 1* Paper not detected Paper detected

6-007-1


7 Original stopper HP sensor Original stopper up Original stopper down

6 Pick-up HP sensor Cover closed Cover opened

5 Top cover Sensor Cover closed Cover opened

4 Lift sensor Pick-up roller up Pick-up roller down

3 Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

2 Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

1 Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

6-007-2

0 Interval Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

7 (Not used) — —







6-007-3


NOTE: The original length sensors detect the following paper sizes: B5 (sensor 1),LG (sensor 2), and A4 (sensor 3).

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-117 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

Low: Deactivated, High: Activated (actuator inside sensor)

Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2

Full Low Low

Nearly full Low HighNear end High High

Almost empty High Low

Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)

0: Not pushed, 1: pushed

Models Switch Location

North America Europe/Asia 1 2 3 4

11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 1 0 0

A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 0

81/2" x 14" SEF *1 B4 SEF *1 1 1 0 181/2" x 11" SEF

*2 A4 SEF

*2 0 1 1 0

11" x 81/2" LEF *3 11" x 81/2" LEF *3 1 0 1 1

A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1

B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0

A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1

NOTES:*1

: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2*2

: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3*3

: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4

Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

Models Bit No.

North America Europe/Asia 4 3 2 1

11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 0 1 1

A3 SEF A3 SEF 0 0 0 1

- B4 SEF 0 0 1 0

81/2" x 11" SEF A4 SEF 0 1 1 0

8" x 13" SEF F SEF 0 1 0 0

- A5 SEF 1 1 0 051/2" x 181/2" SEF B6 SEF 1 0 0 0

Post Card Post Card 0 0 0 0

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-118 SM

Table 4: Original Size Detection

Original Size Length SensorWidth

Sensor

A4/A3 version LT/DLT version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1

SP4-301display

A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132

B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141

F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165

A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133

B5-L X X O X X 142

A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5

B5-S X X X X O 14

A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-119 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.2.1 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE

CH: ChargePF: Paper FeedTS: Toner Supply

CW: ClockwiseCCW: CounterclockwiseMB: 4-bin MailboxDI: Duplex Inverter

5-804 Description

5-804-1 Lift M UP (1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / UP

5-804-2 Lift M DOWN(1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / DOWN

5-804-3 Lift M UP(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / UP

5-804-4 Lift M DOWN(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / DOWN

5-804-5 By-pass CL By-pass Feed Clutch

5-804-6 Pick-up SOL Pick-up Solenoid

5-804-7 PF CL (1) Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 1

5-804-8 PF CL (2) Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 2

5-804-9 PF GRP SOL Grip Roller Release Solenoid

5-804-10 Regist CL Registration Clutch

5-804-11 Junction SOL Exit Junction Gate Solenoid

5-804-12 Oil Supply SOL Oil Supply Unit Solenoid

5-804-13 Fusing CL Fusing Clutch

5-804-14 Wst Tn Vib M Waste Toner Vibration Motor

5-804-19 K Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - K

5-804-20 C Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - C

5-804-21 M Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - M

5-804-22 Y Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - Y

5-804-23 K Dev M H Development Motor - K / High Speed

5-804-24 K Dev M M Development Motor - K / Middle Speed

5-804-25 K Dev M L Development Motor - K / Low Speed

5-804-26 K Dev M Card Black Development Motor - Thick paper

5-804-27 FC Dev M H Color Development Motor - 185mm/s

5-804-28 FC Dev M M Color Development Motor - 125mm/s

5-804-29 FC Dev M L Color Development Motor - 62.5mm/s

5-804-30 TS CL [Y] Toner Supply Clutch for Yellow

5-804-31 TS CL [M] Toner Supply Clutch for Magenta

5-804-32 TS CL [C] Toner Supply Clutch for Cyan

5-804-33 TS CL [K] Toner Supply Clutch for Black

5-804-34 Valve SOL [K] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Black

5-804-35 Valve SOL [C] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Cyan

5-804-36 Valve SOL [M] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Magenta

5-804-37 Valve SOL [Y] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Yellow

5-804-38 Toner Sply Mt1 Toner Supply Motor 1 - yellow and magenta

5-804-39 Toner Sply Mt2 Toner Supply Motor 2 - cyan and black

5-804-40 Air Supply [Y] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Yellow

5-804-41 Air Supply [M] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Magenta

5-804-42 Air Supply [C] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Cyan

5-804-43 Air Supply [K] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Black

5-804-44 T End Sens [Y] Toner End Sensor - Y

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-120 SM

5-804 Description

5-804-45 T End Sens [M] Toner End Sensor - M

5-804-46 T End Sens [C] Toner End Sensor - C

5-804-47 T End Sens [K] Toner End Sensor - K

5-804-50 PSU Fan PSU Cooling Fan Motor5-804-51 Fusing Fan H Fusing Fan Motor / High Speed

5-804-52 Fusing Fan L Fusing Fan Motor / Low Speed

5-804-53 M Fan Laser Optics Housing Unit Cooling Fan

5-804-54 Belt M CW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Clockwise

5-804-55 Belt M CCW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Counterclockwise

5-804-56 Belt M Break Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Break

5-804-57 Fusing Relay Fusing Relay

5-804-58 Heat Lamp Heating Roller Fusing Lamp

5-804-59 Pressure Lamp Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp

5-804-65 Drum M L CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Low Speed / Clockwise

5-804-66 Drum M M CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Middle Speed /Clockwise

5-804-67 Drum M H CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / High Speed / Clockwise

5-804-76 PF M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise

5-804-77 PF M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise

5-804-78 PF M H CW Paper Feed Motor / High Speed / Clockwise

5-804-79 PF M Feed Paper Feed Motor / Feed Speed / Clockwise

5-804-80 By-Pass M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise

5-804-81 By-Pass M C CW Paper Feed Motor / Thick paper or OHP mode /Clockwise

5-804-82 By-Pass M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise

5-804-89 CH DC [Y] Charge DC Bias for Yellow / 125 mm/s5-804-90 CH DC [M] Charge DC Bias for Magenta / 125 mm/s

5-804-91 CH DC [C] Charge DC Bias for Cyan / 125 mm/s

5-804-92 CH DC [K] Charge DC Bias for Black / 125 mm/s

5-804-93 CH AC [FC] 62.5 Charger AC / Full Color / 62.5 mm/s

5-804-94 CH AC [K] 62.5 Charger AC / Black / 62.5 mm/s

5-804-95 CH AC [FC] 125 Charger AC / Full Color / 125 mm/s

5-804-96 CH AC [K] 125 Charger AC / Black / 125 mm/s

5-804-97 CH AC [FC] 185 Charger AC / Full Color / 185 mm/s

5-804-98 CH AC [K] 185 Charger AC / Black / 185 mm/s

5-804-99 Dev DC [Y] Development DC Bias for Yellow

5-804-100 Dev DC [M] Development DC Bias for Magenta5-804-101 Dev DC [C] Development DC Bias for Cyan

5-804-102 Dev DC [K] Development DC Bias for Black

5-804-103 Dev AC [FC] 62.5 Development AC Bias for Color - 62.5 mm/s

5-804-104 Dev AC [K] 62.5 Development AC Bias for Black - 62.5 mm/s

5-804-105 Dev AC [FC] 125 Development AC Bias for Color - 125 mm/s

5-804-106 Dev AC [K] 125 Development AC Bias for Black - 125 mm/s

5-804-107 Dev AC [FC] 185 Development AC Bias for Color - 185 mm/s

5-804-108 Dev AC [K] 185 Development AC Bias for Black - 185 mm/s

5-804-109 Transfer [Y] Transfer Current for Yellow

5-804-110 Transfer [M] Transfer Current for Magenta

5-804-111 Transfer [C] Transfer Current for Cyan

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-121 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5-804 Description

5-804-112 Transfer [K] Transfer Current for Black

5-804-113 Cleaning Bias Transfer Belt Cleaning Roller Bias

5-804-114 PA Roller Bias+ Paper Attraction Roller Bias

5-804-115 PA Roller Bias- Paper Attraction Roller Bias5-804-116 DevAC TRG [FC] Development AC Trigger for Color

5-804-117 DevAC TRG [K] Development AC Trigger for Black

5-804-118 DevPWM TRG [K] Development PWM Trigger for Black

5-804-119 DevPWM TRG [C] Development PWM Trigger for Cyan

5-804-120 DevPWM TRG [M] Development PWM Trigger for Magenta

5-804-121 DevPWM TRG [Y] Development PWM Trigger for Yellow

5-804-122 CHdcPWM TRG [K] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Black

5-804-123 CHdcPWM TRG [C] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Cyan

5-804-124 CHdcPWM TRG [M] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Magenta

5-804-125 CHdcPWM TRG [Y] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Yellow

5-804-126 CHac1 TRG [FC] Charge AC1 Trigger for Color5-804-127 Chac2 TRG [FC] Charge AC2 Trigger for Color

5-804-128 Chac3 TRG [FC] Charge AC3 Trigger for Color

5-804-129 CHac1 TRG [K] Charge AC1 Trigger for Black

5-804-130 Chac2 TRG [K] Charge AC2 Trigger for Black

5-804-131 Chac3 TRG [K] Charge AC3 Trigger for Black

5-804-132 ID Sensor LED ID Sensor LED

5-804-133 TD Vcnt TD Sensor / Vcnt

5-804-134 Memory Chip Memory Chip / Power (5V) Supply

5-804-136 PCU Cln Bias K PCU Cleaning Bias Black

5-804-137 PCU Cln Bias YMC PCU Cleaning Bias YMC

5-804-141 Polygon M 29 Polygon Motor / 29.5285-804-142 Polygon M 21 Polygon Motor / 21.850

5-804-143 LD FC[K]62.5 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 62.5

5-804-144 LD FC[K]125 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 125

5-804-145 LD FC[Y]62.5 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 62.5

5-804-146 LD FC[Y]125 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 125

5-804-147 LD FC[M]62.5 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 62.5

5-804-148 LD FC[M]125 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 125

5-804-149 LD FC[C]62.5 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 62.5

5-804-150 LD FC[C]125 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 125

5-804-151 LD1 [K] 62.5 LD1 Power for Black / 62.5

5-804-152 LD1 [K] 125 LD1 Power for Black / 1255-804-153 LD1 [K] 185 LD1 Power for Black / 185

5-804-154 LD2 [K] 62.5 LD2 Power for Black / 62.5

5-804-155 LD2 [K] 125 LD2 Power for Black / 125

5-804-156 LD2 [K] 185 LD2 Power for Black / 185

5-804-157 LD [K]62.5 LD Power for Black / 62.5

5-804-158 LD [K]125 LD Power for Black / 125

5-804-159 LD [K]185 LD Power for Black / 185

5-804-165 PSU M Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU: Paper Supply Unit) /Motor

5-804-166 PF CL PFU (1) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 1

5-804-167 PF CL PFU (2) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 2

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-122 SM

5-804 Description

5-804-168 Pick-up SOL PSU Pick-up Solenoid / Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU:Paper Supply Unit)

5-804-170 MB M 4-bin Mailbox Main Motor

5-804-171 MB SOL1 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 15-804-172 MB SOL2 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 2

5-804-173 MB SOL3 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 3

5-804-174 MB Gate SOL 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid

5-804-176 Duplex SOL Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid

5-804-177 DI M1 62.5CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise

5-804-178 DI M1 65CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 65 / Counterclockwise





5-804-183 DI M1 370CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Counterclockwise5-804-184 DI M1 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Clockwise

5-804-185 DI M1 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 450 / Clockwise

5-804-186 DI M2 62.5CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise







5-804-193 DI M2 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 370 / Clockwise

5-804-194 DI M2 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 450 / Clockwise5-804-195 DI M2 OFF Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / OFF

5-804-196 DI M12 62.5CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise

5-804-197 DI M12 65CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 65 / Counterclockwise






5-804-203 DI M12 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 370 / Clockwise

5-804-204 DI M12 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 450 / Clockwise

5-804-205 PF M 125CCW Duplex Feed Motor / 125 / Counterclockwise5-804-206 PF M 230CCW Duplex Feed Motor / 230 / Counterclockwise

5-804-207 PF M 370CCW Duplex Feed Motor / 370 / Counterclockwise

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-123 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.2.2 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997)

Test Pattern Printting

Selects the tray in which

desired paper size is

loaded.

SP5-997-001

Selects a pattern.SP5-997-002

Selects the Single Color

or Full Color mode.

Selects a color if printingthe test pattern in the

Single Color mode.

SP5-997-003

SP5-997-004

SP5-997-005 Selects the resolution.

Prints the test pattern.

Tray or by-passSelects the desired

paper size.

SP5-997-007

SP5-997-006

Tray

By-pass

B146S913.WMF

Test Pattern Selection (SP5-997-002)0: None1: 1-dot sub-scan line2: 2-dot sub-scan line3: 1-dot main-scan line4: 2-dot main-scan line5: 1-dot grid pattern (Fine)6: 2-dot grid pattern (Fine)7. 1-dot grid pattern (Rough)8. 2-dot grid pattern (Rough)9. 1-dot slant grid pattern10. 2-dot slant grid pattern11. 1-dot pattern

12. 2-dot pattern13. 4-dot pattern14. 1-dot trimming pattern15. 2-dot trimming pattern16. Cross stitch: sub-scan17. Cross stitch: main-scan18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)19. Belt pattern (Vertical)20. Checkered Flag21. Grey scale (Vertical)22. Grey scale (Horizontal)23. Solid

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER SERVICE MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-124 SM

5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE

SP1-XXX (Service Mode)

1-001 [Bit Switch]

1-001-1 Bit Switch 1 Settings1-001-2 Bit Switch 2 Settings

1-001-3 Bit Switch 3 Settings






*CTL Adjusts the bit switch settings. DFU

1-003 [Clear Setting]

Initialize Printer System1-003-1

Initializes settings in the “System” menu of the user mode.1-003-3 Delete Program

1-004 [Print Summary]

Print Summary1-004-1

Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).

1-005 [Display Version]

Disp. Version1-005-1

Displays the version of the controller firmware.

1-006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On

1-006-1 Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the documentserver is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. Whenyou select “1,” the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service ModeSP5-967.

[Data Recall]1-101

Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) theprevious setting, or c) the current setting.

1-101-1 Factory

1-101-2 Previous1-101-3 Current

1-101-4 ACC

*CTL

[Resolution Setting]1-102

Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.

1-102-1 1200x1200 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 1200x1200 Text, 1800x600,Text, 600x600 Text

[Test Page]1-103

Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma

adjustment.

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER SERVICE MODE

SM 5-125 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

1-103-1 Color Gray Scale

1-103-2 Color Pattern

[Gamma Adjustment]1-104

Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the “Mode Selection” menu.1-104-1 Black: Highlight

1-104-2 Black: Shadow

1-104-3 Black: Middle

1-104-4 Black: IDmax

1-104-21 Cyan: Highlight

1-104-22 Cyan: Shadow

1-104-23 Cyan: Middle

1-104-24 Cyan: IDmax

1-104-41 Magenta: Highlight

1-104-42 Magenta: Shadow

1-104-43 Magenta: Middle

1-104-44 Magenta: IDmax1-104-61 Yellow: Highlight

1-104-62 Yellow: Shadow

1-104-63 Yellow: Middle

1-104-64 Yellow: IDmax

*CTL

[ 0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]

[Save Tone Control Value]1-105

Stores the print gamma adjusted with the “Gamma Adj.” menu item as the currentsetting. Before the machine stores the new “current setting", it moves the datacurrently stored as the ‘current setting’ to the “previous setting” memory storagelocation.

1-105-1 ToneCtlSave

[Toner Limit]1-106

Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.

1-106-1 Toner Limit: Photo [ 100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]

1-106-2 Toner Limit: Text

*CTL

[ 100 to 400 / 190 / 1 %/step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-126 SM

5.4 SCANNER SP MODE

SP1-xxx (System and Others)

[Compression Type]1-004

Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.1-004-1 Compression Type *

CTL[ 1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]

1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR

[Erase margin]1-005

Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.

If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.

1-005-1 Erase Margin *CTL

[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]

1-007 [Store Priority] *CTL

[1: Send/2: Store Only/3: Send & Store]

1-007-1 This program specifies how scanned data is processed as default.

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

SM 5-127 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

2-002 [Text (Print) mode settings]

MTF Filter Coefficient(Main scan)

*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1/step ] DFU 2-002-1

Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Text mode.

Select a higher number for a stronger filter.

If this is “0”, the MTF filter is not applied.

MTF Filter Coefficient(Sub scan)

*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1/step ] DFU 2-002-2

As above, for sub scan

Smoothing Filter *CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 1 / 255/step ] DFU 2-002-7

Selects the smoothing pattern for Text mode when using binary picture processingmode.

A larger value could cause moiré to appear in the image.

Scanner Gamma *CTL

[ 0 to 6 / 4 / 11/step ] DFU

0: Standard

1: Smooth

2: Clearly

3: Liner

4: Text image for the delivery function

5: Text/photo image for the delivery function

6: Photo image for the delivery function

2-002-8

Selects the scanner gamma type for Text mode when using binary picture processingmode.

Adjusts the image density for each image density level for Text mode when usingbinary picture processing mode.

2-002-11 Notch No.7: (Lighter): Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-002-12 Notch No.7: (Lighter): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-002-13 Notch No.7: (Lighter): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-002-14 Notch No.6: Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-002-15 Notch No.6: Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-002-16 Notch No.6: Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU




2-002-20 Notch No.4 (Middle): Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-002-21 Notch No.4 (Middle): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-002-22 Notch No.4 (Middle): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU







2-002-29 Notch No.1: (Darker): Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-002-30 Notch No.1: (Darker): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-002-31 Notch No.1: (Darker): Threshold

*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-128 SM

2-003 [Text (OCR) mode settings]


*CTL

[0 to 255 / 11 / 1/step ] DFU 2-003-1

Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Text/Photo mode.

Select a higher number for a stronger filter.If this is “0”, the MTF filter is not applied.


*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 11 / 1/step ] DFU 2-003-2



[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU 2-003-7

Selects the smoothing pattern for Text/Photo mode when using binary pictureprocessing mode.


Scanner Gamma *CTL

[ 0 to 11 / 5 / 1/step ] DFU 2-003-8

Selects the scanner gamma type for Text/Photo mode when using binary pictureprocessing mode.







2-003-16 Notch No.6: Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 200 / 1/step ] DFU 2-003-17 Notch No.5: Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU



2-003-20 Notch No.4: (Middle): Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-003-21 Notch No.4: (Middle): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-003-22 Notch No.4: (Middle): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step ] DFU










*CTL

[ 0 to -255 / 110 / 1/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

SM 5-129 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

2-004 [Text/Photo mode settings]


*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step ] DFU 2-004-1

Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Text/Photo mode.




*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step ] DFU 2-004-2



[ 0 to 255 / 2 / 1/step ] DFU 2-004-7

Selects the smoothing pattern for Text/Photo mode when using binary pictureprocessing mode.


Scanner Gamma *CTL

[ 0 to 11 / 6 / 1/step ] DFU 2-004-8

Selects the scanner gamma type for Text/Photo mode when using binary pictureprocessing mode.

















2-004-26 Notch No.2: Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-004-27 Notch No.2: Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU





*CTL

[ 0 to -255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-130 SM

2-005- [Photo mode settings]


*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 2 / 1/step ] DFU 2-005-1

Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Photo mode.




*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 2 / 1/step ] DFU 2-005-2



[ 0 to 255 / 7 / 1/step ] DFU 2-005-7

Selects the smoothing pattern for Photo mode when using binary picture processingmode.


Scanner Gamma *CTL

[ 0 to 11 / 7 / 1/step ] DFU 2-005-8

Selects the scanner gamma type for Photo mode when using binary pictureprocessing mode.

Dither Matrix Filter *CTL

[1 to 11 / 5 / 1 step] DFU 2-005-9

Selects the dither matrix type for Photo mode when using binary picture processingmode.

Adjusts the image density for each image density level for Text mode when using

binary picture processing mode.2-005-11 Notch No.7: (Lighter): Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU










2-005-21 Notch No.4: (Middle): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-005-22 Notch No.4: (Middle): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU










*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

SM 5-131 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

2-006 [Gray – scale mode settings]


*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step ] DFU 2-006-1

Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction when using grayscale

processing mode.Select a higher number for a stronger filter.

If this is “0”, the MTF filter is not applied


*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step ] DFU 2-006-2



[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU 2-006-7

Selects the smoothing pattern when using grayscale processing mode.


Scanner Gamma *CTL

[ 0 to 11 / 11 / 1/step ] DFU 2-006-8

Selects the scanner gamma type when using grayscale processing mode.


2-006-11 Notch No.7 (Lighter): Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-006-12 Notch No.7 (Lighter): Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-006-13 Notch No.7 (Lighter): Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU




2-006-17 Notch No.5: Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-006-18 Notch No.5: Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU










2-006-28 Notch No.2: Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-006-29 Notch No.1: (Darker): Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU



*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-132 SM

2-007 [Full Color (Text) mode settings]


*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU 2-007-1

Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction when using grayscaleprocessing mode.




*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU 2-007-2



[ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1/step ] DFU 2-007-3



Adjusts the scanner gamma for RGB.

2-007-4 R-Gamma Curve

2-007-5 G-Gamma Curve

2-007-6 B-Gamma Curve

*CTL

[ 0 to 11 / 9 / 1 /step ] DFU


2-007-11 Notch No.7(Lighter): R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-12 Notch No.7(Lighter): G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-13 Notch No.7(Lighter): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-14 Notch No.7(Lighter): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-15 Notch No.7(Lighter): G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-007-16 Notch No.7(Lighter): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-17 Notch No.7(Lighter): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-18 Notch No.7(Lighter): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-19 Notch No.7(Lighter): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-20 Notch No.6: R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-21 Notch No.6: G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-22 Notch No.6: B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-23 Notch No.6: R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-24 Notch No.6 G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-25 Notch No.6: B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-26 Notch No.6: R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-27 Notch No.6: G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-28 Notch No.6: B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU










2-007-38 Notch No.4(Middle): R - Brightness

*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

SM 5-133 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

2-007-39 Notch No. 4(Middle): G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-40 Notch No. 4(Middle): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-41 Notch No. 4(Middle): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-42 Notch No. 4(Middle) G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-43 Notch No. 4(Middle): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-44 Notch No. 4(Middle): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-45 Notch No. 4(Middle): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-46 Notch No. 4(Middle): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU









2-007-55 Notch No.3: B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-007-56 Notch No.2: R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU









2-007-65 Notch No.1(Darker): R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-66 Notch No. 1(Darker): G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-007-67 Notch No. 1(Darker): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-68 Notch No. 1(Darker): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-69 Notch No. 1(Darker) G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-70 Notch No. 1(Darker): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-71 Notch No. 1(Darker): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-72 Notch No. 1(Darker): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-007-73 Notch No. 1(Darker): B - Threshold

*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-134 SM

2-008 [Full Color (Photo) mode settings]


*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 5 / 1/step ] DFU 2-008-1

Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction when using grayscaleprocessing mode.




*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 5 / 1/step ] DFU 2-008-2



[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU 2-008-3



Adjusts the scanner gamma for RGB.

2-008-4 R-Gamma Curve

2-008-5 G-Gamma Curve

2-008-6 B-Gamma Curve

*CTL

[ 0 to 10 / 10 / 1 /step ] DFU


2-008-11 Notch No.7 (Lighter): R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-12 Notch No.7 (Lighter): G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-13 Notch No.7 (Lighter): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-14 Notch No.7 (Lighter): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-15 Notch No.7 (Lighter): G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-008-16 Notch No.7 (Lighter): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-17 Notch No.7 (Lighter): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-18 Notch No.7 (Lighter): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-19 Notch No.7 (Lighter): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU



















2-008-38 Notch No.4 (Middle): R - Brightness

*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

SM 5-135 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

2-008-39 Notch No. 4 (Middle): G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-40 Notch No. 4 (Middle): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-41 Notch No. 4 (Middle): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-42 Notch No. 4 (Middle) G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-43 Notch No. 4 (Middle): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-44 Notch No. 4 (Middle): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-45 Notch No. 4 (Middle): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-46 Notch No. 4 (Middle): B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU









2-008-55 Notch No.3: B - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-008-56 Notch No.2: R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU









2-008-65 Notch No.1 (Darker): R - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-66 Notch No.1 (Darker): G - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU 2-008-67 Notch No.1 (Darker): B - Brightness [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-68 Notch No.1 (Darker): R - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-69 Notch No.1 (Darker) G - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-70 Notch No.1 (Darker): B - Contrast [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-71 Notch No.1 (Darker): R - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-72 Notch No.1 (Darker): G - Threshold [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

2-008-73 Notch No.1 (Darker): B - Threshold

*CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

[Compression ratio of gray-scale]2-021

Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three

settings that can be selected at the operation panel.2-021-1 Compression ratio (Normal image) [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ]

2-021-2 Compression ratio (High quality image) [ 5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step ]

2-021-3 Compression ratio (Low-quality image)

*CTL

[ 5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER SP MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-136 SM

2-022 [ACS settings]

2-022-1 Color judge rate *CTL

[ 1 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step ]

This menu specifies the area ratio that is checked by the auto-color sensing feature.2-022-2 Color gap Notch No.1 *

CTL[ 0 to 255 / 30 / 1 /step ]

2-022-3 Color gap Notch No.2 *CTL

[ 0 to 255 / 28 / 1 /step ]


[ 0 to 255 / 25 / 1 /step ]


[ 0 to 255 / 22 / 1 /step ]


[ 0 to 255 / 10 / 1 /step ]

This program specifies the color difference for each image density level.

2-022-7 Adjustment value of thresholdNOTE: Requires System firmware v1.21or newer.

*CTL

[ -127 to 127 / -110 / 1 /step ]

This menu specifies the threshold of the auto-color sensing feature.

⇒

Rev. 01/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET

SM 5-137 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.5 REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET

5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET

The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Use the followingprocedure.

Turn the main power switch off and on.

-or-

Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machinebeeps once, release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please wait” is displayed fora few seconds, the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normaloperation.

5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET

System Setting Reset

The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use thefollowing procedure.

1. Press User Tools/Counter.

2. Hold down and then press System Settings.

NOTE: You must press first.

3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the systemsettings, press Yes.

4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.

B146S914.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET

B147/B149/B190 5-138 SM

Copier Setting Reset

The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the followingprocedure.

1. Press User Tools/Counter.

2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.

NOTE: You must press first.

3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the CopierDocument Server settings, press “Yes”.

4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press “Exit”.

B146S915.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-139 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE

To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of thefirmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted

into SD Card Slot 3 on the right side of the controller box.

5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE

There are 16 types of firmware as shown below.

Type of firmware FunctionLocation of

firmwareMessage displayed

Engine - Main Printer engine control BCU Flash ROM Engine

Engine - Music Line position adjustment BCU MUSIC CPU Music

Engine - DSP Line position adjustment BCU DSP CPU DSP

SystemOperating system Flash ROM on the

controller boardOnboard System

Netfile ApplicationFeature application Flash ROM on the

controller boardNetfile DocBox

Printer ApplicationFeature application Printer/scanner

SD cardOnboard Printer

Scanner ApplicationFeature application Printer/scanner

SD cardOnboard Scn

Fax ApplicationFeature application Flash ROM on the

controller boardOpt DIMM Fax

NIBNetwork Interface Flash ROM on the

controller boardNetwork Support

Scanner IPU Scanner control IPU Flash ROM Scanner IPU

Operation Panel Panel control Operation Panel Ope Panel. XX

Fax FCU Fax control FCU Jupi FCU (XXX)-1

Language(16 languages)

Language firmware

Two languages can beselected from 16languages.

Operation Panel LANG.1

LANG.2

WebDocBoxDocument serverapplication

Flash ROM on thecontroller board

Web Document Box

WebSysWeb Service application Flash ROM on the

controller boardWeb Support

SG3-PRE1 Optional G3 fax control FCU SG3DREI-1

PS3Printer DescriptionLanguage

SD Card Option PS3⇒

Rev. 05/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

B147/B149/B190 5-140 SM

5.6.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN…

An SD card is a precision device, so always observe the following precautionswhen handling SD cards:

• Always switch the machine off before inserting an SD card. Never insert the SDcard into the slot with the power on.

• After the power has been switched on, never remove the SD card from theservice slot.

• Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SDcard.

• Store SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed high temperature,high humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.

• Always handle SD cards with care to avoid bending or scratching them. Neverdrop an SD card or expose it to other shock or vibration.

Keep the following points in mind while you are using the firmware updatesoftware:

• “Upload” means to send data from the machine to the SD card, and “download”means to send data from the SD card to the machine.

• To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of the LCD, or press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of theoperation panel. For example, “Exit (0)” displayed on the screen means you can

touch the Exit button on the screen, or press the button on the operationpanel of the copier.

• Before starting the firmware update procedure, always make sure that themachine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job from arrivingwhile the firmware update is in progress.

5.6.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE

Preparation

1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire “romdata” folder onto the SD card.

2. If the card already contains the “romdata” folder, copy the “B149” folder onto thecard.

3. If the card already contains folders up to “B149”, simply copy the necessaryfirmware files (e.g. B149xxxx.fwu) into this folder.

⇒

Rev. 06/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-141 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

1. Turn the main power switch off.

2. Remove the slot cover of SD Card Slot

3 ( x 1).

3. With the label on the SD card [B]facing as shown in the diagram, insertthe SD card into SD Card Slot 3 [C].

4. Slowly push the SD card into the slotso it locks in place.

5. Make sure the SD card is locked inplace.NOTE: To remove the SD, push it in

to unlock the spring lock andthen release it so it pops out ofthe slot.

6. If the machine is connected to a network, disconnect the network cable fromthe copier.

7. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial versionupdate screen appears on the LCD in English.

KEY WHAT IT DOES

Firmware (1)Press this button on the touch-screen (or on the 10-key pad) to openthe firmware update screen.

Language Data (2)Press this button on the touch-screen (or on the 10-key pad) to openthe language update screen.

Exit (0)Press this key on the touch-screen (or on the 10-key pad) to quit theupdate procedure and return to normal machine operation.

B146S901.WMF

Update Menu

Firmware (1)

Language Data(2)

Exit(0)

B146S916.WMF

[B]

[C]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

B147/B149/B190 5-142 SM

NOTE: The firmware update and language update cannot be performed during thesame session. If you need to do both, do the firmware update, switch themachine off and on to confirm the successful update of the firmware, thendo the language update.

8. Touch “Firmware (1)” to open the firmware update screen.

ROM/NEW WHAT IT MEANS

ROM:Tells you the number of the module and name of the version presentlyinstalled. The first line is the module number, the second line the version name.

NEW:

Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The first

line is the module number, the second line the version name.

9. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on theoperation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.

Exit(0)

ROM: G0000000ROM: 0.01

ROM: B0705254ROM: 2.16:16

ROM: B0705370ROM: 1.22

NEW: G0000000NEW: 0.0X

NEW: B0705254NEW: 2.16:16

NEW: B0705370NEW: 2.00

Printer (1)

Engine (2)

OpePanel.DOM (3)

PCcard -> ROM Page01

B146S917.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-143 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

10. After pressing the module button, or entering the appropriate number with the10-key pad to select the module, the “Verify” and “Update” keys appear at thebottom of the screen.NOTE: The screen below shows only the “Printer” option selected for update.

KEY WHAT IT DOES

Verify (./*) Press this button (or) to verify the selected module.

Update(#) Press this button (or) to upgrade the selected module.

Exit(0) Press this button (or) to return to the previous screen.

11. To start the update, touch “UpDate (#)” (or).

Exit(0)

ROM: G0000000ROM: 0.01

ROM: B0705254ROM: 2.16:16

ROM: B0705370ROM: 1.22

NEW: G0000000NEW: 0.0X

NEW: B0705254NEW: 2.16:16

NEW: B0705370NEW: 2.00

Printer (1)

Engine (2)

OpePanel.DOM (3)


UpDate(#)Verify(./*)

B146S918.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

B147/B149/B190 5-144 SM

After selecting “Update”, three lines are displayed on the screen:

The first line tells you what is happening, the second line is the name of themodule, and the third line tells you about the progress of the operation. As theupdate progresses, the underscores (_) in the progress bar are replaced byasterisks.

The update is finished after all 10 underscores are replaced by asterisks.

NOTE: The progress bar (*****_ _ _ _) is not displayed for the operation panelfirmware after you touch “OpePanel”. While the LCDC firmware isupdating, the power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals. When

the update is finished, the power key flashes on and off slower at 3 sintervals.

When the update is finished, you will see a screen like the one below:

The first line prompts you that the update is finished, and the second line tellsyou the name of the module that has just been updated.

NOTE: If you have selected more than one module for updating, only the

screen for the last module updated will be displayed.

PCcard -> ROM

Loading

Printer

Printer _ _ _ _ _

B146S919.WMF

PCcard -> ROM

Update done.

Printer Card No.: 1/1

B146S920.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-145 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

12. When you see the “Update Done” message, switch the copier main powerswitch off.

13. Press in the SD card to release it, then remove it from the slot.

14. Switch the copier on for normal operation.Error Messages

If an error occurs during the download, an error message will be displayed inthe first line.

The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number. The example aboveshows error “E24” displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table.

(5.6.8)

PCcard -> ROM

No Valid Data E24

Exit(0)

B146S921.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

B147/B149/B190 5-146 SM

Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled duringthe update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.

Recovery After Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while thefirmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot beguaranteed after the machine is switched on again. If the ROM update does notcomplete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct operationof the machine, the ROM update error will continue to be displayed until the ROMis updated successfully.

In this case, just insert the card once again and switch on the machine to continuethe firmware download automatically from the card without the menu display.

PCcard -> ROM

Reboot after card insert. E82

BLC2 eplot Card No.:1/1

B146S922.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-147 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.6.4 VERIFYING A SUCCESSFUL UPDATE

Follow this procedure to verify that a module has been updated successfully.

1. Switch off the main power switch.

2. If the SD card is not in the machine, insert it into SD Card Slot 3.

3. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial screenappears on the LCD in English.

4. Press “Firmware (1)” to open the firmware update screen.

Update Menu

Firmware (1)

Language Data(2)

Exit(0)

B146S923.WMF

Exit(0)

ROM: G0000000ROM: 0.01

ROM: B0705254ROM: 2.16:16

ROM: B0705370ROM: 1.22

NEW: G0000000NEW: 0.0X

NEW: B0705254NEW: 2.16:16

NEW: B0705370NEW: 2.00

Printer (1)

Engine (2)

OpePanel.DOM (3)


B146S924.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

B147/B149/B190 5-148 SM

5. On the touch-screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number keyon the operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to verify

6. After pressing the key, the items selected for verification are displayed in

reverse and the “Verify” and “Update” keys appear at the bottom of the screen.7. To start the verification, touch “Verify (./*” (or press).

After selecting “Verify”, two lines are displayed on the screen:

The first line tells you the status of the verification for the item selected from themenu, and the second name tells you the name of the item verified.

NOTE: If you selected more than one item for verification, the “Verify Done”

message is displayed only once for the last module verified.

9. When you see the “Verify Done” message, switch the copier main power switchoff.

10. Press in the SD card to release it, then remove it from the slot.

11. Switch the copier on for normal operation.

PCcard -> ROM

Verify done.


B146S925.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-149 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Error during Verification

If anything abnormal is detected during verification, an error message isdisplayed:

The second line tells you the name of the module where the error was detected.

If an error occurs during verification, switch the printer off and download thefirmware from the SD card again.

PCcard -> ROM


Verify Error

B146S926.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

B147/B149/B190 5-150 SM

5.6.5 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL

Follow this procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).

1. Turn the copier main switch off.

2. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3.

3. Switch the copier main switch on.

4. After about 45 seconds the initial screen opens in English.

5. Touch “OpePanel”.

6. Touch “UpDate(#) (or) to start the update. After about 9 seconds, the downloading starts.

While the data is downloading, the operation panel goes off and the mainpower on key flashes in red at 0.5 s intervals. When the update is finished, thesame key starts flashing in green at 1 s intervals.

7. Switch the copier main power switch off, remove the SD card, then switch thecopier on again.

Exit(0)

ROM: G0000000ROM: 0.01

ROM: B0705254ROM: 2.16:16

ROM: B0705370ROM: 1.22

NEW: G0000000NEW: 0.0X

NEW: B0705254NEW: 2.16:16

NEW: B0705370NEW: 2.00

Printer (1)

Engine (2)

OpePanel.DOM (3)


UpDate(#)Verify(./*)

B146S927.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-151 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.6.6 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA

The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the harddisks:

• When the machine is installed.• After the hard disks have been replaced.

The print data contains the controller software, so execute SP5853 to download thefixed stamp data required by the hard disks.


2. Select SP5853 then press “Execute”. The following screen opens while thestamp data is downloading.

The download is finished with the message prompts you to close.

3. Press the “Close” button then cycle the copier off and on again.

PCcard -> ROM

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Stamp Data

Loading

B146S928.WMF

Processing finished. Switch on the

main power switch.

Note: May re-set automatically.

Close

B146S929.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

B147/B149/B190 5-152 SM

5.6.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card

Follow this procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.

NOTE: This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM isreplaced.

1. Before switching the machine off, execute SP5990 001 (SMC Print). You willneed a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.

2. Switch the copier main power switch off.

3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3, then switch the copier on.

4. Execute SP5824 001 (NVRAM Data Upload) then press the “Execute” key

When uploading is finished, the following files are coped to an NVRAM folder

on the SD card. The fileis saved to the path and filename:NVRAM\<serial number>.NV

Here is an example with Serial Number “B1490017”:

NVRAM\B1490017.NV

5. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD cardthat holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which thedata was uploaded.NOTE: NVRAM data from more than one machine can be uploaded to the

same SD card.

Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM

Follow this procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in themachine.

• If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection betweenthe controller and BCU is defective, the NVRAM data download may fail.

• If the download fails, repeat the download procedure.

• If the second attempt fails, enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC printyou created before uploading the NVRAM data. (5.6.6)

1. Switch the copier main power switch off.

2. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 3.

3. Switch the copier main power switch on.

4. Execute SP5825 001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the “Execute” key.NOTE: In order for the NVRAM data to download successfully, the serial

number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of themachine. If the serial numbers do not match, the download will fail.

This procedure downloads the following data to the NVRAM:

• Total Count

• C/O, P/O Count

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-153 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.6.8 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE

Many languages are available for selection, but only two can be selected forswitching. Follow this procedure to select the two languages, either of which can be

selected for the user interface on the operation panel.1. Switch the copier main power switch off.

2. Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 3.

3. Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 45seconds.

4. Touch the “Language (2)” on the screen (or press).

5. Touch “LANG. 1(1)” or “LANG 2(2)

Key What it does

LANG. 1(1)Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to open the nextscreen so you can select the 1st language.

LANG. 1(2)Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to open the nextscreen so you can select the 2nd language.

Exit(0)Touch this key on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to quit the updateprocedure and return to normal screen.

Download Language LCDC ROM B0705370 Lang. Card ------

Now Lang.

Japanese 2.87

------

English - UK 2.87

------

Select Lang.

-> ------------ ---------------

---------------

-> ------------ ---------------

---------------

Exit(0)

LANG. 2(2)

LANG. 1(1)

B146S930.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

B147/B149/B190 5-154 SM

6. To select the 1st Language, touch “LANG 1(1)”.

-or-

To select the 2nd Language, touch “LANG(2)”.

7. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) Language.

If a language is already selected, it will be displayed in reverse.

Touching “Exit(0)” also returns the previous screen.

8. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch “↑(7)” or “↓(9)” on

the screen (or press or) to display more choices.

Exit(0)


Italian (1)

Spanish (2)

Dutch (3)

Norwegian (4)

Danish (6)

(9)

(7)

B146S931.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-155 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

After you select a language, the Download Screen opens.

The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating is displayed.

To the right of the selection, the first column displays the language currently

selected and the 2nd column displays the language selected to replace thatlanguage.

The example below shows that the download will replace “Japanese” with“Italian” as the 1st language.

9. Touch “Update(#)” on the screen (or press) to start the download.

Another screen with a progress bar is not displayed while the language is

downloading.

While the language is downloading:

• The operation panel switches off.

• The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.

10. After the Start LED begins to flash slowly, switch the copier main power switchoff, then remove the SD card from the slot.

11. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.

Download Language LCDC ROM B0705370 Lang. Card ------

Now Lang.

Japanese 2.87

------

English - UK 2.87

------

Select Lang.

-> Italian 2.88

---------------

-> ------------ ---------------

---------------

Exit(0)

LANG. 2(2)

LANG. 1(1)

UpDate(#)

B146S932.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE

B147/B149/B190 5-156 SM

5.6.9 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS

If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be displayed in the firstline. The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number (“E20”, for example).

Error Message Table

Code Meaning Solution

20Cannot map logical address Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use

another SD card.

21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.

22Cannot decompresscompressed data

Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data iscorrupted.

23Error occurred when ROMupdate program started

Controller program abnormal. If the second attemptfails, replace controller board.

24SD card access error Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use

another SD card.

30 No HDD available for stampdata download HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.

31Data incorrect for continuousdownload

Insert the SD card with the remaining data requiredfor the download, the re-start the procedure.

32Data incorrect after downloadinterrupted

Execute the recovery procedure for the intendedmodule download, then repeat the installationprocedure.

33Incorrect SD card version Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

corrupted.

34Module mismatch - Correctmodule is not on the SD card)

SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correctdata (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then installagain.

35

Module mismatch – Module on

SD card is not for this machine

SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD

card is for another machine. Acquire correct updatedata then install again.

36Cannot write module – Causeother than E34, E35

SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SDcard is for another machine. Acquire correct updatedata then install again.

40Engine module downloadfailed

Replace the update data for the module on the SDcard and try again, or replace the BCU board.

42Operation panel moduledownload failed

Replace the update data for the module on the SDcard and try again, or replace the LCDC.

43Stamp data module downloadfailed

Replace the update data for the module on the SDcard and try again, or replace the hard disks.

44

Controller module download

failed

Replace the update data for the module on the SD

card and tray again, or replace controller board.Write Protect switch on SD card is ON.

50Electronic confirmation checkfailed

SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SDcard is for another machine. Acquire correct updatedata then install again.

⇒

Rev. 12/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


SD CARD APPLI MOVE

SM 5-157 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.7.1 OVERVIEW

The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) enables you to copyapplication programs from an SD card to another SD card.

The machine has three SD card slots. It can use two of them–Slot 1 and Slot 2–asthe storage of application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenance work only. Youcannot use three SD cards at the same time as the application program storage. Ifyour application programs are in three or more SD cards, choose one or two SDcards from them, and save all the application programs into the SD card(s).

Extreme caution should be exercised when using SD Card Appli Move:

1. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the applicationprogram from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try touse the SD card after you copy the application program from the card toanother card.

2. Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer.Normal operation is not guaranteed when such SD card is used.

3. Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program fromthe card to another card. This is because: The SD card can be the only proofthat the user is licensed to use the application program. You may need tocheck the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.

4. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy anotherdata to the SD card that stores PostScript data.

8/12/2019 2238c


SD CARD APPLI MOVE

B147/B149/B190 5-158 SM

5.7.2 MOVE EXEC

The menu “Move Exec” (SP5-873-001) enables you to copy application programsfrom the original SD card to another SD card.


2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program iscopied into this SD card.

3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.The application program is copied from this SD card.

4. Turn the main switch on.

5. Start the SP mode.

6. Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.”

7. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel.


9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.


11. Check that the application programs run normally.

8/12/2019 2238c


SD CARD APPLI MOVE

SM 5-159 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.7.3 UNDO EXEC

The menu “Undo Exec” (SP5-873-002) enables you to copy back applicationprograms from an SD card to the original SD card. You can use this program when,

for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec(SP5-873-001).


2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copiedback into this card.

3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.The application program is copied back from this SD card.


5. Start the SP mode.

6. Select SP5-873-002 “Undo Exec.”

7. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel.


9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 1

10. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 and insert it to SD Card Slot 1.

NOTE: This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card areused by the machine.

11. Turn the main switch on.12. Check that the application programs run normally.

8/12/2019 2238c


CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

B147/B149/B190 5-160 SM

5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

5.8.1 OVERVIEW

There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.• Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics

just after the power has been turned on.

• Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics byusing a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)

• SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on orduring operation.

The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.

Power ON

Diagnostic RAM Check

CPU Check

ASIC Check

Standard RAM

Conection Check

Optional RAM

Connection Check

Clock Generator Check

Standard NVRAM

Check

Font Header Check

Optional NVRAM Check

Real Time Clock Check

Network Check

Engine I/F Check

Interrupt Check

Memory Chip Check

Power-on or

Detailed

ROM Sum Check

Standard RAM Detailed

Check

Optional RAM Detailed

Check

Standard NVRAM

Detailed Check

Optional NVRAM

Detailed Check

Optinoal HDD Check

IEEE1284 Loop-back

Check

Real Time Clock

Detailed Check

Font ROM Sum Check

END

Power-on

Detailed

NG SC821

NG SC820

NG SC838

NG

SC826

NG SC828

NG SC829

NG SC826

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

A

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

A

NG Not initialized

NG SC829

NG SC827

NG SC824

NG

Not use optional RAM

Error Logged

B146S933.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

SM 5-161 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine ispowered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually

in order to test other components or conditions that are not tested during self-diagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put themachine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode.

No. Name

G0219350 Parallel Loopback Connector

Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis

Follow this procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.

1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the

Centronics I/F port.2. Hold down, press and hold down, and then while pressing both keys at

the same time, switch on the machine.

You will see “Now Loading” on the touch-panel, and then you will see theresults of the test.The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics and prints the diagnosticreport after completing the test.

• Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detectedduring self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).

•Refer to section 4.2 for details about the error codes.

8/12/2019 2238c


USER PROGRAM MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-162 SM

5.9 USER PROGRAM MODE

5.9.1 MENU

System SettingsGeneral Features

• Panel Tone

• Warm Up Notice

• Copy Count Display

• Function Priority

• Print Priority

• Function Reset Timer

• Output: Copier

• Output: Document Server

• Output: Facsimile

• Output: Printer

• <F/F4> Size Setting

Tray Paper Settings

• Paper Tray Priority: Copier

• Paper Tray Priority:Facsimile

• Paper Tray Priority: Printer

• Tray Paper Size: Tray 2

• Paper Type: Bypass Tray

• Paper Type: Tray 1

• Paper Type: Tray 2

• Cover Sheet Tray• Slip Sheet Tray

Timer Settings

• Auto Off Timer

• Energy Saver Timer

• Panel Off Timer

• System Auto Reset Timer

• Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer

• Facsimile Auto ResetTimer

• Scanner Auto Reset Timer• Set Date

• Set Time

Interface Settings

• Network

• Parallel Interface

• Print List

File Transfer

• Delivery Option

• SMTP Server

• SMTP Authentication

• POP before SMTP

• Reception Protocol

• POP3/IMAP4 Settings

• Key Operator's E-mail Address

• E-mail Reception Port

• E-mail Reception Interval

• Maximum Reception E-mail Size

• E-mail Storage in Server

• Default UserName/Password (Send)

• Program/Change/DeleteE-mail Message

• Program/Change/DeleteSubject

• Scanner Recall IntervalTime

• Number of ScannerRecalls

• E-mail Account

Key Operator Tools

• User Code Management

• Key Counter Management

• External Charge UnitManagement

• Key Operator Code

• Extended Security

• Display/Print Counter

• Display/Clear/PrintCounter per User Code

• Print Address Book:

Destination List• Panel Off Level

• Address BookManagement

• Address BookProgram/Change/DeleteGroup

• Address Book:Program/Change/DeleteTransfer Request

• Address Book: ChangeOrder

• Address Book: Edit Title• Address Book: Select Title

• Auto Delete File

• Delete All Files

• Password Management forStored Files

• AOF

• Program/Change LDAPServer

• User LDAP Server

8/12/2019 2238c


USER PROGRAM MODE

SM 5-163 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Maintenance

Auto Color Calibration

Color Registration

Copier Document Server FeaturesGeneral Features

• Auto Paper Select Priority

• Paper Display

• Original Type Display

• Original Type Priority

• Original Photo TypePriority

• Auto Tray Switching

•Duplex Mode Priority

• Copy Orientation in DuplexMode

• Original Orientation inDuplex Mode

• Change Initial Mode

• Maximum Copy Quantity

• Tone: Original Remains

• Job End Call

• Copy Function Key: F1



• Copy Function Key: F4• Copy Function Key: F5

• Document Server StorageKey: F1





• Clear Bypass Mode

• Color Mode Priority

• Two Color Mode Priority

• Auto Image DensityPriority

Reproduction Ratio

• Shortcut R/E 1

• Shortcut R/E 2

• Shortcut R/E 3

• Enlarge 1

• Enlarge 2

• Enlarge 3

• Enlarge 4

• Enlarge 5• Priority Setting: Enlarge

• Reduce 1

• Reduce 2

• Reduce 3

• Reduce 4

• Reduce 5

• Reduce 6

• Priority Setting: Reduce

• Ratio for Create Margin

• R/E Priority

Edit

• Front Margin: Left/Right

• Back Margin: Left/Right

• Front Margin: Top/Bottom

• Back Margin: Top/Bottom

• 1 Sided → 2 Sided AutoMargie: T to T

• 1 Sided → 2 Sided AutoMargie: T to B

• Erase Boarder Width

• Erase Original Shadow in

Combine• Erase Center Width

• Front Cover Copy inCombine

• Copy Order in Combine

• Image Repeat SeparationLine

• Double Copies SeparationLine

• Separation Line inCombine

• Orientation Magazine

Stamp

• Preset Stamp

• User Stamp

• Date Stamp

• Page Numbering

Input/Output

• Switch to Batch

•SADF Auto Reset

• Rotate Sort: Auto PaperContinue

• Auto Sort

• Memory Full Auto ScanRestart

• Letterhead Setting

Adjust Color Image

• Background Image of ADS(Full Color/Two Color)

• Color Sensitivity

• A.C.S. Sensitivity• A.C.S. Priority

8/12/2019 2238c


USER PROGRAM MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-164 SM

Facsimile Features

General Settings/Adjustment

• Memory/Immediate

Transmission Switch• Text Size Priority

• Original Type Priority

• Auto Image Density

• Adjust Scan Density

• Select Title


• Adjust Sound Volume

• Program Fax Information

• Scan End Reset

• TX Stamp Priority

• Line Priority Setting• Program Economy Time

• On Hook Mode ReleaseTime

• Quick Operation Key 1



Reception Settings

• Switch Reception Mode

• Authorized RX• Forwarding

• RX File Print Quantity

• 2 Sided Print

• RX Reverse Printing

• Paper Tray

• Specify Tray for Lines

• Checkered Mark

• Center Mark

• Print Reception Time

E-mail Settings• Internet Fax Settings

• Maximum E-mail Size

• SMTP RX File DeliverySetting

Key-Operator Tools

• Program/Change/Delete

Standard Message• Store/Change/Delete Auto

Document

• Program/Change/DeleteScan Size

• Print Journal

• Transmission Page Count

• Forwarding

• Memory Lock RX

• ECM

• Parameter Setting

• Program Special Sender

• Box Setting

• Transfer Report

• Program Confidential ID

• Program Polling ID

• Program Memory Lock ID

• Reception File Setting

• Stored RX File User CodeSetting

Printer Features

Paper Input• Bypass Paper Size

List/Test Print

• Multiple List

• Configuration Page

• Error Log

• Menu List

• PCL Configuration/FontPage

• PS Configuration/FontPage

• Hex Dump

Maintenance

• Menu Protect

• 4 Color Graphic Mode

System• Print Error Report

• Auto Continue

• Memory Overflow

• Job Separation

• Memory Usage

• B&W Page Detect

• Duplex

• Copies

• Sub Paper Size

• Page Size

• Letterhead Setting

Host Interface

• I/O Buffer

• I/O Timeout

PCL Menu• Orientation

• Form Lines

• Font Source

• Font Number

• Point Size

• Font Pitch

• Symbol Set

• Courier Font

• Extend A4 Width

• Append CR to LF

• Resolution

8/12/2019 2238c


USER PROGRAM MODE

SM 5-165 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Scanner Features

Scan Settings

• Default Scan Settings

• Wait Time for NextOriginal: Exposure Glass

• Wait Time for NextOriginal(s): SADF

• Original Setting

• Original Feed Type Priority

• Mixed Original SizesPriority

• Original Orientation Priority


• Auto Color Select: ModePriority

• A.C.S. Sensitivity Level

Destination List Settings

• Destination List Display

Priority 2• Select Title

Send Settings

• TWAIN Standby Time

• File Type Priority• Compression (Black &

White)

• Compression (GrayScale/Full Color)

• Print & Delete ScannerJournal

• Maximum E-mail Size

• Divide & Send E-mail

• E-mail InformationLanguage

• Sender's Name Default

(Language)—

Inquiry

Print Inquiry List

Counter Print Counter List

8/12/2019 2238c


USER PROGRAM MODE

B147/B149/B190 5-166 SM

5.9.2 DISPLAY

Selecting Menu

To start the UP mode (User Tools/Counter), press the key. The initial screenis displayed.

For the list of the menus and submenus, see section 5.9.1, “Menu.”

Inquiry

The menu “Inquiry” displays the information specified by the corresponding SPs:

Information Specified by

Consumables Telephone number to order SP5-812-003

Machine maintenance/Repair Telephone number SP5-812-001

Sales representative Telephone number SP5-812-004

B146S908.WMF

System Settings

Maintenance

Copier/Document Server Features

Exit

Francais

Inquiry

CounterScanner Features

Printer Features

Facsimile Features

User Tools/Counter

8/12/2019 2238c


USING THE DEBUG LOG

SM 5-167 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG

This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the CustomerEngineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.

Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. Butthis information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.

To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two mainfeatures:

• Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDDfor later retrieval.

• Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.

Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information issaved automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine. Thenask the user to reproduce the problem.

5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved until the “Save Debug Log” function hasbeen switched on and a target has been selected.

1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.

• Press then use the 10-key pad to enter.

• Press and hold down for more than 3 seconds.

• Touch “Copy SP”.

• On the LCD panel, open SP5857.

2. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “1 On/Off”.

3. On the control panel keypad, press “1”. Then press. This switches the SaveDebug Log feature on.NOTE: The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in

order for the debug information to be saved.

B178S001.JPG

Rev. 11/2005

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


USING THE DEBUG LOG

B147/B149/B190 5-168 SM

4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under“5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation panel

key to select the hard disk as the target destination. Then press.

NOTE: Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SDcard if it is inserted in the service slot.

5. Now touch “5858” and specify the events that you want to record in the debug

log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.

1 Engine SC ErrorSaves data when an engine-relatedSC code is generated.

2 Controller SC ErrorSaves debug data when a controller-related SC Code is generated.

3 Any SC ErrorSaves data only for the SC code thatyou specify by entering code number.

4 Jam Saves data for jams.

NOTE: More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4

Touch the appropriate items(s). Press “ON” for each selection. This exampleshows “Engine SC Error” selected.

Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the controlpanel number keys. Then press. This example shows an entry for SC670.

NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables inSection 4. “Troubleshooting”.

B178S002.JPG

B178S003.JPG

B178S004.JPG

⇒

Rev. 11/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


USING THE DEBUG LOG

SM 5-169 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

6. Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debuginformation. Touch “5859”.

Under “5859” press the necessary key item for the module that you want torecord.

Enter the appropriate 4-digit number. Then press.

NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for eachkey.

The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered.

The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials inparentheses indicate the names of the modules.)

4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10

KEY NO. COPY PRINTER SCANNER WEB

1 2222 (SCS)

2 2223 (SRM)

3 256 (IMH)4 1000 (ECS)

5 1025 (MCS)

6 4848 (COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)

7 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)

8 4600 (GPS-PM) 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS)

9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)

10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)

NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”).

Key to Acronyms

Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning

ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application

GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language

GSP-PM GW Print Service – Print Module PTS Print Server

IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service

MCS Memory Control Service SRM System ResourceManagement

NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box(Document Server)

The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically onthe HDD (the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected

with SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859.

B178S005.JPG

Rev. 11/2005

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


USING THE DEBUG LOG

B147/B149/B190 5-170 SM

Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:

• Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,

Scanner, and Web memory modules.• The initial settings are all zero.

• These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all thesettings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,enter a zero for that key.

• You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering thecorresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.

• You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. Forexample, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select thesettings from the 9 available selections for the “PRINTER” column only.

• One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is

limited to 4 MB.

5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD

Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.

1. Insert the SD card into the service slot of the copier.

2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.

3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricohrepresentative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if youwant.

⇒

Rev. 11/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


USING THE DEBUG LOG

SM 5-171 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically. Please

instruct the user to do the following immediately after occurrence to save the debugdata for any other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site.Such problems also include a controller or panel freeze.

NOTE: You must previously switch on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) andselect the hard disk as the save destination (SP5857-002) if you want touse this feature.

1. Press (Clear Modes). on the operation panel when the error occurs.

2. On the control panel, enter “01”. Then hold down for at least 3 seconds

until the machine beeps and then release it. This saves the debug log to thehard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.

3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.

The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets theservice representative retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDDto an SD card.

Rev. 11/2005

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


USING THE DEBUG LOG

B147/B149/B190 5-172 SM

5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES

SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key

This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information writtendirectly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operationis executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (Thisfunction does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copyoperation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log datafrom more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. Thiscommand does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of thespecified key.

SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log

This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not acompletely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS keynumber and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file iscreated on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD (it takes some time tocomplete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may beswitched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute thisSP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of timerequired to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file alreadycreated on the HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded. A new logfile does not need to be created. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 todelete the debug log data from the HDD. Then do SP5857-016.

SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log

This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not acompletely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS keynumber and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file iscreated on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card (it takes sometime to complete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may

be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you executethis SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of timerequired to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the filealready created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded;a new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to delete the debug log data from the SD card. Then do SP5857-017.

⇒

Rev. 11/2005

8/12/2019 2238c


DIP SWITCHES

SM 5-173 B147/B149/B190

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.11 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board

DIP SW No. OFF ON1 to 4 Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.

BCU Board

Set the DIP switch on the BCU as listed in the table.

DIP Switch

4Model 1 2 3

B147/B190 B149

North/South America

ON OFF OFF OFF ON

Europe OFF ON OFF OFF ON Asia ON ON OFF OFF ON

Taiwan ON OFF ON OFF ON

Korea OFF ON ON OFF ON

China OFF OFF ON - ON

When the DIP switch is incorrectly set, one of the following error occurs:

• “SC195”

• “SC902”

• “Fusing Unit Setting Error”

Rev. 11/2005

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c



8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

SM 6-1 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d

D e s c r i p t i o n s

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Scanner HP sensor

2. ADF exposure glass3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage)4. Scanner lamp5. 1st scanner (1st carriage)6. Original width sensor7. Original length sensor8. Scanner motor9. Exposure glass10. Sensor board unit (SBU)

11. Toner cartridge

12. Laser optics housing unit

13. Polygon mirror motor 14. By-pass feed table

15. Transfer unit 16. Rotation encoder17. Tray 2

18. Tray 1

19. Waste oil bottle

20. Waste toner bottle 21. Waste toner vibrator

22. Duplex feed unit 23. Transfer belt cleaning unit 24. ID sensor 25. Development unit (each color) 26. PCU (each color) 27. Fusing unit

B146D901.WMF

1

17

2 3 4 5 8 9

10

6

12

11

13

14

18

19

20

21

16

22

23

24

25

26

27

15

7

K

Y

C

M

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

B147/B149/B190 6-2 SM

6.1.2 PAPER PATH

1. Original tray2. Original exit tray3. By-pass tray

4. Tray 15. Tray 26. Optional paper feed unit/LCT

7. Duplex inverter unit8. Duplex feed unit9. To optional finisher

10. To optional finisher11. External Tray12. Standard tray

The two-tray finisher requires an optional paper feed unit or the LCT. The duplexinverter unit has two exits for the two-tray finisher. When the one-tray paper feedunit is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the upper exit. Whenthe two-tray paper feed unit or LCT is installed, paper feeds out to the two-trayfinisher from the lower exit.

B146D911.WMF

12

12

3

6

8

7

9

10

11

4

5

K

Y

C

M

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

SM 6-3 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Scanner motor: Drives the scanner unit.

2. Development drivemotor-K:

Drives the development unit for black, the fusing unit, and the paperexit section.

3. Development drivemotor-CMY:

Drives the color development units (magenta/cyan/yellow), theregistration roller, and the waste toner collection coils from the PCUs.

4. Drum drive motor-CMY: Drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.

5. Transfer belt contactmotor:

Moves the transfer belt into contact and away from the color PCUs.

6. Paper feed motor: Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2/by-pass tray).

7. Drum drive motor-K: Drives the black PCU and the collection coil in the waste toner bottle.

8. Transfer unit drivemotor:

Drives the transfer unit.

9. Waste toner vibrationmotor:

Makes vibration to prevent the waste toner from clogging the wastetoner path.

B146D912.WMF

1

3

4

5

6

2

7

98

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

B147/B149/B190 6-4 SM

6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE

Overview

* The SD card (printer/scanner), the IEEE 1284 interface, and the Ethernetinterface are optional components for the Asia model.

Sub Power Supply Unit

Main Power

Supply Unit

Fax Controller

Unit

IPU Board

Scanner

I/O Board

Controller

Base EngineControl Unit

Driver

board

Solenoids

Clutches

Fans

Tray motors

Toner pumps

Trans. unit

drive motor

Chips (toner

cartridge)

Sensors

Waste toner

vibrator

Polygon motor

Synch.

detectors

LD boards

Operation

panel

ARDF

controller

Scanner

motor

Bluetooth

Wireless

LAN

IEEE1394

HDD

IEEE1284*

Handset

G3 board

Paper feed

unit/LCT

Fusing lamps

Finisher

controller

Develop.

motors

Trans. unit

drive motor

Feed motor

High volt.

supply (T. unit)

Duplex unit

motors

High volt.supply unit

Motherboard

Duplex unit

solenoidDrum motors

USB

SD card

(Printer/

scanner)*

Optional

component

Standard

component

Ethernet*

SBU

File format

converter

B146D913.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

SM 6-5 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Descriptions

BCU (Base Engine Control Unit):The BCU controls all the mechanical components. The BCU has three CPUs (Main,MUSIC, and DSP). The CPUs control the following functions:

Main CPU

• Engine sequence

• Engine operation

• Timing for peripherals

• High voltage supply, laser, and fusing

• Sensors, drive board, and solenoids

• Motors

MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction) CPU

• TD sensor

• Line position adjustment• Memory chip on the toner cartridge

DSP (Digital Signal Processor)

• Line position adjustment

Controller:The controller connects to the BCU through a PCI bus. The controller handles thefollowing functions:

• Machine-to-host interface

• Operation panel interface

• Network interface• Interfacing and control of the optional USB, Bluetooth, IEEE1394,

IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN), HDD, and DRAM DIMM

LD Drive Board:This is the laser diode drive circuit board.

DRB:The DRB (driver board) controls the paper feed motor, development motors(color/black), drum drive motors (color/black), transfer unit drive motor, and transfervoltage.

IPU:The Image Processing Unit is a large-scale integrated circuit. This unit processesdigital signals.

SBU:The Sensor Board Unit has a CCD (charge-coupled device) and an analog-to-digital conversion circuit.

Operation Panel Board:Controls the display panel, the LED, and the keypad.

Motherboard:The motherboard is the main circuit board connecting with the BCU, FCU,

controller, IPU, and main power supply unit.

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

B147/B149/B190 6-6 SM

FCU:The FCU (fax controller unit) manages the fax programs and communicates withthe controller to share copier resources.

Scanner I/O Board:The scanner I/O board is a circuit board that transmits control signals, image data,and electricity.

6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS

This machine uses four PCUs, four development units, and four laser beams forcolor printing. Each PCU consists of a drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, andblade. From the left, the PCU stations are black, yellow, cyan, and magenta.

A transfer belt feeds paper past the PCUs, and the toner image on each drum istransferred to the paper.

The paper path is inclined about 38 degrees to make the machine as compact aspossible.

B146D500.WMF

2, 6

3

10

5

8

9

7

4

1

K

Y

C

M

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

SM 6-7 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge

Laser exposure: The laser beam from the laser diode (LD) goes through the lens and mirrors andreaches the drum. The beam creates a latent image on the drum by turning thelaser beam on and off.

Development: The development roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on thedrum surface. This machine uses four independent development units (one foreach color).

Image transfer: The charge applied to the transfer roller attracts the toner from the drum to thepaper. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the paper.

Cleaning for OPC drum: The cleaning brush and blade remove any toner remaining on the drum surfaceafter image transfer to the paper.

Quenching for OPC drum: Quenching is done by illuminating the entire area of the drum surface with the laserat the end of every job.

Paper attraction: Paper is attracted to the transfer belt by the charge applied to the paper attractionroller.

Separation: Paper separates from the transfer belt when the belt curves away from it.

Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt: The cleaning brush and blade clean the belt surface. The grounding roller insidethe transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.

ID sensor: The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors (one at the front, center, and rear).The ID sensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on the transfer belt. TheID sensor output is used for process control and for automatic line position, skew,and color registration adjustments for the latent image.

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

B147/B149/B190 6-8 SM

6.2 PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.1 OVERVIEW

This machine provides the following two forms of process control:• Potential control

• Toner supply control

The process control facilities of this machine have the following features:

• Three ID (image density) sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center IDsensor is used for process control. The front, center, and rear ID sensors areused for line positioning and other adjustments.

• TD (toner density) sensor.

6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL

Overview

Potential control controls development to maintain the density of the toner imageson the drums. It does this by compensating for variations in drum chargeability andtoner density.

The machine uses the ID sensor to measure the reflectivity of the transfer belt andthe density of a standard sensor pattern. This is done during the process control

self check.The machine determines the following depending on the ID sensor output and areference table in memory.

• VD: Drum potential without exposure – to adjust this, the machine adjusts thecharge roller voltage.

• VB: Development bias

• VL: Drum potential at the strongest exposure – to adjust this, the machineadjusts the laser power.

(In addition, VREF is corrected. This is used for toner supply control.)

This process controls the development potential so that the maximum amount oftoner applied to the drum is constant. However, to control the developmentpotential to improve reproduction of highlight parts of images, the laser powercontrol method can be changed. This depends on the setting of SP3-125-2. Thedefault setting is 1 (normal control method). To change to the highlight rangecontrol method, set this SP to 2.

If SP3-125-1 is set to 0 (Off), the machine does not do the potential control, butuses the development bias adjusted with SP2-201-1 to -9, the charge roller voltageadjusted with SP2-001-1 to -9, and the laser power selected with SP2-103-1 to -27.However, these SPs should normally not be adjusted in the field.

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-9 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Process Control Self Check

This machine carries out potential control using a procedure called the processcontrol self check. There are seven types of process control self check, categorizedaccording to their execution timing.

1. Forced

This is done when SP3-126-1 is used.

2. Initial

This starts automatically when the power is turned on or when recovering fromenergy saver mode, but only if the fusing unit pressure roller temperature is

60°C or less.

3. Interval: Job End

This starts automatically at the end of a print job when the total print counter for

this feature exceeds 200 (this can be changed with SP3-906-1). After anyprocess control is done (except for forced process control), the counters arereset to “0.”

4. Interval: Interrupt (default: not done)

This interrupts printing and then starts automatically when the machine makesa certain number (A) of continuous color prints in the same job and the mainscan length detection is executed. After it is completed, the machine continuesto make prints.

The value A can be adjusted with SP3-906-2 (default: off).

At this time, only VREF is corrected. Potential control (VD, VB, VL correction) isnot done.

5. Non-use Time (default: not done)

This starts before the next print job if the machine has no job for a certain time(M) after it makes more than a certain number (N) of prints.

M is adjusted with SP3-906-4 and N is adjusted with SP3-906-3.

6. After Toner End Recovery

This starts after recovery from a toner end condition.

7. After Developer Initialization

The machine executes the Auto Toner Density Adjustment (SP3-125-003). Thisstarts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occursautomatically after a new development unit has been installed.

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

B147/B149/B190 6-10 SM

6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE

Step 1: V SG Adjustment

This machine uses three ID sensors (direct reflection type). They are located at the

front, center, and rear of the transfer unit. Only the center ID sensor is used forprocess control. The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belt's reflectivity and themachine calibrates the ID sensor until its output (known as VSG) is as follows.

• VSG = 4.0 ± 0.5 Volts

This calibration compensates for the transfer belt's condition and the ID sensorcondition, such as dirt on the surface of the belt or ID sensor.

Sensor pattern density detection

VSG adjustment

ID sensor solid pattern generation

Sensor pattern density detection

Toner amount calculation

VD, VB, VL selection and VREF adjustment

ID sensor highlight pattern generation

Step 1

VL (LD power) selection

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Step 7

Step 8

Default: off

Start

End

B146D501.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-11 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation

First, the machine agitates the developer for between 15 and 30 seconds until thefluctuation in TD sensor output becomes less than 0.3V.

Second, the machine makes the first series of grade patterns. See the diagram;this 5-grade pattern is made in black, in yellow, in cyan, and in magenta (20squares in total). They are made by changing the development bias and chargeroller voltage. The difference between development bias and charge roller voltageis always the same.

Third, the machine makes the second series of grade patterns in the same order asthe first series. The development bias and charge roller voltage are different fromthose of the first series.

Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection

The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 solid-color squares for each color (5squares in the first series and another 5 squares in the second series). This datagoes to memory.

Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation

The amount of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) is

calculated for each of the 10 grades of the sensor pattern from the ID sensoroutput value from each grade of the pattern.

Left

Transfer belt

12 mm

15 mm

B146D502.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

B147/B149/B190 6-12 SM

Step 5: V D, V B, VL Selection and V REF Adjustment

The machine determines the relationship between the amount of toner on thetransfer belt and the development bias for each of the 10 grades. The machine nowselects the development bias and charge roller voltages for the target M/A for eachcolor by referring to a table in memory.

The way that the laser power (VL) is selected depends on the setting of SP3-125-2.

• If it is set to 0, the LD power is fixed at the value of SP2-103-1, to -27.

• If it is set to 1, LD power is selected using the same memory table as mentionedabove.

• If it is set to 2, LD power is determined by ID sensor highlight pattern generation(steps 6 to 8 later in this procedure).

The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time so that thedevelopment gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP3-120-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).

NOTE: The patterns on the transfer belt are cleaned by the transfer belt cleaningunit.

Allowable changes to VD, VB, and VL as a result of process control:

This depends on the process control type as follows.

• Forced : No limit

• Initial, After Developer Initialization: ± 80 volts

• Interval (Job End/ Non-use Time/ During Toner End Recovery): ± 40 volts

• Interval (Interrupt): Constant (The memory table is not used.)

Steps 6 to 8 are carried out only if SP3-125-2 is set to 2. (Default: Steps 6 to 8are not used)

Target

M/A

M/A

B Development Bias

Development Bias Charge Bias LD Power

B0 C0 L0

B1 C1 L1

— — —

B C L

— — —

Bn-1 Cn-1 Ln-1

Bn Cn Ln

B146D503.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-13 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation

The machine makes a 10-grade pattern on the transfer belt for each toner color.The pattern consists of 10 squares. Each of the squares is 12 mm x 15 mm, and isa dot-pattern squares (not solid-color squares like in the process of step 2). Theyare made using constant bias and charge roller voltages selected from one of the

types mentioned above, and the various grades are made by changing the LDpower.

Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection

The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 grade-pattern squares for each color.This data goes to memory.

Step 8: V L (LD Power) Selection

The machine determines the relationshipbetween the amount of toner on the transferbelt and the laser power for each of the 10grades. The machine now selects the laserpower to get the target M/A.

Left

Transfer belt

12 mm

15 mm

B146D504.WMF

Target

M/A

M/A

L LD Power B146D505.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

B147/B149/B190 6-14 SM

6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB

Highlight Pattern

The M/A target (mass-per-area target) is the target toner amount in a given area.To adjust the toner amount, a highlight pattern [B] is created on the transfer belt atthe following times during each print job.

Job Interval Color of highlight pattern

Black-and-white printing After every four pages Black

Color printing After every one page One of four colors

For color jobs, the order of pattern generation is K → Y → M → C → K → Y → M

→ C.... The highlight pattern is created about 2 cm after the trailing edge of thepaper [A].

Adjustment Process

The machine generates a highlight pattern (just one grade) of a specified density.The center ID sensor checks the density and the machine adjusts VREF bycomparing the reading with the target of each color (SP3-905-1 to 4). When thisadjustment is not sufficient, the machine adjusts VCNT too.

Left

Transfer belt

B146D506.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-15 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL

Overview

Toner supply control uses the following to determine the amount of toner to be

supplied. This is done before every development for each color.

• Density of the toner in the developer (as detected by the TD sensor) - VREF, VT

• Pixel count

The image density is kept constant by adjusting the density of toner in thedevelopment unit, while accommodating to changes in the development conditionsthrough the potential control mechanism. Environmental changes and the numberof prints made are also used in the calculation.

The amount of toner supplied is determined by the “on” time of the toner supply

clutch. The total “on” time for each toner supply clutch is stored in the memory chipfor the relevant toner cartridge. The amount of toner supplied also depends on theprocess line speed for the current job. The machine supplies the calculated amountof toner for each color.

Toner Supply Control Modes

This machine has three toner supply control modes. They are selected with SP2-208-1 to -4.

1. Fuzzy control mode

This is the default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor, ID sensor, andpixel count are used in this mode.

2. Proportional control modeThis mode is used when the ID sensor at the center becomes faulty. Only theTD sensor is used to control toner supply. The machine uses the VREF that isstored in SP2-224-5 to -8.

3. Fixed supply modeThis mode is used when the TD sensor becomes faulty. The amount of tonersupply can be adjusted with SP2-208-5 to -8 if the image density is incorrect(the default setting is 5%).

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

B147/B149/B190 6-16 SM

6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION

Introduction

Toner Near End

To determine the toner near end status, the controller considers the following

information:

• TD sensor [A] in the development unit

• Operation time counter of the toner attraction pump [B]

• Memory chip [C] on the toner cartridge

• Toner end sensor [D]

There are two different toner near-end detection procedures (after here, referred toas “Toner Near End Detection 1” and “Toner Near End Detection 2”). If either ofthese detect near end, the machine enters the near-end condition.

Toner EndTo determine the toner end status, the controller considers the followinginformation:

• TD sensor [A] in the development unit

• Pixel counter

B146D507.WMF

[A]

[C]

[D]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-17 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Toner Near End Detection 1

The controller considers the information from the TD sensor.

1) The controller checks that the following condition is satisfied ten times

consecutively:VREF + 0.4 V < VT

NOTE: The condition can be adjusted with SP2-212.

2) If the above condition is satisfied, toner is supplied to the development unit.The messages, “Loading Toner” and “Please wait,” are displayed.

3) The controller checks the above condition again.

a) If the condition is satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is inthe toner near end status. The messages, “Toner is almost empty,”“Replace Toner Cartridge(s),” and “Xxxxx,” are displayed; where “Xxxxx”

indicates the color, such as cyan.b) If the condition is not satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is

not in the toner near end status. The machine resumes its normaloperation.

Toner Near End Detection 2

The controller considers the information from the operation time counter of thetoner attraction pump, the memory chip on the toner bottle, and the toner endsensor.

1) To calculate the toner amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the controllerconsiders the operation time counter of the toner attraction pump and theinitial amount of the toner (recorded in the memory chip).

2) If the amount reaches the predefined weight (default: 100 g), the controllerchecks the signals from the toner end sensor.

NOTE: The weight can be adjusted with SP2-212-1 and -2.

a) If the signals indicate the toner amount has fallen to a certain level(determined by SP 2-212-12 to -15), the controller decides that themachine is in the toner near end status. The messages, “Toner is almost

empty,” “Replace Toner Cartridge(s)”, and “Xxxxx,” are displayed; where“Xxxxx” indicates the color, such as cyan.

b) If the signals indicate the toner amount is not less than a certain level,the controller decides that the machine is not in the toner near end status.The machine resumes its normal operation.

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

B147/B149/B190 6-18 SM

Toner End Detection

The machine flags the toner end status when one of the conditions below isdetected for a toner color. The messages, “No Toner,” “Replace Toner Cartridge,”and “Xxxxx,” are displayed; where “Xxxxx” indicates the color, such as cyan.

• VREF + 0.5 V < VT (ten times consecutively)

• The pixel counter counts up the equivalent of 50 A4 sheets of pixels (100%coverage) since near-end was detected.

However, if fewer pages have been made since near-end than the numberguaranteed with SP 2-212-11 (default: 10 pages), printing will continue.

NOTE: If one of the following conditions is detected 10 consecutive times, themachine flags a “toner end condition” regardless of the number of pagesprinted since near-end.

• VREF + 1.2 V < VT

• VT > 4.8 V

After the machine detects toner end for black, it cannot print until the tonercartridge is replaced. If cyan, magenta, or yellow are in a toner end conditionduring standby mode, the machine can print with black and white only; colorprinting is disabled.

NOTE: If the yellow, cyan, or magenta toner ends during a color printing job, the job is suspended until toner is supplied. If new color toner is not installed,the user can print black-and-white jobs but not color jobs.

Toner End Recovery

The machine assumes that the toner cartridge has been replaced if either of thefollowing occurs when the near-end or end status exists:

• The upper right cover is opened and closed.

• The main switch is turned off and on.

The machine then starts to supply toner to the development unit. After supplyingtoner, the machine clears the toner near-end or end status if the followingconditions are detected.

• Vt [0] – Vt [3] > 0.5V

• Vt – Vref > 0.3V

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-19 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION

After installing a new development unit, you set “Enable” in SP5-999-005, 006, 007,or 008 for the machine to detect the new unit. When detecting a new unit, the

copier initializes the developer.First, the copier agitates the developer for about 100 seconds. Second, it adjusts

VCNT (control voltage for TD sensor) so that VT (TD sensor output) becomes 3.5 ± 0.1 volts. Third, the copier stores this VT as VREF.

VCNT is corrected for the current humidity every print job. VCNT is also corrected forthe total number of prints, to prevent the developer Q/M from varying.

If the humidity correction is giving poorresults (for example, if the humidity sensor

[A] is broken), it can be disabled with SP2-223-2. Then a value for VCNT must be inputmanually using SP2-224-1 to -4 (adjust bytrial and error).

During developer initialization, the machineforcibly supplies toner because there is notoner inside the toner transport tube atinstallation. Then the machine does theprocess control self check.

B146D903.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNING

B147/B149/B190 6-20 SM

6.3 SCANNING

6.3.1 OVERVIEW

1. Scanner HP sensor

2. ADF exposure glass

3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage)

4. Scanner lamp

5. 1st scanner (1st carriage)

6. Scanner motor

7. Exposure glass

8. Sensor board unit (SBU)

9. Original length sensor

10. Original width sensor

The original on the exposure glass or ARDF exposure glass reflects the lightemitted from the scanner lamp. The reflected light goes to the CCD on the sensorboard by way of the 1st and 2nd scanners. The sensor board converts the CCDanalog signals into digital signals.

When the original is manually placed on the exposure glass, the scanner motorpulls the 1st and 2nd scanners via mechanical linkage. The original is scannedfrom left to right as shown above.

When the original is fed from the optional ARDF, it is automatically transported

onto the ARDF exposure glass, and to the original exit. The original does not stayon the glass, but keeps going to the exit. The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at theirhome positions.

B146D904.WMF

1

8

9

2 73 4 5 6

10

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNING

SM 6-21 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE

The 1st and 2nd scanners [A] are driven by the scanner motor [B] through thescanner drive pulley, scanner drive shaft [C], and two scanner wires [D].

- Book mode -

The SBU board controls the scanner drive motor. The 2nd scanner speed is half

that of the 1st scanner.

In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on themagnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size ormagnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done bychanging the scanner motor speed, and in the main scan direction it is done byimage processing on the IPU board.

Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scannermotor speed using SP4-008.

- ARDF mode -

The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner H.P sensordetects the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ARDF motor feeds the originalthrough the ARDF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in thesub-scan direction is done by changing the ARDF motor speed. Magnification inthe main scan direction is done in the IPU board, like for book mode.

Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ARDFmotor speed using SP6-017

B146D508.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][D]

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNING

B147/B149/B190 6-22 SM

6.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

• The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original lengthsensors [B] detect the original length.

• The SBU controller on the SBU board checks each sensor status when the

platen cover sensor is activated as it is closed. It detects the original size by theon/off signals received from each sensor.

• If the copy is made with the platen cover fully open, the SBU controller on theSBU determines the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start key ispressed.

B146D905.WMF

B146D509.WMF

[A]

[B]

L1 L2 L3

W1

W2

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNING

SM 6-23 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Original Size Length SensorWidth

Sensor

Metric

versionInch version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1

SP4-301display

A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132

B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141

F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165

A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133

B5-L X X O X X 142

A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5

B5-S X X X X O 14

A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128

NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present, X: Paper not present

For other combinations, “Cannot detect original size.” will be indicated on theoperation panel display.

The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. Thisoriginal size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan andincreases the machine's productivity.

However, if the by-pass tray is used, note that the machine assumes that the copypaper is lengthwise (L). For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by-

pass tray, the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area,disregarding the original size sensors.

Original size detection using the ARDF is described in the manual for the ARDF.

6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

The anti-condensation heater is available as an optional unit. The anti-condensation heater prevents condensation on the mirrors, which may occur whenthe scanner unit is, for example, carried from a cold room to a warm room. Suchcondensation can cause abnormal images.

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

B147/B149/B190 6-24 SM

6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.4.1 OVERVIEW

• The CCD (Charged Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals.

• The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digitalsignals. It sends these signals to the IPU (Image Processing Unit).

• The IPU processes the image, then the image data is sent to the controller.

CCD SBU

IPU

FCU

Option

Controller BCU

Memory

HDD

LD Board

M

C

Y

K

Mother Board

B146D917.WMF

MemoryK

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-25 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM

Signal Processing

1. Signal Amplification

• Odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals from the CCD are amplified byoperational amplifiers.

2. Signal Composition

• The amplified signals (even-pixel and odd-pixel for each RGB color) arecombined by the MPX circuit after A/D conversion.

A/D Conversion

• The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1024 gradations) digitalsignals.

White Level Correction

A white plate is on the back of the left scale. When you turn the switch on, thescanner scans this plate to see the actual white level. To compensate thedifference between the actual white level and the ideal white level (target white

level), the CCD-gain control is conducted.

Others

The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if the original is scanned byusing ARDF.

Analog Amplifier A/D Converter

CCD

SBU

Analog Amplifier

A/D Converter

Analog Amplifier

A/D Converter

SBU

Controller

R(B)O

E

O

E

O

E

G

B(R)

10 bit

10 bit

10 bit

FieldMemory

Field

Memory ASIC

IPU

10 bit

10 bit

10 bit

R

G

B

8 bit

8 bit

8 bit

B146D929.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

B147/B149/B190 6-26 SM

Black Level Correction

• Improves image reproduction for high-density areas.

• Reads the black video level at black elements on the CCD. These pixels aremasked off, and should produce a pure black signal.

• This is subtracted from the value of each pixel.

• Calculated for each scan line.

• Corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machinescans down the page.

Adjustments

The properties of the scanner unit, which are necessary for controlling the scannerVPU (video processing unit), are stored in the NVRAM on the controller.

After replacing the SBU, adjust the following:

SP4–008 Scanner sub-scan magnification

SP4–010 Scanner leading edge registration

SP4–011 Scanner side-to-side registration

VPU Test Mode

To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test patternwith SP4-907. ( “4. Troubleshooting” for details)

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-27 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM

Shading Correction

Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the amount of light at theedge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or variationsamong pixels of the CCD.

• Shading Correction

• Picture Elemnet Correction

• Scanner γ Correction

• Filter

• ADS

• Image Separation

SBU

IPU

• Color Correction

• Main Scan Magnification

BCU

Controller

ASIC2

ASIC1

ASIC3

• Gradation Processing

ASIC4

FCUController

Option

P C I B U S

I/F

• Printer γ Correction

B146D931.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

B147/B149/B190 6-28 SM

Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction

Picture element correction does two things.

1. Completion of the scan line correction process.

2. Correction if the CCD is not perpendicular to the light.

• The green CCD line is taken as a standard.

• Both ends of the red and blue lines are adjusted to match.

• Use SP 4-932-1 to 4-932-4 to change the vertical line correction level( “3. Replacement and Adjustment – Image Adjustments”).

Scan Line Correction

R, G, and B CCD lines are spaced 4 lines apart (8 lines total) when full sizemagnification is used.

• Scan line correction synchronizes these signals by storing each line in memory.

• The difference between the R, G and B signals depends on the magnificationratio.

• If this calculation does not result in an integer, the corrected data is set to theclosest integer, but further correction is needed ( “Picture ElementCorrection”).

Image Separation

The machine separates the original image into text and photo (dot screen) areas.

Edge Separation

• Used to locate text and line diagrams

• Locates areas of strong contrast.

• Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels.

• Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels.

• Only uses data from the green CCD.

Dot Screen Separation

• If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area.

Colored Text Separation

• Identifies whether the text area’s pixels are black or color.

• Based on:1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels.2) Output levels of the RGB video signals.

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-29 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


ACS (Auto Color Select)

The Auto Color Select determines if an original is black/white or color. Black copymode or full color mode is automatically selected.

Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels.

RGB video signals are compared.

If the maximum difference among RGB signals is within a certain range, theoriginal is considered black and white.

0 102 128 255

255

(40% UCR rate) (50% UCR rate)

RGB common data

153 (50% UCR rate)

204 (50% UCR rate)

Color first

Black and white first

B146D510.WMF

RGB signal after scanner γ correction

B

S i g n a l L e v e l

R G

B146D511.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

B147/B149/B190 6-30 SM

Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction)

The RGB video signals from the CCD are sent to the IPU section. This signal isproportional to the intensity of light reflected from the original image (Fig. 1).Scanner gamma correction inverts the video signals. The shading circuit convertsthe signal from 10-bit to 8-bit.

• The IPU section converts the signal levels as shown in Fig. 2.

• This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY color conversion (conversion is donelater in the image process).

• The same table is used for R, G, and B signals.

255

0

255LightDark

B146D512.WMF

255

Dark Light

01023

B146D513.WMF

Fig. 2Fig. 1

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-31 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Filtering

Appropriate software filters are applied to the RGB video signals.

• Varies depending on the results of auto text/photo separation (or on the selected

original mode).• RGB smoothing is applied to photo areas

• Edge emphasis applied to text areas.

Background Density Control

• Removes low ID image signals (background) that are less than a certainthreshold.

• The threshold depends on the color mode (single color or full color).

Users can select a different threshold for each mode.

ADS (Auto Image Density Selection)

• Full color mode1) Refers to the RGB data taken from the entire original.2) Calculates a threshold for removing the background based on this data.

• Black and white mode1) Determines the peak white level.2) Peak level data is taken for each scan line.3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white

background.4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for A/D conversion.

5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter.

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

B147/B149/B190 6-32 SM

Color Conversion

Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates forthe differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts theRGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.

Conversion Matrix

The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrixoperation.

• Simple color copying.

• No special modes applied.

• To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.

Color Conversion Table Original Color

Toner K R Y G C B M W

Y 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

M 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

C 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

K 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

User Program Mode

When the user selects one of the following special modes, the values in this tablemay fall between 0 and 1.

Photo mode

• Glossy Photo

• Printed Photo

• Copied Photo

Others

• Generation Mode

• Pale Mode

• Map Mode

Two-color mode

• Separates black areas and colored areas.

• Converts black areas to a color selected by the user.

• All other areas are converted to a second color selected by the user.( the operator's manual for details)

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-33 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Main Scan Magnification

While the machine changes the scanner speed to reduce or enlarge the original inthe sub-scan direction, the ASIC2 chip on the IPU board handles reduction andenlargement in the main scan direction.

• Scanning and laser writing are done at a fixed pitch (CCD elements cannot besqueezed or expanded).

• Imaginary points are calculated, corresponding to a physical enlargement orreduction.

• Image density is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on theimage data for the nearest two true points.

• The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data.

NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomialconvolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of a

service manual and will not be covered here.

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

B147/B149/B190 6-34 SM

Printer Gamma Correction

Ideally, the gamma curves for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black should beidentical, as shown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electricalcomponents can result in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2.

• Printer characteristics are much more variable than the scanner. Printer gammaneeds recalibration and adjustment from time to time.

• The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepanciesin color reproduction.

• ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, andblack text).

• After ACC, the gamma curve for each color can be adjusted with service

programs (SP4-909 to SP4-918).• 4 different modes:1) ID max.2) Shadow (High ID)3) Middle (Middle ID)4) Highlight (Low ID)

• If the previous gamma curve was better, it can be recalled.

• Factory settings can be loaded using SP 5-610-4.NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new

values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate,since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings

may no longer be suitable.• Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings using SP5-

610-5.

K

B146D514.WMFB146D515.WMF

Fig. 2Fig. 1

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-35 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


ID Max. This mode adjusts the total image densityas shown in figure 3.

Shadow (High ID)

The High ID mode adjusts the imagedensity between Level 6 and Level 9 of thecolor gradation scale on the C-4 test chart(figure 4).

Middle (Middle ID) The Middle ID mode adjusts the imagedensity between Level 3 and Level 7 of thecolor gradation scale on the C-4 test chart(figure 5).

Highlight (Low ID) The Low ID mode adjusts the image densitybetween Level 2 and Level 5 of the colorgradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure6).

B146D516.WMF

B146D517.WMF

B146D518.WMF

B146D519.WMF

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE PROCESSING

B147/B149/B190 6-36 SM

Auto Color Calibration Test Pattern

The test pattern has eight 17-stepgradation scales for each color (CMYK),including background white, for Textand Photo modes.

ACC automatically calibrates the printergamma curve. The user starts the ACCprocess.

1. The user prints an ACC TestPattern.

2. The user places the test pattern onthe exposure glass.

3. The copier makes 8 scans to readeach color scale.

4. The copier corrects the printergamma by comparing the idealsettings with the current imagedensity.

5. The copier combines the correctedgamma curve with the Shadow,Middle, and Highlight valuescurrently in memory.

6. The copier then calculates the IDmax (amplitude of the gamma curve) based on data from the ACC scan.

7. The corrected printer gamma curves can be adjusted further using SP modes(SP4-909 to SP4-918).

Error Diffusion

Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of ahalftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the

surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusionmatrix.

IPU Board Test

You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2.( “4. Troubleshooting” for details)

K

C

M

Y

K

C

M

Y

Dark Light

B146D520.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE DATA PATH

SM 6-37 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH

Copier Application

SBU → IPU → Controller (HDD/Memory) → IPU → Controller (straight through) → BCU

Printer Application

Controller → IPU (through) → Controller → BCU

Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits)

SBU → IPU → Controller (HDD/Memory)

Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)

Transmission: SBU → IPU → FCU

Reception: FCU → IPU → Controller (straight through) → BCU

CCD SBU

IPU

FCU

Option

Controller BCU

Memory

HDD

LD Board

M

C

Y

K

Mother Board

B146D917.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

B147/B149/B190 6-38 SM

6.6 LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.1 OVERVIEW

1. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-E2. LD unit-Y

3. LD unit-K

4. LD Mirror-M

5. LD unit-M

6. LD unit-C

7. F-theta lens-M, C

8. Synchronizing detector board-M, C-S

9. Synchronizing detector board-M, C-E

10. OPC drum-M11. WTL

12. OPC drum-C

13. OPC drum-Y

14. OPC drum-K

15. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-S

16. F-theta lens-Y, K

17. Polygon mirror motor

18. LD Mirror-K

This machine uses four LD units and one polygon mirror motor to produce latentimages on four OPC drums (one drum for each color toner).

There are two hexagonal mirrors. Each mirror reflects beams from two LD units.The LD unit for black has two laser diodes to do dual beam writing (this is onlydone for black-and-white printing; for full color printing, only one of the beams isused).

Laser exposure for magenta and cyan starts from the rear side of the drum, but foryellow and black it starts from the front side of the drum. This is because the unitsfor magenta and cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirror from the units foryellow and black.

B146D521.WMF

12

3

5

6

8

9

7

12

16

13

14

15

17

11

18

4

10

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

SM 6-39 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH

The laser beams for cyan [C] and yellow [A] are directed to the upper part of thepolygon mirror [B], and those for magenta [E] and black [D] are directed to the

lower part of the polygon mirror. The LD mirrors (see the previous page) deflect thelaser beams for magenta and black towards the lower polygon mirror.

The WTL [F] corrects the main scan line; without this component, the line bendsout towards the middle of the main scan. The central bend of the WTL is adjustedin the factory.

The speed of the polygon mirror depends on the selected mode (see below).

ModeResolution

(dpi)Polygon motor

speed (rpm)Process linespeed (mm/s)

Print speed(ppm)

Remarks

600 x 600

1,800 x 600

21,850 185 38B/W

(exceptOHP/Thick

paper)1,200 x 1,200 29,528 125 28

Dual beamwriting

600 x 6001,800 x 600

29,528 125 28Color

(exceptOHP/Thick

paper)1,200 x 1,200 29,528 62.5 14

OHP/Thick600 x 600

1,800 x 6001,200 x 1,200

29,528 62.5 10

B146D522.WMF

[C]

[A]

[E]

[D]

[B]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

B147/B149/B190 6-40 SM

6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR

OverviewThe machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards (LSD), one at eachcorner of the laser optics housing unit.

Each pair of boards detects two colors. The machine recognizes each color fromthe time that they are detected. The two LSDs at the right [A] are used for magentaand cyan, and the two [B] at the left are used for yellow and black.

Main Scan Start Detection

For magenta and cyan, the LSD at the rear detects the start of the main scan. Foryellow and black, the LSD at the front detects the start of the main scan.

Clock Frequency Adjustment

Each pair ensures that the number of laser clock pulses in the main scan isconstant. If the count for one particular beam varies from normal, the LD clockfrequency for that beam is adjusted.

If the board at the end position is defective, this cannot be detected. In such case,you must disable the detection feature with SP2-919-1.

B146D523.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

SM 6-41 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING

Dual Beam Mechanism

The LD unit for black has two laser diodes. Each face of the polygon mirror writes

two main scan lines. This only happens for black and white printing.

Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism

There is a spring [A] at the front end of the black LD unit [E], and there is apositioning motor [D] at the right end. The spring pushes the unit clockwise, whilethe motor pushes it counterclockwise. These two components drive the unit to oneof the following three positions:

• 600-dpi position []

• 1,200-dpi position []

• Home position []

Before it is driven to the 600-dpi position or the 1,200-dpi position, the black LD unitis set to its home position. When driven from one position to another, the unit goesas follows:

• 600-dpi position → Home position → 1,200-dpi position

• 1,200-dpi position→ Home position → 600-dpi position

The home position is detected by the home position sensor [B]. When the unit is inits home position, the actuator [C] is out of the sensor. The 600-dpi and 1,200-dpipositions are determined by the distance from the home position. The distance iscalculated from the operation time of the LD positioning motor.

B146D524.WMF

1

2

3 B146D525.WMF

[E]

[C]

[A]

[D]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

B147/B149/B190 6-42 SM

Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position

The machine changes the main scan resolution between 600 and 1,200 dpi forblack and white printing by rotating the LD unit, except for OHP sheets and thickpaper (remains at the 600 dpi position).

The table lists the printing modes and the positions of the black LD unit.

Mode Position

600 dpi 600-dpi positionMonochrome

1,200 dpi 1,200-dpi position

600 dpi 600-dpi positionColor

1,200 dpi 600-dpi position

After the laser optics housing unit has been replaced, the beam pitch for 600 dpiand 1,200 dpi must be adjusted (SP2-109-2, -3).

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

SM 6-43 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH

PSU

BCU

LDB (M)CN401-48 (M)

CN401-49 (M)

E-MAC

LDB (C)CN401-48 (C)

CN401-49 (C)

E-MAC

CN221-3

CN221-2

CN222-3

CN222-2

CN223-3

CN223-2

CN224-3

CN224-2

CN101-10LD5VCN350-6

RELAY

CN361-2

Front Door andLeft Door SW

CN361-1

+24V +5V

Right Door SW

LDB (Y)

LDB (K)CN401-48 (K)

CN401-49 (K)

E-MAC

CN401-48 (Y)

CN401-49 (Y)

E-MAC

B146D923.WMF

B146D526.WMF

[A]

[B]

A relay on the PSU ensures technicianand user safety and prevents the laserbeam from inadvertently switching onduring servicing. This relay turns off

when the front cover, upper left cover, orright door is opened, and cuts the power(+5V) supplied to the LD board for eachcolor through the BCU.

Two safety switches are used to turn therelay off. One switch is used for the frontcover and upper left cover. This safetyswitch is off when either of the twocovers is opened. Another safety switchis used for the right door.

•

E-MAC: Enhanced Modulation ASICon CMOS

• LDB: LD Drive Board(included in the LD Unit)

Front and Upper Left Cover Switch

The micro switch [A] on the PSU isactivated or deactivated by the actuator[B] when the front cover or the upper leftcover is opened and closed.

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

B147/B149/B190 6-44 SM

Error Messages

Cooperating with other switches, the LD safety switches help display errormessages related to external covers. When one or more covers are open, themessages, “Cover is open as shown” and “Close it,” are displayed with a diagram.The diagram indicates which cover is open. The table lists the diagram indicationsand the switch conditions. Note that some diagram indications take precedenceover others.

ConditionDiagram indication [A] Upper left

cover switch[B] Duplex unit

switch[C] Front door

switch[E] Right door

switch

Upper left cover Open (any) (any) (any)

Duplex unit (any) Open (any) (any)

Front cover Closed (any) Open (any)

Right door Closed (any) Closed Open

NOTE: 1) In the table, “any” indicates the condition does not affect the diagramindication.

2) The left door switch [D] is closed when the upper left cover switch [A] isclosed.

B146D918.WMF

[C]

[A]

[D]

[E]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

SM 6-45 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Overview

YY, KK, CC, MM: Spaces between two lines of the same color

KY, KC, KM: Spaces between a black line and a color line

During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns above are created eighttimes on the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (YY, KK, CC, MM, KY, KC,KM) are measured by the front, center, and rear ID sensors. The controller takesthe average of the spaces, and adjusts the following positions and magnification:

• Sub scan line position for YCM

• Main scan line position for KYCM

• Magnification ratio for KYCM

• Skew for YCM

After the patterns are measured, the transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the transferbelt. If an error is detected three times consecutively, SC285 is generated.

Center Front Rear

Y

K

C

M

Y

K

C

M

MM

KY

KC

KM

YY

KK

CC

MM

KY

KC

KM

YY

KK

CC

MM

KY

KC

KM

YY

KK

CC

B146D527.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

B147/B149/B190 6-46 SM

Summary of Each Adjustment

Sub scan line position for YCM

The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for YCM is based on the line positionfor K (color registration). The machine measures the gaps between the lines ofeach color in the pattern on the transfer belt. If the gaps for a color are not correct,the machine moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this,it changes the laser write timing for that color.

Main scan line position for KYCM

If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, itchanges the laser write start timing for each scan line.

Magnification adjustment for KYCM

If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes theLD clock frequency for the required color.

Skew for YCM

The adjustment of the skew for YCM is based on the line position for K.

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

SM 6-47 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Adjustment Conditions

Line position adjustment timing depends on several SP mode settings. Amongthem, the mode selection, SP5-993-001, takes precedence over the others. Thetable below lists the conditions and the processes to be executed. Note that theadjustments of the sub-scan line position, main scan line position, andmagnification are executed under the same conditions.

The numbers in the mode selection column indicate the setting of SP 5-993-001.For details, refer to the description for SP 5-993-001 in the SP table.

Modeselec-tion

Condition SettingS-pos./M-pos./Magni.

Skew

Job End SP3-906-001

Interrupt SP3-906-002

Non-use Time 1, 2 SP3-906-003, 004

1

Process

control Recovery (fusing

tempera-ture 60°C orlower)

None

Standby SP5-993-003, 005

Job start SP5-993-003, 006 Temperaturedifference

Interrupt SP5-993-003, 04, 022

Main scan length detection SP5-993-024 *

Recovery (fusing temperature over

60°C)SP5-993-026

1 or 2

Replacement of development unit orPCU

None

0, 1, or 2 Forced self check SP5-993-002

S-pos. : Sub-scan line position : ExecutedM-pos. : Main scan line positionMagni. : Magnification

* : Executed one time when theconditions are met twice

NOTE: 1) “Recovery” includes turning on the main switch.2) Fusing temperature is measured by the thermistor in the fusing unit.

Other temperature is measured by the sensors on the laser opticshousing unit.

3) You can use SP5-993-035 to select one of the three frequency levels of

color adjustment.

8/12/2019 2238c


LASER EXPOSURE

B147/B149/B190 6-48 SM

Main Scan Skew Adjustment

The 3rd mirror positioning motors for magenta [A], cyan [B], and yellow [C] adjustthe angle of the 3rd mirrors [B] respectively, based on the 3rd mirror position forblack. This mechanism corrects main scan skew.

6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES

To improve reproduction in the copy mode, the machine generates the print imagewith 2 bits per pixel. Different parameters are used for the copy and print modes asshown in the table below.

Function Copy Mode Printer Mode

Gradation for printing 2 bits / pixel 1 bit / pixel

LD control SP2-103-101 to -110 SP2-103-1 to -59

Pointer table display SP3-902-5 to -8 SP3-902-1 to -4

M/A target SP3-903-5 to -8 SP3-903-1 to -4

M/A target for LD correction SP3-904-5 to -8 SP3-904-1 to -4

B146D528.WMF

[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

SM 6-49 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.1 OVERVIEW

1. Cleaning brush roller

2. Charge roller (non-contact)

3. OPC drum

4. Cleaning brush

5. Waste toner collection auger

6. Cleaning blade

This machine has four independent PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU consistsof an OPC drum, non-contact charge roller, cleaning brush, and cleaning blade.The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm).

The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development rolleris determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not

adjustable in the field.

.

B146D529.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

⇒

Rev. 06/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

B147/B149/B190 6-50 SM

6.7.2 DRIVE

The drum drive motor-K [A] drives the PCU for black.

The drum drive motor-CMY [B] drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.Using one motor to drive these three drums reduces CMY color misalignment.

M

C

Y

K

G080D927.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

SM 6-51 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS

Mechanism

The machine uses these sensors to detect if the drum motors rotate. When itdetects that the drum motor is not moving, SC440 appears. These sensors alsohelp the machine to initialize the relative positions of the gears when turning on themain switch and initializing. This prevents phase fluctuation between printouts.

There is an interrupter [E] on each of the black [D] and yellow [C] drum gears. The

drum gear position sensors [F][G] detect the positions of these interruptersrespectively. The sensors check that the two interrupters are parallel. Thismechanism makes sure that output quality does not vary. The cyan [B] andmagenta [A] drum gears operate with the yellow drum gear because these threedrum gears are linked through other gears [H][I].

In the ready status, the two interrupters stay in a parallel position. If they are not ina parallel position (as shown in the illustration), the machine adjusts the position ofthe black drum gear.

B146D530.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[G]

[F]

[I]

[H]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

B147/B149/B190 6-52 SM

Initialization Process and SC Codes

When a drum gear position sensor has found an error, SC code 440-1 or 440-2 isdisplayed. The table lists the steps of the initialization process, possible errors, andcorresponding SC codes.

Initialization process Possible error SC code

The black drum gearinterrupter is not detected.

440-1

The yellow drum gearinterrupter is not detected.

440-2Step 1

The four drums are simultaneouslyoperated for seven seconds. The twodrum position sensors detect the twodrum gear interrupters several times.

Both black and yellow drumgear interrupters are notdetected.

440-1

Step 2

The time lags between detection ofthe black drum gear interrupter and

detection of the yellow drum gearinterrupter are checked. The averagetime lag is calculated.

Step 3The black drum is operated. Theposition of the gear is adjustedaccording to the average time lag.

The black drum gearinterrupter is not detected(NOTE).

440-1

NOTE: If the connector of the black drum position sensor has been connected tothe yellow drum position sensor (and the connector of the yellow drumposition sensor, to the black drum position sensor), no error occurs in step1 and step 2.

8/12/2019 2238c


PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

SM 6-53 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING

This machine uses a non-contact charge roller [A] to reduce ozone. The non-contact charge roller gives the drum surface a negative charge. The high voltagesupply board – C, B, which is located at the rear of the machine, applies a dc andac voltage (at a constant current) to the roller. The ac voltage helps to ensure that

the charge given to the drum is as uniform as possible.

The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage if automatic processcontrol is enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to 0). However, if process control isswitched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to 1), the dc voltage is the value stored inSP2-001-1 to -9 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).

The diameter of the roller is 11.14 mm (circumference about 35 mm). The gap

between a drum and the corresponding charge roller is about 50 µm.

The cleaning brush roller [B], which always contacts the charge roller, cleans thecharge roller.

The charge roller can generate small amounts of nitrogen oxide gases (known asNOx), which may be absorbed by the surface of the drum. This can causeunfocused copies. To avoid this, the film of NOx is removed at power on, at the endof a job (if more than 200 prints), and when a toner cartridge has been replaced.SP3-920-1 to -4 determine when this procedure (known as “refresh mode”) is done.It can also be executed at any time (using SP3-920-5) if the prints are smeared.

Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at theend of every job.

B146D531.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

B147/B149/B190 6-54 SM

6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING

The cleaning brush [A] spreads out the waste toner remaining on the drum. Thecleaning blade [B] then scrapes it off. The toner collection auger [C] transports thetoner towards the waste toner collection duct.

B146D532.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

SM 6-55 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION

Waste Toner Path

The waste toner from the collection augers in the four PCUs drops into the wastetoner collection duct from the four openings [F][G][H][I] at the rear of the PCUs. Thetoner collection coils [J][K][L] in the duct transport this waste toner towards thewaste toner bottle [A]. The coils [J][K][L] are driven by development drive motor-

CMY. The openings and PCUs correspond as follows: black → [F], yellow → [G],

cyan → [H], magenta → [I].

The waste toner from the transfer belt cleaning unit drops into the waste toner

collection duct from another opening [E].

The end of the waste toner collection duct is in the waste toner bottle [A]. There arethree openings [B][C] and one collection coil [D] in this part. The waste toner dropsinto the bottle through the openings. The collection coil [D] is driven by drum drivemotor-K.

B146D906.WMF

[E]

[A] [D]

[F][G]

[H]

[B]

[I]

[J]

[K]

[L]

[M]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

B147/B149/B190 6-56 SM

Waste Toner Vibrator

The waste toner vibrator contains one motor [M]. The motor operates for about onesecond at a time. Its vibration prevents the waste toner from clogging the wastetoner path.

The table lists the conditions under which the motor operates.

Machine status Motor operation

During machine start (machineinitialization)

Two times

At the beginning of the processcontrol

One time

Printing jobs that output five or lesspapers

At the job end if 3 or more papers have been outputsince the previous operation (of the motor) ()

Printing jobs that output 6 or morepapers

Every five papers and at the job end ()

Suppose: The copier executes two jobs, the first job outputs one paper, and thesecond job outputs two papers. In this case, the motor operates one time at theend of the second job (see ).

Suppose: The copier executes one job, and the job outputs 12 papers. In this case,the motor operates one time during the fifth printing, one time during the tenthprinting, and one more time at the job end (see ).

Suppose: The copier executes two jobs, the first job outputs one paper, and thesecond job outputs 12 papers. In this case, the motor operates one time during thefifth printing of the second job, one time during the tenth printing of the second job,and one more time at the end of the second job (see ; This case does not satisfycondition ).

8/12/2019 2238c


PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

SM 6-57 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION

The waste toner bottle set switch [A] detects the bottle when it is placed in the

machine.The waste toner sensor [B] detects the weight of the bottle and informs when it isalmost full.

When the bottle contains a certain amount of waste toner, the sensor isdeactivated. The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is almost full anddisplays “Waste Toner is Almost Full”.

After that, the machine can print about 2,500 more sheets. After printing 2,500sheets, it displays “Replace Waste Toner,” and after the end of the job, themachine cannot be used until the bottle is replaced or emptied.

NOTE: The number of sheets is calculated on the assumption that the paper sizeis A4 and that the coverage ratio of each color is 5%.

B146D533.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


DEVELOPMENT

B147/B149/B190 6-58 SM

6.8 DEVELOPMENT

6.8.1 OVERVIEW

1. Doctor blade

2. Developer hopper

3. Mixing auger (right)

4. TD sensor

5. Mixing auger (left)

6. Development roller

This machine has four independent development units, one for each color. Eachcontains 280 g of developer when new. The developer in each unit is supplied tothe development roller by the two mixing augers and attracted onto the surface ofthe roller.

The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined by

the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not adjustable in the field.

The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unithas a TD sensor.

The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm (circumference about 56.5 mm).

B146D534.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

⇒

Rev.06/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


DEVELOPMENT

SM 6-59 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.8.2 DRIVE

The development drive motor-K [A] drives the development roller for black throughgears and a clutch. This motor also drives the fusing unit and paper exit rollers.The gear trains are indicated in the diagram by dotted lines.

The development drive motor-CMY [B] drives the development unit for magenta,cyan, and yellow through gears and clutches. This motor also drives theregistration roller.

B146D535.WMF

B146D536.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


DEVELOPMENT

B147/B149/B190 6-60 SM

6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION

Two mixing augers [A and B] circulate the developer forward and backward toagitate the developer.

This happens during the process control self check, during toner supply, and duringdevelopment.

B146D537.WMF[A][B]

8/12/2019 2238c


DEVELOPMENT

SM 6-61 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

The high voltage supply board [A] supplies development bias to the developmentroller via the receptacle [B] at the rear of each development unit.

There are both ac and dc bias voltages. The ac bias improves toner transfer to thedrum.

The machine automatically controls the dc bias, if automatic process control isenabled (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to 0). However, if process control is switched off,(i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to 1), the dc bias is the value stored in SP2-201-001 to009 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).

The ac bias cannot be adjusted.

B146D930.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


DEVELOPMENT

B147/B149/B190 6-62 SM

6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM

Overview

The air transport system agitates the toner [H] in the toner cartridges [G]. Toner istransported to the development unit [A] by the toner attraction pump [B] (eachcartridge has a separate pump). This provides a more stable way to transport finepowder than previous methods.

Toner Agitation and Attraction

The rear air pump [D] supplies air to the yellow and magenta toner cartridges, whilethe front air pump [E] supplies air to the black and cyan toner cartridges. Airagitates all the toner in each cartridge. The pumps and four valves [C] control theair flow. Mixed with air, the toner passes part of the way along the transport tube [J]towards the toner attraction pump. This pump draws the toner the rest of the way( Toner Transport).

The air pump turns on to supply air to the toner cartridges for one second underany of the following conditions:

• During normal operation, when the “on” time for a toner supply clutchreaches a certain value

• When forced toner supply (SP2-207) is done

• When forced toner density adjustment (SP3-126-002) is done

• At toner end recovery

• Developer initialization

The filter [F] on the inner package of the toner cartridge ensures that the internalpressure does not become too high.

B146D538.WMF

[G][A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[H]

[F]

[H]

[J]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


DEVELOPMENT

SM 6-63 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Air Flow and Toner Flow

The air tube [F] and the toner tube [E] are connected to the joint [C] at the bottomof the toner cartridge holder. This joint contains an inner pipe [A] and an outer pipe[B]. These two pipes are L-shaped. The inner pipe goes through the outer pipe,and is longer than the other.

The toner goes through the inner pipe [A], and reaches the toner tube [E] at thebottom end of the pipe. On its way to the toner tube, the toner passes the sensorwindows [G]. These windows are at the front side and the rear side of the pipe, andare transparent. The light emitted from the toner end sensor [D] goes through thisarea if the toner is not going through the pipe.

The air flow generated by the air pump goes through the outer pipe [B], and comesout of the four openings at the top end.

Toner Near End Detection

Toner end sensors [D] detect toner near end conditions ( 6.2.6).

B146D539.WMF

[D]

[G]

[F]

[E]

[C]

[B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


DEVELOPMENT

B147/B149/B190 6-64 SM

Toner Transport

Each toner attraction pump has the same mechanism. The pump (toner attractionpump) [A], which consists of the toner supply clutch [B], rubber tube [C], and rotor[D], attracts the toner in the toner transport tube [E] toward the development unit.

The toner supply clutch drives the rotor, which draws the toner in from the cartridgeand passes it to the development unit. When supplying toner, the clutch is on for0.7 second and off for 1.3 seconds. The clutch turns on and off as many times asnecessary to supply the appropriate amount of toner. The amount of toner dependson the results of toner supply control.

Motor drive comes from the development drive motors.

B146D540.WMF

[A]

[B][C] [D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


DEVELOPMENT

SM 6-65 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Shutter Mechanism

The development unit and toner attraction pump each have a shutter mechanism.When the development unit is placed in the machine, the protrusion [A] on thedevelopment unit opens the shutter [B] in the pump, and the protrusion [C] on thepump opens the shutter [D] in the development unit. When both shutters are open,toner can enter the development unit from the toner attraction pump.

When the development unit is removed, the shutter spring [E and F] pulls and

closes the shutter.

6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION

The memory chip [A] on each toner cartridgestores the total “on” time of the toner supplyclutch. This is used to calculate the amount oftoner remaining in the toner cartridge. The chipis also used to detect whether the cartridge isinstalled (if the cartridge is not installed, themachine does not detect a signal from thememory chip).

B146D541.WMF

B146D542.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][D]

[E][F]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

B147/B149/B190 6-66 SM

6.9 PAPER FEED

6.9.1 OVERVIEW

1. Pick-up roller - tray 12. Feed roller - tray 1

3. Separation roller - tray 1

4. Relay roller

5. Registration roller

6. Feed roller - By-pass feed

7. Pick-up roller - By-pass feed

8. By-pass feed table

9. Separation roller - By-pass feed10. Transport roller

11. Vertical transport roller

12. Feed roller - tray 2

13. Separation roller - tray 2

14. Pick-up roller - tray 2

15. Paper tray 2

16. Paper tray 1

There are two paper trays (500 sheets each), and a by-pass feed table (100sheets).

The paper feed mechanism uses an FRR system.

Tray 1 can only hold A4 or letter paper. Tray 2 can hold a range of sizes.

B146D543.WMF

54

9

31 2

7

6

8

10

12

13141516

11

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

SM 6-67 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.9.2 DRIVE – TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY

The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanisms in tray 1 [E], tray2 [F], and the by-pass tray [G], using clutches and complex trains of gears (thelocations of the gear trains are indicated by dotted lines in the above diagram).

When tray 1 and tray 2 are inside the machine, their pick-up rollers [H][K] arealways in contact with each top sheet of the paper stack. On the other hand, thepick-up roller [P] of the by-pass tray stays away until the by-pass pick-up solenoid[Q] turns on. When the paper feed clutch [B][C][D] turns on, the pick-up, feed[I][L][N], and separation [J][M][O] rollers start rotating to feed the paper. The paperfeed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor activates.


[A]

[K]

[C]

[L]

[M]

[H]

[B]

[I]

[J]

[D]

[P]

[N]

[O]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[Q]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

B147/B149/B190 6-68 SM

6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2

The tray 1 set switch [A] and tray 2 paper size switches [B] detect when the papertrays [C] are placed in the machine. When the machine detects that a tray hasbeen placed in the machine, the tray lift motor [D] rotates and the coupling gear [E]on the tray lift motor engages the pin [F] on the lift arm shaft [G]. Then the tray liftarm [I] lifts the tray bottom plate [H] until the paper lift sensor for the tray detectsthat the top of the stack is at the paper feed position.

B146D546.WMF

[A]

[E][F][G]

[H]

[I][B]

[C][D]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

SM 6-69 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

For tray 1, there is no size switch. The paper size is fixed at either A4 or LT; thiscan be changed with SP1-902-1.

For tray 2, four paper size switches, working in combination, detect the paper sizeas shown in the table below. The actuators are on the side plate [A]. The side plate

is moved by the end plate [B] through a cam [C].

1: Pushed

Models Switch Location

North America Europe/Asia 1 [D] 2 [E] 3 [F] 4 [G]

11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 1 0 0

A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 0

81/2" x 14" SEF*1

B4 SEF*1

1 1 0 1

81/2" x 11" SEF*2

A4 SEF*2

0 1 1 0

11" x 81/2" LEF *3 11" x 81/2" LEF *3 1 0 1 1

A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1

B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0

A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1

NOTE: *1

: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2*2

: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3*3

: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4

The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected(if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).

B146D547.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

B147/B149/B190 6-70 SM

6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

Two paper height sensors, working in combination, detect the amount of paper inthe tray.

When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever moves upand the actuator [A] (on the pressure lever drive shaft) rotates.

Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 [B] Paper height sensor 1 [C]

Full OFF OFF

Nearly full ON OFF

Near end ON ON

Almost empty OFF ON

OFF: No actuator

6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feelerand the paper end sensor deactivates.

When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout inthe tray bottom plate, and this activates the paper end sensor.

B146D548.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

SM 6-71 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.9.7 REGISTRATION

The development drive motor - CMY [A] drives the registration roller [B] using aclutch and a complex train of gears (the location of the gear train is indicated bydotted lines in the above diagram).

The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew.The paper buckle can be adjusted with SP1-003-1 to - 8.

B146D549.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

B147/B149/B190 6-72 SM

6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED

This machine has three process line speeds (for feed from registration roller tofusing unit) depending on the mode and selected resolution

ModeResolution

(dpi)Line speed

(mm/s)Print speed

(ppm)

600 x 6001,800 x 600

185 38B/W

1,200 x 1,200 125 28

600 x 6001,800 x 600

125 28Color

1,200 x 1,200 62.5 14

OHP/Thick600 x 600

1,800 x 6001,200 x 1,200

62.5 10

During a monochrome print job, the machine changes the line speed if there is apage with color in the middle of the job. However, it will not change the line speed ifthere is a monochrome page in the middle of a color print job.

Line speed (mm/s)

Paper feed from tray to registration roller 230

Fusing, paper exit to standard tray, and mailbox A bit slower than “Process line speed”

Duplex invert and feed 370

Finisher 450

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

SM 6-73 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM

The grip roller release mechanism reduces the pressure of the grip roller [E].

The grip roller transports a sheet of paper to the transfer unit. When the transfer

unit starts to feed the leading edge of the paper [G], the trailing edge has still notreached the grip roller. So the paper is handled by the transfer unit and the griproller at the same time. If the handling speeds are not the same, this may skew thepaper. Longer paper sizes are more affected by the speed difference than shortersizes. From the viewpoint of image crispness, multi-color images are more easilyaffected than mono-color images.

To solve this possible problem, the grip roller release mechanism is activatedunder the following conditions:

1) B4 paper or longer is being fed.2) The machine is operating in the full-color mode.

3) The leading edge of the paper has been fed in the transfer unit.

The spring [A] is always pressing the grip roller against the transport roller [B].When the above conditions are met, the solenoid [F] turns on, the lever [C] pushesthe grip roller shaft [D], and the grip roller moves away from the paper.

B146D550.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C] [D] [E]

[F]

[G]

8/12/2019 2238c


DUPLEX UNIT

B147/B149/B190 6-74 SM

6.10 DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.1 OVERVIEW

1. Exit sensor 1

2. Junction gate

3. Duplex feed sensor

4. Duplex inverter sensor

5. Junction mylar 3

6. Junction mylar 2

7. Exit sensor 3

8. Junction mylar 1

9. Exit sensor 2

• For duplex printing, the second page (rear side) is printed first.

• To print on the second side, the duplex inverter unit (on the side of the machine)inverts the paper from the fusing unit and feeds it to the duplex feed unit (insidethe machine).

• The duplex feed unit feeds the inverted paper back to the paper feed section.

• When both sides have been printed, the duplex inverter unit feeds the paper outto the finisher.

• If the mailbox or standard exit tray (on top of the machine) was selected toreceive the duplex copies, the print will not enter the duplex unit after the secondside has been printed. The junction gate inside the machine directs it upwards tothe selected tray.

• Duplex copies are not fed out to the external tray (on the left of the machine).

B146D551.WMF

1 2

8

3

4

5

7

9

6

8/12/2019 2238c


DUPLEX UNIT

SM 6-75 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION

Up to A4/LT (8 1/2 " x 11") LEF

There are three sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. The

interleave method is used.

Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages.The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (ifshaded, this indicates the second side).

Larger than A4/LT (8 1/2 " x 11") LEF

There are two sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. Theinterleave method is used.

Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages.The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (ifshaded, this indicates the second side).

3142 ⇒ ⇒ 6 ⇒ ⇒ 8 ⇒ ⇒ 5 ⇒ 7 1 2 43 1 4 2 3

B146D552.WMF

2 1

42

11

6 3

32

8 4

5 3

7 4

⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒

B146D553.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


DUPLEX UNIT

B147/B149/B190 6-76 SM

6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

The duplex inverter motor 1 [A] drives the paper exit roller 1 [B], paper transportroller [C], paper exit roller 2 [D], and upper inverter roller [E].

The duplex inverter motor 2 [F] drives the exit roller 3 [G], paper exit roller 4 [H],and lower inverter roller [I].

B146D554.WMF

[A]

[F]

[B][C]

[D]

[E]

[G]

[H]

[I]

8/12/2019 2238c


DUPLEX UNIT

SM 6-77 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE)

This shows how the machine feeds paper through the duplex unit to the externaltray [A], when duplex mode is not selected.

NOTE: The paper cannot be fed out to the external tray if duplex printing isselected.

The junction gate [B] directs the paper from the fusing unit out to the external tray ifthick paper or OHP mode is selected, or if the external tray is selected as theoutput tray with the operation panel or the printer driver.

B146D555.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


DUPLEX UNIT

B147/B149/B190 6-78 SM

6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT

This shows how the machine feeds paper back into the machine after side 1 isprinted.

The junction gate [A] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of theinverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [B] is activated, the machine waitsuntil the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 3 [C]. Then, the paper is switchedback and junction mylar 3 directs the paper back into the machine for the secondside.

The next page shows how the paper is fed out to the finisher after both sides areprinted.

B146D556.WMF

B146D557.WMF

[A]

[C][B]

8/12/2019 2238c


DUPLEX UNIT

SM 6-79 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER

With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit

The paper is fed out to the finisher from the upper exit [A].

The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of theinverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waitsuntil the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 1 [D]. Then, the paper is switchedback and junction mylar 1 directs the paper out to the finisher.

With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

The paper is fed out to the finisher from the lower exit [A].

The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of theinverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waitsuntil the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 2 [D], but before it passes junctionmylar 3 [E]. Then, the paper is switched back and junction mylar 2 directs thepaper out to the finisher.



[A]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[D]

[B]

[D]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


DUPLEX UNIT

B147/B149/B190 6-80 SM

6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT

Drive

The duplex feed motor [A] drives all paper transport rollers.

Feed-in and feed-out

The duplex feed unit feeds the paper from the duplex inverter unit to the relay roller[A].

B146D562.WMF

B146D563.WMF

[A]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

SM 6-81 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.11.1 OVERVIEW

1. Transfer unit drive motor2. Transfer belt3. Rotation encoder4. Paper attraction roller5. Transfer roller6. Back-up roller

7. Cleaning blade8. Toner collection auger9. Cleaning brush10. Cleaning unit11. ID sensor

Paper is fed to the transfer belt before image transfer begins. The paper attractionroller charges the paper to ensure that the paper is attracted to the belt.

The magenta, cyan, yellow, and black color images transfer to the paper while thetransfer belt feeds the paper past the drums towards the fusing unit. A positive

charge is applied to the paper under the transfer belt, opposite each drum, totransfer the toner from the drums onto the paper. The back-up roller ensures thatthe contact area between the drum and belt is sufficient.

The cleaning unit in the transfer unit cleans the belt surface with the cleaning bladeand brush. The waste toner collected from the belt is transported to the waste tonerbottle.

There are three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID sensordetects the image density of the patterns generated on the transfer belt for processcontrol. The other function of the ID sensors is for automatic line position

adjustment. All ID sensors are used for this.

G080D701.WMF

1

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

2

3

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 6-82 SM

6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE

Drive Motor

The transfer unit drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] and the cleaning unit viathe timing belt and gears. The speed of transfer belt drive depends on the processline speed.

B146D564.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 6-83 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Rotation Encoder

An encoder [C] is on one of the rollers. This encoder checks the rotation speed ofthe transfer belt. The controller analyzes the signals from the encoder, and adjuststhe rotation speed of the transfer belt.

The encoder contains a disk that has 300 notches on its surface [B]. Thesenotches are read by the sensor [A]. The controller counts the number of notchesthat the sensor has read in the unit of time. If the sensor has read an unusuallylarge number of notches or an unusually small number of notches, the controllerignores such unusual signals. Thanks to this feature, incorrect reading does notaffect the rotation speed.

Filter H: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt isat its possible highest.

Filter L: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is

at its possible lowest.

B146D914.WMF

B146D915.WMF

[C]

Number of notches (read by the sensor)

Time

Filter H

Filter L

Ignored

Ignored

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 6-84 SM

6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT

The transfer roller [D] applies a current to transfer the toner to the paper on thetransfer belt [A]. The high voltage supply board – Transfer applies a current to thetransfer roller and the paper attraction roller [C].

These currents are automatically corrected for paper size, temperature (measuredby the thermistor on the right side of the laser optics housing unit), and humidity(measured by the humidity sensor).

Available adjustments are summarized below.

• The transfer roller current for each printing mode (color or B/W, resolution, papertype) can be adjusted with SP2-301-1 to -56. The by-pass tray settings are usedwhen the duplex unit has not been installed and the user is making duplex printsmanually from the by-pass tray. There is a correction for narrow-width paper withSP2-309-1 to -4.

• The current for paper attraction can be adjusted with SP2-801-1 to -9. There is acorrection for narrow-width paper with SP2-801-10 to -13.

The back-up roller [E] makes a wider contact area between the drum [B] and thebelt. The transfer exit roller [F] is charged to 2 kV. The roller prevents the tonerfrom being scattered while the paper is leaving the transfer unit.

The other rollers are grounded to neutralize the belt surface.

B146D565.WMF

[A]

[E]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 6-85 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING

The transfer belt cleaning unit removes toner (during printing) and the ID sensorpatterns (during process control or automatic line position adjustment) on the belt.Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer belt makes one rotation. The transferunit drive motor [A] drives the unit.

The cleaning brush [B] always contacts the transfer belt [C], and removes wastetoner from the belt. The cleaning blade [D] in the cleaning unit scrapes the toner offthe transfer belt. The toner collection auger [E] transports the toner towards thewaste toner collection duct.

B146D567.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 6-86 SM

6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT

Mechanism

The transfer belt contact and release mechanism improves the lifetime of thetransfer belt and drums.

The drum for black always contacts the belt, but the transfer belt moves away fromthe other drums during monochrome printing.

In the standby mode, the transfer belt contacts only the black drum. The transferbelt comes away from the black drum when you turn the release levercounterclockwise.

When the machine prints a color page, the machine waits until the previous pagehas gone through the transfer unit. Then the transfer belt contact motor [C] turns on

and a cam [D] moves the lower end [E] of the transfer belt upward, so that itcontacts the other three drums.

The machine does not release the transfer belt from the color drums during the job,even if a monochrome page comes again. This is because the total printing speedreduces if the transfer belt changes position often.

The belt comes away from the color drums if the job is interrupted by any errorexcept a power failure.

NOTE: If a power failure occurs when the transfer belt is in contact with the drum,the belt stays in this position. To release the belt, swing out the controller

box, and turn the drive gear [B] manually.

B146D568.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 6-87 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Transfer Belt Sensor

The transfer belt sensor [A] works as the detection sensor during machineinitialization, and works as the position sensor during machine operations.

Before machine initialization, the lower end of the transfer belt is in the homeposition. When initialization starts, the transfer belt contact motor lifts the lower enduntil the actuator has passed the sensor, and lowers it to its home position. Thisaction actuates the sensor in a certain pattern.

The table lists the sensor actuation patterns.

Machine status Sensor pattern

Initialization On → Off → On→ Off → On

Standby (Default) On

B/W printing OnOperation

Color Printing Off

On: The actuator is out of the sensor.Off: The actuator is interrupting the sensor.

Copier ACS

The Auto Color Select manages the transfer belt and PCUs. To print color pages,the ACS lifts the transfer belt and operates the four PCUs. To print black and whitepages, the ACS manages the transfer belt and the PCUs as follows:

1. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in the lower position and operates the blackPCU (does not operate the other PCUs) if the first print of a job is a black andwhite page.

2. The ACS lifts the transfer belt to the upper position and operates the four PCUsif a color page appears in the job.

3. The ACS keeps the transfer belt inthe upper position and keepsoperating the four PCUs after the firstcolor page. Note that all PCUs are inoperation even when black and white

pages are processed.The ACS works when the user pushesthe Auto Color Select key from the operation panel. The table lists which PCUs arein operation.

OriginalKey

B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color

Auto Color Select Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or fourPCUs

Full Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs

Black and White Black PCU Black PCU Black PCU

Four PCUsK PCU

K K Color Color K K Color

B146D935.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 6-88 SM

Printer ACS

The user can validate or invalidate the ACS from the following menu: > PrinterFeatures > System > B&W Page Detect. The ACS works when B&W Detect is on,and does not work when B&W detect is off. The tables list which PCUs are in

operation.

B&W Page Detect: On

PrintPrinter Driver

B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color


Color Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or fourPCUs

B&W Page Detect: Off

PrintPrinter DriverB/W Only Color Only B/W and Color


Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 6-89 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.12 FUSING

6.12.1 OVERVIEW

1. Oiling roller

2. Oil supply roller

3. Heating roller4. Heating roller fusing lamp

5. Heating roller thermostat

6. Heating roller thermistor

7. Fusing belt

8. Pressure roller thermistor

9. Pressure roller thermo fuse

10. Pressure roller fusing lamp

11. Pressure roller12. Hot roller

13. Junction gate

14. Cleaning roller

15. Oil supply unit

• A belt fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventionalhot and pressure roller system.

• The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusing

belt quickly.• The hot roller is made of sponge, which flattens slightly, also increasing the

fusing nip. This roller does not contain a fusing lamp.

• Each of the heating and pressure rollers has a fusing lamp. – NA: 770W for the heating roller, 350W for the pressure roller – EU: 700W for the heating roller, 325W for the pressure roller

• The heating roller thermistor and pressure roller thermistor control thetemperature of these lamps.

• Temperature is normally controlled by turning the fusing lamps on and off. Tochange between on/off control and phase control: SP1-104-1.

• The oil supply roller supplies oil to the fusing belt through the oiling roller. This

mechanism spreads the oil on the fusing belt evenly.

B146D569.WMF

2

3

4

5

6

7

8910

11

12

13

14

15

1

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147/B149/B190 6-90 SM

6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE

Belt and Rollers

Development drive motor-K drives the pressure roller [G], hot roller [B], oil supplyroller [C], and oiling roller [D] through the gear train. The heating roller [E] is drivenby the pressure with the fusing belt [F].

Fusing Clutch

The fusing clutch [A] turns off and cuts the drive power when the fusing unit doesnot need to operate. This mechanism prevents the belt and rollers from wearing

and saves the fusing oil.

NOTE: The fusing clutch turns off when images and patterns are created on thetransfer belt during process control and line position adjustment.

B146D570.WMF

[G]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[F]

[D]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 6-91 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Fusing Temperatures

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays

on until the thermistor detects the standby temperature. Then the CPU raises thetemperature to the printing temperature.

The fusing temperature for each mode is as follows.

ModeResolution

(dpi)Temperature of Heating Roller

Temperature ofPressure Roller

Note

Energy saverlevel 1

100°C 130°C

Standby modeNA: 175°C

EU: 170°C

NA: 145°C

EU: 140°C

If SP1-104-025 is set to 4

1,200 x 1,200 150°CNA: 125°C

EU: 130°CColor

1,800 x 600600 x 600

180°C 160°C

1,200 x 1,200NA: 180°C

EU: 175°C

NA: 160°C

EU: 155°CBlack and white

1,800 x 600600 x 600

NA: 185°C

EU: 180°C

NA: 155°C

EU: 160°C

OHP All 165°C 150°C

Thick All 175°C 155°C

1,200 x 1,200 145°CNA: 120°C

EU: 125°CColor(duplex) 1,800 x 600

600 x 600NA: 165°C

EU: 170°C

NA: 135°C

EU: 150°C

1,200 x 1,200 165°CNA: 135°C

EU: 145°CBlack and white(duplex) 1,800 x 600

600 x 600175°C

NA: 145°C

EU: 155°C

The heating and pressure roller temperatures for fusing are stored in SP1-105-4 to-28.

When the machine is switched on, the fusing lamp temperatures increase to thosespecified by SP1-104-25.

The print ready temperature is slightly less than the fusing temperature. Thedifference is specified by SP1-105-1 and -2.

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147/B149/B190 6-92 SM

Temperature Corrections

To prevent excessive glossiness caused by fusing temperature overshoot, thefollowing SP modes are available:

• 1-913: Fusing temperature is reduced after this number of pages during the job.

• 1-914: This shows how much the temperature is reduced

If a job using OHP or thick paper starts while the fusing unit is still warm, the fusingtemperature could be higher than the target for this type of paper, causing markson the output. To prevent this problem, we have the following SP modes:

• 1-996-4, 5: These SPs specify a limit, above which printing will not start.

Overheat Protection

If the heating or pressure roller temperature becomes higher than 210°C, the CPUcuts off the power to the fusing lamp. SC543 for the heating roller or SC553 for thepressure roller is generated.

If thermistor overheat protection fails, there are the thermostat for the heating rollerand two thermofuses for the pressure roller in series with the common ground lineof the fusing lamp.

• If the thermostat temperature becomes higher than 215°C, the thermostatopens, removing power from the fusing lamp.

• If either of the two thermofuses temperature becomes higher than 126°C, the

thermofuse opens, removing power from the fusing lamp.NOTE: These thermofuses make a series circuit.

In either case, the machine stops operation.

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 6-93 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY AND CLEANING

Oil Supply Pad and Roller

The fusing oil makes it easier for paper to separate from the fusing belt and rollerafter fusing. The oil [C] from the oil supply pad [B] is supplied to the oil supply roller[A]. The oil supply roller rotates and supplies a bit of oil to the oiling roller [D]. Theoiling roller applies the oil to the fusing belt [E].

B146D571.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[E]

Front

Rear

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147/B149/B190 6-94 SM

Oil Supply Mechanism

When the solenoid [A] turns on, the solenoid lever [B] pushes the oil supply lever[C] on the fusing unit. The movement is transmitted by the link [D] and the bracket[E] to the oil supply roller [F]. The roller is lifted and touches the oil supply pad [G].

B146D572.WMF

[C]

Front

Rear

[B]

[A]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 6-95 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.12.5 WASTE OIL

Bottle Set Sensor

Excess fusing oil is collected in the waste oil bottle [H] through the pipe [I]. There isa feeler [E] behind the waste oil bottle holder [G]. The feeler is linked to the bottleset sensor [D]. The feeler is pushed when the bottle is in the holder and the holderis set in place.

NOTE: 1) The feeler goes through an opening [F] on the rear side of the holder.The bottle pushes the feeler directly.

2) The bottle set sensor is checked when the main switch is turned on or

when the front or left door is opened and closed.

If the sensor does not detect the bottle, the message, “Waste Oil Bottle SettingError,” is displayed. This message is cleared after the bottle is set and the frontcover is closed (or the main switch is turned off and on). Just opening and closingthe cover does not clear the message.

NOTE: With this error message, another message, “Waste Oil Bottle is AlmostFull,” can be displayed ( Waste Oil Sensor).

B146D919.WMF

[A]

[C]

[E]

[G]

[B]

[D]

[F]

[H]

[I]

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147/B149/B190 6-96 SM

Waste Oil Sensor

There is an enclosed area [A] on the rear left shoulder of the waste oil bottle. Onthe inside wall of this area are two pinholes, through which the waste oil can flowinto the enclosed area. This enclosed area contains an actuator [B], whichinterrupts the waste oil sensor [C] if no oil is in the area.

When the amount of waste oil becomes large enough for the waste oil to flow intothe area, the actuator floats on the oil. When the actuator leaves the waste oilsensor, the message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full,” is displayed on theoperation panel.

NOTE: With this error message, another message, “Waste Oil Bottle SettingError,” can be displayed ( Bottle Set Sensor).

After this message appears, the copier can operate until the number of rotations ofdevelopment drive motor K reaches the value specified with SP7-905-010. Whenthe number has reached this value, an error message is displayed and the copierstops its operation. When you dispose of the waste oil, the machine resumes itsnormal operations (no need to switch the machine off/on).

6.12.6 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION

The fusing oil supply unit [A] contains a fuse [B] in a circuit between the fusing unitand the BCU board. The fuse opens shortly after a new unit has been installed inthe machine and the power is switched on. When the power is turned on or the leftcover is closed, the BCU checks whether a new fusing oil supply unit is installed bychecking the fuse condition. If the fusing oil supply unit has been replaced, themachine detects the new unit and automatically resets the counter for the unit.

Oil near-end is detected by counting the number of prints made. The machineindicates oil near-end 2,500 sheets before the life of the oil supply unit runs out.This timing can be changed with SP7-905-14. . When the number has reached this

value, an error message is displayed and the copier stops its operation.

B146D573.WMF

[B]

[A]

⇒

Rev. 06/2004

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 6-97 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.12.7 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Overview

When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces powerconsumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.

This machine has two types of energy saver mode as follows.

1) Panel-off mode2) Auto Off mode

These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes.

• Panel off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Panel OffTimer

• Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Auto OffTimer

• Auto off disabling: User Tools – System Settings – Key Operator Tools – AOF (Always ON). This disables the auto off mode.

Stand-by Mode

Auto Off Mode

Key Operation

Energy Saver Key ON -or-Panel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 10 s)

Panel-Off Mode (1&2)

Low Power Mode

Energy Saver Timer (1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)

Return Time Less Than 3s Panel-Off Level 1

Return Time Less Than 10s Panel-Off Level 2

Key Operation

Return Time Less Than 30 s

Off Mode

Off Stand-by Mode

FAX: RX, etc.

Printer Data inAfter Printing

Operation Sw. Off -or-Auto Off Timer (1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)



Return Time Less Than 101 s

Operation Sw. On

Platen Cover Open / Close

Original Set ADF

B146D936.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

B147/B149/B190 6-98 SM

Panel Off Mode

Entering the panel off mode

The machine enters the panel off mode under the following condition:

• The panel off timer runs out.• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second.

If the value specified in the panel off timer is larger than the value specified in theenergy saver timer, the machine goes into the low power mode without going intothe panel off mode. A similar thing happens when the value in the panel off timer islarger than that in the auto off timer. To make the panel off mode effective, specifya value smaller than the values in the energy saver timer and auto off timer.

What happens in panel off mode

When the machine is in the panel off mode, each of the fusing lamps are kept at

the temperatures indicated in the table below, and the operation panel indicatorsare turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power LED.

If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program(e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of eachfusing lamp rises to print the data.

Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:

• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed

• Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed

• An original is placed in the ADF

• The ADF is lifted

• A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table

The return time from the panel off mode to stand-by mode is less than 30 seconds.

ModeOperation

SwitchEnergy

Saver LEDFusing Temperature +24V System +5V

Panel off On OnHeating roller: 100

oC

Pressure roller: 130oC

On On

8/12/2019 2238c


FUSING

SM 6-99 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Auto Off Mode

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The differencebetween Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machine’s condition when itenters the Auto Off mode.

Entering off stand-by and off modes

The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off Mode when one of the followingis done.

• The auto off timer runs out.

• The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off.

If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-bymode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters the Off Mode.

• Error or SC condition

• Image data is stored in the memory• During memory TX or polling RX

• The handset is off hook

• An original is in the ARDF

• The ARDF is open

Off Stand-by mode

The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects aringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply isactivated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes

the print job.

Off Mode

The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy savermode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and thesystem +5V and +24V supplies are activated.

Returning to stand-by mode

The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The

return time is less than 99 seconds.Mode

OperationSwitch

EnergySaver LED

Fusing Lamp +24V System +5V Note

OffStand-by

Off OffOff

(On when printing)On On

Off Off Off Off Off Off+5VE issupplied

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER EXIT

B147/B149/B190 6-100 SM

6.13 PAPER EXIT

6.13.1 OVERVIEW

[D]: To standard paper tray[E]: To external paper tray[F]: Junction gate[G]: Junction gate solenoid

After fusing, the junction gate feeds paper to the standard paper tray or the

external paper tray. The junction gate solenoid [D] controls the junction gate asfollows:

• To the standard paper tray: The junction gatesolenoid is off (default)

• To the external paper tray: The junction gatesolenoid is on.

Development drive motor-K drives the exit rollers.


[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER EXIT

SM 6-101 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION

When the paper overflow sensor [A] is activated, the machine detects that thepaper stack height has exceeded a certain limit, and stops printing.

B146D921.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B147/B149/B190 6-102 SM

6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS

6.14.1 OVERVIEW

The printer/scanner unit is provided as a standard unit for North America andEurope models. For other models, install the printer/scanner unit to use scannerfunctions.

The controller is based on the GW (Grand Work) architecture.

CPU: RM7065C-533 (496 MHz)

CLARINET:This is one of the GW-architecture ASICs. It uses a 124 MHz bus to interface withthe CPU and memory. CLARINET controls the interface, memory, local bus,interruption processing, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation panel,IEEE1284, and image processing.

Flash ROM: The 16-MB flash ROM is for the system program.

AS Option: Optional component for Asia model

(standard component for other models)

AL Option: Optional component for all models

: Optional printer/scanner for Asia model

(standard component for other models)

IEEE1284 NIB

SD Slot 1 SD Slot 2

System

Flash ROM

(16 MB)CLARINET CPU

NVRAM

(128 kB)

PCICONTROLLER PCIPCI

BCU FCU NCU

AL Option

IEEE1394/

Wireless LAN/

Bluetooth

AL Option

PCI BUS

Local BUS

AL Option

SD Slot 3

AL Option

SD CardPS3Printer/

Scanner

RAM

(256 MB)

RAM

(256 MB)RAM

(256 MB)

AS Option

PCI

File Format

Converter

AL Option

AL Option

SDRAM

DIMM

SDRAM

DIMM

SDRAM

DIMM

2.5" HDD

IDE IDE

2.5" HDD

AS Option

B146D924.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-103 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


SDRAM DIMM (3 slots):The controller has 512-MB resident SDRAM. You can expand the memory up to768 MB (256 MB x 3).

NVRAM:The 128-KB NVRAM stores the engine/controller settings and logs.

Ethernet:100Base-TX/10Base-T is an optional component for the Asia model, and astandard component for other models.

IEEE1284 Interface:The IEEE1284 interface is a standard component for the Europe and North America models, and an optional component for other models.

NIB:The network interface board is a standard component for the Europe and North

America models, and an optional component for other models.Interface Option:You can install one of the four network components (USB 2.0, IEEE1394, WirelessLAN, Bluetooth).

HDD: Two 40-GB HDDs are among standard components. Each hard disk is partitionedas shown below. You cannot change the partition sizes.

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B147/B149/B190 6-104 SM

6.14.2 HARD DISK

Overview

The capacity of the hard disk is 80 GB. The controller partitions it into several

drives and allocates them for different functions. You can initialize these partitionsas necessary ( SP5-832). The table lists the contents of the hard disk.

Contents Capacity (MB)Volatile/

NonvolatileInitialization

(SP5-832)

37,500 NonvolatileImages

25,000 Volatile002

Thumbnails 2,400 Nonvolatile 003

Job logs 10 Nonvolatile 004

Printer fonts 500 Nonvolatile 005

User information 100 Nonvolatile 006

Mail RX data 200 Nonvolatile 007Mail TX data 1,000 Nonvolatile 008

1,256 NonvolatileDesigner data

1,000 Volatile009

Logs 150 Nonvolatile 010

Ricoh interfaces 500 Nonvolatile 011

Volatile: The data is lost when you turn the main switch off.Nonvolatile: The data is retained when you turn the main switch off.

Data Transfer

The copier executes the direct memory access(DMA) two times as fast as the conventional DMA.

The controller has two identical hard disk drives.One HDD interface connects these drives with thememory. There is a 32-bit data bus between thememory and the HDD interface; and a 16-bit databus between the HDD interface and each harddisk drive (two 16-bit data busses in total).

When receiving 32-bit data from the memory, theHDD interface divides them into two 16-bit dataand transfers them to each hard disk drive. Harddisk drive 1 stores data in an address; hard diskdrive 2 stores data in an address. These twoaddresses correspond with each other. Whenreceiving two 16-bit data from two correspondingaddresses of the hard disk drives, the HDDinterface combines them and transfers 32-bit data to the memory.

If a bad sector is found in an address of one hard disk drive, the sector in thecorresponding address of the other hard disk drive is also treated as a bad sector.

B146D937.WMF

Memory

HDD Interface

HDD 1 HDD 2

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-105 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING

RPCS Driver

PCL5c Driver

RCM profile

Gray

Correction

Correction

8-bit

CMYK

Corrected

RGB

Toner Limitation

Dithering & ROP

Matching

RPCS Driver

Controller Host

ICM Engine/

ICM profile

Printer

Engine

CMYK

8 bits

CMYK

8-bit K

UCR/BG

RGB

CMYK

RGB

1 bit or 2 bits

B146D932.WMF

PCL Driver Decode

&

Scale

8 bitsColor

Matching

Dithering

&

ROP

BG/UCR,

Gray Correction

Toner Limitation

RGB

RGB RGB

8 bits

RGB 8 bits

CMY

8 bits

CMYK

1 bit

CMY1 bit

Controller Host Printer Engine

ICM Engine/

ICM profile

(Matching by Host)

RGB CMY

Correction

CMY

8 bits

B146D933.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B147/B149/B190 6-106 SM

PS3 Driver

CMS (Color Management System)

CMS optimizes the color print quality using a color profile that is based on thecharacteristics of the printer. With RPCS, the color profile is applied by the driver.With PS3 and PCL5c, the color profile is applied in the matching/CRD module onthe controller except when using CMM/ICC/ICM profiles.

CMS is not used when the color profile setting in the printer driver is set to “Off.”

Gray Correction

Gray correction processes gray with the K or CMYK toner depending on the driversettings.

BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)

The RGB data is converted to CMYK data with BG/UCR. During CMYK conversion,some CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm.

Gamma Correction

The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). ForCMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data isstored in NVRAM.

PS Driver

CIEto

XYZ

Color

Matching

RGB

XYZ

CIE ABC

CMYK

8 bits

CMM/

ICC/ICM

Profile

Fine

Fine Super

BG/UCR

(RGB

Correction)

RGB

to

XYZ

CMYK8 bits

XYZ

G a m m a

G r a y C o r r e c t i o n

T o n e r L i m i t a t i o n

D i t h e r a n d R I P

CMYK CMYK CMYKCMYK

1 bit or 2 bits

Vivid

Super Vivid

None

CRD

B146D934.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-107 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Toner Limitation

Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.

Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can

be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).• Default: 190% for text, 260% for photo

• Adjustable range: 100% to 400%

Dither Processing and ROP/RIP

Dither patterns have been prepared for photo and text independently. Ditheringconverts 8-bit data to 1-bit or 2-bit data. However, these dither patterns create theillusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern isselected depending on the selected resolution.

RIP: Raster Image ProcessingROP: Raster Operation

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B147/B149/B190 6-108 SM

6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

Sample Print

This feature was formerly known as “Proof Print.” This function gives users a

chance to check the print results before starting a multiple-set print run.

• The maximum number of pages is 1,000. It is 1,100 pages total, including jobs from locked print and collation.

• The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 2.5 GB. Thispartition is also used by the collation and locked print features.

Locked Print

Using this feature, the print job is stored in the machine but will not be printed until

the user inputs an ID at the machine’s operation panel. This ID must match the IDthat has been input with the printer driver.

• The maximum number of pages is 1,000. It is 1,100 pages total, including jobs using sample print and collation.

• Locked print uses the same hard disk partition as sample print and collation,which is 2.5 GB.

Rev. 05/2005

⇒

⇒

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-109 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING

Print data can be spooled (stored) in the machine’s HDD, and the machine starts toprint when data transfer is complete. Since the machine stores all data first before

printing, the host computer is freed up more quickly.NOTE: 1) The supported print protocols are IPP and LPR.

2) The default setting for this feature is ‘off’. The user must switch it onusing UP mode to enable this feature.

• The size of the HDD partition for job spooling is 1 GB.

• The partition can hold up to 150 jobs.

Related SP Modes

Job spooling can be turned on and off using the SP mode (SP5-828-069) for each

protocol.

The machine does not spool jobs when job spooling is switched off with the SPmode, even when the customer switches it on with the user mode.

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B147/B149/B190 6-110 SM

Paper Source Selection

Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)

The “Tray Priority” setting

determines the start of the traysearch when the user selects “AutoTray Select” with the driver. Themachine searches paper trays forthe specified paper size and type.

When no tray contains paper thatmatches the paper size and typespecified by the driver, the controllerstops printing until the user loads thecorrect paper.

The “Tray Priority” setting can bespecified in the following menu: > System Settings > Tray PaperSettings > Paper Tray Priority:Printer.

NOTE: The by-pass feed table is not part of the tray search.

Tray Locking

If “Tray Locking” is enabled for a tray, the controller skips the “locked” tray in the

tray search process.The “Tray Locking” setting can be specified in the following menu: > SystemSettings > Tray Paper Settings > Paper Type: Tray # > Apply Auto Paper Select(where the “#” indicates the tray number).

NOTE: The by-pass feed table cannot be unlocked (Tray Locking is alwaysenabled).

Manual Tray Select

If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver,

the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper.

Priority Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

LCT (Optional)

Start of

Tray Search

Tray 3 (Optional)

Tray 4 (Optional)

B146D575.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-111 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Auto Continue

Overview

When this function is enabled, the machine waits for a specified period (0, 1, 5, 10,

15 minutes) for the correct paper size and type to be set in the tray. If the timerruns out, the machine starts printing, even if there is no paper tray which matchesthe paper size and paper type specified by the driver.

The machine searches for a paper tray in the following way:

• The interval can be set with the following menu: > Printer Features > System> Auto Continue.

NOTE: The default setting for this feature is “Off.”

Auto Tray Select

When there is no paper tray thatmatches the paper size and typespecified by the driver, the machinesearches for any tray that has paper,and prints from the first tray it finds.The start of the tray search is thetray selected as the priority tray.

Manual Tray Select

The machine prints from the selected tray even if the paper size and type do notmatch the setting specified from the driver.

If “Auto Continue” is disabled, the machine waits until the user loads the correctpaper in the tray.

Priority Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

LCT (Optional)

Start of

Tray Search

Tray 3 (Optional)

Tray 4 (Optional)

B146D576.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B147/B149/B190 6-112 SM

Paper Output Tray

You can select output trays as follows: User Tools > System Settings > Tray PaperSettings. If a print job does not specify an output tray or if the driver specifies thedefault tray, the output tray selected with this user tool will be used.

Output Tray Selected

• If the machine cannot print to the selected output tray, it prints to the defaultpaper output tray.

• If paper overflow is detected at the selected output tray, the controller suspendprinting.

Stapling

The optional two-tray finisher and booklet finisher can staple papers. Both finishers

support the following stapling positions:[A]: One staple (vertical) is at the rear right

corner.[B]: Two staples (vertical) are at the right

middle edge.[C]: One staple (vertical) is at the front right

corner.[D]: One staple (slant) is at the front right

corner.

The two-tray finisher supports the followingstapling position (the booklet finisher doesnot):

[D]: One staple (slant) is at the front rightcorner.

The booklet finisher supports the followingstapling position (the two-tray finisher doesnot):

[E]: Two staples (vertical) are at the center.

The table lists the number of papers that the finishers can staple.Position Paper size

A4, B5, LT A3, Ledger, Legal

Two-tray finisher [A][B][C][D] 50 sheets 30 sheets

[A][B][C][D] 50 sheets 25 sheetsBooklet finisher

[E] — 10 sheets

NOTE: For more paper sizes, see the specifications.

B146D922.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

Paper exit

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-113 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Punching

To enable a finisher to punch out holes, you must install the optional punch unit toit. Each punch unit needs the dedicated punch unit. Note that these punch unitsare not interchangeable with each other. To make two holes on a sheet of paper,you must install the two-hole type; to make three, the three-hole type; and to makefour, the four-hole type. The table shows which type you can install to your finisher.

Finisher model Two holes Three holes Four holes

North America N/A

Europe (excludingNorth Europe)

N/A

North Europe N/A N/A

: Available

N/A: Not available

8/12/2019 2238c


ETHERNET BOARD

B147/B149/B190 6-114 SM

6.15 ETHERNET BOARD

6.15.1 ETHERNET BOARD LAYOUT

Function Blocks Description

PHY (Physical Layer Device) Completely standardized physical layer device for thefunctions of each device in the network.

EEPROM Stores the MAC address.

The physical layer device, the lowest layer of the OSI reference model, refers tothe physical components of the network: cables, connectors, and so on. OSI, theOperating Standard Interface, is a framework upon which networking standards arearranged. It is commonly diagramed as a layered cake.

C o n n e c t o r

G W P

H Y B u s I / f

EEPROM

LED

LED PHY DP83843

Filter Modue

Connector

XTL

25 MHz

LAN I/F

B146D579.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


ETHERNET BOARD

SM 6-115 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.15.2 ETHERNET BOARD OPERATION

The NIB is a standard IEEE802.3u type which implements 10/100Mbps autonegotiation. System initialization sets the network for 10Mbps/100Mbps.

Indicates the operation mode:

On: 100 Mbps modeLED [A] (Orange)

Off: 10 Mbps mode

Indicates the link status:

On: Link SafeLED [B] (Green)

Off: Link Fail

B146D580.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)

B147/B149/B190 6-116 SM

6.16 IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)

6.16.1 OVERVIEW

An IEEE1394 interface board is available as an option for this machine to providehigh speed connectivity through what is commonly called Firewire or i.LINK (Sony).Some important advantages of Firewire are:

• High speed data transmission at 400 Mbps.

• Easier connectivity (many devices can be connected without a host).

• Devices in a computer can be connected to external devices on a shared bus.

IEEE1394 supports two printing methods: 1) SCSI Print, and 2) IP Over 1394. IPOver 1394 supports printing by setting an IP address, and SCSI supports printingwithout an IP address.

NOTE: 1) Windows Me and Windows XP support IP over 1394.2) Windows XP and 2000 support IEEE1394 SCSI printing.

Software Application

TCP/IP (Virtual)

PortSCSI (Virtual)

Port

IEEE802.11b

(Wireless LAN)

PortIEEE1394 Port

Ethernet

Port

IP over 1394

SCSI PrintingIP over 1394

Printing

B146D581.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)

SM 6-117 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


When the host computer powers up, it queries all the devices connected to the busand assigns each one an address, a process called enumeration. Here are somegeneral features of Firewire:

• Firewire is Plug-and-Play.

• Firewire devices are hot pluggable (they can be plugged while the system isoperating).

• Firewire uses 64-bit fixed addressing, based on the IEEE 1212 standard. Thereare three parts to each packet of information sent by a device over FireWire:

• 10-bit Bus ID. Used to determine the Firewire bus where the data came from.

• 6-bit Physical ID. Used to identify the device that sent the data.

• 48-bit Storage Area. Capable of addressing 256 terabytes of information foreach node

• The Bus ID and Physical ID comprise the 16-bit Node ID. 64,000 nodes areallowed on each system.

• Up to 16 hops are allowed (4.5 m/hop) for a total of 72 meters devices are daisy-chained.

• Firewire allows its devices to draw power from the Firewire connection. Twopower connectors in the cable can supply power (8 to 40 V, 1.5 amp max.)

• An important element of Firewire is its support of isochronous devices.When isochronous devices are in the isochronous mode, data streams betweenthe device and the host in real time with guaranteed bandwidth and no errorcorrection. Essentially, this means that a device like a digital camcorder canrequest that the host computer allocate enough bandwidth for the camcorder tosend uncompressed video in real time to the computer. The camera can sentdata via the Firewire connection in a steady flow to the computer without

anything disrupting the process. This is one of the main reasons why 1394 hasbeen widely adopted by the consumer electronics industry.

8/12/2019 2238c


USB

B147/B149/B190 6-118 SM

6.17 USB

6.17.1 SPECIFICATIONS

USB connectivity is provided as an option for this machine.Interface: USB 1.1, USB 2.0

Data rates: 480 Mbps (high speed), 12 Mbps (full speed), 1.5 Mbps (low speed)

High speed mode is only supported by USB 2.0.

6.17.2 USB 1.1/2.0

USB (Universal Serial Bus) offers simple connectivity for computers, printers,keyboards, and other peripherals. In a USB environment, terminators, device IDs(like SCSI), and DIP switch settings are not necessary.

USB 1.1 provides the following features:

• Plug & Play. As soon as a new device is connected via USB, the operatingsystem recognizes it, and the appropriate driver is installed for it automatically ifthe driver is available. If the driver is not available, a message prompts the userfor the driver disk for immediate installation.

• Hot swapping (cables can be connected and disconnected while the computerand other devices are switched on)

• No terminator or device ID required

• Data rates of 12 Mbps (full speed), and 1.5 Mbps (low speed)

• Common connectors for different devices

• Bi-directional data communication between device and host computer via a 4-byte header and DEVICE ID.

USB 2.0 is an evolution of the USB 1.1 specification. It uses the same cables,connectors, and software interfaces so the user will see no change. It provides aneasy-to-use connection to a wide range of products with a maximum data rate of480Mbps (high speed).

Up to 127 devices can be connected and 6 cascade connections are allowed.Power is supplied from the computer and the maximum cable length is 5 m.

8/12/2019 2238c


USB

SM 6-119 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.17.3 USB CONNECTORS

USB is a serial protocol and a physical link, which transmits all data on a single pairof wires. Another pair provides power to downstream peripherals. The USB

standard specifies two types of connectors, type “A” connectors for upstreamconnection to the host system, and type “B” connectors for downstream connectionto the USB device.

6.17.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT

The controller has the type B receptacle (CN10).

Pin No. Signal Description Wiring Assignment

1 Power Red

2 Data – White

3 Data + Green

4 Power GND White


B146D928.WMF

Type A connector Type B connector

1

23

4

8/12/2019 2238c


USB

B147/B149/B190 6-120 SM

6.17.5 REMARKS ABOUT USB

• The machine does not print reports specifically for USB.

• Only one host computer is allowed for the USB connection.

• After starting a job using USB, do not switch the printer off until the job has beencompleted. When a user cancels a print job, if data transmitted to the printer hasnot been printed at the time of cancellation, the job will continue to print up to thepage where the print job was cancelled

• When the controller board is replaced, the host computer will recognize themachine as a different device.

Related SP Mode

“USB Settings” is in SP5-844. Data rates can be adjusted to full speed fixed (12Mbps). This switch may be used for troubleshooting if there is a data transfer error

using the high speed mode (480Mbps).

Data rates can also be adjusted using the UP mode “USB Setting” in the HostInterface in the System menu. This mode can be accessed only when the “Enter”,“Escape”, then “Menu” keys are pressed to enter the UP mode.

8/12/2019 2238c


IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)

SM 6-121 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.18 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)


The IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN interface card is available as an option for thismachine.

A wireless LAN is a flexible data communication system used to extend or replacea wired LAN. Wireless LAN employs radio frequency technology to transmit andreceive data over the air and minimize the need for wired connections.

• With wireless LANs, users can access information on a network without lookingfor a place to plug into the network.

• Network managers can set up or expand networks without installing or movingwires.

• Most wireless LANs can be integrated into existing wired networks. Once

installed, the network treats wireless nodes like any other physically wirednetwork component.

• Flexibility and mobility make wireless LANs both effective extensions of andattractive alternatives to wired networks.

Standard applied: IEEE802.11b

Data transmission rates: Speed Distance

11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)

5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)

2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)

1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)

Network protocols: TCP/IP, Apple Talk, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX

Bandwidth: 2.4GHz(divided over 14 channels, 2400 to 2497 MHz for each channel)

NOTE: The wireless LAN cannot be active at the same time as the Ethernet LAN.The following user tool setting determines which LAN is active: SystemSettings – Interface Settings – Network - LAN Type.

LED Indicators

LED Description ON OFF

LED 1 (Green) Link Status Linked No Link

LED 2 (Orange) Power Distribution Power On Power Off

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 6-122 SM

6.18.2 TRANSMISSION MODES

Wireless communication has two modes: 1) ad hoc mode, and 2) infrastructuremode.

Ad Hoc Mode

The ad hoc mode allowscommunication between each device(station) in a simple peer-to-peernetwork. In this mode, all devicesmust use the same channel tocommunicate. In this machine, thedefault transmission mode is ad hocmode and the default channel is 11.

First, set up the machine in ad hocmode and program the necessarysettings, even if the machine will beused in the infrastructure mode.

To switch between ad hoc andinfrastructure modes, use thefollowing user tool: Host InterfaceMenu - IEEE802.11b - Comm Mode

Infrastructure ModeThe infrastructure mode allowscommunication between eachcomputer and the printer via anaccess point equipped with anantenna and wired into the network.This arrangement is used in morecomplex topologies. The wireless LANclient must use the same SSID(Service Set ID) as the access point in

order to communicate.

B146D584.WMF

Access Point

B146D585.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 6-123 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.18.3 SECURITY FEATURES

SSID (Service Set ID) The SSID is used by the access point to recognize the client and allow access to

the network. Only clients that share the same SSID with the access point canaccess the network.

NOTE: 3) If the SSID is not set, clients connect to the nearest access point.4) The SSID can be set using the web status monitor or telnet.

Using the SSID in Ad hoc mode

When the SSID is used in ad hoc mode and nothing is set, the machineautomatically uses “ASSID” as the SSID. In such a case, “ASSID” must also be setat the client.

NOTE: SSID in ad hoc mode is sometimes called “Network Name.”

Some devices automatically change from ad hoc mode to infrastructure modewhen the same SSID is used in ad hoc mode and infrastructure mode. In such acase, to use the device in ad hoc mode, use a specified SSID in infrastructuremode and use “ASSID” in the ad hoc mode.

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) WEP is a coding system designed to protect wireless data transmission. In order tounlock encoded data, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. Thereare 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys. However, this machine supports only 64 bit WEP.

NOTE: The WEP key can be set using the Web Status Monitor or Telnet.

MAC Address When the infrastructure mode is used, access to the network can also be limited atthe access points using the MAC address. This setting may not be available withsome types of access points.

8/12/2019 2238c



B147/B149/B190 6-124 SM

6.18.4 WIRELESS LAN TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES

Communication Status

Wireless LAN communication status can be checked with the UP mode “W.LAN

Signal” in the Maintenance menu. This can also be checked using the Web StatusMonitor or Telnet.The status is described on a simple number scale.

Status Display Communication Status

Good 76 ~ 100

Fair 41 ~ 75

Poor 21 ~ 40

Unavailable 0 ~ 20

NOTE: Communication status can be measured only when the infrastructure modeis being used.

Channel Settings

If a communication error occurs because of electrical noise, interference with otherelectrical devices, etc., you may have to change the channel settings.

To avoid interference with neighboring channels, it is recommended to change by 3channels. For example, if there are problems using channel 11 (default), try usingchannel 8.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13Channel

MHz 2,412 2,437 2,462

25MHz 25MHz

B146D586.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 6-125 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


Troubleshooting Procedure

If there are problems using the wireless LAN, check the following.

1) Check the LED indicator on the wireless LAN card.

2) Check if “IEEE802.11b” is selected in the following user tool: Host Interfacemenu - Network Setup - LAN Type.3) Check if the channel settings are correct.4) Check if the SSID and WEP are correctly set.

If infrastructure mode is being used,

1) Check if the MAC address is properly set.2) Check the communication status.

If the communication status is poor, bring the machine closer to the accesspoint, or check for any obstructions between the machine and the accesspoint.

If the problem cannot be solved, try changing the channel setting.

8/12/2019 2238c


BLUETOOTH

B147/B149/B190 6-126 SM

6.19 BLUETOOTH


Bluetooth wireless provides radio links between mobile computers, mobile phonesand other portable handheld devices.

Bluetooth contains the following features.

• Cheaper compared to the IEEE802.11b wireless LAN.

• Many protocols for infrared transmission (IrDA) can be used with Bluetooth.

• A Bluetooth device can connect to other Bluetooth devices without any settings.

Standard applied: Bluetooth 1.1 (Bluetooth Special Interest Group)Data transfer rates: 1 MbpsBandwidth: 2.4GHz Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS)

Piconet. Bluetooth devices communicate with each other device in the ad hocmode. This network is called a “Piconet”. A Piconet may contain a maximum of 8Bluetooth devices.

There is one master device and seven slave devices in a Piconet. The masterdevice controls the hopping frequency and timing, as well as storing the ID codesof the slave devices. The master and slave devices can be swapped. Once themaster device leaves the Piconet, a slave device becomes the new master.

Machines with the Bluetooth option become potential slave devices to connect tothe PC.

FHSS (Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum). The Bluetooth device divides

2402 to 2480 MHz into 79 channels of 1 MHz width, and changes the channel 1600times per second. If other devices in the LAN are using the same radio band,Bluetooth can avoid interference from the other devices.

Time

F r e q u e n c y

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

B146D587.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


BLUETOOTH

SM 6-127 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


6.19.2 BLUETOOTH PROFILES

A Bluetooth device will not operate if it is located to close another Bluetooth device.However, the Bluetooth device should support the protocols to communicate with

each other. There are many types of Bluetooth and service protocols. These arelisted below.

Here are 14 profiles for Bluetooth as follows.

• Generic Access Profile

• Service Discovery Profile

• Cordless Telephony Profile

• Intercom Profile

• Serial Port Profile

• Headset Profile

• Dial-up Networking Profile

• Fax Profile• LAN Access Profile

• Generic Object Exchange Profile

• Object Push Profile

• File Transfer Profile

• Synchronization Profile

• Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile

Serial Port Profile (SPP) and Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP) areused for the printer products.

SPP is used is place of the serial port, while HCRP is used in place of the parallel

port.

6.19.3 BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES

Public and Private Mode. The PC can browse Bluetooth devices. The machine’sdefault is public mode. The PC cannot browse the machine if it has been changedto private mode.

PIN Code (Personal Identification Number). When the PIN code is used, the PCconnects to the device that sent the PIN code. The PIN code is a 4 digit number.

This machine uses the last four digits of the machine's serial number. It cannot bechanged.

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER FUNCTIONS

B147/B149/B190 6-128 SM

6.20 SCANNER FUNCTIONS

The printer/scanner unit is provided as a standard unit for North America andEurope models. For other models, install the printer/scanner unit to use scanner

functions.

6.20.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE

The image processing for scanner mode is done in the IPU chip on the BCU board.The IPU chip chooses the most suitable image processing methods (gammatables, dither patterns, etc) depending on the settings made in the driver.

The image compression method can be selected with SP mode (MR/MH/MMR forbinary picture processing, JPEG for grayscale processing).

Whether the user selects the image mode using the driver (TWAIN mode) or fromthe operation panel (Delivery mode), the IPU chip does the image processing usingthe appropriate image processing methods mentioned above.

Image Data Path

1. Image Store/Image Delivery Mode

The user can select the following modes from the LCD.

1) Delivery only2) Store only3) Store and delivery

After image processing and image compression, all image data for the job arestored in the printer controller HDD using TIFF file format (binary pictureprocessing) or JPEG file format (grayscale processing). The type of TIFF formatused depends on the user’s scanner settings.

When delivery mode is selected, the controller creates a file which contains thedestination and page information, then the controller sends the file to a server.

Controller SBU

Image

Scanning

Server

HDD

File

BCU

Image

Processing

Image

CompressionNIB

B146D926.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


SCANNER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-129 B147/B149/B190

D e t a i l e d


2. Twain Mode

After image processing and image compression, the data (TIFF or JPEG) is sentto the scanner Twain driver directory on the computer.

6.20.2 SCANNER ACS (AUTO COLOR SELECTION)

The scanner auto-color selection (ACS)function determines if an original is blackand white or color, so that the black andwhite mode or the full color mode isautomatically selected.

Comparing RGB video signals, the ACSprocesses the original as black and whiteif the maximum difference among RGB

signals is within a certain range. After the above processing, the G signalsare further processed to make black andwhite data (a pixel is black or white, notgray). In this processing, the followinginformation is compared:

• The G signal level

• The threshold (calculated from the average G signal level)

Controller SBU

Image

Scanning

Im age

BCU

Image

Processing

Image

CompressionNIB

P C

B146D927.WMF

BR G

B146D938.WMF

Signallevel

8/12/2019 2238c


FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

B147/B149/B190 6-130 SM

6.21 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

In previous models (such as A-C2, R-C2), DeskTopBinder V2 could retrieve copyand print jobs from the document server and convert them to TIFF. However, this

software-based conversion was slow for many users.So, for this machine, this conversion has been made hardware-based, using theoptional File Format Converter. Without the File Format Converter, copy and print jobs cannot be downloaded to a PC (or e-Cabinet) from the document server.

Two common target formats are provided for conversion to files that can beselected by the SP modes: JPEG, and TIFF.

In scanner mode, users can select file format from TIFF, JPEG, or PDF. The timeto create TIFF and JPEG files will be shortened with the File Format Converter,especially for high scanning resolution and large image size. When the customerselects PDF, the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned image firstthen converts it to PDF. So, the total time to create a PDF is also shortened withthe File Format Converter.

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-1 B147/B149/B190

S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

SPECIFICATIONS

1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 BASIC

Configuration: Desktop

Print Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system

Number of scans: 1

Resolution: Scan: 600 dpi

Print: 600 dpi

Gradation: Scan: 8 bits/pixel

Print: 2 bits/pixel

Original type: Sheets, book, objects

Max. original size: A3/11" x 17"

Original referenceposition:

Left rear corner

Copy speed: NormalB147: 24 cpm (color) or 32 cpm (black & white)B149: 28 cpm (color) or 38 cpm (black & white)B190: 20 cpm (color) or 28 cpm (black & white)

OHP/ThickB147, B149, B190: 10 cpm (color/black & white)

ADF 1 to 1B147: 24 cpm (color) or 32 cpm (black & white)B149: 28 cpm (color) or 38 cpm (black & white)B190: 20 cpm (color) or 38 cpm (black & white)

First copy (normalmode):

Color: 10 seconds or lessBlack & white: 8 seconds or less

Warm-up time: 101 seconds or less (23°C, 50%)

Print Paper Capacity:(80 g/m2, 20 lb)

Standard tray: 500 sheets x 2By-pass tray: 100 sheetsOptional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 1, 500 sheets x 2, Optional

LCT: 2000 sheets

Print Paper Size: (Refer to “Supported Paper Sizes”.)

Minimum Maximum

Tray 1 A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)

Tray 2 A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11" A3/11" x 17"

By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 458 mm/12" x 18"

Optional Tray A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11" A3/11" x 17"

LCT A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)

Printing PaperWeight:

Standard tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)Optional paper tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

By-pass tray: 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb.)

Rev. 09/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

B147/B149/B190 7-2 SM

Output PaperCapacity:

Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down)External exit tray: 100 sheets (face up)

Continuous copy: Up to 999 sheets

Zoom: Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step)

Fixed:

North America Europe

25% 25%

50% 50%

65% 65%

73% 71%

78% 75%

85% 82%

93% 93%

100% 100%

121% 115%129% 122%

155% 141%

200% 200%

400% 400%

Memory: Standard: 768 MB (Europe and North America model)/512 MB (other models*)

* One expansion slot is available.

Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12A (for North America)220 V – 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 8A (for Europe)

Power Consumption:120V 230V

Maximum 1440 W or less 1500 W or less

Energy Saver 15 W or less 18 W or less

Noise Emission:(Sound Power Level)

Mainframe Only Full System

Printing 68 dB or less 72 dB or less

Stand-by 42 dB or less

Low power mode 40 dB or less

NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricohstandard methodology.

Dimensions (W x D x H):Copier: 670 x 698 x 859 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 33.8")Copier + 1-Tray PFU: 670x 698 x 1,020 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 40.2")Copier + 2-Tray PFU or LCT: 670 x 698 x 1,118 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 44.0")

Weight: Less than 120 kg (265 lb.) [excluding toner]

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-3 B147/B149/B190


1.2 PRINTER

Printer Languages: PCL5c Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)

RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)Resolution andGradation:

PCL5c:600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 300 x 300 dpi (1 bit/pixel)

Adobe PostScript 3:1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)

RPCS:1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)

NOTE: 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel) = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits/pixel)

Printing speed:

Resolution Plain paper Thick/OHP

600 x 600 dpi 32 ppm 10 ppm

1,800 x 600 dpi 32 ppm 10 ppmMonochrome

1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm

600 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 10 ppm

1,800 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 10 ppm

B147

Color

1,200 x 1,200 dpi 14 ppm 10 ppm

600 x 600 dpi 38 ppm 10 ppm


1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm

1,800 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm

B149

Color

1,200 x 1,200 dpi 14 ppm 10 ppm

600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm


1,200 x 1,200 dpi 20 ppm 10 ppm

600 x 600 dpi 20 ppm 10 ppm

1,800 x 600 dpi 20 ppm 10 ppm

B190

Color

1,200 x 1,200 dpi 14 ppm 10 ppm

Resident Fonts: PCL5c:35 Intelli fonts10 TrueType fonts

Adobe PostScript 3:136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)

Host Interfaces: Bi-directional IEEE1284 parallel x 1..................... StandardEthernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)...................... StandardUSB 2.0 ............................................................... OptionalIEEE1394............................................................. OptionalIEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)............................... OptionalBluetooth (Wireless)............................................. Optional

Rev. 09/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

B147/B149/B190 7-4 SM

Network Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk, SMB

First Print Speed: Color: 9 seconds or less (from tray 1)Monochrome: 7 seconds or less (from tray 1)

1.3 SCANNER

Standard ScannerResolution:

Main scan/Sub scan600 dpi

Available scanningResolution Range:

Twain Mode:

100 ~ 1200 dpi

Delivery Mode:

100/200/300/400/600 dpiGrayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB

ScanningThroughput(ARDF mode):

B/W: 28 ppm LEFColor: 24 ppm LEF

Interface: Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394,Wireless LAN

CompressionMethod:

B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG

Rev. 09/2004

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-5 B147/B149/B190


2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

2.1 PAPER FEED

North America Europe/Asia

Paper Size (W x L)Tray 1

Tray2/3/4

LCTBy-

passTray

Tray 1Tray2/3/4

LCTBy-

passTray

A3 W 12" x 18" N N N Y# N N N Y

#

A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm N Y N Y# N Y N Y

A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm N Y#/Y* N Y

# N Y N Y

A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm N Y N Y# Y* Y Y Y

#

A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm N N N Y# N N N Y

A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm N Y N Y# N Y N Y

#

A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm N N N Y# N N N Y

#

B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm N Y#/Y* N Y

# N Y N Y

#

B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm N Y#/Y* N Y

# N Y

#/Y* N Y

#

B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm N Y N Y# N Y N Y

#

B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm N N N Y# N N N Y

#

Ledger 11" x 17" N Y N Y N Y N Y#

Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" N Y N Y N Y#/Y* N Y

#

Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y* Y Y Y# N Y N Y

#

Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" N Y N Y# N Y

#/Y* N Y

#

Half LetterSEF

5.5" x 8.5" N N N Y N N N Y#

ExecutiveSEF

7.25" x 10.5" N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

ExecutiveLEF

10.5" x 7.25" N N N Y# N N N Y

#

F SEF 8" x 13" N Y# N Y# N Y# N YFoolscapSEF

8.5" x 13" N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

8K 267 x 390 mm N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

16K SEF 195 x 267 mm N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

16K LEF 267 x 195 mm N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

Custom Minimum:

90 x 148 mm

Maximum:

305 x 458 mm

N N N Y# N N N Y

#

Com10

Env.

4.125" x 9.5" N N N Y# N N N N

MonarchEnv.

3.875" x 7.5" N N N Y# N N N N

C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm N N N N N N N Y#

C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm N N N N N N N Y#

DL Env. 110 x 220 mm N N N N N N N Y#

Remarks:

Y Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.

Y# Supported: the user specifies the paper size.

Y* Supported: depends on a technician adjustment

N Not supported

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-7 B147/B149/B190


PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

Platen ARDFSize (width x length)[mm] Inches Metric Inches Metric

A3 (297 x 420) L No Yes Yes Yes

B4 (257 x 364) L No Yes No Yes

A4 (210 x 297) L No Yes No Yes**

A4 (297 x 210) S No Yes Yes Yes

B5 (182 x 257) L No Yes No Yes

B5 (257 x 182) S No Yes No Yes

A5 (148 x 210) L No No* No Yes

A5 (210 x 148) S No No No Yes

B6 (128 x 182) L No No No Yes

B6 (182 x 128) S No No No Yes

11" x 17" (DLT) Yes No Yes** Yes**

11" x 15" No No Yes** No

10" x 14" No No Yes No

8.5" x 14" (LG) Yes No Yes** No

8.5" x 13" (F4) No No Yes** Yes

8.25" x 13" No No No No

8" x 13"(F) No Yes No No

8.5" x 11" (LT) Yes No Yes** No

11" x 8.5" (LT) Yes No Yes** No

8" x 10.5" No No No No

8" x 10" No No Yes** No

5.5" x 8.5" (HLT) No* No Yes No

8.5" x 5.5" (HLT) No No Yes No

8K (267 x 390) No No No Yes**16K L (195 x 267) No No No Yes**

16K S (267 x 195) No No No Yes

7.25" x 10.5"(Executive)

No No Yes No

10.5" x 7.25"(Executive)

No No Yes** No

*: When the message “Cannot detect original size” appears, use SP4-303 todetect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT.

**: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1.

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

B147/B149/B190 7-8 SM

3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES

The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-runinstaller allows you to select which components to install.

3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS

PrinterLanguage

Windows95/98/ME

WindowsNT4.0

Windows2000

WindowsXP

Windows2003

Macintosh

PCL 5c Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

RPCS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86

platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC, Alpha, or MIPS platforms.2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows

2000, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system isprovided with the driver.

3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 8.6 or later versions.

3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE

Software Description Agfa Font Manager 2000

(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP,NT4)

A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer.

SmartNetMonitor for Admin

(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP,NT4)

A printer management utility for network administrators. NIBsetup utilities are also available.

SmartNetMonitor for Client

(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP,NT4)

• A printer management utility for client users.

• A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IPnetwork.

• A peer to peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. Thisprovides the parallel printing and recovery printing features.

Printer Utility for Mac

(Mac)

This software provides several convenient functions for printingfrom Macintosh clients.

IEEE1394 Utility

(Win2000) This utility solves problems with Windows 2000.

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP,NT4)

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal documentmanagement software and can manage both image dataconverted from paper documents and application files saved ineach client’s PC.

LAN-Fax Driver This software enables you to fax documents directly form yourPC. Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to beinstalled as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-9 B147/B149/B190


SCANNER

The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM.

Scanner Drivers

• Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003

Scanner Utilities

• Scan Router V2 Lite (Cherry-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP

• Desk Top Binder V2 Lite (Plumeria-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

B147/B149/B190 7-10 SM

4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION

Item

Machine

Code Remarks

Copier B146 C

Platen cover G329 B

ARDF B597 AOne from the two

Booklet finisher B602 IOne from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires onefrom [D], [E], and [F]

Punch unit (for B602) B647 Requires [I]

Two-tray finisher B599 GOne from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires onefrom [D], [E], and [F]

Punch unit (for B599) B377 Requires [G]

Multi-Bin output tray G306 H One from [G], [H], and [I]

One-tray paper feed unit B601 D

Two-tray paper feed unit B598 F

LCT B600 E

One from the three

B146V902.WMF

[C]

[B]

[I]

[G]

[A]

[H]

[E]

[D]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-11 B147/B149/B190


ItemMachine

CodeRemarks

IEEE 1284 — A Standard

Ethernet B594 BDistributed with the optional printer/scanner

for the Asia model

IEEE 1394 B581 C

USB 2.0 B596 D

Wireless LAN B582 E

Bluetooth G377 F

One from the four

File Format Converter B609 G

Printer/Scanner B612 HStandard for the Europe and North Americamodels; Optional for other models

Hard Disk Drive — I Standard

256 MB DIMM G332 JDistributed with the optional printer/scannerfor the Asia model

PostScript 3 G369 K

B146V903.WMF

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[B]

[A]

[I]

[J]

[H]

[K]

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

B147/B149/B190 7-12 SM

5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

5.1 ARDF

Paper Size/Weight:Size A3 to B6, DLT to HLT

SimplexWeight 40 to 128 g/m

2 (11 to 34 lb.)

Size A3 to B5, DLT to HLTDuplex

Weight 50 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)

Table Capacity: 80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)

Original StandardPosition:

Rear left corner

Separation: Feed belt and separation roller

Original Transport: Roller transport

Original Feed Order: From the top original

Supported MagnificationRatios:

Copy 50 to 200 %

Color 32.6 to 200 %Fax

Black & white 48.9 to 200 %

Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit

Power Consumption: 60 W or less

Dimensions (W × D × H): 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4” x 20.4” x 5.9”)

Weight: 12 kg

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-13 B147/B149/B190


5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"

Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2

(16 to 28 lb.)Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)

Paper Feed System: FRR system

Paper Height Detection: 3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)

Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main unit)

Power Consumption: 50 W

Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 172 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 6.8")

Weight 18 kg (39.7 lb.)

5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"

Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Tray Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)

Paper Feed System: FRR system

Paper Height Detection: 3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)





5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

Paper Size: A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)

Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Tray Capacity: 2000 sheets (80 g/m

2

, 20 lb.)Paper Feed System: FRR system

Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near End)





8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

B147/B149/B190 7-14 SM

5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT

Print Paper Size: No punch mode: A3/11" x 17" to A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"

Punch mode:2 holes: A3/11" x 17" to A4/81/2" x 11" (SEF) A4/81/2" x 11" to A5 (LEF)

3 holes: A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)

4 holes (Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)

4 holes (North Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)

Staple mode: A3/11" x 17" to B5/81/2" x 11"

Paper Weight: No punch mode:60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Punch mode:60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Staple mode:64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 23 lb.)Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled

Tray Capacity: Upper tray:500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B5, A5 (LEF)250 sheets: 11" x 17", A3, 81/2" x 14", B4

Lower tray (default mode – stapled output only goes totray 2):

2000 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",

81/2" x 11" (SEF)500 sheets: A5 (LEF)

Lower tray (multi-tray staple mode – stapled output cango to either tray):

1500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",

81/2" x 11" (SEF)

500 sheets: A5 (LEF)

Staple capacity: Single size:50 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B530 sheets: A3, B4, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17"

Mixed size:30 sheets: A4 (LEF) & A3, B5 (LEF) & B4,

81/2" x 11" (LEF) & 11" x 17"

Staple position: 7 positions1-staple: 4 positions (Top Left, Top Right,

Top Left-Oblique, Top Right-Oblique)

2-staples: 3 positions (Left, Top, Right)

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-15 B147/B149/B190


Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)

Power consumption: 48 W


Without punch unit: 53 kg (116.9 lb.)Weight

With punch unit: 55 Kg (121.3 lb.)

5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER

Paper Size: A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT

Booklet Paper Size: A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF

Paper Weight: Stack/Sort mode:60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lb.)

Staple mode:64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb.)

Booklet mode:64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 21 lb.)

Tray Capacity: 1,000 sheets: A4, LT, B5500 sheets: A3, B4, DLT, LG

Booklet Tray Capacity: 2 to 5 sheets/booklet: 206 to 10 sheets/booklet: 10

Staple capacity: 30 sheets

Booklet capacity: 10 sheets

Staple position: 3 positions (excluding booklet mode)1-staple: 2 positions (Top right, Top left)2-staples: 1 positions (Left)

Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

B147/B149/B190 7-16 SM

5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY

Number of Bins 2

Paper Size Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)

Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"

Paper Weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Stack Capacity(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)

Tray 1: 100 sheets

Tray 2: 100 sheets (A4/smaller than 81/2" x 11")250 sheets (B4/81/2" x 14")

8/12/2019 2238c


AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

B597

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM i B597

ARDF B597TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................11.1 COVERS ......................................................................................................11.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ................................................................................ 21.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER...................................................................... 21.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT................................................................................31.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTHSENSORS...........................................................................................................41.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS ..................................................................51.7 SEPARATION ROLLER...............................................................................51.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS...................................................... 6

1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR/PICK-UP HPSENSOR .............................................................................................................61.10 TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR .....................................71.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH ....................... 81.12 EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................................... 91.13 STAMP SOLENOID....................................................................................91.14 CONTROLLER BOARD .............................................................................9

2. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................102.1 TIMING CHARTS .......................................................................................10

2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE ...............................10

2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE.............................. 112.2 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................... 12

3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................133.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 133.2 TEST POINTS............................................................................................133.3 FUSES ....................................................................................................... 13

4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS..........................................................144.1 MAIN COMPONENTS................................................................................144.2 DRIVE LAYOUT .........................................................................................15

4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.................................................................... 164.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM.........................................................................164.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ........................................................ 18

4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM ............................................................194.4.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ........................................................... 194.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION..................................................... 204.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES............................. 20

4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................... 214.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS............................................................. 214.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ...........................................................22

4.6 STAMP ....................................................................................................... 23

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


COVERS

SM 1 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 71. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1.1 COVERS

[A]: Front cover (! x 2)

[B]: Rear cover (! x 2)

[C]: Top cover (! x 1," x 2)

[D]: Original tray (" x 1,# x 1)[E]: Platen sheet (Velcro pads)

[F]: Original exit tray (! x 2). Slide to the right and then pull out.

!CAUTION

The hinge of the ARDF is spring-loaded and becomes much lighter with allthe covers removed. After removing all the covers, lay a heavy book on thefront right corner of the ARDF to prevent it from springing upunexpectedly.

B597R111.WMF

B597R110.WMF

[D]

[E]

[F]

[C]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

B597 2 SM

1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

Open the top cover.

[A]: Original feed unit

Press it toward you on its shaft torelease and lift out.

1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER

Original feed unit (! 1.2)

[A]: Pick-up roller (# x 1)

B597R101.WMF

B597R102.WMF

[A]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


ORIGINAL FEED BELT

SM 3 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 71.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT

Original feed unit and original pick-up roller (! 1.2, 1.3)

[A]: Shaft (# x 1)NOTE: Before removing the shaft, note carefully the positioning of the spring

[B]. This must be reset during re-installation.[C]: Feed belt cover (Timing belt, gear, shaft, springs x 2)

NOTE: Do not lose the springs.[D]: Original feed belt

B597R104.WMF

B597R103.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS

B597 4 SM

1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS

Open the top cover.

[A]: Upper original guide (! x 3).

[B]: Skew correction sensor (" x 1)

[C]: Interval sensor (" x 1)

[D]: Registration sensor (" x 1)

[E]: Original width sensor bracket (! x 1," x 4)[F]: Original width sensors

B597R106.WMF

B597R105.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E][F]

8/12/2019 2238c


ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

SM 5 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 71.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

Raise the original table.

[A]: Lower cover of original tray (! x 4)

[B]: Original length sensor-1 (" x 1)[C]: Original length sensor-2 (" x 1)

1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER

Original feed unit (! 1.2)

[A]: Separation roller cover

[B]: Separation roller (# x 1)

B597R107.WMF

B597R108.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS

B597 6 SM

1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS

Rear cover. (! 0)

[A]: Lower the original stopper by rotating

the pick-up motorOriginal feed unit (! 1.2)

[B]: Feed guide plate (! x 4, steppedscrew)

NOTE: Raise the original tray beforeyou re-install the paper feed guide.

Separation roller, torque limiter (# x 1) (! 1.7)

[C]: Bracket (! x 1," x 1)

[D]: Inverter sensor (! x 1)[E]: Original set sensor (" x 1)

1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HPSENSOR/PICK-UP HP SENSOR

Rear cover (! 0)

[A]: Pick-up motor (" x 1, ! x 2, Timingbelt)

[B]: Sensor bracket (" x 2, ! x 1)[C]: Pick-up HP sensor[D]: Original stopper HP sensor

B597R109.WMF

B597R114.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR

SM 7 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 71.10 TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR

Rear cover (! 0)

[A]: Pick-up roller assembly (# x 1, ! x 3," x 3)

[B]: Motor bracket (! x 3," x 2, Timing belt x 2)

[C]: Transport motor (! x 2, Spring x 1)[D]: Inverter motor (! x 2)

B597R113.WMF

B597R112.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH

B597 8 SM

1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLERCLUTCH

Rear cover (! 0)

[A]: Motor bracket (! x 5," x 1)

[B]: Feed motor (! x 2)

[C]: Clutch stopper (! x 1)

[D]: Skew correction roller clutch (" x 1)

B597R115.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


EXIT SENSOR

SM 9 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 71.12 EXIT SENSOR

Open the ARDF.

[A]: Pull the platen sheet off halfway.

[B]: Open the exit guide plate.[C]: Exit guide plate cover (! x 2)

[D]: Exit sensor (! x 1," x 1)

1.13 STAMP SOLENOID

Rear cover (! 0)

Open exit guide plate (! 1.12)

[A]: Exit guide plate cover (! x 1)

[B]: Stamp solenoid (! x 1," x 1)

1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD

Rear cover (! 0)

[A]: Controller board (! x 4, all")

B597R116.WMF

B597R201.WMF

B597R202.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


TIMING CHARTS

B597 10 SM

2. TROUBLESHOOTING

2.1 TIMING CHARTS

2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE0 500 0 500 2000

RXD

TXD

ON

OFF

CCW

OFFCW

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

CCW

OFF

OFF

ON

ONOFF

ON

OFF

Original Set Sensor

Pick-up Motor

Original Stopper H.P Sn.

Original Pick-up H.P Sn.

Feed Motor

Feed Clutch

Skew Correction Sn.

Interval Sn.

Registration Sn.

Transport Motor

DF Gate

Exit Sn.

Inverter Motor

1600 pps

1600 pps

6800 pps

4385 pps

3433 pps8268 pps

JAM1

JAM2

JAM3

JAM4

JAM5

JAM6 JAM7

(ms)

CCWOFFCW

3979 pps

1600 pps

1000 1500 0 500 20001000 1500

B597T900.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


TIMING CHARTS

SM 11 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 72.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE

0 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

Original Set Sensor

RXD

TXD

ON

OFF

CCW

OFF

CWON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

CCW

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

CW

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Pick-up Motor

Original Stopper H.P Sn.

Original Pick-up H.P Sn.

Feed Motor

Feed Clutch

Skew Correction Sn.

Interval Sn.

Transport Motor

Registration Sn.

DF Gate

Exit Sn.

Inverter Motor

Inverter Sol.

Inverter Sn.

1600 pps

1600 pps

6800 pps

4385 pps

3433 pps8268 pps

2322 pps

73 mm

5138 pps

JAM9

JAM8

CCW

OFF

CW

CCW

73 mm

3000 3500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

1600 pps

3979 pps

B597T901.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


JAM DETECTION

B597 12 SM

2.2 JAM DETECTION

1. Registration sensor

2. Interval sensor

3. Skew correction sensor

4. Inverter sensor

5. Exit sensor

6. Scanning position

Jam Site Cause

Original stopper HPsensor (Jam 1)

Original stopper home position could not be detected within 1000 msafter the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating counter-clockwise.

Pick-up HP sensor

(Jam 2)

Pick-up roller home position could not be detected within 1000 ms

after the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating clockwise.Skew correctionsensor jam (Jam 3)

The skew correction sensor does not turn on after the feed motorhas fed the original 185 mm.

Transport jam(Jam 4)

The interval sensor does not turn on after the feed motor has fed theoriginal 141 mm.

Registration sensor(Jam 5)

The registration sensor does not turn on after the interval sensorturned on and the original has been fed 117 mm.

Exit jam (Jam 6) The exit sensor does not turn on after the transport motor has fedthe original 124 mm.

Exit jam (Jam 7) The exit sensor does not turn off after the exit sensor turned on andthe original has been fed 294 mm.

Inverter sensor jam

(Jam 8)

The inverter sensor does not turn on after the inverter motor has fed

the original 100 mm.

Interval sensor jam(Jam 9)

The interval sensor does not turn on after the inverter motor has fedthe original 339 mm.

B597T905.WMF

1 2 3

456

8/12/2019 2238c


DIP SWITCHES

SM 13 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 73. SERVICE TABLES

3.1 DIP SWITCHES

DPS1011 2 3 4

Description

0 0 0 0 Normal operating mode, with/without stamp.

0 0 0 1 Not used

0 0 1 0 Not used

0 0 1 1 Not used

0 1 0 0 Feed motor rotation (pull-out mode) 6800 pps (1-2 phase)

0 1 0 1 Feed motor rotation (feed mode) 4385 pps (1-2 phase)

0 1 1 0 Transport motor rotation 8268 pps (2W1-2 phase)

0 1 1 1 Inverter motor rotation 7720 pps (1-2 phase)

1 0 0 0 Free run: one-sided original 100% (color mode)

1 0 0 1 Free run: one-sided original 200% (color mode)1 0 1 0 Free run: one-sided original 32% (color mode)

1 0 1 1 Free run: one-sided original 100% (b/w mode)

1 1 0 0 Free run: two-sided original 100% (color mode)

1 1 0 1 Free run: two-sided original 100% (b/w mode)

1 1 1 0 Free run: one-sided (fax mode) 48% (b/w mode)

1 1 1 1 Free run: one-sided (mixed original size mode) 100% (color mode)

3.2 TEST POINTS

No. Label Monitored Signal

TP100 (GND) Ground

TP101 (Vcc) +5V

TP103 (TXD) TXD to the copier

TP104 (RXD) RXD from the copier

3.3 FUSES

No. Function

FU101 Protects the 24 V line.

8/12/2019 2238c


MAIN COMPONENTS

B597 14 SM

4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS

1 Pick-up roller 10 Exit sensor

2 Original tray 11 Idle roller 3

3 Original length sensor 1 12 Idle roller 2

4 Original length sensor 2 13 Transport roller

5 Reverse table 14 Registration sensor

6 Inverter roller 15 Idle roller 1

7 Junction gate 16 Original width sensor

8 Separation roller 17 Skew correction roller

9 Exit roller 18 Feed belt

Pick-up Mechanism: Picks up the originals for scanning.

Feed/Separation Mechanism: Comprised of the feed belt and separation roller,feeds and separates the originals, and corrects skew.

Original Size Detection Sensors: Comprised of 4 width sensors and 2 lengthsensors, detect the sizes of the originals.

Original Transport Mechanism: Comprised of the transport roller, ADF exposureglass, and exit roller.

Original Reverse/Exit Mechanism: Exit/junction gate.

B597D103.WMF

1 2 3 4

56789101112

13

14

1516 17 18

8/12/2019 2238c


DRIVE LAYOUT

SM 15 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 74.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

1 Feed motor 7 Inverter roller

2 Feed belt 8 Exit roller

3 Pick-up roller 9 Separation roller

4 Pick-up motor 10 Transport roller

5 Transport motor 11 Skew correction roller

6 Inverter motor

B597D102.WMF

1

2 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

8/12/2019 2238c


ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

B597 16 SM

4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM

The original size is detected by four original width sensors [A] and two originallength sensors, [B] and [C].

The machine determines the original width when the leading edge of the original

activates the registration sensor.

The ARDF detects the original size by combining the readings of the four widthsensors and two length sensors, as shown in the table on the next page.

B597D110.WMF

[B] B5

[C] LG

[A]

"$% &

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 17 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 7

Width Sensor Length SensorSize (Width x Length)

& % $ B5 LG

A3 L*1 (297 x 420 mm) ON ON ON ON ON ON

B4 L (257 x 364 mm) ON ON - - ON ON

A4 L (210 x 297 mm) ON - - - ON -

A4 S*2 (297 x 210 mm) ON ON ON ON - -

B5 L (182 x 257 mm) - - - - ON -

B5 S (257 x 182 mm) ON ON - - - -

A5 L (148 x 210 mm) - - - - - -

A5 S (210 x 148 mm) ON - - - - -

B6 L (128 x 182 mm) - - - - - -

B6 S (182 x 128 mm) - - - - - -

DLT L (11" x 17") ON ON ON - ON ON

11" x 15" L ON ON ON - ON ON10" x 14" L ON ON - - ON ON

LG L (81/2" x 14") ON - - - ON ON

F4 L (81/2" x 13") ON - - - ON ON

F L (8" x 13") ON - - - ON ON

LT L (8.5" x 11") ON - - - ON -

LT S (11" x 8.5") ON ON ON - - -

71/4" x 101/2" L - - - - ON -

101/2" x 71/4" S ON ON ON - - -

8" x 10" L ON - - - ON -

HLT L 51/2" x 81/2" - - - - - -

HLT S 81/2" x 51/2" ON - - - - -

267 x 390 mm ON ON ON - ON ON

195 x 267 mm ON - - - ON -

267 x 195 mm ON ON ON - - -

*1 L: Lengthways

*2 S: Sideways

ON: Paper present

8/12/2019 2238c



B597 18 SM

4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE

This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original sizemode.

Because this ADF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for originaldocument width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, butthe document length detection method is different. Therefore, the scanning speedis slightly slower.

Document length detection

From when the registration sensor switches on until the interval sensor switchesoff, the CPU counts the transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determinesthe length of the original.

Feed-in cycle

When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, theimage cannot be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until thedocument length has been accurately detected. The length must be determinedbefore the image is scanned.

Auto Reduce/Enlarge

Centering

Erase Center/Border

BookletImage Repeat

An original follows this path during transport:

1. Document length detection! Scanning glass! Inverter table

2. Inverter table! Scanning glass! Inverter table (restores original order)

3. Inverter table! Scanning glass (image scanned)! Exit tray

Normal feed-in

In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the rate ofreduction/enlargement has been determined, the originals are scanned normally. Inorder to store the scanned images, a large area of memory (the detected documentwidth x 432 mm) is prepared. Next, only the portion of the image up to the detecteddocument length is read from memory and printed.

8/12/2019 2238c


ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM

SM 19 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 74.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM

4.4.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

When the original is put on the original table, it contacts the original stopper [A] andpushes the actuator [B] out of the original set sensor [C].

When Start" is pressed, the pick-up motor [D] turns on and the original stopper

cam [E] rotates. The original stopper lowers and releases the original.

Next, the pick-up roller cam [F] lowers the pick-up roller, and then the feed motor[G (at this location but not shown in the drawing)] turns on to feed the top sheet ofpaper. After being fed from the pick-up roller, the top sheet is separated from thestack by the separation roller [H] and the feed belt [I].

B597D109.WMF

B597D505.WMF[H]

[I]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F][G]

8/12/2019 2238c


ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM

B597 20 SM

4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION

This mechanism is the same as the skew correction used by the registration rollerin the main machine.

The feed motor and the skew correction clutch control the skew correction roller.Immediately after separation, the skew correction sensor [A] detects the leadingedge of the original. The feed belt [B] moves the paper slightly until it pressesagainst the skew correction roller [C] and buckles slightly to correct any skew.

4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES

After performing skew correction, the feed motor runs at a speed higher than itsoriginal speed in order for the next original to catch up to the one ahead of it. Thisreduces the gap between the leading edge of the next original with the trailing edgeof the one ahead.

When the leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [A], the feedmotor slows to match the speed of paper transport.

B597D202.WMF

B597D303.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

SM 21 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 74.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS

The transport motor drives the transport roller [A] and the exit roller [B]. When theleading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [C], the transport motorrotates the transport roller. The transport roller then feeds the original throughscanning area. After scanning, the original is fed out by the exit roller to the exittray.

B597D104.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

B597 22 SM

4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS

Shortly after the transport motor has beenturned on, the inverter solenoid is

activated and junction gate [A] opens. Theoriginal is then scanned and transportedtowards the reverse table [B].

Shortly after the original exit sensor [C]detects the trailing edge of the original, theinverter solenoid turns off and the junction

gate [D] closes.Next, the inverter motor turns on and theinverter roller [E] starts rotating to feed theoriginal from the reverse table.

Then the original is fed to the transport rollerand the scanning area [F] (where thereverse side is scanned).

After scanning the reverse side of the original,the original is then sent to the reverse table[G] a second time and turned over. Thisensures that the double-sided original will beproperly stacked in the correct order, front

side down, in the original exit tray [H].

B597D105.WMF

B597D107.WMF

B597D106.WMF

B597D108.WMF

[E]

[A]

[B]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[C][D]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAMP

SM 23 B597

A

u t o R e v e r s e

D o c u m e n t

F

e e d e r B 5 9 74.6 STAMP

NOTE: This function is only for fax mode.

The stamp [A] is located between the transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C].

When the original reaches the stamp, the transport motor stops and the stampsolenoid turns on if the page is sent successfully (immediate transmission) or

stored successfully (memory transmission). After stamping, the ARDF feed motorre-starts to feed out the document.

NOTE: The position of the stamp can be adjusted with the Stamp Position Adjustment SP mode.

B597D201.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

B601

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM i B601

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................11.1 COVER REPLACEMENT.............................................................................11.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ...........................................................................2

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 21.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................31.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .....................................................................................41.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ...............................................................................41.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................62.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................6

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 62.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................... 72.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ..................................................................................8

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


COVER REPLACEMENT

SM 1 B601

O n e - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t

B 6 0 1


1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT

1. Rear cover [A] (! x 2)

B601R102.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


ROLLER REPLACEMENT

B601 2 SM

1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS

1. Paper tray

2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)

3. Paper Feed Roller [B] (" x 1)

4. Separation Roller [C] (" x 1)

B601R101.WMF

[B]

[C][A]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD

SM 3 B601

O n e - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t

B 6 0 1

1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD

1. Rear cover (! 1.1)

2. Paper feed motor [A] (# x 1, ! x 3)

3. Main board [B] (!

x 2)

B601R103.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRAY LIFT MOTOR

B601 4 SM

1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR


2. Tray lift motor [A] (#

x 1,!

x 2)

1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH


2. Bracket [B] (! x 1)

3. Bushing

4. Paper feed clutch [C]

B601R104.WMF

B601R105.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

SM 5 B601

O n e - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t

B 6 0 1

1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

1. Right cover [A]

2. Paper feed unit [B] (! x 2,# x 1)

B601R106.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

B601 6 SM


2.1 OVERVIEW

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Pick-up Roller

2. Paper Feed Roller

3. Relay Roller

4. Separation Roller5. Tray

B601D001.WMF

5

1 2

3

4

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

SM 7 B601

O n e - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t

B 6 0 1

2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Paper Size Switch 1




5. Main Board

6. Paper Feed Motor

7. Paper End Sensor

8. Lift Sensor

9. Paper Feed Clutch

10. Vertical Guide Switch

11. Tray Lift Motor

12. Relay Sensor

13. Paper Height 2 Sensor

14. Paper Height 1 Sensor

B601D101.WMF

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

14

13

1 2 3 4

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

B601 8 SM

2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Paper Feed Motor



4. Separation Roller

5. Pick-up Roller

B601D102.WMF

1

4

2

3

5

8/12/2019 2238c


TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

B598

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM i B598

TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................11.1 COVER REPLACEMENT.............................................................................11.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ...........................................................................2

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 21.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................31.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS...................................................................................41.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES........................................................................... 41.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................6

2.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................62.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 62.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................... 72.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ..................................................................................8

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


COVER REPLACEMENT

SM 1 B598

T w o - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t B 5 9 8


1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT


B598R102.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


ROLLER REPLACEMENT

B598 2 SM

1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS

1. Paper tray

2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)3. Paper Feed Roller [B] (" x 1)

4. Separation Roller [C] (" x 1)

B598R101.WMF

[B]

[C][A]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD

SM 3 B598

T w o - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t B 5 9 8

1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD


2. Paper feed motor [A] (#

x 1,!

x 3)3. Main board [B] (! x 2)

B598R103.WMF

[B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRAY LIFT MOTORS

B598 4 SM

1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS


2. Tray lift motor [A] (#

x 1,!

x 2)

1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES


2. Paper feed clutches [A] (! x 1, 1bracket, 1 bushing)

B598R104.WMF

B598R105.WMF

[A]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

SM 5 B598

T w o - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t B 5 9 8

1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

1. Vertical transport cover [A] (1 hook)

2. Paper feed unit [B] (! x 2,# x 1)

B598R108.WMF

B598R107.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

B598 6 SM


2.1 OVERVIEW


1. Upper Pick-up Roller

2. Upper Paper Feed Roller

3. Upper Relay Roller

4. Upper Separation Roller

5. Lower Relay Roller

6. Lower Paper Feed Roller

7. Lower Separation Roller

8. Lower Pick-up Roller

9. Lower Tray

10. Upper Tray

B598D001.WMF

10

9

8

5

6

7

4

3

21

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

SM 7 B598

T w o - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t B 5 9 8






5. Main Board

6. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor

7. Paper Feed Motor8. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor

9. Upper Lift Sensor

10. Upper Paper Feed Clutch

11. Upper Paper End Sensor

12. Upper Tray Lift Motor

13. Lower Paper Feed Clutch


15. Lower Lift Sensor

16. Lower Tray Lift Motor

17. Lower Paper End Sensor

18. Lower Relay Sensor

19. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor

20. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor21. Upper Relay Sensor





B598D101.WMF

12

3 45

67

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

1819

20

21

22

24

23

25

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

B598 8 SM

2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Tray Motor

2. Upper Paper Feed Clutch

3. Lower Paper Feed Clutch

4. Lower Relay Roller

5. Lower Separation Roller

6. Lower Paper Feed Roller

7. Lower Pick-up Roller

8. Upper Separation Roller

9. Upper Relay Roller

10. Upper Paper Feed Roller

11. Upper Pick-up Roller

B598D102.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM i B600

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 11.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME....................................11.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ........................................................................11.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE.......................................................... 21.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR ............................................................31.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .....................................................................................41.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH..................................51.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ...............................................................................61.8 PAPER FEED UNIT...................................................................................... 71.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS.........8

1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER ...................................... 9

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 102.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................10

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................ 102.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................. 11

2.2 PAPER FEED.............................................................................................122.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE .................... 132.4 TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................. 142.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION...................................................................152.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM............................................. 162.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION................................................... 17

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME

SM 1 B600

L a r g e

C a p a c i t y T r a y

B 6

0 0


1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME

1. To draw the tray out, press thestopper [A] on the guide rail.

2. To install the tray, set the tray on theguide rails, keep the tray level, andpush the tray in.

1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR

1. Pull out the large capacity tray.

2. Left tray rear side fence [A] (! x 2)

3. Rear fence bracket [B] (! x 1)4. Connector of the rear fence HP

sensor [C]

5. Rear fence HP sensor [D] (! x 1)

B600R101.WMF

B600R102.WMF

[A]

[C][B]

[A][D]

8/12/2019 2238c


CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE

B600 2 SM

1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE

1. Screws [A] [B]

2. Change the position of the side fences.

3. Change the position of the rear fence HP sensor (! 1.2).

4. Before securing the right tray side fence, load the paper in the right tray, andadjust the fence.

B600R103.WMF

[A]

[B]

A4

Lt

A4

Lt

8/12/2019 2238c


LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR

SM 3 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR

1. Pull out the large capacity tray.

2. Left tray side fence [A] (! x 2)

3. Rear fence bracket [B] (! x1)

4. Left tray paper end sensor [C] (" x 1)

B600R104.WMF

[C]

[B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRAY LIFT MOTOR

B600 4 SM

1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR


2. Tray lift motor [B] (! x 3," x 1)

B600R105.WMF

B600R106.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH

SM 5 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH


2. Tray motor [A] (! x 6," x 1)


4. Stack transport clutch [C] (! x 2, 2 bushings, 1 gear)

B600R107.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED CLUTCH

B600 6 SM

1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH


2. Bracket [A] (! x 1)

3. Bushing

4. Paper feed clutch [B]

B600R108.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED UNIT

SM 7 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT

1. Stack transport clutch (! 1.6)

2. Paper feed clutch (! 1.7)

3. Paper feed unit cable [A]

4. Open the vertical transport guide plate [B].

5. Paper feed unit [C] (! x 2)

B600R109.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS

B600 8 SM

1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, ANDRELAY SENSORS

1. Paper feed unit (! 1.8)2. Sensors

• Upper limit [A]

• Relay [B] (! x 1, 1 bracket)

• Right tray paper end [C]

NOTE: To remove the upper limit [A] or paper end sensor[C], press the lever [D]and hold it down.

B600R111.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER

SM 9 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Paper tray unit

2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)3. Separation roller [B] (# x 1)

4. Feed roller [C] (# x 1)

NOTE: If the rollers are incorrectly installed, the one-way clutch does not work.

B600R110.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

B600 10 SM


2.1 OVERVIEW


1. Paper Height Sensors 5



4. Pick-up Roller

5. Upper Limit Sensor


7. Relay Sensor

8. Relay Roller

9. Separation Roller



12. Lower Limit Sensor

13. Left Paper End Sensor

B600D001.WMF

1 2 4 5 6 7 8

9

3

10

11

1213

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

SM 11 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0


1. End Fence Home Position Sensor

2. Left Tray Paper End Sensor

3. Paper Height Sensor 4


5. Paper Size Sensor

6. Main Board

7. Side Fence Open/Closed Sensor

8. Tray Sensor

9. Tray Motor


11. Upper Limit Sensor



14. Right Tray Paper End Sensor



17. Lower Limit Sensor

18. Tray Lift Motor

19. Relay Sensor

20. Stack Transport Clutch

B600D101.WMF

4

1

23

9

10

11

12

13

17

1920

15

16

14

5 6 78

18

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER FEED

B600 12 SM

2.2 PAPER FEED

• This product uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism.

• The paper feed unit consists of the pick-up roller [A], paper feed roller [B],separation roller [C], and relay roller.

• There is a torque limiter (ferrite powder type) in the back of the separation roller.

B600D102.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE

SM 13 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLERRELEASE

To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, theseparation and pickup rollers are set so that they release automatically.

When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is awayfrom the paper feed roller [C] and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position.

When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. Thiscauses the pick-up roller to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper andthe separation roller to move up and contact the paper feed roller.

B600D108.WMF

B600D107.WMF

[E]

[D]

[A]

[A]

[C]

[B]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRAY LIFT

B600 14 SM

2.4 TRAY LIFT

When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray sensor on the back faceturns on and the tray lift motor [A] starts. The base plate lift shaft [B] is coupled tothe lift motor at shaft [C], so the base plate of the tray is lifted. After a short while,the top of the paper stack contacts the pick-up roller and lifts it up.

When this occurs, the actuator enters the upper limit sensor, the sensor turns offand the lift motor stops. When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller isgradually lowered, and the actuator leaves the upper limit sensor (turning thesensor on). When this happens, the lift motor begins turning again. The tray willthen be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit sensor (turning the sensor offagain).

When the tray is removed from the printer, the coupling between the lift motor andbase plate lift shaft is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free fall(using a damper [D] to slow the fall and prevent damage).

B600D103.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][D]

[E][G]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


NEAR END/END DETECTION

SM 15 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION

This tray holds two stacks of paper, so the machine needs to monitor the status ofboth these stacks. There are seven sensors to do this.

In the right tray (paper feed side), three height sensors ([E] in the diagram on theprevious page) measure the height of the stack, and an end sensor detects whenall the paper is used up. As the amount of paper remaining in the tray decreases,the base plate rises and the actuator activates the paper height sensors. Whenpaper runs out in the right tray, the stack in the left tray is moved across to the righttray.

There are also two height sensors ([F] in the diagram on the previous page) and anend sensor in the left tray (paper storage side) ([G] in the diagram on the previouspage). When there is no paper in both trays, paper end is detected.

The machine determines the amount of remaining paper based on the sensoroutputs, as shown in the following table.

Amount of paper

100% 75% 50%

Paper Height Sensor 1 " " " " " " $ " "

Paper Height Sensor 2 " " " " " $ – " $

Paper Height Sensor 3 " " $ " " – – $ –

Right Tray Paper End Sensor $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $

Paper Height Sensor 4 " " " $ $ " " " "

Paper Height Sensor 5 " $ " $ $ " " $ $

Left Tray Paper End Sensor " " " " $ " " " "

Amount of paper25% Near-end End

Paper Height Sensor 1 $ " " " " $ $ –

Paper Height Sensor 2 – " $ " $ – – –

Paper Height Sensor 3 – $ – $ – – – –

Right Tray Paper End Sensor $ $ $ $ $ $ $ "

Paper Height Sensor 4 " $ $ $ $ $ $ $

Paper Height Sensor 5 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $

Left Tray Paper End Sensor " " " $ $ " $ $

Right tray paper end sensor: " = Low (no paper), $ = High (paper present)Other sensors: " = Low (paper present), $ = High (no paper)

The following diagram is the sensor layout, as viewed from the front.

Paper Storage Side Paper Feed Side

Paper Height

Sensor 5

Paper Height

Sensor 4

Paper End

Sensor 2

Paper Height

Sensor 3

Paper Height

Sensor2

Paper Height

Sensor 1

Paper End

Sensor 1

B600D112.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM

B600 16 SM

2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM

When the paper in the right tray is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack transportclutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from the left

tray to the right tray.While the stack is being moved, it pushes the side fence aside, and the side fenceopen/closed sensor [D] detects that the fence is open.

After the stack has been moved across, a spring in the side fence moves the sidefence back, and the sensor detects that the fence is closed. Then, the tray motorreverses until end fence home position sensor [E] is deactivated.

B600D104.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E]

8/12/2019 2238c


RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION

SM 17 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION

The paper end sensor [A] detects when copy paper in the right tray runs out.

When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the paper end feeler [B] andcauses the actuator to enter the sensor. When paper runs out, the feeler drops andthe actuator leaves the sensor, and the machine detects that there is no paper inthe tray.

When the tray is being pulled out, the lever [E] lifts the pick-up roller and this alsolifts up the feeler.

B600D106.WMF

B600D111.WMF

[D][E]

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


TWO-TRAY FINISHERB599

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM i B599

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 11.1 COVERS ......................................................................................................1

1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS..........................................................................11.1.2 INNER COVER....................................................................................1

1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................................... 21.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR................................................................................21.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR .................31.5 STAPLER TRAY........................................................................................... 31.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ....... 41.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR....................................................................... 5

1.8 LIFT MOTORS .............................................................................................51.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR ...............................................................................71.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS.........................................................81.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR........................................................81.12 STAPLER UNIT..........................................................................................81.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR..........................................................91.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR.....................................................................................9

1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS..............................................................................91.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR............. 101.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR ..................................................................101.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH........................................................10

1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD .........................................................................111.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT............................................... 11

2. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 122.1 JAM DETECTION.......................................................................................12

3. SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 133.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS............................................................................ 133.2 TEST POINTS............................................................................................133.3 FUSES........................................................................................................13

. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS........................................................... 144.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ...................................................................................144.2 DRIVE LAYOUT .........................................................................................154.3 JUNCTION GATES ....................................................................................164.4 TRAY SHIFTING ........................................................................................17

4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS............................................................. 17Tray 1 (Upper Tray) ...............................................................................17Tray 2 (Lower Tray) ...............................................................................18

4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ..............................................................194.5.1 TRAY 1 ..............................................................................................19

Introduction ............................................................................................19

8/12/2019 2238c


B599 ii SM

Normal and sort/stack modes ................................................................19Staple Mode...........................................................................................20Tray 1 release mechanism.....................................................................21

4.5.2 TRAY 2 ..............................................................................................22

4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM ...............................................................234.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 24Vertical Paper Alignment .......................................................................24Horizontal Paper Alignment ...................................................................24

4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM ............................................................................254.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT..................................................................... 25

Stapler Rotation .....................................................................................25Side-to-Side Movement .........................................................................25

4.7.2 STAPLER ..........................................................................................264.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT......................................................... 27

4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................28

4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ...........................................................284.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ........................................................29

8/12/2019 2238c


COVERS

SM 1 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9


1.1 COVERS

1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS

1. Top cover [A] (! x 4)NOTE: If the shift tray below is

blocking the screw hole,remove the shift tray.


3. Front door [C]

4. Rear cover [D] (! x 4)

5. Right cover [E] (! x 2)

1.1.2 INNER COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNALCOVERS)

2. Inner cover [A] (! x 3, tabs [B] x 3)

B599R151.WMF

B599R102.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]

[B]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


POSITIONING ROLLER

B599 2 SM

1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

1. Open the front door.

2. Positioning roller [A] ("

x 1)3. Belt [B]

1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR

1. Top cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS)

2. Open transport door [A]

3. Bracket [B] (! x 1, (# x 1)

4. Tray 1 exit sensor [C]

B599R103.WMF

B599R104.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B][C]

8/12/2019 2238c


ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR

SM 3 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCESENSOR

1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] (! x 1,# x 1)

2. Entrance sensor [B] (! x 1)

3. Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket [C] (! x

1,# x 1)

4. Stapler tray entrance sensor [D]

1.5 STAPLER TRAY

1. External covers, front door, inner cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS, 1.1.2INNER COVER)

2. Two clamps [A]

3. Harnesses [B] (# x 8)

4. Stapler tray [C] (! x 2 [D], ! x 2 [E])NOTE: At the front of the finisher, pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out.

B599R105.WMF

B599R106.WMF B599R107.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[C]

[E]

[A]

[B]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH

B599 4 SM

1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPERLIMIT SWITCH

1. External covers (! 1.1.1)

2. Place one hand under tray 2 (the lower tray), press in on the gear [A] to releasethe tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.

3. Place one hand under tray 1 (the upper tray), press in on the gear [B] to releasethe tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.

4. Tray 1 back fence [C] (! x 4)

5. Sensor stay [D] (! x 2, (# x 4)

6. Plastic bracket [E] (! x 1)

7. Stack height sensors [F]

8. Metal bracket [G] (! x 1)

9. Upper limit switch [H]

B599R201.WMF

B599R109.WMF

B599R110.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]

8/12/2019 2238c


EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR

SM 5 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR

1. Tray 1 back fence (! 1.6)

2. Exit guide plate motor [A] (!

x2,#

x1)NOTE: Disengage the shaft of the exit

guide plate motor from thering.

1.8 LIFT MOTORS

1. Top cover and rear cover (! 1.1.1)

2. Tray 1 back fence [A] (! 1.6)

3. Sensor stay [B] (! x 4)

B599R111.WMF

B599R203.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


LIFT MOTORS

B599 6 SM

4. Motor bracket [C] (! x 3,# x 2)

5. Tray 1 lift motor [D] (! x 2, drive belt)

6. Tray 2 lift motor [E] (! x 2, drive belt)

B599R204.WMF

B599R205.WMF

[C]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


LOWER EXIT SENSOR

SM 7 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR

1. Front door, external and internalcovers. (! 1.1)

2. Exit guide plate motor (! 1.7)

3. Guide plate [A] (" x 1)NOTE: Pull the shaft toward you

through the round hole.

4. Guide plate exit assembly [B] (# x 1," x 1)

5. Anti-static brush [C] (! x 2)

6. Bracket guide exit [D] (! x 2)

7. Lower exit sensor [E] (! x 1,# x 1)

B599R112.WMF

B599R113.WMF

B599R114.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS

B599 8 SM

1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS

1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)

2. Sensor bracket [A] (! x 1,# x 2)


4. Feeler [C]

5. Lower stack height sensors [D]

1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR

1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)

2. Sensor bracket [A] (! x 1,# x 1)

3. Tray 2 shunt position sensor [B] (! x1)

1.12 STAPLER UNIT

1. Open the front door

2. Stapler unit [A] (! x 1,# x 2)NOTE: Hold the stapler holder [B] with

one hand as you remove thestapler. Do not twist or rotatethe stapler bracket as youremove it.

B599R116.WMF

B599R202.WMF

B599R117.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B] [C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR

SM 9 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR

1. Stapler unit (! 1.12)

2. Carefully rotate the stapler holder [A].

3. Stapler cover [B] (! x 1)

4. Sensor bracket [C] (! x 1,# x 1)

5. Stapler rotation HP sensor [D]

1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR

1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS

1. Tray 1 [A] (! x 1)

2. Rear tray cover [B] (! x 1)

3. Front tray cover [C] (! x 1)

4. Bottom tray cover [D] (! x 2)

5. Bottom bracket [E] (! x 3)

B599R118.WMF

B599R207.WMF

B599R208.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRAY 1 INTERIOR

B599 10 SM

1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)

2. Gear disk [A] (" x 1)

3. Tray shift sensors [B] (# x 1 each).

4. Tray release sensor [C] (# x 1)

1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)

2. Motor bracket [A] (! x 3,# x 1)

3. Tray 1 shift motor [B] (! x 3, belt x 1)

1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)

2. Back fence lock clutch [A] (" x 1,# x1)

B599R210.WMF

B599R209.WMF

B599R211.WMF

[A][C]

[A]

[B]

[B]

[B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


FINISHER MAIN BOARD

SM 11 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD

1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)

2. Main PCB [A] (!

x 6, All#

)

1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use theappropriate SP mode.

To adjust the horizontal position of the holes, use the spacers provided with thepunch unit.

1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)

2. Punch unit [A] (! x 3,# x 5)

3. Spacers [B]

The punch position can be adjustedby up to 4 mm using combinationsof the 3 spacers provided with thefinisher.

B599R206.WMF

B599R119.WMF

[A][B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


JAM DETECTION

B599 12 SM

2. TROUBLESHOOTING

2.1 JAM DETECTION

ModeShift 1 Shift 2 Staple

Jam Content

! ! ! Entrance sensor:no detection

After the exit sensor in the main machinewent off, the entrance sensor did not switchon for at least 2 s.

! ! ! Entrance sensor:no detection

After the entrance sensor switched on, it didnot remain on for at least 150 ms.*

1

! Upper exit sensor:no detection

After the entrance sensor switched on, theupper exit sensor did not remain on for atleast 59 pulses. *

2

! Upper exit sensor: jam

After the upper exit sensor switched on, itdid not switch off within 150 ms. *1

! Lower exit sensor:no detection

After the entrance sensor switched on, thelower exit sensor did not switch on within 59pulses. *2

! Lower exit sensor: jam

After the lower exit sensor switched on, it didnot switch off within 150 ms. *

1

! Stapler trayentrance sensor:no detection

After the entrance sensor switched off, thestapler tray entrance sensor did not switchon within 102 pulses.*

2

! Stapler trayentrance sensor: jam

After the stapler tray entrance sensorswitched on, it did not switch off within 59pulses.*1

! Lower tray exitsensor: nodetection

After the transport motor switched on, thelower tray exit sensor did not switch onwithin 1260 ms.

*1: Timing for A4 L (differs according to paper size).

*2: Counted by entrance motor pulses because timing differs for feed out.

8/12/2019 2238c


DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

SM 13 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

3. SERVICE TABLES

3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those describedin the table below.

DPS101

1 2 3 4Mode Description

0 0 0 0 Default.

1 1 1 0 Free run. No paper.

0 0 0 1 Transportation See the note below.

NOTE: The following procedure repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.1) Make sure that the main switch is turned off.

2) Turn on DIP SW101-4 on the main board.3) Turn on the main switch.4) After the fisher completes the initialization, turn off DIP SW101-4.

Finisher automatically repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.

3.2 TEST POINTS

No. Label Monitored Signal

TP101 GND Ground

TP102 5 V 5 VTP103 RXD Received command data

TP104 TXD Transmitted command data

3.3 FUSES

No. Function

FU101 Protects 24 V.

8/12/2019 2238c


GENERAL LAYOUT

B599 14 SM


4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT

1. Upper junction gate

2. Punch unit (option)

3. Stapler junction gate

4. Pre-stack tray

5. Stapler

6. Stapler tray

7. Tray 2

8. Tray 1

Tray junction gate: Directs paper either to the upper or lower exit. In staple mode,the stack always goes out to the lower exit.

Stapler junction gate: Directs paper either to the lower exit or to the stapler tray.

Pre-stack tray: When stapling multiple prints (A4 LEF, LT LEF, B5 LEF only) in thestaple mode, the first sheet of the second print waits here for the next sheet to feedwhile the previous stack is stapled. After the second print is fed, the first andsecond sheets are fed together to the pre-stack tray. This delay allows enough timefor the previous stack to be stapled without interrupting paper feed.

Shift trays: Tray 1 (upper) and tray 2 (lower) shift side to side in the sort mode,and raise and lower to receive ejected prints.

Stapler tray jogger: Employs positioning rollers and jogger fences to align stacksfor stapling.

Punch unit: Punches holes in stacked prints.

B599D118.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


JUNCTION GATES

B599 16 SM

4.3 JUNCTION GATES

The two junction gates can direct paper to three destinations.

In sort/stack mode for tray 1, the tray junctionsolenoid [A] is on, and the prints go to the upper exit(tray 1 is at the upper exit for sort/stack mode).

In sort/stack mode for tray 2, both the tray junction gatesolenoid [A] and stapler junction gate solenoid [B] areoff, and prints go to the lower exit.

In staple mode, the tray junction solenoid [A] is off andthe stapler junction gate solenoid [B] is on, and prints goto the stapler tray.

B599D205.WMF

B599D206.WMF

B599D207.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRAY SHIFTING

SM 17 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.4 TRAY SHIFTING

4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS

Tray 1 (Upper Tray)

In sort/stack mode, tray 1 [A] moves from side to side to separate the printed sets.The tray 1 shift motor [B], inside the shift tray, controls the horizontal position oftray 1 through the timing belt [C] and gear disk [D].

After one print set is delivered to tray 1, the shift motor turns on, driving the geardisk and the arm [E], and the tray drive unit moves to one side.

Two shift sensors [F] detect when to stop this side-to-side movement. There is acut-out in the gear disk. The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shiftsensors detects the cut-out. Then the shift tray stops.

The next set of prints is then delivered, and the gear disk is turned in the opposite

direction until the other shift sensor is activated.

B599D106.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

[D] [E]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRAY SHIFTING

B599 18 SM

Tray 2 (Lower Tray)

In sort/stack mode, tray 2 [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of prints.

The shift mechanism for tray 2 is similar to that used for tray 1. However, when thetray 2 shift motor [B] turns on, the arm [D] moves the entire end fence [C] from sideto side (not just the tray).

After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees, the cut-out in the gear disk enters thetray half-turn sensor [E], and the motor stops. When the next set of prints isdelivered, the motor turns on again, and moves the tray back to its previousposition.

B599D105.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

SM 19 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

4.5.1 TRAY 1

Introduction

The tray 1 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 1 [B] through gears andtiming belts [C].

Normal and sort/stack modes

When the main switch is turned on, the tray is initialized at the upper position. Todo this, the tray is moved up until upper stack height sensor 1 [D] is de-actuated.

During printing, if upper stack height sensor 2 [E] is actuated, the tray 1 lift motorlowers the tray for a specified time.

When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator [F] will pass through the tray 1overflow 1 sensor [G]. When the actuator drops below the sensor (to deactivate thesensor), the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded theoverflow limit.

The upper limit switch for tray 1 [H] prevents the drive gear from being damaged ifthe upper stack height sensor 1 should fail. If the tray is raised to the traypositioning roller [I], the switch will automatically cut the power to the tray 1 liftmotor.

B599D204.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E]

[G]

[F]

[H]

[I]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c



B599 20 SM

Staple Mode

In staple mode, stapled stacks can be delivered to either tray, but they can only goto the lower exit. So, if tray 1 is selected, tray 1 [A] moves down to the lower paperexit.

Tray 1 lowers until the actuator [B] enters the tray 1 lower limit sensor [C]. Tray 1then lifts up until lower stack height sensor 1 [D] is activated.

When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit, tray 2 must be moved down out ofthe way. So, tray 2 [E] is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor [F]detects tray 2 (or the top of the paper stack in tray 2).

The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area.

When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2sensor [G]. When this happens, the machine detects that the paper stack heighthas exceeded the overflow limit.

B599D204.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[G]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 21 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

Tray 1 release mechanism

When tray 1 is selected for staple mode, tray1 must be moved down to the lower paperexit. However, to move past the sensors atthe lower exit, the tray must be moved awayfrom the finisher.

To do this, the tray 1 shift motor turns untilthe cut-out in the gear disk enters the trayrelease sensor [A]. At this time, the arm [B]has reached position [C], and is pushingagainst the plate [D], in towards the finisher.However, the plate is fixed, so the traymoves out away from the finisher.

Then, the tray 1 shift motor stops, then thetray 1 lift motor lowers tray 1.

When the tray 1 lower limit sensor isactivated (as described on the previouspage), the tray has moved past the sensorsat the lower exit. The tray 1 shift motor turnson again until the gear disk activates thetray shift sensor [E]. This moves the trayback against the finisher.

Next, tray 1 lifts until the finisher detects thatthe tray is at the correct height.

When tray 1 is at the lower exit, the tray locksolenoid [F] is on, and the lever [G] locks thetray. This prevents the user from moving thetray out of position (the first tray has some

play when it is at the lower position).

Before tray 1 goes back to the upper exitarea, the tray lock solenoid [F] turns off tounlock the tray. In addition, the back fencelock clutch [H] turns on to hold the backfence [I]. This prevents the springs insidethe back fence from suddenly contracting(these springs normally keep the tray steadyduring side-to-side shift).

Then, tray 1 is released and it moves up to

the upper exit area.

B599D201.WMF

B599D202.WMF

B599D203.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[F]

[H]

[I]

[D]

[G]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c



B599 22 SM

4.5.2 TRAY 2

The tray 2 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 2 [B] through gears andtiming belts [C].

The paper height detection is the same as for tray 1.

When the tray lowers during printing, the tray is judged to be overflowing when thetray 2 overflow sensor 1 [D] is off and the tray 2 overflow sensor-2 [F] is on (see‘Normal Mode’ in the above diagram).

In the multi-tray staple mode (selected by the service technician), the machinedetects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when theactuator [E] enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor [D].

The lower limit sensor [G] for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit andstops the tray 2 lift motor.

The function of the tray 2 upper limit switch [H] is the same as for tray 1.

B599D109.WMF

Normal ModeMulti Tray Staple Mode

Overflow condition

B599D500.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[G]

[D]

[E]

[F] [C]

[H]

[D]

[E]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 23 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM

NOTE: This feature is available only when using A4 L, LT L, and B5 L.

During stapling, the main machine must wait. This mechanism reduces the wait byholding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. Itonly works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set print job.

The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] switches on after the first sheet activatesthe entrance sensor. This directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray [B].

The pre-stack feed roller [C] stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of thepaper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leavingthe pre-stack tray.

At the same time, the pre-stack junction gate solenoid switches off, and the secondsheet is sent to the paper guide [D]. The pre-stack feed roller (controlled by thepre-stack motor) starts to rotate again for a specified time after the trailing edge ofthe second page has been passed through the entrance sensor, and then bothsheets are sent to the stapler tray together.

B599D200.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM

B599 24 SM

4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM

In staple mode, each sheet of print paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when

it arrives in the stapler tray.

Vertical Paper Alignment

After the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor [A], thepositioning roller solenoid [B] is energized for a specified time to push thepositioning roller [C] into contact with the paper.

The positioning roller rotates to push the paper back and align the trailing edge ofthe paper against the stack stopper [D].

Horizontal Paper Alignment

When the start key is pressed, the jogger motor [E] turns on and the jogger fences[F] move to the waiting position, which is 8 mm wider on both sides than theselected paper.

When the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor, the jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fences 5 mm towards the paper. After ashort time, the jogger motor turns on again for the horizontal paper alignment thenreturns to the waiting position.

B599D110.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER MECHANISM

SM 25 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM

4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT

The stapler can be moved from side to side or rotated according to the

requirements of the selected stapling mode.

Stapler Rotation

After the start key is pressed, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the staple unit[B] until the stapler rotation HP sensor [C] is activated. Then, the stapler movesfrom front to rear of the finisher.

When oblique stapling at one position has been selected, after the stapler moves tothe stapling position, the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler 45 degrees(clockwise) at the stapling position before the stapler fires.

Side-to-Side Movement

The stapler motor [D] moves the stapler from side to side. After the start key ispressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.

The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined bythe size of the selected paper. If the two-staple mode is selected, the staplermoves to the front stapling position first, and then moves to the rear staplingposition. However, for the next print set, it staples in the reverse order.

After the stapling job is finished, the stapler returns to its home position,

determined by the stapler HP sensor [E].

B599D112.WMF

B599D113.WMF

[D]

[B][E]

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER MECHANISM

B599 26 SM

4.7.2 STAPLER

The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A] inside the stapler.

As soon as the paper stack is aligned, the staple hammer motor starts. Whenstapling is finished, the staple hammer HP sensor [B] is turned on, and the staplehammer motor then stops.

The staple end sensor [C] detects the staple end condition and whether the staple

cartridge is installed or not. If a stapler cassette is not installed, or after the staplercassette runs out of staples, a message is displayed in the operation panel. If thiscondition is detected during a print job, the indicator will appear, but the print jobwill not stop.

The staple position sensor [D] detects if there is a staple sheet at the staplingposition. After a new staple cartridge is installed, the staple hammer motor turns onto transfer the staple sheet until the staple position sensor is activated by the staplesheet.

If a staple jam occurs and overloads the motor, this causes a staple jam messageto appear on the operation panel.

B599D208.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER MECHANISM

SM 27 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT

When stapling starts, the exit guide plate motor [A] switches on and opens the exitguide plate [B], so that the stapled stack can exit to the tray. The exit guide platesensor [C] detects when to switch off the exit guide plate motor.

After the prints have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [D] starts. The pawl [E]on the stack feed out belt [F] lifts the stapled set and feeds it to the tray [G].

The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints havestarted to feed out. Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed-out. The stackfeed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt homeposition sensor [H].

When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit, the exit guidesafety switch [I] cuts power to the tray lift motor if the guide is opened too far. Thisprevents damage to the user’s fingers if they are inside the lower exit when the trayis moving up.

B599D115.WMF

B599D114.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[C][I]

[H]

8/12/2019 2238c


PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

B599 28 SM

4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit isprovided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching.

4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

The punch drive mechanism is driven by the punch motor [A]. Each sheet ispositioned and punched by pressure from above. A certain time after the trailingedge of the paper passes through the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motorturns on and the paper stops. Then the punch clutch [C] turns on to make thepunch holes.

The home position is detected by the punch HP sensor [D]. When the cut-out in thepunch shaft disk [E] enters the punch HP sensor, the punch clutch turns off.

When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punchholes, the punch hole motor [F] turns on until the disk changes the status of thepunch hole switch [G] (until it switches on or off). This indicates that the cover [H]and the punch cam [I] have moved to one side or the other to change the numberof holes.

B599D102.WMF

B599D101.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F] [G]

[H]

[I]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 29 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION

Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unitinside the finisher.

When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates thehopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after thecurrent job is completed.

This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When thewaste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensorand display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for thehopper full condition.

B599D153.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


BOOKLET FINISHER

B602

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM i B602

BOOKLET FINISHER B602

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1

1.1 REGULAR TRAY..........................................................................................11.2 COVERS ......................................................................................................1

1.2.1 FRONT COVER...................................................................................11.2.2 REAR COVER.....................................................................................31.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER .................................31.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER ......................................................................5

1.3 SIDE GUIDE.................................................................................................6

Removal...................................................................................................6Reassembly .............................................................................................61.4 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................7

Removal...................................................................................................7 Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase..........................................................10

1.5 FOLDING UNIT ..........................................................................................13Removal................................................................................................. 13

Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase..................................................151.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE .......................................................16

1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT...........................................................................161.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT.....................................................................18

1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT ...........................................................................201.8 TRANSPORT .............................................................................................221.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR ......................................................................221.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER.....................................................................22

1.9 STACK TRAY.............................................................................................241.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER .......................................................241.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE.....................................................................251.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER.......................................................27

Removal................................................................................................. 27Reassembly ...........................................................................................29

1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD .....................................................................................30

1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................. 301.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD.............................301.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER.......................................32

1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR.....................................321.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR ...............................................................341.11.3 CONTROLLER................................................................................351.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD..............................................................351.11.5 LED BOARD....................................................................................361.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD ................371.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION.............................................38

Sensor Voltage ......................................................................................38

8/12/2019 2238c


B602 ii SM

Punch Type............................................................................................39EEPROM...............................................................................................39

2. SERVICE TABLES ........................................................................ 402.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ........................................................................... 40

Punch Controller Board..........................................................................40

3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS..........................................................41

3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ...................................................................................413.2 DRIVE ........................................................................................................ 423.3 CONTROLLER...........................................................................................433.4 STACK TRAY.............................................................................................44

3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT..............................................................................44Mechanism ............................................................................................44Stack-Tray Belt ......................................................................................44

3.4.2 SORT.................................................................................................453.4.3 STACK...............................................................................................46

Paddle....................................................................................................46Stack-Tray Stopper................................................................................ 46Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................47Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................48Home Position .......................................................................................48Stapler Switch........................................................................................48Safety Feature .......................................................................................48

3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE .............................................................................. 49

Action.....................................................................................................49Drive ......................................................................................................49Home Position .......................................................................................49Paper Position .......................................................................................50

3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 51Mechanism ............................................................................................51Stack-Tray Belt Home Position ..............................................................51

3.5 STAPLING.................................................................................................. 523.5.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................523.5.2 STAPLER ..........................................................................................53

Mechanism ............................................................................................53

Stapler Switch........................................................................................53Sensors..................................................................................................53

3.5.3 POSITIONING...................................................................................54 Action and Drive .................................................................................... 54Home Position and Ready Position........................................................54Staple Position.......................................................................................55

3.6 REGULAR TRAY........................................................................................ 57 Action and Drive ....................................................................................57Ready Position.......................................................................................57Paper Sensor.........................................................................................58

8/12/2019 2238c


SM iii B602

Paper Full ..............................................................................................58Fail Safe Feature ................................................................................... 58

3.7 SADDLE STITCH .......................................................................................593.7.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................593.7.2 STACK TRAY....................................................................................603.7.3 STAPLER ..........................................................................................603.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT .......................................................................613.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 62

Folding Plate Mechanism.......................................................................62Folding Plate Home Position..................................................................62Folder Rollers Mechanism .....................................................................63Folder Rollers Home Position ................................................................63Shape of Folder Rollers .........................................................................64

3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)........................................................................65

3.8.1 REGISTRATION................................................................................65Slide Unit ...............................................................................................65Home Position .......................................................................................65Registration............................................................................................65

3.8.2 PUNCH..............................................................................................67Types of Punch Unit...............................................................................67Drive ......................................................................................................67Home Position .......................................................................................67Two Holes and Four Holes ....................................................................68Two or Three Holes ...............................................................................69

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


REGULAR TRAY

SM 1 B602

B o o k l e t F i n -

i s h e r

B 6 0 2


1.1 REGULAR TRAY

Regular tray [A] (! x 4)

1.2 COVERS

1.2.1 FRONT COVER

1. Joint guard [A] (! x 2)

2. Front lower cover [B] (! x 2)

B602R901.WMF

B602R987.WMF B602R988.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


COVERS

B602 2 SM

3. Open the front door [A].

4. Release the stopper and remove the knob

[B].

5. ! [C] x 2

6. Front cover [D]

B602R902.WMF

B602R903.WMF

[A]

[C]

[D]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


COVERS

SM 3 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.2.2 REAR COVER

Rear cover [A] (! [B] x 2, ! [C] x 1)

NOTE: One of the screws is under the mylar [D].

1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.2.1)

2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

3. Screw (on the right top cover holder) [A]

NOTE: Remove the regular tray [B] if it isin its upper position.

B602R904.WMF

B602R905.WMF

B602R907.WMF

[A]

[C]

[A]

[D]

[B]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


COVERS

B602 4 SM

4. Open the left top cover [A].

5. Fastener [B]

6. Strap [C]

7. Tray upper cover [D] (" x 1, ! x 1)

8. Right top cover (with the right top cover holder)

B602R906.WMF

B602R908.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


COVERS

SM 5 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER


2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

3. Left top cover (! 1.2.3)

4. ! [A] x 1

5. Upper right cover [B]

(! [C] x 1, 4 hooks)

B602R910.WMF

B602R911.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


SIDE GUIDE

B602 6 SM

1.3 SIDE GUIDE

Removal

1. Regular tray (!

1.1)2. Front cover (! 1.2.1)

3. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

4. Regular tray holders [A][B]

(! x 1 for each)

5. ! [C] x 4

6. Side-guide fastener [D]

7. Open the side guide [E] and releasethe feeler link [F]. (The diagram showsthe view seen from the top.)

8. Side guide

Reassembly

Place the feeler link [A] between the feeler [B] andthe side guide. After installing the side guide, checkthat the feeler link moves with the feeler.

B602R912.WMF

B602R913.WMF

B602R914.WMF

[E]

[A]

[F]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[C]

[B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER UNIT

SM 7 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.4 STAPLER UNIT

Removal

CAUTION: Do not remove the stapler [A]

from the stapler unit. The stapler and thestaple holder [B] must be in their originalpositions.

1. Open the front door [C].

2. Release the lever [D] and pull out thestapler unit.

3. Stapler knob [E]

4. Jam-release knob [F] (# x 1)

5. Front cover [G] (! x 3)

B602R915.WMF

B602R989.WMF

B602R990.WMF

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER UNIT

SM 9 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

13. Timing belt [A]

14. Gear [B] (# x 1)

B602R920.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER UNIT

B602 10 SM

Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase

If you remove the gears [A][C] and timing belt [B],you must adjust the phase of the gears when youreassemble the machine. These gears and the beltdecide when the staple holder sends a staple andwhen the stapler bends the staple. The diagramshows the view seen from the rear.

1. By rotating the timing-belt gear [A],align the hole in the staple-holder gear[B] with the hole in the frame [C].

B602R917.WMF

B602R921.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[B]

[C]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER UNIT

SM 11 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

2. To fix the gear in position, place a thintool [A] such as an Allen key or

screwdriver through the holes.

3. By rotating gear [B], align the hole in cam

[C] with the hole in the frame [D].

4. To fix the gear in position, place a thintool [E] such as an Allen key orscrewdriver through the holes.

B602R922.WMF

B602R923.WMF

B602R924.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER UNIT

B602 12 SM

5. Install the timing belt [A].

6. Align the blue mark [B] on the gear withthe hole [C] in the frame, and install thegear.

NOTE: The stapler is in the homeposition when the blue mark andthe hole are aligned.

7. Remove the two thin tools that youplaced earlier to secure the gears inposition.

8. Install the spring [D], spacer [E], gears[F][G], and timing belt [H].

9. Reassemble the whole stapler unit.

10. Check the operation.

B602R925.WMF

B602R926.WMF

B602R927.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F] [G]

[H]

8/12/2019 2238c


FOLDING UNIT

SM 13 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.5 FOLDING UNIT

Removal

1. Front cover (!

1.2.1)2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

3. Open the right cover [A].

4. Magnet bracket [B] (! x 2)

5. Inner cover [C] (! x 2)

6. Tension plate [D]

7. Rotate the shaft [F] clockwise and lowerthe folder plate [E].

NOTE: You may have to rotate the

shaft about 20 times (7,200°).

B602R991.WMF

B602R929.WMF

[F]

[E]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


FOLDING UNIT

B602 14 SM

8. Timing belt [A] ($ x 1, 1 spacer)

9. Two connectors [B][C]

10. Stapler unit [D] (! 1.4).

11. Folding unit [E] (! [F] x 3)

B602R930.WMF

B602R931.WMF

[E]

[D] [F]

[A]

[B][C]

8/12/2019 2238c


FOLDING UNIT

SM 15 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase

If you remove gears from the folding unit, you must adjust the phase of the gearswhen you reassemble the folding unit.

1. Arrange the folding rollers [A] and cam [B] as shown in the diagram.

2. Install the gears as follows:• Align either of the two “"” marks [C] on the cam gear with one of the “"”

marks [D] on the relay gear. The “"” marks on the relay gear must be at oneo'clock [D] and five o'clock [E] respectively.

• Align the other “"” mark on the relay gear [E] with the protruding plastic tab(“#”) on the roller gear [F].

NOTE: When you have correctly installed the gears, the shorter teeth on the relaygear [D] are at the upper right, and the longer teeth are at the lower left.

B602R994.WMF

B602R932.WMF

[D]

[F]

[B]

[E]

[C]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

B602 16 SM

1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT

1. Left top cover, tray upper cover (! 1.2.3)

2. Side guide (! 1.3)

3. ! [A] x 2

4. " [B] x 5, 2 standoffs

5. Release the front lock [D] and the rearlock [C] on the mechanical link of thestack-tray stopper.

B602R934.WMF

B602R935.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 17 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

6. " [A] x 3

7. Open the cable fasteners [B].

8. Release the cables [C].

9. Timing belt [D] ($ x 1, 1 spacer)

10. 2 standoffs [E]

B602R936.WMF

B602R937.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c



B602 18 SM

11. ! [A] x 2

12. Slide the stack tray [B] to the rear and

lift it.

1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT

CAUTION: Do not damage the jogger fences.

1. Stack tray (!1.6.1)

2. Place the stack tray unit on a levelsurface. Check that the fences [A] are insafe positions.

B602R938.WMF

B602R939.WMF

[B]

[A]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 19 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3. Timing belt [A]

4. ! [B] x 2

5. Jogger fence unit [C]

B602R940.WMF

B602R941.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

B602 20 SM

1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

2. Stapler unit (! 1.4).

3. Connector holder [A] (! x 1)

4. Release all the cables (on the staplermotor unit) [B] from the clamps.

5. Release the cables [D] (" x 2 [fromthe stapler motor unit or from thecontroller])

6. Cable fastener [E] (! x 2)

7. Release the cables (" x 2)

B602R942.WMF

B602R944.WMF

B602R945.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

SM 21 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

8. ! [A] x 3

9. Stapler motor unit [B] (! [C] x 1)

B602R946.WMF

B602R947.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRANSPORT

B602 22 SM

1.8 TRANSPORT

1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

2. Cable guide [A] (! x 1)

3. Transport motor (with the timing belt

behind) [B] (" x 1, ! x 3)

1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER


2. Upper cover (! 1.2.3)

3. Upper right cover (! 1.2.4)

4. Transport motor (!1.8.1)

5. ! [A] x 1

6. Bushing [B] ($ x 1)

B602R948.WMF

B602R949.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A] [B]

8/12/2019 2238c


TRANSPORT

SM 23 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

7. ! [A] x 2

8. Gear [B]

9. Gear (with the pin behind) [C]

10. Bushing [D] ($ x 1)

11. ! [E] x 1

12. Paper guide [F]

13. Transport roller [G]

B602R950.WMF

B602R951.WMF

B602R952.WMF

[A]

[F]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[G]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

B602 24 SM

1.9 STACK TRAY

1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER

1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise

and lift the stack tray upper roller unit[B].

3. Release the stack tray upper roller [C]

from the shaft [D].

B602R953.WMF

B602R954.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

SM 25 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

4. Lift up the stack tray upper roller [A],and push it down.

5. In the same manner, remove theother roller [B].

1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE

1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)

2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwiseand lift the stack tray upper roller unit[B].

B602R955.WMF

B602R953.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

B602 26 SM

3. Push the bottom of the guide [A] andrelease the rear side of it.

4. Push the bottom of the guide [B] andrelease the front side of it.

5. Paddle [C]

B602R956.WMF

B602R957.WMF

B602R958.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

SM 27 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER

Removal

1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)

2. Slide the jogger fences (the frontfence [A] to the front, the rear fence[B] to the rear) and remove them.

3. Tray stopper [C] (2 clips)

4. Paper guide [F] (! [D] x 1)

B602R959.WMF

B602R960.WMF

B602R961.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

B602 28 SM

5. Paper guide [A] (! [B] x 1)

6. Slide the bushing [C] ($ x 2).

7. Stack tray lower roller unit [E] (! [F] x4)

B602R962.WMF

B602R963.WMF

B602R964.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[F]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

SM 29 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

8. Stack tray lower roller [A]

9. Belt [B]

Reassembly

When reassembling, align the positions ofthe belt pawls [A][B].

B602R965.WMF

B602R966.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


CIRCUIT BOARD

B602 30 SM

1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD

1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)2. Controller board [A]

(all"'s, ! x 1, 3 hooks)

NOTE: After replacing the controllerboard, remove the NVRAM onthe old board and install it on thenew board.

1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD

1. Stapler unit (! 1.4)

2. Guide [A] (! x 2)

B602R967.WMF

B602R969.WMF

[A]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


CIRCUIT BOARD

SM 31 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3. Turn the knob [B] until you see thescrew [C] (on the home position sensorboard) through the opening. The homeposition board moves to the front when

you turn the knob clockwise.4. ! [C] x 1

5. Home position board [D]

(" x 1, 1 flat cable)

B602R970.WMF

B602R971.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

B602 32 SM

1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR

1. Right top cover (! 1.2.3)2. Chad box [A]

3. Release the cables [B] (" x 1).

B602R993.WMF

B602R973.WMF

[B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 33 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

4. Sensor bracket [A] (" x 1, ! x 1)

5. Remove the whole punch unit from the saddlefinisher.

6. Washer [B] (! x 1)

7. Base cover [C] (" x 2, ! [D] x 2) (Thediagram shows the view seen from thebottom.)

B602R974.WMF

B602R975.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c



B602 34 SM

8. Sensor unit [A] (" x 2, ! x 3)

9. Punch unit motor [B] (! x 2)

1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR

1. Remove the whole punch unit fromthe saddle finisher.

2. Registration motor [A]

(" x 1, ! x 2!

B602R976.WMF

B602R978.WMF

B602R979.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 35 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.11.3 CONTROLLER

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

2. Punch unit controller [A] (all"'s, ! x 2)

NOTE: After replacing the punch unit controller,adjust the sensor voltage and specify thepunch type (! 1.11.7). After replacingthe EEPROM, make the controllerinitialize the new EEPROM (! 1.11.7).

1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD

1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)

2. Release the cables [A]3. Board cover [B] (! x 1)

B602R980.WMF

B602R981.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



B602 36 SM

4. Photo sensor board [A] (" x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the photo sensor

board, adjust the sensor voltage(! 1.11.7).

1.11.5 LED BOARD

1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)

2. LED board [A] (" x 1, ! x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the LED board,adjust the sensor voltage (! 1.11.7).

B602R982.WMF

B602R983.WMF

[A]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 37 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD

1. Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)

2. Remove the whole punch unit from thesaddle finisher.

3. Protector [A] (! x 2)

4. Sensor board [B] (" x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the sensor board,adjust the sensor voltage (! 1.11.7).

5. LED board [C] (! x 1," x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the LED board,adjust the sensor voltage (! 1.11.7).

B602R984.WMF

B602R985.WMF

B602R986.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



B602 38 SM

1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION

Sensor Voltage

You make the controller adjust the LEDvoltage of the sensors after you havereplaced any of the following units andcomponents:

• Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)

• Photo sensor board (! 1.11.4)• LED board (! 1.11.5)

• Chad box full sensor board (! 1.11.6)

• Chad box LED board (! 1.11.6)

Perform as follows:

1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board asfollows: 1 = ON, 2 = OFF, 3 = ON, 4 = OFF [H].

2. Push SW1002 [C] or SW1003 [D]. The controller starts to adjustthe LED voltage of the sensors.

3. Wait until LED1001 [E], LED1002 [F], and LED1003 [G] light.This indicates the controller ends the adjustment.

4. Set the DIP switch as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4 =OFF.

B602R995.WMF

B602R996.WMF

B602R997.WMF

[G]

[F]

[E]

[D]

[C]

[B]

[A]

[I]

[H]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 39 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Punch Type

After you replace the punch-unit controller, specify the punch typeas follows:

1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board asfollows: 1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = ON [J].

2. Push SW1002 [C] to select a punch type. As you push SW1002,the three LEDs [E][F][G] change as shown in the table. TheseLEDs indicate which punch type you have selected.

Punch Type LED1001 LED1002 LED1003

2 holes Lights — —

2 or 3 holes Lights Lights —

4 holes* — Lights —

4 holes** — — Lights

** For the North Europe model* Four the other models

3. Push SW1003 [D]. The LEDs blink.

4. Push SW1003 again. The controller stores the punch type in theEEPROM.

5. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4= OFF [K].

EEPROM

After you replace the EEPROM [A], make the controller initialize thenew EEPROM as follows:

1. Set the DIP switch on the punch-unit controller board as follows:1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = OFF [L].

2. Push SW1002 and SW1003 at the same time. The controllerstarts initializing the EEPROM.

3. Wait until LED1001, LED1002, and LED1003 light. Thisindicates that the initialization ends.

4. Adjust the sensor voltage (! Sensor Voltage).

5. Specify the punch type (! Punch Type)

6. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4= OFF [M].

B602R998.WMF

B602R997.WMF

B602R999.WMF

B602R997.WMF

[J]

[K]

[M]

[L]

8/12/2019 2238c


DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

B602 40 SM

2. SERVICE TABLES

2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

Punch Controller Board

The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those describedin the table below.

SW1001

1 2 3 4Mode Description

OFF OFF OFF OFF Default

ON OFF ON OFF Sensor voltage adjustment See 1.11.7.

ON ON OFF ON Punch type setting See 1.11.7.

ON ON OFF OFF EEPROM initialization See 1.11.7.

8/12/2019 2238c


GENERAL LAYOUT

SM 41 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2


3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT

1. Regular tray

2. Jogger fence

3. Exit roller

4. Paddle

5. Stack tray stopper

6. Transport roller

7. Cam*

8. Punch*

9. Punch base*

10. Chad box*

11. Stack-tray transport roller

12. Folding plate

13. Folder rollers

14. Booklet exit roller

15. Booklet tray

16. Booklet stopper

17. Stapler

18. Stack-tray lower roller

19. Stack-tray belt

20. Stack-tray upper roller

* Installed with the optional punch unit.

B602D901.WMF

10

11

12

14

15

16

17

18

19

7

8

9

20

4 5

13

321 6

8/12/2019 2238c


DRIVE

B602 42 SM

3.2 DRIVE

1. Paddle motor

2. Transport motor

3. Stapler slide motor

4. Stack-tray exit motor

5. Stapler/folder motor

6. Rear fence motor

7. Front fence motor

8. Lift motor

9. Finisher controller

B602D902.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

8/12/2019 2238c


CONTROLLER

SM 43 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.3 CONTROLLER

The finisher controller board communicates with the controllers of the optional

punch unit and the copier or printer. Listed below are the functions of importantICs:

• CPU (IC13): Controls the sequence or the processing.

• EEP-ROM (CS12): Stores adjustment settings.

• Communication IC (IC11): Contains the program.

• EP-ROM (IC6): Communicates with other controllers.

• Regulator IC (IC1): Generates 5-volt power source.

Main unit

Controller board

Sensors

Switches

Motors

Clutches

Regulator IC (IC1)

CPU (IC13)

EEP-ROM (IC12)

Communication IC(IC11)

EP-ROM (IC6)

Punch (optional)

Controller

boardSensor

Motor

Finisher

Controller board

B602D903.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

B602 44 SM

3.4 STACK TRAY

3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT

MechanismThe exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray. The rollers and belts on thestack tray transport the paper to the regular tray. The finisher operates like thiseven when it handles one sheet of paper.

Phase 1: The transport motor drives theexit roller [A] to transport the paper to thestack tray.

Phase 2: The paddle motor operates inreverse to lower the stack-tray upperroller [B] onto the paper.

Phase 3: The stack-tray exit motordrives the stack-tray upper roller [B], thestack-tray lower roller [E], and the stack-tray belts [C] to transport the paper to theregular tray.

Stack-Tray Belt

The stack tray has two stack-tray belts. Each stack-tray belt has a paper support[D] on its surface. As stack-tray exit motor rotates the stack-tray belts

counterclockwise (viewed from the machine front), the paper supports movescounterclockwise. While moving, these paper supports transport the paper from thestack tray to the regular tray.

For the home position of the stack-tray belt, see “Stack-Tray Belt Home Position” insection 3.4.5.

B602D904.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D] [E]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

SM 45 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.4.2 SORT

The finisher can sort and stack the paper. To do this, it uses the stack tray and theregular tray.

Phase 1: The exit roller transports thepaper on the stack tray [A]. The frontfence motor or the rear fence motor drivesthe jogger fence [B] to push the paper tothe front or rear. The jogger fence handlesthe next paper in the same way, andpushes the paper in the same direction.

For the jogger fence mechanism, seesection 3.4.4.

Phase 2: When the number of papers onthe stack tray reaches one of the followingnumbers, the stack-tray upper roller, thestack-tray lower roller, and the stack-traybelts (! 3.4.1) transport the paper stack[C] to the regular tray.

Paper Size Number of Sheets

300 mm and longer 10

Shorter than 300 mm 30

Phase 3: The finisher repeats Phase 1and Phase 2 until it finishers handling thefirst set of paper.

Phase 4: For the next set, the finisherconducts phases 1 through 3 again. Thistime, the other jogger fence pushes the

paper in the opposite direction in phase 1.

Every time phase 3 ends, the finisher stacks one set of paper on the regular tray.The diagram shows the paper stack [D] on the regular tray after the finisher stacksfour sets of paper. The arrow [E] indicates the direction of paper travel.

B602D905.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

B602 46 SM

3.4.3 STACK

Paddle

There are four paddles [C] above the stack tray. These paddles push down thepaper [B] to the stack-tray stopper [D]. This aligns the right edges of the paper(viewed from the machine front). The paddle motor [A] drives these paddles.

Stack-Tray Stopper

The stack-tray stopper [E] remains standing (as shown in the diagram) while theexit roller is transporting the paper to the stack tray.

Before the stack-tray upper and lowerrollers transport the paper to the stapler(! 3.5 and 3.7), the stapler slide motorstarts to move the stapler to the machinefront. The stapler pushes the mechanicallink of the stack-tray stopper (! 1.6.1).This link pulls down the stack-traystopper.

B602D906.WMF

B602D907.WMF

B602D908.WMF

[E]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

SM 47 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism

The paddle motor [A] drives the stack-tray guide. The stack-tray guide stays awayfrom the paper (the upper position [B]) under either of the following conditions:

• When the exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray

• When the jogger fences adjust the direction of the paper

The paddle motor drives the stack-tray guide onto the paper (the lower position [C])under either of the following conditions:

• When the stapler operates

• When the stack-tray upper roller, stack-tray lower roller, and stack-tray belttransport the paper

B602D906.WMF B602D909.WMF

B602D910.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

B602 48 SM

Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism

The paddle motor [A] moves the timingbelts [B][G], which drive the cam [D]. Thecam pushes up the first lever [C], whichpushes down the second lever [H]. Thesecond lever lowers the stack-tray guide[I].

Home Position

The actuator [F] moves with the cam [D].The actuator interrupts the home positionsensor [E] while the cam does not pushthe first lever [C] (in other words, while the

stack-tray guide is in its upper position).

Stapler Switch

The second lever [H] moves with thestapler-switch actuator [J]. When the firstlever pushes the second lever (in otherwords, when the stack tray guide is in itslower position), the actuator pushes thestapler switch [K], turning it on. The staplercan operate only when this switch is on.

Safety Feature

The stapler switch, along with the stack-tray guide mechanism, works as a safetyfeature. The stapler operates only when the stack-tray guide is in the lower position.When the stack-tray guide is in this position, the user cannot access the staplerthrough the opening between the stack-tray guide and the stack tray. Therefore,staples do not injure the user.

B602D949.WMF

[C]

[A]

[K]

[J]

[I]

[B]

[D] [E]

[F]

[H]

[G]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

SM 49 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE

Action

There are two jogger fences: the front fence [A] and the rear fence [B]. These two jogger fences adjust the position of the paper [C] on the stack tray.

Drive

The front-jogger-fence motor [D] and the rear-jogger-fence motor [E] drive the jogger fences.

Home Position

There are two home position sensors: the front-fence home-position sensor [F] andthe rear-fence home-position sensor [G]. Each jogger fence is linked to an actuator[H][I]. When the main switch is turned on, the front and rear fence motors drive the

jogger fences until each home position sensor detected its actuator.

B602D911.WMF

[A]

[B]

[E]

[D]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

B602 50 SM

Paper Position

To align the paper to the front of thestack tray, the jogger fences operate asfollows:

• The rear fence [A] pushes thepaper [B] to the front each time theexit roller transports the paper tothe stack tray.

• The front fence [C] stays at thefront side.

To align the paper to the rear side of thestack tray, the jogger fences operate asfollows:

• The rear fence [D] stays at therear side.

• The front fence [E] pushes the

paper [F] to the rear each time theexit roller transports the paper tothe stack tray.

B602D912.WMF

B602D913.WMF

Regular tray

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

Rear

Front

Regular tray

Rear

Front

8/12/2019 2238c


STACK TRAY

SM 51 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT

Mechanism

The paper in the stack tray is transported to the regular tray as follows:

1. The paddle motor [A] moves the stack-tray guide to its lower position [G].

2. The stack-tray exit motor [B] drives the stack-tray upper roller [F], the stack-traylower roller [H], and the stack-tray belt [I]. The stack-tray belt has a pair of

paper supports [K] that push the paper [C] (!

3.4.1).3. When the paper supports have left the home position, the controller starts to

count the pulses of the stack-tray exit motor.

4. When the pulse count reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), thepaddle motor moves the stack-tray guide to its upper position [J].

5. The paper supports keep pushing the paper to the regular tray [D].

Stack-Tray Belt Home Position

When the stack-tray belt is at its home position, one of the paper supports [K]

pushes the actuator of the home position sensor [E].

B602D914.WMF

B602D916.WMF

B602D915.WMF

B602D906.WMF

[J]

[D]

[C]

[A]

[G]

[B]

[F]

[H]

[I]

[E]

[K]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLING

B602 52 SM

3.5 STAPLING

3.5.1 OVERVIEW

The finisher staples the paper asfollows:

Phase 1: The exit roller transports thepaper to the stack tray [A] until thenumber of papers reaches a specifiednumber.

Phase 2: The jogger fences [B] adjust

the position of the paper. For the joggerfence mechanism, see section 3.4.4.

Phase 3: The stapler [C] staples thepaper.

Phase 4: The stapled paper [D] istransported to the regular tray.

When the finisher has conductedphases 1 through 4, it starts the sameprocessing from phase 1.

B602D917.WMF

[A][B]

[C][D]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLING

SM 53 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.5.2 STAPLER

Mechanism

The stapler/folder motor [A] drives the stapler (! “Action and Drive” in section3.5.3).

Stapler Switch

See “Stapler Switch” in section 3.4.3.

Sensors

There are three sensors inside the stapler:

• Staple Home Position Sensor: The staple home position sensor detects thecam position.

• Staple Sensor: The staple sensor detects the staples in the cartridge.

• Staple Ready Sensor: The staple ready sensor detects the upper end ofthe staple.

The staple home position sensor above is different from the home position sensoron the bottom of the stapler (! 3.5.3).

B602D920.WMF

B602D918.WMF B602D919.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLING

B602 54 SM

3.5.3 POSITIONING

Action and Drive

There is one stapler [A] in the finisher. The stapler is on six rails [C][D][E][I]. The

rail [C], rail [D], rail [I], and rail [J] transmit the drive power:

• The rail [C] and rail [I] transmit the drive power of the stapler/folder motor.The stapler uses this power to staple the paper (! 3.5.2).

• The rails [D] and [J] transmit the drive power of the staple slide motor [H].This drive power moves the stapler to the front or rear.

In the diagram above, [B] is the paper stack on the stack tray.

Home Position and Ready Position

The home position sensor [G] is at the bottom of the stapler; the sensor blade [F] ison the frame of the unit. The controller references the home position sensor to setthe stapler in its ready position. Note that the stapler is not in the home positionwhen it is ready. The controller sets the stapler in the ready position as follows:

1. You turn the main switch on (or you close the front door of the finisher).

2. The slide motor drives the stapler from the rear side to the front side.

3. The home position sensor detects the sensor blade. The slide motor stops.

4. The slide motor starts in reverse to drive the stapler to the rear side. Thecontroller starts to count the pulses of the motor.

5. When the pulse count reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the

controller stops the slide motor. The stapler is in its ready position.

B602D921.WMF

[F]

[G]Rear

Front

[C]

[D]

[E]

[H]

[I]

[J]

[K]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLING

SM 55 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Staple Position

The controller counts the pulses of the stapler slide motor to calculates thedistance between the ready position (! Home Position and Ready Position) andthe staple position

Front-End One Staple

1. Before the stapler slide motor starts,the stapler is in the ready position [C].

2. The stapler slide motor starts to slidethe stapler to the front. The controllercounts the pulses of the stapler slidemotor.

3. While moving to the front, the staplerlowers the stack-tray stopper [B] (! “Stack-Tray Stopper” in 3.4.3).

4. When the pulse count reaches thepredefined number (not adjustable),the controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the staplingposition [D].

5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler [A].

Rear-End One Staple

1. The stapler is in the ready position [F].

2. The stapler/folder motor drives thestapler. The stapler staples the paper.

The stapler does not move to the front.The stack-tray stopper [E] keepsstanding

B602D922.WMF

B602D923.WMF

[C]

[D]

[B]

[A]

[F]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


STAPLING

B602 56 SM

Two Staples

1. Before the stapler slide motor starts,

the stapler is in the ready position [G].

2. The stapler slide motor starts to slidethe stapler to the front. The controllercounts the pulses of the stapler slidemotor.

3. While moving to the front, the staplerlowers the stack-tray stopper [J].

4. When the pulse count reaches thepredefined number (not adjustable), the controller stops the stapler slide motor.The stapler is in the first stapling position [H].

5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler.

6. The stapler slide motor starts to slide the stapler to the front. The controllercounts the pulses of he stapler slide motor.

7. When the pulse cont reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), thecontroller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the second staplingposition [I].

8. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paper.

Saddle Stitch

1. The stack-tray upper and lower rollerstransport the paper to the stapler unituntil the center of the paper [K]reaches the stapling positions (! 3.7.4).

2. The stapler operates as described inthe previous paragraph (! Two

Staples).

B602D924.WMF

B602D925.WMF

[G]

[J]

[H]

[I]

[K]

8/12/2019 2238c


REGULAR TRAY

SM 57 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.6 REGULAR TRAY

Action and Drive

The lift motor [I] drives the regular tray to adjust its height.

Ready Position

Before the stack-tray rollers and belts transport the paper to the regular tray, the liftmotor sets the regular tray in the ready position:

1. The lift motor lowers the regular tray. The controller references the lift motorencoder sensor [D] to count how many turns the motor makes.

2. When the number of turns reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), thecontroller stops the lift motor.

3. The lift motor operates in reverse, lifting the regular tray.

4. The paper height sensor [F] detects the edge [G] of the tray or the top of thepaper stack (!Paper Sensor). The lift motor stops.

B602D926.WMF

[E][B]

[C]

[D]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SADDLE STITCH

SM 59 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.7 SADDLE STITCH

3.7.1 OVERVIEW

The saddle stitch process consists of the following four phases:

1. The stack tray aligns the paper (!3.7.2).

2. The stapler staples the paper (! 3.7.3).

3. The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper in the folding

position (! 3.7.4).

4. The folding plate and folder rollers cooperate to fold the paper and to transportit to the booklet tray (! 3.7.5).

B602D927.WMF

12

3

4

8/12/2019 2238c


SADDLE STITCH

B602 60 SM

3.7.2 STACK TRAY

The stack tray operates as follows:

1. The stack-tray stopper aligns the rightedges of the paper in the stack tray (! “Stack-Tray Stopper” in 3.4.1).

2. The jogger fences adjust the position ofthe paper (! 3.4.4).

3. When a specified number of paper [A] isstacked, the paddle motor operates inreverse to lower the stack-tray guide andthe stack-tray upper roller [B] onto thepaper.

4. The stack-tray exit motor drives thestack-tray upper roller and lower roller totransport the paper to the stapler unit.

5. The booklet clutch [D] turns on. Thisclutch transmits the driver power of the

transport motor to the stack-traytransport roller [C].

3.7.3 STAPLER

The stapler waits for the paper in the ready position, and operates when the paperis set to the stapler positions (! 3.5.3). When the finisher is processing one sheetof paper, the stapler does not staple the paper.

B602D928.WMF

B602D950.WMF

[B][A]

[D]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


SADDLE STITCH

SM 61 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT

The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper as follows:

1. When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the folder home positionsensor [A], the controller starts to count the pulses of the transport motor.

2. When the pulse count reaches the number equivalent to the distance [B]between the stapler and the folding plate, the transport motor stops. The centerof the paper is in the folding position.

B602D930.WMF

B602D931.WMF

[B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


SADDLE STITCH

B602 62 SM

3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT

Folding Plate Mechanism

The folding plate is driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folding plate operates asfollows:

1. The folding plate waits for the stack-tray transport roller to transport the paper.

2. When the center of the paper is set in the folding position, the stapler/foldermotor drives the folding plate [C] and the folder rollers [D]. The folding platepresses the paper between the folder rollers.

3. The folder rollers feed the paper about 10 mm, the folding plate returns to itshome position. The folder rollers keep feeding the paper.

Folding Plate Home PositionThe home position of the folding plate is detected by the folder home positionsensor [E]. The actuator [F] is linked to the folding plate by way of cam [A] andlever [B] (though they are separated in the diagram).

The sensor also detects the home position of the folder rollers (! Folder RollersHome Position).

B602D932.WMF

B602D933.WMF

[D]

[C]

[F]

[E]

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


SADDLE STITCH

SM 63 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Folder Rollers Mechanism

The folder rollers are driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folder rollers operateas follows:

1. The folder rollers [B] feed the paper pressed by the folding plate.

2. The folder rollers and the booklet exit rollers [C] feed the paper [D] andtransport it to the booklet tray [E].

Folder Rollers Home Position

The home position of the folder rollers is detected by the folder home positionsensor [F]. The folder home position sensor blade [A] is linked to the folder rollersby way of the gears [G][H] (though they are separated in the diagram).

The sensor also detects the home position of the folding plate (!

Folding PlateHome Position).

B602D934.WMF

B602D935.WMF

[G]

[F]

[A]

[H]

[D]

[E]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


SADDLE STITCH

B602 64 SM

Shape of Folder Rollers

Viewed from the front or rear, each folder rollers is a half-circle [A] except bothends and middle. This structure prevents the rollers from crumpling the paper stack.

B602D936.WMF

Folding Plate

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 65 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

3.8.1 REGISTRATION

Slide UnitThe slide unit includes the punch motor[C], the punch [A], and paper edge andsize sensors [B]. This unit is driven by theregistration motor [E].

Home Position

The home position of the slide unit (inother words, the home position of the

paper edge sensors) is detected by theregistration home position sensor [F].

Registration

Registration is executed as follows:

1. When the paper [D] comes from the main

unit, the leading edge [I] of the paper isdetected by the paper edge sensor [H].

2. The registration motor starts to operate.The slide unit [G] moves to the front.

B602D937.WMF

B602D938.WMF

[H]

[I]

[F] [E]

[G]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c



B602 66 SM

3. One of the paper size sensors [A] thatcorresponds to the paper size detects therear end [B] of the paper.

4. When the slide unit is set in place, theregistration motor stops its operations.

5. When the paper edge sensor [C] detects thetrailing edge of the paper, the transportmotor [D] (of the finisher) stops.

B602D939.WMF

B602D940.WMF

B602D941.WMF

[A] [B]

[D]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 67 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.8.2 PUNCH

Types of Punch Unit

There are four types:

• 2 holes

• 2 or 3 holes (The user can select 2-hole punching or 3-hole punching fromthe operation panel or the printer driver.)

• 4 holes

• 4 holes

There are two 4-hole types: for the North Europe models and for the other models.

Drive

The diagram shows the 2 or 3 holes type, which has five punch cams [B]: two ofthem are for 2-hole punching and the other three are for 3-hole punching. Thepunch motor [A] drives the punch cams.

Home Position

The controller uses two sensors, the home position sensor [D] and the encodersensor [C], to set the punch cams in the home position. The controller fine-adjuststhe home position by referencing the encoder sensor signals.

B602D942.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

8/12/2019 2238c



B602 68 SM

Two Holes and Four Holes

When the finisher punches holes, the punch motor drives all punches at the sametime.

Phase 1

1) The punch is in the home position.The punch home position sensor [A]is on. When the first sheet of paper isset, the punch cam starts a forwardturn.

2) When the punch cam has made a90-degree turn, a hole is punched.

3) When the punch cam has made a180-degree turn, the punch comes

back to the home position. Note thatthe punch cam [B] is not in theprevious position.

Phase 2

4) The punch is in the home position.The punch home position sensor ison. When the second sheet of paperis set, the punch cam starts abackward turn.

5) When the punch cam has made a 90-

degree turn, a hole is punched.6) When the punch cam has made 180-

degree turn, the punch comes backto its home position. Note that thepunch cam is not in the previousposition but in the same position asthe start fo phase 1.

Phase 3

• Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.

B602D943.WMF

B602D944.WMF

1) 2) 3)

4) 5) 6)

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 69 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Two or Three Holes

There are five punches. When the finisher punches holes, the punch drives allpunches at the same time. But three of them do not reach the paper (when thefinisher is punching two holes), or two of them do not reach the paper (when thefinisher is punching three holes).

Phase 1

Standby

Working

Working punches operate asfollows:

1) The punch is in the home

position. The punch homeposition sensor [A] is on. Whenthe first sheet of paper is set, thepunch cam starts a forward turn.

2) When the punch cam has made a180-degree turn, a hole ispunched.

3) When the punch cam has made a180-degree turn, the punchcomes back to the home position.

Note that the punch cam [B] is notin the previous position.

Standby punches operate asfollows:

1) When the first sheet of paper is

set, the punch cam starts aforward turn.

2) When the punch cam has made a90-degree turn, the punch is awayfrom the paper.

3) When the punch cam has made a180-degree turn, the punch isback to the home position.

B602D945.WMF

B602D946.WMF

1) 2) 3) 1) 2) 3)

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c



B602 70 SM

Phase 2

Standby

Working

Working punches operate asfollows:

4) The punch is in the homeposition. The punch homeposition sensor [A] is on. Whenthe next sheet of paper is set, thepunch cam starts a backwardturn.

5) When the punch cam has made a

90-degree turn, a hole ispunched.

6) When the punch cam has made a180-degree turn, the punchcomes back to the home position.Note that the punch cam [B] is notin the previous position but in thesame position as the start ofphase 1.

Standby punches operate asfollows:

4) When the next sheet of paper isset, the punch cam starts abackward turn.

5) When the punch cam has made a90-degree turn, the punch is awayfrom the paper.

6) When the punch cam has made a

180-degree turn. the punchcomes back to the home position.

Phase 3

• Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.

B602D948.WMF

B602D947.WMF

4) 5) 6)4) 5) 6)

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


FAX OPTION TYPE 2238

B603

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM i B603

FAX OPTION B603

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1

1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 11.2 FAX UNIT .....................................................................................................3

Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 3Installation Procedure ..............................................................................4

1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT ..................................................................................6 Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 6Installation Procedure ..............................................................................7

1.4 FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT.............................................................101.5 EXPANSION MEMORY ............................................................................. 111.6 HANDSET .................................................................................................. 12

Accessory Check ................................................................................... 12Installation Procedure ............................................................................13

2. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................14

2.1 ERROR CODES.........................................................................................142.2 FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES................................................ 22

SC871 FCU Flash ROM Abnormal ........................................................22FCU Flash ROM Access Limit Exceeded .............................................. 22

SRAM Abnormal ....................................................................................22Expansion SRAM Abnormal ..................................................................22

3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................23

3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 233.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION...................................... 23

Entering and Exiting SP mode...............................................................23SP2-XXX (RAM Data)............................................................................25SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings).................................................................. 25SP4-XXX (ROM Versions).....................................................................26SP5-XXX (Initializing)............................................................................. 26

SP6-XXX (Reports)................................................................................27SP7-XXX (Tests) ................................................................................... 29

3.2 BIT SWITCHES..........................................................................................303.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES........................................................................303.2.2 FAX SWITCHES................................................................................413.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES.......................................................................453.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 503.2.5 G3-1 SWITCHES...............................................................................593.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES...............................................................................67

3.3 NCU PARAMETERS ..................................................................................733.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS......................................... 83

3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE.......................................................83

8/12/2019 2238c


B603 ii SM

3.4.2 PARAMETERS..................................................................................843.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................... 88

4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS.........................................89

4.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................894.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................... 904.2.1 FCU ...................................................................................................904.2.2 MBU................................................................................................... 914.2.3 NCU (US) .......................................................................................... 924.2.4 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA) ....................................................................... 934.2.5 SG3-D BOARD..................................................................................94

4.3 ADDRESS BOOK....................................................................................... 95With Printer Scanner Unit ...................................................................... 95Without Optional Printer Scanner Unit (Asia Model Only)...................... 95

SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................96

1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................... 962. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS............................................ 973. MACHINE CONFIGURATION.....................................................................99

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCEDURE OVERVIEW

SM 1 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

1. INSTALLATION

1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW

!WARNING

1. Never install telephone writing during a lightning storm.

2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack isspecifically designed for wet locations.

3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless thetelephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

5. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an

electrical storm. There may be remote risk of electric shock fromlightning.

6. Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in thevicinity of the leak.

!CAUTION

1. Before installing the fax unit, switch off the main switch, anddisconnect the power cord.

2. The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists ifa battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the sameor an equivalent type recommended by the manufacture. Discardbatteries in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions and localregulations.

NOTE FOR AUSTRALIA

Unit must be connected to Telecommunication Network through a line cordwhich meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008.

8/12/2019 2238c


PROCEDURE OVERVIEW

B603 2 SM

The flowchart illustrates your installation procedure.

Do you install the fax

function upgrade unit?

Install the fax function

upgrade unit to the fax

unit.

Install the optional G3

unit to the fax unit.

Check the operations.

Specify necessary

settings.

Install the handset

to the copier.

Install the fax unit

to the copier.Install the expansion

memory to the fax unit.

Start

End

Do you install

the optional G3 unit?

Do you install the

expansion memory?

Do you install

the handset?

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

B603I910.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


FAX UNIT

SM 3 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

1.2 FAX UNIT

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty

1. Fax key................................................................................2

2. Fax panel.............................................................................2

3. Stamp ..................................................................................1

4. G3 decal ..............................................................................1

5. Serial number decal.............................................................1

6. FCC decal (for North America model only) ..........................1

7. Cable holder ........................................................................1

NOTE: You need the cable holder when installing the optional handset (for theNorth America model only).

B603I906.WMF

1 2 3

4

7

5 6

8/12/2019 2238c


FAX UNIT

B603 4 SM


!CAUTION

Before installing this option, do the following:

1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printerbuffer.

2. Press the operation switch to be the standby mode. Make sure thepower LED is not lit then, turn off the main switch and disconnect thepower cord and the network cable.

1. Remove the option cover [A]

(! x 2).

2. Turn the battery switch on [B].3. Install the fax unit [C] (! x 2).

4. Attach the serial number decal [D] onthe rear cover.

5. Attach the FCC decal on the rearcover (only for USA/Canada).

6. Remove the key cover [E] and installone of the fax keys [F].

7. Remove the panel cover [G] andinstall the fax panel [H].

B603I911.WMF

B603I902.WMF

[A]

[C]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[D]

[B]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


FAX UNIT

SM 5 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

8. Attach the G3 decal [A].

9. Install the stamp [B] to the ADF [C] (if installed).

10. Connect the telephone line to the “LINE 1” jack atthe left of the machine.


12. Wait until the following messages are displayed:

Function Problems

Functional problems with facsimile.Data will be initialized.

13. Touch “OK” on the touch panel. The initialization starts.

14. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set.

15. Enter the service mode and program the serial number into the fax unit (SP3-102-000). The serial number can be found on the serial number decal (attachedto the machine in step 4).

B603I903.WMF

G307I105.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


G3 INTERFACE UNIT

B603 6 SM

1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty

1. NCU.....................................................................................1

2. Interface board ....................................................................1

3. G3 board..............................................................................1

4. Cable ...................................................................................1

5. Flat cable.............................................................................1

6. Spacer .................................................................................4

7 Screw M3 x 6........................................................................6

B603I908.WMF

1 2 3

4 5 6

7

8/12/2019 2238c


G3 INTERFACE UNIT

SM 7 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


!CAUTION


1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printerbuffer.

2. Press the operation switch to be the standby mode. Make sure thepower LED is not lit then, turn off the main switch and disconnect thepower cord and the network cable.

1. Remove the “LINE 2” cover [A] on the fax-controller board.

2. Remove the fax controller board [B] (" x 1, ! x 4).

B604I901.WMF

[A]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


G3 INTERFACE UNIT

B603 8 SM

3. Install the four spacers [A] to the rear of the fax-controller unit.

4. Install the interface board [B] on the spacers.

5. Install the flat cable [C] to the interface board.

6. Connect the flat cable to the fax-controller board [D] (the connector is on thefront of the fax-controller board).

7. Connect the G3 board [E] to the interface board (! x 2).

NOTE: See the diagram above and connect the G3 board to the correct slot.Leave the other slot open–this slot is used by some local models.

8. Connect the cable [F] to the G3 board.

NOTE: The core [G] is on an end of the cable. Connect this end to the G3board.

B604I903.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

8/12/2019 2238c


G3 INTERFACE UNIT

SM 9 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

9. Install the fax-controller board (with the G3 board and interface board) [A] to the

fax-controller base [B] (! x 4," x 1).

10. Install the NCU [C] to the fax-controller unit (! x 4).

11. Connect the cable [D] on the G3 board to the NCU.

12. Fix the cable to the clamp [E].

13. Install the fax unit to the copier.


15. Enter the service mode. Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to “1.”

16. Turn the main switch off and on.17. Print out the system parameter list and check that “G3” is listed as an option.

18. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.

B604I902.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

8/12/2019 2238c


FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT

B603 10 SM

1.4 FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT

!CAUTION


1. Print out all data in the printer buffer.

2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and thenetwork cable.

1. Turn on the DIP switch [A].

NOTE: The DIP switch works as the power switch.

2. Attach the spacer [B].

3. Install the fax function upgrade unit [C].


5. Enter the service mode. Set bit 7 of system switch 1E to “1.”

A892I901.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

8/12/2019 2238c


EXPANSION MEMORY

SM 11 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

1.5 EXPANSION MEMORY

!CAUTION


1. Print out all data in the printer buffer.

2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and thenetwork cable.

Install the expansion memory [A] into the memory slot.

G578I901.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


HANDSET

B603 12 SM

1.6 HANDSET

The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty

1. Base bracket........................................................................1

2. Handset cradle ....................................................................1

3. Handset ...............................................................................1

4. Screw M3 x 6.......................................................................4

B603I909.WMF

1 2 3

4

8/12/2019 2238c


HANDSET

SM 13 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover.

2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit (! x 2) as shown.

3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D].

4. Attach the cradle to the bracket [B] (! x 2), then replace the label [C].

5. Install the handset [E] on the cradle.

6. Connect the cable [F] to the “TEL” jack at the rear of the machine.

7. Attach the cable holder [G].

NOTE: The cable holder is distributed with the fax unit (not with the handset).

8. Fix the cable to the holder.

B603I907.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D]

[F]

[A]

[E]

[G]

8/12/2019 2238c


ERROR CODES

B603 14 SM

2. TROUBLESHOOTING

2.1 ERROR CODES

If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try tofix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in theerror code display and on the service report.

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within40 s of Start being pressed

• Check the line connection.

• Check the NCU - FCU connectors.

• The machine at the other end may beincompatible.

• Replace the NCU or FCU.

• Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.

• If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.

0-01 DCN received unexpectedly • The other party is out of paper or has a jammedprinter.

• The other party pressed Stop duringcommunication.

0-03 Incompatible modem at theother end

• The other terminal is incompatible.

0-04 CFR or FTT not receivedafter modem training



• Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.

• Replace the FCU or NCU.• The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to

another machine.

• If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may bea bad line.

Cross reference

• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)

• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4

0-05 Unsuccessful after modemtraining at 2400 bps



• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.• Replace the FCU or NCU.

• Check for line problems.

Cross reference

• See error code 0-04.

8/12/2019 2238c


ERROR CODES

SM 15 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


0-06 The other terminal did notreply to DCS


• Check the FCU - NCU connectors.

• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer

settings.• Replace the NCU or FCU.

• The other end may be defective or incompatible;try sending to another machine.


Cross reference


0-07 No post-message responsefrom the other end after apage was sent




• The other end may have jammed or run out of

paper.• The other end user may have disconnected the

call.

• Check for a bad line.

• The other end may be defective; try sending toanother machine.

0-08 The other end sent RTN orPIN after receiving a page,because there were toomany errors




• The other end may have jammed, or run out ofpaper or memory space.

• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.

• The other end may have a defectivemodem/NCU/FCU; try sending to anothermachine.

• Check for line problems and noise.

Cross reference

• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)

• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4

0-14 Non-standard post messageresponse code received


• Incompatible or defective remote terminal; trysending to another machine.

• Noisy line: resend.



Cross reference


8/12/2019 2238c


ERROR CODES

B603 16 SM


0-15 The other terminal is notcapable of specificfunctions.

The other terminal is not capable of accepting thefollowing functions, or the other terminal’s memory isfull.

• Confidential rx

• Transfer function

• SEP/SUB/PWD/SID

0-16 CFR or FTT not detectedafter modem training inconfidential or transfer mode





• The other end may have disconnected, or it maybe defective; try calling another machine.

• If the rx signal level is too low, there may be aline problem.

Cross reference


0-17 Communication wasinterrupted by pressing theStop key.

If the Stop key was not pressed and this error keepsoccurring, replace the operation panel.

0-20 Facsimile data not receivedwithin 6 s of retraining





• Try calling another fax machine.

• Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first

line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.

Cross reference

• Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6

• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line)from the other end notreceived within 5 s of theprevious EOL signal

• Check the connections between the FCU, NCU,& line.

• Check for line noise or other line problems.


• The remote machine may be defective or mayhave disconnected.

Cross reference

• Maximum interval between EOLs and betweenECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4

0-22 The signal from the otherend was interrupted formore than the acceptablemodem carrier drop time(default: 200 ms)




• Defective remote terminal.

• Check for line noise or other line problems.

• Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier droptime.

Cross reference

• Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch

0A, bits 0 and 1

8/12/2019 2238c


ERROR CODES

SM 17 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


0-23 Too many errors duringreception




•

Defective remote terminal.• Check for line noise or other line problems.

• Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.

• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/orrx error criteria.

Cross reference

• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

• Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits0 and 1

0-30 The other terminal did notreply to NSS(A) in AI shortprotocol mode



•

Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.

• The other terminal may not be compatible.

Cross reference

• Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4

0-32 The other terminal sent aDCS, which containedfunctions that the receivingmachine cannot handle.

• Check the protocol dump list.

• Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.

0-52 Polarity changed duringcommunication

• Check the line connection.Retry communication.

0-70 The communication mode

specified in CM/JM was notavailable

(V.8 calling and calledterminal)

• The other terminal did not have a compatiblecommunication mode (e.g., the other terminalwas a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)

• A polling tx file was not ready at the otherterminal when polling rx was initiated from thecalling terminal.

0-74 The calling terminal fell backto T.30 mode, because itcould not detect ANSamafter sending CI.

• The calling terminal could not detect ANSam dueto noise, etc.

• ANSam was too short to detect.

• Check the line connection and condition.

• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-75 The called terminal fell backto T.30 mode, because itcould not detect a CM inresponse to ANSam(ANSam timeout).

• The terminal could not detect ANSam.• Check the line connection and condition.

• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-76 The calling terminal fell backto T.30 mode, because itcould not detect a JM inresponse to a CM

(CM timeout).

• The called terminal could not detect a CM due tonoise, etc.


• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.

8/12/2019 2238c


ERROR CODES

B603 18 SM


0-77 The called terminal fell backto T.30 mode, because itcould not detect a CJ inresponse to JM

(JM timeout).

• The calling terminal could not detect a JM due tonoise, etc.

• A network that has narrow bandwidth cannotpass JM to the other end.


• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-79 The called terminal detectedCI while waiting for a V.21signal.

Check for line noise or other line problems.

If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back toT.30 mode.

0-80 The line was disconnecteddue to a timeout in V.34phase 2 – line probing.

0-81 The line was disconnecteddue to a timeout in V.34phase 3 – equalizer training.

0-82 The line was disconnecteddue to a timeout in the V.34phase 4 – control channelstart-up.

0-83 The line was disconnecteddue to a timeout in the V.34control channel restartsequence.

• The guard timer expired while starting thesephases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or lowsignal level can cause these errors.

If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:

• Try making a call at a later time.

•

Try using V.17 or a slower modem usingdedicated tx parameters.

• Try increasing the tx level.

• Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.

If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:

• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.

• Try increasing the tx level.

• Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the sameerror is frequent when receiving from multiplesenders.

0-84 The line was disconnecteddue to abnormal signaling in

V.34 phase 4 – controlchannel start-up.

• The signal did not stop within 10 s.

• Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

• If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.

0-85 The line was disconnecteddue to abnormal signaling inV.34 control channel restart.

• The signal did not stop within 10 s.


• If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.

0-86 The line was disconnectedbecause the other terminalrequested a data rate usingMPh that was not availablein the currently selectedsymbol rate.

• The other terminal was incompatible.

• Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.

0-87 The control channel startedafter an unsuccessfulprimary channel.

•

The receiving terminal restarted the controlchannel because data reception in the primarychannel was not successful.

• This does not result in an error communication.

0-88 The line was disconnectedbecause PPR wastransmitted/received 9(default) times within thesame ECM frame.

• Try using a lower data rate at the start.

• Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.

2-10 The modem cannot enter txmode

• Replace the FCU.

2-11 Only one V.21 connection

flag was received


8/12/2019 2238c


ERROR CODES

SM 19 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU.

2-13 Modem initialization error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

• Update the modem ROM.

• Replace the FCU.2-20 Abnormal coding/decoding

(cpu not ready)• Replace the FCU.

2-23 JBIG compression orreconstruction error


• Replace the EXFUNC board if the error isfrequent.

2-24 JBIG ASIC error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

• Replace the EXFUNC board if the error isfrequent.

2-25 JBIG data reconstructionerror (BIH error)

2-26 JBIG data reconstructionerror (Float marker error)

2-27 JBIG data reconstructionerror (End marker error)

2-28 JBIG data reconstructionerror (Timeout)

• JBIG data error

• Check the sender’s JBIG function.

• Update the MBU ROM.

2-50 The machine resets itself fora fatal FCU system error

• If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace theFCU.

2-51 The machine resets itselfbecause of a fatalcommunication error

• If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace theFCU.

4-01 Line current was cut • Check the line connector.

• Check the connection between FCU and NCU.


• Replace the FCU or the NCU.

4-10 Communication failedbecause of an ID Codemismatch (Closed Network)or Tel. No./CSI mismatch(Protection against WrongConnections)

• Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIsprogrammed correctly, then resend.

• The machine at the other end may be defective.

5-00 Data construction notpossible

5-01 Data reconstruction notpossible

5-10 DCR timer expired


5-20 Storage impossible becauseof a lack of memory

• Temporary memory shortage.

• Test the SAF memory.

• Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board

5-21 Memory overflow

5-22 Mode table overflow afterthe second page of ascanned document

• Wait for the messages which are currently in thememory to be sent or delete some files frommemory.

8/12/2019 2238c


ERROR CODES

B603 20 SM


5-23 Print data error whenprinting a substitute rx orconfidential rx message

• Test the SAF memory.

• Ask the other end to resend the message.

• Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.

5-24 Memory overflow after thesecond page of a scanneddocument

• Try using a lower resolution setting.• Wait for the messages which are currently in the

memory to be sent or delete some files frommemory.

5-25 SAF file access error • Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.

6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time outduring reception of facsimiledata

6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signalwas received

6-02 G3 ECM - EOR wasreceived

• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.

• Replace the FCU or NCU.

6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected • Check the line connection.

• Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.

• Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.


6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile dataframe not received within 18s of CFR, but there was noline fail


• Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.

• Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.


• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer

Cross reference

•

Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding

error• Defective FCU.

• The other terminal may be defective.

6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN receivedin reply to PPS.NULL

• The other end pressed Stop duringcommunication.

• The other terminal may be defective.

6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received • Check for a noisy line.

• Adjust the tx levels of the communicatingmachines.

• See code 6-05.

6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still

received at the other endafter all communicationattempts at 2400 bps

• Check for line noise.

• Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or thededicated tx parameter for that address).



6-21 V.21 flag detected duringhigh speed modemcommunication

• The other terminal may be defective orincompatible.

6-22 The machine resets thesequence because of anabnormal handshake in theV.34 control channel

• Check for line noise.

• If the same error occurs frequently, replace theFCU.


6-99 V.21 signal not stoppedwithin 6 s•

Replace the FCU.

8/12/2019 2238c


ERROR CODES

SM 21 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


22-00 Original length exceeded themaximum scan length

• Divide the original into more than one page.

• Check the resolution used for scanning. Lowerthe scan resolution if possible.

•

Add optional page memory.22-01 Memory overflow while

receiving• Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.

• Delete unnecessary files from memory.

• Transfer the substitute reception files to ananother fax machine, if the machine’s printer isbusy or out of order.

• Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.

22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due toline disconnection at theother end

• The job started normally but did not finishnormally; data may or may not have beenreceived fully.

• Restart the machine.

22-04 The machine cannot storereceived data in the SAF

• Update the ROM


23-00 Data read timeout duringconstruction

• Restart the machine.

• Replace the FCU

25-00 The machine softwareresets itself after a fataltransmission error occurred

• Update the ROM


31-21 LAN Fax Error • It was cancelled received LAN Fax images duringstore the image to SAF of FCU.

• The LAN Fax transmission of a message wascancelled by the LAN Fax driver.

F0-xx V.34 modem error • Replace the FCU.

Rev. 10/15/2009

8/12/2019 2238c


FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES

B603 22 SM

2.2 FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES

SC871 FCU Flash ROM Abnormal

Message: Flash ROM error.

Quick Dial Table is UnavailablePlease call service.

The flash ROM mounted in the fax unit where the address book is stored has beendetected as abnormal.


FCU Flash ROM Access Limit Exceeded

Message: Flash ROM replacement is nownecessary for the Quick Dial Table.

The access limit of the flash ROM mounted in the fax unit has exceeded the limit.You can continue to use the machine after this error occurs.


SRAM Abnormal

Message: Functional problems with facsimile.Data will be initialized.

This message may appear immediately after the fax unit is installed, or when theSRAM (backup RAM) is detected abnormal.

On this message screen:

• Initialize SRAM.

• Set the SRAM backup switch to ON.

Expansion SRAM Abnormal

Message: Some data will be deleted by installing Fax Memory Board.Will you continue to install it? If you want to cancel, turn main power switchoff and take the Board out.

This message may appear immediately after installation of the Function UpgradeKit, or when the SRAM (backup RAM) is detected abnormal.

On this message screen:

• Initialize the expansion SRAM

• For the Function Upgrade Kit, set the backup switch to ON.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 23 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

3. SERVICE TABLES

!CAUTION

Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation powerswitch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and thenswitch the main power switch off.

NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF isopen, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or thenetwork server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memoryfor reading or writing data.

3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

3.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION

The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,and adjust values.

Entering and Exiting SP mode

" 1.

Press the Clear Mode key.

$%& 2. Use the keypad to enter “107”.

' 3.

Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.

Fax SP 4.

On the touch-panel, press Fax SP.

Exit 5.

Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.

8/12/2019 2238c



B603 24 SM

SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) ! Section 3.2 Bit Switches

1 Mode No. Function

System Switch101

001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for system settingsfor the fax option! Section 3.2 Bit Switches

102 IFAX SW (! Internet Fax (IFAX) Model J-C1 Service Manual)

Printer Switch103

001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for printer settingsfor the fax option! Section 3.2 Bit Switches

Communication Switch104

001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for communicationsettings for the fax option! Section 3.2 Bit Switches

G3-1 Switch105001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol

settings of the standard G3 board ! Section 3.2 Bit Switches

G3-2 Switch106

001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocolsettings of the optional G3 board! Section 3.2 Bit Switches

G4 Internal Switch108

001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for the optionalISDN settings! Section 3.2 Bit Switches

(Japan Only)

G4 Parameter Switch109

001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for optional ISDNparameters! Section 3.2 Bit Switches

(Japan Only)

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 25 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

SP2-XXX (RAM Data)

2 Mode No. Function

RAM Read/Write101

001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly.! Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses

Memory Dump

001 G3-1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board.! Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses

002 G3-2 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SG3-1 board.

102

004 G4 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.

(Japan Only)

G3-1 NCU Parameters103

001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the standardG3 board.! Section 3.3 NCU Parameters

G3-2 NCU Parameters104

001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3board.! Section 3.3 NCU Parameters

SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)

3 Mode No. Function

Service Station

001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.

101

002 Select Line Select the line type.

Serial Number102

000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.PSTN-1 Port Settings

001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.If the machine is installed on a PABX line,select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or“PABX(FLASH)”.

002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for theG3-1 line.

103

003 Memory LockDisabled

If the customer does not want to receivetransmissions using Memory Lock on thisline, turn this SP on.

PSTN-2 Port Settings

001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. Ifthe machine is installed on a PABX line,select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or“PABX(FLASH)”.

002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-2 line.


If the customer does not want to receivetransmissions using Memory Lock on thisline, change this SP to on.

104

004 TransmissionDisabled

If you turn this SP on, the machine does notsend any fax messages on the G3-2 line.

8/12/2019 2238c



B603 26 SM

3 Mode No. Function

106 ISDN Port Settings

001 Select Line Select the line setting for the ISDN line. Ifthe machine is installed to the PABX line,

select “PABX”. (Japan Only) 002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for ISDN

line. (Japan Only)


If the customer does not want to receivetransmissions using Memory Lock on thisline, change this SP to on. (Japan Only)

004 TransmissionDisabled

If you turn this SP on, the machine does notsend any fax messages on the ISDN line.(Japan Only)

FAX Switches201

001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for scannersettings for the fax option

! Section 3.2.2 Fax Switches

SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)

4 Mode No. Function

101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.

102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.

103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.

104 001 G3-2 ROM Version Displays the G3-2 modem version.

106 001 G4 ROM Version Displays the G4 (ISDN) ROM version.

(Japan Only) 107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used.

SP5-XXX (Initializing)

5 Mode No. Function

Initialize SRAM101

000 Initializes the bit switches and userparameters, user data in the SRAM, files inthe SAF memory, and clock.

Erase All Files102

000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.Reset Bit Switches103

000 Resets the bit switches and userparameters.

Factory setting104

000 Resets the bit switches and userparameters, user data in the SRAM andfiles in the SAF memory.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 27 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

SP6-XXX (Reports)

6 Mode No. Function

System Parameter List101

000 Touch the “ON” button to print the systemparameter list.

Service Monitor Report102

000 Touch the “ON” button to print the servicemonitor report.

G3 Protocol Dump List

001 G3 AllCommunications

Prints the protocol dump list of allcommunications for all G3 lines.

002 G3-1 (AllCommunications)

Prints the protocol dump list of allcommunications for the G3-1 line.

003 G3-1 (1

Communication)

Prints the protocol dump list of the last

communication for the G3-1 line.004 G3-2 (All

Communications)Prints the protocol dump list of allcommunications for the G3-2 line.

103

005 G3-2 (1Communication)

Prints the protocol dump list of the lastcommunication for the G3-2 line.

G4 Protocol Dump List

001 Dch + Bch 1

002 Dch

003 Bch 1 Link Layer

004 Dch Link Layer

005 Dch +Bch 2

104

006 Bch 2 Link Layer

Prints the protocol dump lists for the G4line. (Japan Only)

105 All Files print out

000 Prints out all the user files in the SAFmemory, including confidential messages.

NOTE: Do not use this function, unless thecustomer is having trouble printingconfidential messages or recoveringfiles stored using the memory lockfeature.

Journal Print out

001 All Journals The machine prints all the communicationrecords on the report.

106

002 Specified Date The machine prints all communicationrecords after the specified date.

8/12/2019 2238c



B603 28 SM

6 Mode No. Function

Log List Print out

001 All log files

002 Printer003 SC/TRAP Stored

004 Decompression

These log print out functions are for

designer use only.

005 Scanner

006 JOB/SAF

007 Reconstruction

008 JBIG

009 Fax Driver

010 G3 CCU

011 Fax Job

012 CCU

107

013 Scanner Condition

These log print out functions are fordesigner use only.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 29 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

SP7-XXX (Tests)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.

7 Function

101 G3-1 Modem Tests102 G3-1 DTMF Tests

103 Ringer Test

104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)

105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)

106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)

107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)

108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)

109 Recorded Message Test

110 G3-2 Modem Tests

111 G3-2 DTMF Tests

112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)

114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)

115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)

116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)

124 IG3-1 Modem Tests (Japan Only)

125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests (Japan Only)

126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) (Japan Only)




130 IG3-1 V34 (S3429baud) (Japan Only) 131 IG3-2 Modem Tests (Japan Only)

132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests (Japan Only)






8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 30 SM

3.2 BIT SWITCHES

!WARNING

Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”,

as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a mannerthat is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in otherareas, such as Japan.

NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to theSystem Parameter List printed by the machine.

3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Dedicated transmissionparameter programming0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicatedtransmission parameters.

Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicatedtransmission parameters.

1 Not used Do not change the setting.

Technical data printout on theJournal0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: Instead of the personal name, the following dataare listed on the Journal for each G3communication.

2

e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04 (1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)(3): Final modem type used(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)(5): Final data rate(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.Note: EQM and rx level are fixed at “FFFF” in tx mode.The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at “00” for transmission records andECM reception records.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 31 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3



2 Rx level calculation

Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04

The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -16 to get the rx level.

In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB

3 Not used Do not change the settings.

4 Line error mark on the receivedpage0: Disabled1: Enabled

If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the left edgeof the page at any place where a line error occurredin the data. Such errors are caused by a noisy linefor example.

5 G3/G4 communicationparameter display0: Disabled1: Enabled

This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the keyparameters (see below). This is normally disabledbecause it cancels the CSI display for the user.Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.

6 Protocol dump list output aftereach communication0: Off1: On

This is only used for communicationtroubleshooting. It shows the content of thetransmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always resetthis bit to 0 after finishing testing.If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is onlyprinted if there was an error during thecommunication.


G3 Communication Parameters

Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps

Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)

D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)

Compression mode MMR: MMR compressionMR: MR compressionMH: MH compressionJBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)

Communication

mode

ECM: With ECM

NML: With no ECM

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 32 SM

Width andreduction

A4: A4 (8.3"), no reductionB4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction

I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line

5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/lineNote: “40” is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI shortprotocol.

System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)



0to1

Not used Do not change the setting.

2 Communication error reset 0: OFF/1: ON

Bit 2 turns on or off the communication error resetswitch. When this switch is on, the system forcefullyterminates the job under the following conditions:

1. A communication job has started, and

2. The job does not end within an hour.

After terminating the job, the system goes back tothe ready status. When this switch is on, the systemcan automatically recover from a communication

error. You cannot adjust the timer for the secondcondition above.


4 File retention time0: Depends on User Parameter24 [18(H)]1: No limit

1: A file that had a communication error will not beerased unless the communication is successful.


6to7

Memory read/write by RDSBit 7 6 Setting

0 0 Always disabled0 1 User selectable

1 0 User selectable1 1 Always enabled

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allowRDS operations to take place. RDS will

automatically be locked out again after a certaintime, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note thatif an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switchoff until this time limit has expired.(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access themachine.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 33 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3



0

to7

Length of time that RDS is

temporarily switched on whenbits 6 and 7 of System Switch02 are set to “User selectable”

00 - 99 hours (BCD).

This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of SystemSwitch 02 are set to “User selectable”.The default setting is 24 hours.



0 Program registration list outputkey display selection

This setting determines whether the key to print theprogram registration list is displayed on the screen.

1-2 Not used Do not change the settings.

3 Printing dedicated txparameters on Quick/SpeedDial Lists0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list isprinted with the dedicated tx parameters (10 byteseach).The first 10 bytes of data are the programmeddedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data areprinted (the other 24 bytes have no use for servicetechnicians).




System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 34 SM



0 Addition of image data from

confidential transmissions onthe transmission result report0: Disabled 1: Enabled

If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first

page of confidential messages will be printed ontransmission result reports.

1 Inclusion of communications onthe Journal when no imagedata was exchanged.0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Communications that reached phase C (messagetx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.1: Communications that reached phase A (callsetup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.This will include telephone calls.

2 Automatic error report printout0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Error reports will not be printed.1: Error reports will be printed automatically afterfailed communications.

3 Printing of the error code on the

error report0: No 1: Yes

1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.


5 Power failure report0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: A power failure report will be automatically printedafter the power is switched on if a fax messagedisappeared from the memory when the power wasturned off last.

6 Conditions for printing theprotocol dump list0: Print for all communications1: Print only when there is acommunication error

This switch becomes effective only when systemswitch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.

1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocoldump list only for communications with errors.

7 Priority given to various typesof remote terminal ID whenprinting reports0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.number1: Dial label > Tel. number >RTI > CSI

This bit determines which set of priorities themachine uses when listing remote terminal nameson reports.

Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for theQuick/Speed Dial number.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 35 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

System Switch 0A SP No. 1-101-011



3 Continuous polling reception0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This feature allows a series of stations to be polledin a continuous cycle. This will continue until thepolling reception file is erased.The dialing interval is the same as memorytransmission.

4 Dialing on the ten-key padwhen the external telephone isoff-hook0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while theexternal telephone is off-hook. Use this setting whenthe external telephone is not by the machine, or if awireless telephone is connected as an externaltelephone.1: The user can dial on the machine’s ten-key padwhen the handset is off-hook.

5 On hook dial0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: On hook dial is disabled.


7 Line used when the machinefalls back to G3 from G4 if theother end is not a G4 machine0: PSTN 1: ISDN (Japan Only)

This bit switch has no effect if CommunicationSwitch 07 bit 0 is set to 0.

System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0E SP No. 1-101-015



3 Action when the externalhandset goes off-hook0: Manual tx and rx operation1: Memory tx and rx operation(the display remains the same)

0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the externalhandset is off-hook. However, memory tx is notpossible.1: The display stays in standby mode even whenthe external handset is used, so that other peoplecan use the machine for memory tx operation.

Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with thissetting.


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 36 SM

System Switch 0F SP No. 1-101-016


0

to7

Country/area code for

functional settings (Hex)

00: France 11: USA01: Germany 12: Asia02: UK 13: Japan03: Italy 14: Hong Kong04: Austria 15: South Africa05: Belgium 16: Australia06: Denmark 17: New Zealand07: Finland 18: Singapore08: Ireland 19: Malaysia09: Norway 1A: China0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan

0B: Switz. 1C: Korea0C: Portugal 20: Turkey0D: Holland 21: Greece0E: Spain 22: Hungary0F: Israel 23: Czech10: Canada 24: Poland

This country/area code determines the factory

settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.However, it has no effect on the NCU parametersettings and communication parameter RAMaddresses.

Cross reference NCU country code: Function 06, parameter C.C.




0 TTI printing position0: Superimposed on the pagedata1: Printed before the dataleading edge

Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints informationthat the customer considers to be important (G3transmissions).

1 TSI (G3) or CIL/TID (G4)printing position0: Superimposed on the pagedata1: Printed before the dataleading edge (Japan Only)

Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) or CIL/TID (G4)overprints information that the customer considersto be important.

CIL: Command Information Line (Group 4)

2-6 Not used Do not change the factory setting.

7 Use of parallel memorytransmission with G4transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled (JapanOnly)

This determines whether parallel transmission canbe used with a G4 transmission or not.Note that this bit is only effective if Parallel Memorytransmission is enabled (User Parameter 07 - bit 2).

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 37 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3



0

to7

TTI/CIL printing position in the

main scan direction

TTI/CIL: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm

Input even numbers only.This setting determines the print start position forthe TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. Ifthe TTI is moved too far to the right, it may overwritethe file number which is on the top right of the page.On an A4 page, if the CIL is moved over by morethan 50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.

System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings)





1 Going into the Energy Savermode automatically0: Enabled1: Disabled

1: The machine will restart from the Energy Savermode quickly, because the +5V power supply isactive even in the Energy Saver mode.



System Switch 17 - Not used (do not change the settings)System Switch 18 - Not used (do not change the settings)




3 Selects a temporary addressfor the number PC-FAX #. 0: When prefixed by #, handled only as a stored

address.

1: When prefixed by #, when a digit exists thatprevents handling the transaction as a Coded,

One-Touch, or Group dialing, handles temporarily.

4 Number of jobs controlled forPC-FAX TX

0: 64 Jobs

1: No limitations (butconforms to devicelimitations)

Sets the number of jobs controlled for PC-FAXtransactions. If “1” is selected (no limitations), controlis relinquished to the device (standard 400,expandable to 800).


7 Special Original mode0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a formor letterhead which has a colored or printedbackground, change this bit to “1”. “Original 1” and“Original 2” can be selected in addition to the “Text”,

“Text/Photo” and “Photo” modes.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 38 SM

System Switch 1A SP No. 1-101-026


0

to7

LS RX memory remaining

refresh value setting Sets a value of 4K.

If the amount of memory remaining falls below 4K,documents received in memory are printed to createmore space in memory.

Initial value: 0x80 (512K)

00-FF (0-1020 KB: Hex)

System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 1D SP No. 1-101-030


0 RTI/CSI/CPS display0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of theLCD panel during communication.


System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031


0 Communication after theJournal data storage area has

become full0: Impossible1: Possible

This setting is effective only when Automatic Journalprintout is enabled but the machine cannot print the

report (e.g., no paper).0: If the buffer memory of the communicationrecords for the Journal has become full, faxcommunications will become impossible, to preventoverwriting the communication records before themachine prints them out.1: If the buffer memory of the communicationrecords for the Journal is full, fax communicationsare still possible. But the machine will overwrite theoldest communication records.

Cross Reference

• Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7

• Number of communication records for theJournal:200 records (standard)1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit

installed)

1 Action when the SAF memoryhas become full duringscanning0: The current page is erased.1: The entire file is erased.

0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.

This bit switch is ignored for parallel memorytransmission.

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 40 SM

System Switch 1F SP No. 1-101-032



1 Report printout after an original jam during SAF storage or ifthe SAF memory fills up

0: Enabled1: Disabled

0: When an original jams, or the SAF memoryoverflows during scanning, a report will be printed.

Change this bit to “1” if the customer does not wantto have a report in these cases.

Memory tx – Memory storage report

Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report


3 Received fax print start timing(G3 reception)0: After receiving each page1: After receiving all pages

4 Received fax print start timing

(G4 reception) (Japan Only) 0: After receiving each page1: After receiving all pages

0: The machine prints each page immediately afterthe machine receives it.

1: The machine prints the complete message afterthe machine receives all the pages in the memory.

5-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

7 Action when a fax SC hasoccurred0: Automatic reset1: Fax unit stops

0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code otherthan SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automaticallyresets itself.1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, thefax unit stops.

Cross Reference Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 41 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

3.2.2 FAX SWITCHES

FAX Switch 00 - Not used (do not change the settings)

FAX Switch 01 SP No. 3-201-002


0to7

Scan density step value(Text mode)

When scan density is adjusted manually away fromthe Normal setting, the threshold value for binarypicture processing changes for each step from thevalue specified by Scanner Switch 02, by theamount programmed here.For example, with the default setting (14), thethreshold value changes as follows.+3 (Darkest) : 71 (= 85 – 14)+2 : 85 (= 99 – 14)+1 : 99 (= 113 – 14)0 (Normal) : 113 (Scanner Switch 02 setting)-1 : 127 (= 113 + 14)-2 : 141 (= 127 + 14)-3 (Lightest) : 155 (= 141 + 14)

For smaller steps, input a lower value.



0to7

Binary picture processing:Threshold for Text mode -Normal setting (center position)

This setting determines the threshold value forbinary picture processing in Text mode (when thescan density setting is at the center).The value can be between 01 and FF. For a darkerthreshold, input a lower value.Default setting: 71(H) = 113(D)

FAX Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings)



0to7

Binary picture processing:Threshold for monotonebackground special original 1mode - Normal setting (centerposition)

This setting determines the threshold value forbinary picture processing in monotone backgroundspecial original 1 mode (when the scan densitysetting is at the center).The value can be between 01 and FF. For a darkerthreshold, input a lower value.Default setting: A4(H) = 164(D)

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 42 SM



0

to7

Binary picture processing:

Threshold for coloredbackground special original 2mode - Normal setting (centerposition)

This setting determines the threshold value for

binary picture processing in colored backgroundspecial original 2 mode (when the scan densitysetting is at the center).The value can be between 01 and FF. For a darkerthreshold, input a lower value.Default setting: 28(H) = 40(D)



0to

3

MTF filter level (Text mode)The value can be between 0(Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower value.

Default setting: 7This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes.

4to7

MTF filter level (Text/Photo mode)The value can be between 0(Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower value.Default setting: 7

This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes.



0

to2

Smoothing filter level (Photo

mode)

The value can be between 0(Off) and 7. For a

weaker threshold, input a lower value.Default setting: 2This setting is independent from the thresholdsetting specified by the copier SP modes.


FAX Switch 08 – Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 3-201-009

FAX Switch 09 – Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 3-201-010

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 43 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

FAX Switch 0A SP No. 3-201-011



4 to 7 MTF filter level (Colored background special original mode)The value can be between 0 (Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lowervalue.Default setting: 7

This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes.

FAX Switch 0B SP No. 3-201-012


0to3

Scan margin setting (right and left margin in book scan ADF mode)The setting can be between 0 and F (H) (unit 0.5 mm).Default setting: 2 mm

4to7

Scan margin setting (top and bottom margin in book scan and ADF mode)The setting can be between 0 and 7 (H) (unit 0.5 mm).Default setting: 3 mm

FAX Switch 0C SP No. 3-201-013


0 Action when an original jamhas occurred while scanningthe original into memory for

memory tx0: Continues scanning afterrecovery1: Stops scanning and erasesall scanned pages for that job

This bit is only effective when parallel memory tx isdisabled (user parameter 07 - bit 2).If parallel memory tx is enabled, the machine alwayserases the scanned pages when an original jam

occurs. The machine then asks the user to retry fromthe first page, even if the parallel memory tx is notactually used.0: The machine displays a message asking the user toput the jammed page back into the original stack, andcontinues scanning.The message is displayed for the time period specifiedby scanner switch 0E, bit 2.1: The machine erases all the scanned pages andasks the user to retry from the first page.

1 to 2 Setting when an original sizecannot be recognizedBit 2 1 Setting

0 0 No original

0 1 A5 ( 1 0 A5 ) 1 1 No original


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 44 SM

FAX Switch 0D SP No. 3-201-014



7 Scan width for A5 lengthwise orB5 lengthwise originals0: 210 mm (8.5”)1: Original width

0: The machine scans the original as 210 mm (8.5")width. The transmitted image has a blank area onthe right.1: The machine scans 148 mm (A5) or 182 mm (B5)and centers the scanned data on a 216 mm widthtransmitted image.

FAX Switch 0E SP No. 3-201-015



1 Scan resolution unit

0: mm1: inches

This bit determines which resolution unit will be

used for scanning a fax message.Default setting: mm


FAX Switch 0F SP No. 3-201-015


0 A4/LT LEF-to-SEF turn 0: OFF/1: ON

Bit 0 activates or deactivates the A4/LT LEF-to-SEF turn function. When this function isactivated, the machine sends A4/LT SEF dataeven when the machine has fed an A4/LT LEF

original.1 Not used Do not change the setting.

2 A5/HLT SEF-to-LEF turn 0: OFF/1: ON

Bit 2 activates or deactivates the A5/HLT SEF-to-LEF turn function. When this function isactivated, the machine sends A5/HLT LEF dataeven when the machine has fed an A5/HLTSEF original.


FAX Switch 10 ~ 1F - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 3-201-016

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 45 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001


0 Page separation mark0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: No marks are printed.1: If a received page has to be printed out on twosheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printedat the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,and a “2” inside a small box is printed at the top righthand corner of the second sheet. This helps theuser to identify pages that have been split.

1 Repetition of data when thereceived page is longer thanthe printer paper0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: The next page continues from where the previouspage left off.1: The final few mm of the previous page arerepeated at the top of the next page. The amount ofrepeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5and 6.

2 Prints the date and time onreceived fax messages0: Disabled1: Enabled

This switch is only effective when user parameter 02- bit 2 (printing the received date and time onreceived fax messages) is enabled.1: The machine prints the received and printed dateand time at the bottom of each received page.





3-4 Maximum print width used inthe setup protocolBit 4 3 Setting

0 0 Not used0 1 A31 0 B41 1 A4

These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printerswitch 01 is “1”.


7 Received message widthrestriction in the protocol signalto the sender0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: The machine informs the transmitting machine ofthe print width depending on the paper sizeavailable from the paper feed stations.Refer to the table on the next page for how the

machine chooses the paper width used in the setupprotocol (NSF/DIS).1: The machine informs the transmitting machine ofthe fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and4 above.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 46 SM

Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in thesetup protocol

Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)

A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width

B5 256 mm width

A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width

No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width



0 1st paper feed station usage forfax printing0: Enabled1: Disabled

1 2nd paper feed station usagefor fax printing0: Enabled 1: Disabled

2 3rd paper feed station usagefor fax printing0: Enabled 1: Disabled

3 4th paper feed station usagefor fax printing0: Enabled1: Disabled

4 LCT usage for fax printing0: Enabled1: Disabled

0: The paper feed station can be used to print faxmessages and reports.

1: The specified paper feed station will not be used

for printing fax messages and reports.

Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed stationwhich has been specified by User Parameter Switch0F (15), or which is used for the Specified CassetteSelection feature.




0 Length reduction of receiveddata0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Incoming pages are printed without lengthreduction.(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4to 7)

1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,bits 0 to 4)

1-3 Not used Do not change the settings

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 47 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3



4to7

Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)

If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excessportion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than thelength of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.The value of x is determined by these four bits.

Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)0 01 1

and so on untilF 15

Default setting: 6 mm

Cross reference Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0



0to4

Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)“N” is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.

Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting0 0 0 0 0 0 mm

0 0 0 0 1 5 mm

0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)

1 1 1 1 1 155 mm

For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)

5to6

Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has takenplace.

UsedNot

1

1mm,15

1

0mm,10

0

1mm,4

0

0=!!

"

#$$

%

& =!!

"

#$$

%

& =!!

"

#$$

%

& =!!

"

#$$

%

&

7 Not used. Do not change the setting.

Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 48 SM



0 Printing while a paper cassette

is pulled out, when the JustSize Printing feature isenabled.0: Printing will not start1: Printing will start if anothercassette has a suitable size ofpaper, based on the paper sizeselection priority tables.

Cross reference

Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5

1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.


No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Reduction for Journal printing

0: Off1: On

1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure thatthere is enough space in the left margin for punchholes or staples.


4 List of destinations in theCommunication Failure Reportfor broadcasting0: All destinations1: Only destinations wherecommunication failure occurred

1: Only destinations where communication failureoccurred are printed on the Communication FailureReport.




Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015

No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Paper size selection priority

0: Width1: Length

0: A paper size that has the same width as thereceived data is selected first.1: A paper size which has enough length to print allthe received lines without reduction is selected first.

1 Paper size selected forprinting A4 width fax data0: 8.5" x 11" size1: A4 size

This switch determines which paper size is selectedfor printing A4 width fax data, when the machine hasboth A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 49 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015


2 Page separation0: Enabled1: Disabled

1: If all paper sizes in the machine require pageseparation to print a received fax message, themachine does not print the message (SubstituteReception is used). After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, themachine automatically prints the fax message.

3to4

Printing the sample image onreportsBit 4 Bit 3 Setting

0 0 The upper halfonly

0 1 50% reductionin sub-scan only

1 0 Same size1 1 Not used

“Same size” means the sample image is printed at100%, even if page separation occurs.

User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to“0” to enable this switch.

Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more onthis feature.


7 Equalizing the reduction ratioamong separated pages(Page Separation)0: Enabled1: Disabled

0: When page separation has taken place, all thepages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selectedpaper size when page separation has taken place.Other pages are printed without reduction.

Printer Switch 0F SP No. 1-103-016


0

to1

Smoothing feature

Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled0 1 Disabled1 0 Enabled1 1 Not used

(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine

receives halftone images from other manufacturersfax machines frequently.

2 Duplex printing0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: The machine always prints received faxmessages in duplex printing mode:

3 Binding direction for Duplexprinting0: Left binding1: Top binding

4 Printing fax messages in usercode mode0: Enabled1: Disabled

1: The machine holds the received fax messagesuntil the machine exits the restricted access mode(user code or key counter).If the machine enters the restricted access modeagain while printing fax messages, the machinestops printing the machine exits the mode again.


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 50 SM

3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001


0to1

Compression modes availablein receive mode Bit 1 0 Modes

0 0 MH only0 1 MH/MR1 0 MH/MR/MMR1 1 MH/MR/MMR/

JBIG

These bits determine the compression capabilitiesto be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30protocol.

2to3

Compression modes availablein transmit modeBit 3 2 Modes

0 0 MH only0 1 MH/MR1 0 MH/MR/MMR1 1 MH/MR/MMR/

JBIG

These bits determine the compression capabilitiesto be used in the transmission and to be declared inphase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.


5 JBIG compression method:Reception0: Only basic supported1: Basic and optional bothsupported

Change the setting when communication problemsoccur using JBIG compression.

6 JBIG compression method:Transmission0: Basic mode priority1: Optional mode priority

Change the setting when communication problemsoccur using JBIG compression.

7 Closed network (reception)0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of theother terminal does not match the ID code of thisterminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSSmode.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 51 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3



0 ECM

0: Off 1: On

If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all

communications.In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression areswitched off automatically.


2to3

Wrong connection preventionmethodBit 3 Bit 2 Setting

0 0 None0 1 8 digit CSI1 0 4 digit CSI1 1 CSI/RTI

(0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line withoutsending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of thereceived CSI do not match the last 8 digits of thedialed telephone number. This does not work whenmanually dialed.(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last4 digits are compared.(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without

sending a fax message, if the other end does notidentify itself with an RTI or CSI.(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will alwaysgo ahead.

Note: This function does not work when dialing isdone from the external telephone.


6to7

Maximum printable page lengthavailableBit 7 6 Setting

0 0 No limit

0 1 B4 (364 mm)1 0 A4 (297 mm)1 1 Not used

The setting determined by these bits is informed tothe transmitting terminal in the pre-messageprotocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).



0 Burst error threshold 0: Low 1: High

If there are more consecutive error lines in thereceived page than the threshold, the machine willsend a negative response.The Low and High threshold values depend on thesub-scan resolution, and are as follows.

Resolution 100 dpi 200 dpi 400 dpi3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm 15.4 l/mm

Low settings 6 12 24High settings 12 24 48

1 Acceptable total error line ratio0: 5% 1: 10%

If the error line ratio for a page exceeds theacceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.

2 Treatment of pages receivedwith errors during G3 reception0: Deleted from memorywithout printing1: Printed

0: Pages received with errors are not printed.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 52 SM



3 Hang-up decision when anegative code (RTN or PIN) isreceived during G3 immediatetransmission0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up

0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN isreceived.1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if itreceives RTN or PIN.

This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or ifECM is being used.


7 Method of total error ratecalculation0: Normal method1: French PTT requirement

0: Error rate is calculated by dividing the number oftotal lines by the number of error lines.

1: Error rate is calculated by dividing the number oftotal plus error lines by the number of error lines.

Communication Switch 03 SP No. 1-104-004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to7

Maximum number of pageretransmissions in a G3memory transmission

00 - FF (Hex) times.This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.Default setting - 03(H)

Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)



8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 53 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3



0 Fallback from G4 to G3 if the

other terminal is not a G4terminal0: Disabled1: Enabled (Japan Only)

Also see system switch 0A bit 7.

Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual (G4Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 1C) for theCPS code set (Cause Value set) that determines G4to G3 fallback.



3 Fallback from G4 to G3reflected in programmedQuick/Speed dials0: Fallback enabled1: Always start with G4

(Japan Only)

0: If a communication falls back from G4 to G3, themachine will always start transmission with G3 fromthe next communication.1: The machine will always start to transmit with G4.

4 Fallback from G4 to G3 whenG4 communication fails on theISDN B-channel0: Fallback disabled1: Fallback enabled

(Japan Only)

1: Enable this switch only when G4 communicationerrors occur because the exchanger connects G4calls to the PSTN.This problem occurs with some types of exchanger.




Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0A SP No. 1-104-011


0 Point of resumption of memorytransmission upon redialing0: From the error page1: From page 1

0: The transmission begins from the page wheretransmission failed the previous time.1: Transmission begins from the first page, usingnormal memory transmission.


7 Emergency calls using 999

0: Enabled 1: Disabled

If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to

dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTTrequirement in the Hong Kong.

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 55 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

Communication Switch 0C SP No. 1-104-013


0

to4

Number of digits compared to

find the requester’s fax numberfrom the programmedQuick/Speed Dials when actingas a Transfer Station

00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)

After the machine receives a transfer request, themachine compares the own telephone number sentfrom the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/SpeedDials programmed in the machine, starting fromQuick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.This number determines how many digits from theend of the telephone numbers the machinecompares.If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report tothe first Quick/Speed Dial that the machinecompared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, themachine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick

Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and QuickDial 05 is programmed, the machine will send thereport to Quick 05.Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits


Communication Switch 0D SP No. 1-104-014


0to7

The available memorythreshold, below which ringingdetection (and therefore

reception into memory) isdisabled

00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)One page is about 24 kbytes.

The machine refers to this setting before each faxreception. If the amount of remaining memory isbelow this threshold, the machine cannot receiveany fax messages.If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detectringing signals and go into receive mode even ifthere is no memory available. This will result incommunication failure.

Communication Switch 0E SP No. 1-104-015

No FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Minimum interval betweenautomatic dialing attempts

06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)This value is the minimum time that the machinewaits before it dials the next destination.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 56 SM

Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.)


0to7

Memory transmission:Maximum number of dialingattempts to the samedestination

01 - FE (Hex) times

Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.)



0to7

Memory transmission: Intervalbetween dialing attempts to thesame destination

01 - FF (Hex) minutes

Communication Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings.)



0 Inch-to-mm conversion duringtransmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inchformat are transmitted without conversion.In memory transmission, data stored in the SAFmemory in mm format are transmitted withoutconversion.Note: When storing the scanned data into SAFmemory, the fax unit always converts the data intomm format.

1: The machine converts the scanned data or storeddata in the SAF memory to the format which wasspecified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) beforetransmission.

1-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

6to7

Available unit of resolution inwhich fax messages arereceivedBit 7 Bit 6 Unit

0 0 mm0 1 inch1 0 mm and inch

(default)1 1 Not used

For the best performance, do not change the factorysettings.

The setting determined by these bits is informed tothe transmitting terminal in the pre-messageprotocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 57 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3



0 Standard G3 unit0: Disabled1: Enabled (Japan Only)

Set this bit to 0 if the user wants to use only theISDN line (option G4 unit), even for G3communications. However, for ISDN on hookdialing, bit 7 of user parameter 30 must be set to 1.

Note: If the optional G4 unit is not installed, but thisbit is changed to ‘disabled’, no document can betransmitted.

1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2)0: Not installed1: Installed

Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optionalG3 unit.

2 Optional ISDN unit0: Not installed1: Installed (Japan Only)

Change this bit to 1 when installing the optionalISDN unit.





7 G4 Dual communication0: Enabled1: Disabled (Japan Only)

1: The machine uses only one B channel forcommunication. This enables a customer to occupyanother B channel for other purposes such asinternet communication.



0 SEP reception

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: Polling transmission to another maker’s machineusing the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.

1 SUB reception

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: Confidential reception to another maker’smachine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal isdisabled.

2 PWD reception

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)signal reception.


7 Action when there is no boxwith an F-code that matchesthe received SUB code0: Disconnect the line1: Receive the message(using normal reception mode)

Change this setting when the customer requires.



8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 58 SM

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1B SP No. 1-104-028


0to7

Extension access code (0 to 7)to turn V.8 protocol On/Off0: On1: Off

If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocolprocedure, set this bit to “1” to disable V.8.

Example: If “0” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0to 1. When the machine detects “0” as the firstdialed number, it automatically disables V.8protocol. (Alternatively, if “3” is the PSTN accesscode, set bit 3 to 1.)

Communication Switch 1C SP No. 1-104-029 No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to1

Extension access code (8 and9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off0: On1: Off

Refer to communication switch 1E.

Example: If “8” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0to 1. When the machine detects “8” as the firstdialed number, it automatically disables V.8protocol. (If “9” is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)


Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 59 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

3.2.5 G3-1 SWITCHES

G3-1 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001


0to1

Monitor speaker duringcommunication (tx and rx)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled0 1 Up to Phase B1 0 All the time1 1 Not used

(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all throughthe communication.(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B inthe T.30 protocol.(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is onall through the communication. Make sure that youreset these bits after testing.

2 Monitor speaker duringmemory transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memorytransmission.


G3-1 Switch 01 SP No. 1-105-002



4 DIS frame length0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes

1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte willnot be transmitted (set to 1 if there arecommunication problems with PC-based faxeswhich cannot receive the extended DIS frames).


6 CED/ANSam transmission0: Disabled1: Enabled

Do not change this setting, unless thecommunication problem is caused by theCED/ANSam transmission.


G3-1 Switch 02 SP No. 1-105-003


0 G3 protocol mode used0: Standard and non-standard1: Standard only

Change this bit to 1 only when the other end canonly communicate with machines that send T.30-standard frames only.1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used innon-standard mode communication)


5 Use of modem rate history fortransmission usingQuick/Speed Dials0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials alwaysstart from the highest modem rate.1: The machine refers to the modem rate history forcommunications with the same machine whendetermining the most suitable rate for the currentcommunication.

6 AI short protocol (transmissionand reception)0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 FacsimileManual for details about AI Short Protocol.

7 Short preamble0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 FacsimileManual for details about Short Preamble.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 60 SM

G3-1 Switch 03 SP No. 1-105-004


0 DIS detection number

(Echo countermeasure)0: 11: 2

0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same

DIS frame twice.1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for thesecond DIS which is caused by echo on the line.

1 V.8 protocol in manualreception0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSamwhen starting a manual reception.

1: The machine sends ANSam during manualreception.

2 V.8 protocol0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.

Note:

Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is alwaysbad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbpsor lower.

3 ECM frame size0: 256 bytes1: 64 bytes

Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.

4 CTC transmission conditions0: After one PPR signalreceived1: After four PPR signalsreceived (ITU-T standard)

0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back themodem rate after receiving a PPR, if the followingcondition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,9.6, and 7.2 kbps.

NTransmit N send≤ Re

NTransmit- Number of transmitted framesNResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted

1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC todrop back the modem rate after receiving fourPPRs.

PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.

This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the nextpage after receiving a negative

code (RTN or PIN)0: No change 1: Fallback

1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back beforesending the next page if a negative code is

received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.

6 V.8 protocol in manualtransmission0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: The machine detects either ANSam or CEDduring manual transmission.


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 61 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

G3-1 Switch 04 SP No. 1-105-005


0

to3

Training error detection

threshold

0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits

If the number of error bits in the received TCF isbelow this threshold, the machine informs thesender that training has succeeded.


G3-1 Switch 05 SP No. 1-105-006


0to3

Initial Tx modem rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)

0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8 k0 0 1 1 7.2 k0 1 0 0 9.6 k0 1 0 1 12.0 k0 1 1 0 14.4 k0 1 1 1 16.8 k1 0 0 0 19.2 k1 0 0 1 21.6 k1 0 1 0 24.0 k1 0 1 1 26.4 k1 1 0 0 28.8 k1 1 0 1 31.2 k1 1 1 0 33.6 k

Other settings - Not used

These bits set the initial starting modem rate fortransmission.

Use the dedicated transmission parameters if youneed to change this for specific receivers.

If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8protocol should be disabled manually.

Cross reference

V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2

4to5

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or7.2 kbps.Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting 0 0 V.290 1 V.171 0 V.341 1 Not used

These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 62 SM

G3-1 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007


0

to3

Initial Rx modem rate

Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8 k0 0 1 1 7.2 k0 1 0 0 9.6 k0 1 0 1 12.0 k0 1 1 0 14.4 k0 1 1 1 16.8 k1 0 0 0 19.2 k1 0 0 1 21.6 k1 0 1 0 24.0 k1 0 1 1 26.4 k

1 1 0 0 28.8 k1 1 0 1 31.2 k1 1 1 0 33.6 k


These bits set the initial starting modem rate for

reception.

Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problemsduring reception.


Cross reference


4to7

Modem types available forreceptionBit 7 6 5 4 Setting

0 0 0 1 V.27ter0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.290 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29

V.330 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,

V.17/V.330 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,V.17/V33,V.34


The setting of these bits is used to inform thetransmitting terminal of the available modem type forthe machine in receive mode.

If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must bedisabled manually.

Cross reference


G3-1 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008


0to1

PSTN cable equalizer(tx mode: Internal)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 None0 1 Low1 0 Medium1 1 High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire betweenthe modem and the telephone exchange.

Use the dedicated transmission parameters forspecific receivers.

Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more ofthe following symptoms occurs.

• Communication error

• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

Note: This setting is not effective in V.34communications.

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 64 SM

G3-1 Switch 09 SP No. 1-105-010


2to3

ISDN cable equalizer(rx mode: Internal)Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting

0 0 None0 1 Low1 0 Medium1 1 High

(Japan Only)

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire betweenthe modem and the telephone exchange.


• Communication error with error codes such as0-20, 0-23, etc.


Note: This setting is not effective in V.34communications.

4 ISDN cable equalizer(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)

0: Disabled1: Enabled (Japan Only)


5 ISDN cable equalizer(V.34 rx mode: External)0: Disabled1: Enabled (Japan Only)



G3-1 Switch 0A SP No. 1-105-011


0

1

Maximum allowable carrier

drop during image datareceptionBit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)

0 0 2000 1 4001 0 8001 1 Not used

These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop

time.Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 isfrequent.


4 Maximum allowable frameinterval during image datareception.0: 5 s 1: 13 s

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL(end-of-line) signals and the maximum intervalbetween ECM frames from the other end.Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is

frequent.


6 Reconstruction time for the firstline in receive mode0: 6 s 1: 12 s

When the sending terminal is controlled by acomputer, there may be a delay in receiving pagedata after the local machine accepts set-up data andsends CFR. This is outside the T.30recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set thisbit to 1 to give the sending machine more time tosend data.Refer to error code 0-20.ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line shouldcome within 5 s of CFR.


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 65 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

G3-1 Switch 0B SP No. 1-105-012


0 Protocol requirements: Europe

0: Disabled 1: Enabled1 Protocol requirements: Spain

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

2 Protocol requirements:Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

3 Protocol requirements: France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

4 PTT requirements: Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

5 PTT requirements: France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

The machine does not automatically reset these bits

for each country after a country code (SystemSwitch 0F) is programmed.Change the required bits manually at installation.


7 DTS requirements : Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Change this bit manually if required.

G3-1 Switch 0C SP No. 1-105-013


01

Pulse dialing methodBit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 Normal(P=N)0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)

1 0 Sweden(N+1)1 1 Not used

P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.


G3-1 Switch 0D SP No. 1-105-014



2to5

Data rate threshold during V.34receptionBit 5 4 3 2 Setting

0 0 0 0 Normal0 1 1 1 Lower by

one step1 1 1 1 Lower by

two steps

The machine changes the modulation parameters inthe MPh signal to lower the initial modem rateduring V.34 reception. If this switch is set to “0111”,

the machine lowers the initial speed one step, forexample, from 28,800 to 26,400 bps.This switch reduces transmission time if themachine frequently sends PPR signals during V.34reception.


7 B signal detection time for V.34polling transmission0: 75 ms (default setting)1: 65 ms

Change this switch only when there arecommunication errors during V.34 pollingtransmission to a machine with a Panasonicmodem.

8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 66 SM

G3-1 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-1 Switch 0F SP No. 1-105-016 No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Alarm when an error occurredin Phase C or later0: Disabled1: Enabled

If the customer wants to hear an alarm after eacherror communication, change this bit to “1”.

1 Alarm when the handset is off-hook at the end ofcommunication0: Disabled1: Enabled

If the customer wants to hear an alarm if thehandset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,change this bit to “1”.


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 67 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

3.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES

These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.

G3-2 Switch 00 SP No. 1-106-001

No FUNCTION COMMENTS0-1 Monitor speaker during

communication (tx and rx)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled0 1 Up to Phase B1 0 All the time1 1 Not used

(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all throughthe communication.(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B inthe T.30 protocol.(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is onall through the communication. Make sure that youreset these bits after testing.

2 Monitor speaker duringmemory transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memorytransmission.


G3-2 Switch 01 SP No. 1-106-002



4 DIS frame length0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes

1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte willnot be transmitted (set to 1 if there arecommunication problems with PC-based faxeswhich cannot receive the extended DIS frames).


6 CED/ANSam transmission

0: Disabled1: Enabled

Do not change this setting, unless the

communication problem is caused by theCED/ANSam transmission.


G3-2 Switch 02 SP No. 1-106-003


0 G3 protocol mode used0: Standard and non-standard1: Standard only

Change this bit to 1 only when the other end canonly communicate with machines that send T.30-standard frames only.1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used innon-standard mode communication)

1-4 Not used Do not change the settings.5 Use of modem rate history for

transmission usingQuick/Speed Dials0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials alwaysstart from the highest modem rate.1: The machine refers to the modem rate history forcommunications with the same machine whendetermining the most suitable rate for the currentcommunication.

6 AI short protocol (transmissionand reception)0: Disabled 1: Enabled


7 Short preamble0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 FacsimileManual for details about Short Preamble.

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 69 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

G3-2 Switch 05 SP No. 1-106-006


0

to3

Initial Tx modem rate

Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8 k0 0 1 1 7.2 k0 1 0 0 9.6 k0 1 0 1 12.0 k0 1 1 0 14.4 k0 1 1 1 16.8 k1 0 0 0 19.2 k1 0 0 1 21.6 k1 0 1 0 24.0 k1 0 1 1 26.4 k1 1 0 0 28.8 k

1 1 0 1 31.2 k1 1 1 0 33.6 k


These bits set the initial starting modem rate for

transmission.

Use the dedicated transmission parameters if youneed to change this for specific receivers.


Cross reference

V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit 2

4to5

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or7.2 kbps.Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting

0 0 V.290 1 V.171 0 V.341 1 Not used

These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.


G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007


0to3

Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)

0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8 k0 0 1 1 7.2 k0 1 0 0 9.6 k0 1 0 1 12.0 k0 1 1 0 14.4 k0 1 1 1 16.8 k1 0 0 0 19.2 k1 0 0 1 21.6 k1 0 1 0 24.0 k1 0 1 1 26.4 k1 1 0 0 28.8 k1 1 0 1 31.2 k1 1 1 0 33.6 k


These bits set the initial starting modem rate forreception.

Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problemsduring reception.


Cross reference

V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit 2

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

SM 71 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0A SP No. 1-106-011


01

Maximum allowable carrierdrop during image datareceptionBit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)

0 0 2000 1 4001 0 8001 1 Not used

These bits set the acceptable modem carrier droptime.Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 isfrequent.


4 Maximum allowable frame

interval during image datareception.0: 5 s 1: 13 s

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL

(end-of-line) signals and the maximum intervalbetween ECM frames from the other end.Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 isfrequent.


6 Reconstruction time for the firstline in receive mode0: 6 s 1: 12 s

When the sending terminal is controlled by acomputer, there may be a delay in receiving pagedata after the local machine accepts set-up data andsends CFR. This is outside the T.30recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set thisbit to 1 to give the sending machine more time tosend data.

Refer to error code 0-20.ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line shouldcome within 5 s of CFR.


G3-2 Switch 0B SP No. 1-106-012


0 Protocol requirements: Europe0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1 Protocol requirements: Spain0: Disabled 1: Enabled

2 Protocol requirements:Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

3 Protocol requirements: France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

4 PTT requirements: Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

5 PTT requirements: France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

The machine does not automatically reset these bitsfor each country after a country code (SystemSwitch 0F) is programmed.Change the required bits manually at installation.



8/12/2019 2238c


BIT SWITCHES

B603 72 SM

G3-2 Switch 0C SP No. 1-106-013


01

Pulse dialing methodBit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 Normal(P=N)0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)1 0 Sweden

(N+1)1 1 Not used

P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.


G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

8/12/2019 2238c


NCU PARAMETERS

SM 73 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

3.3 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation unitsthat the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The

factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed byRAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameterprogramming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, thiswill be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex codeunless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.

NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.Change the fourth digit from “5” to “6” (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for thesettings for the first optional G3 interface unit.Change the fourth digit from “5” to “7” (e.g. 680500 to 680700) for the

settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.

8/12/2019 2238c


NCU PARAMETERS

B603 74 SM

Address Function Unit Remarks

680500 Country/Area code for NCUparameters

Use the Hex value to program thecountry/area code directly into this

address, or use the decimal value toprogram it using SP2-103-001

Country/Area Decimal Hex France 00 00Germany 01 01UK 02 02Italy 03 03 Austria 04 04Belgium 05 05Denmark 06 06Finland 07 07

Ireland 08 08Norway 09 09Sweden 10 0ASwitzerland 11 0BPortugal 12 0CHolland 13 0DSpain 14 0EIsrael 15 0FUSA 17 11 Asia 18 12Hong Kong 20 14South Africa 21 15 Australia 22 16New Zealand 23 17Singapore 24 18Malaysia 25 19China 26 1ATaiwan 27 1BKorea 28 1CGreece 33 21Hungary 34 22Czech 35 23Poland 36 24

680501 Line current detection time

680502 Line current wait time

680503 Line current drop detect time

20 ms Line current detection isdisabled.

Line current is notdetected if 680501contains FF.

680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit(high byte)

680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit(low byte)

Hz (BCD) If both addresses containFF(H), tone detection isdisabled.

680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit(high byte)

680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit(low byte)


8/12/2019 2238c


NCU PARAMETERS

SM 75 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


680508 PSTN dial tone detection time

680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)

68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)

68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone time68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop time

If 680508 contains FF(H),the machine pauses forthe pause time (address68050D / 68050E).

Italy: See Note 2.

68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)

68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)

20 ms

68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms Detection is disabled ifthis contains FF.

680510 PSTN ring-back tone off detectiontime

20 ms

680511 PSTN detection time for silent periodafter ring-back tone detected (LOW)

20 ms

680512 PSTN detection time for silent period

after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)

20 ms

680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upperlimit (high byte)

680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)


680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)

680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)


680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit(high byte)

680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit(low byte)


680519 PABX dial tone frequency lower limit(high byte)

68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower limit(low byte)


68051B PABX dial tone detection time

68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)

68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)

68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone time

68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop time

If 68051B contains FF,the machine pauses forthe pause time (680520 /680521).

680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)

20 ms

680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms

680523 PABX ringback tone off detectiontime

20 ms

If both addresses containFF(H), tone detection isdisabled.

680524 PABX detection time for silentperiod after ringback tone detected(LOW)

20 ms

680525 PABX detection time for silentperiod after ringback tone detected(HIGH)

20 ms


8/12/2019 2238c


NCU PARAMETERS

B603 76 SM


680526 PABX busy tone frequency upperlimit (high byte)

680527 PABX busy tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)


680528 PABX busy tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)

680529 PABX busy tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)


68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1

68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1

68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2

68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2

68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3

68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3

680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4

680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4

680532 Busy tone continuous tone detectiontime

20 ms

680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cyclesrequired for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).

Tolerance (±)Bit 1 0

0 0 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always0 1 50% be kept at 0.1 0 25%1 1 12.5%

Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

680534 International dial tone frequencyupper limit (high byte)

680535 International dial tone frequencyupper limit (low byte)


680536 International dial tone frequencylower limit (high byte)

680537 International dial tone frequencylower limit (low byte)


680538 International dial tone detection time680539 International dial tone reset time

(LOW)

68053A International dial tone reset time(HIGH)

68053B International dial tone continuoustone time

68053C International dial tone permissibledrop time

If 680538 contains FF,the machine pauses forthe pause time (68053D /68053E).

Belgium: See Note 2.

68053D International dial wait interval (LOW)

68053E International dial wait interval (HIGH)

20 ms

8/12/2019 2238c


NCU PARAMETERS

SM 77 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


68053F Country dial tone upper frequencylimit (HIGH)

680540 Country dial tone upper frequencylimit (LOW)


680541 Country dial tone lower frequencylimit (HIGH)

680542 Country dial tone lower frequencylimit (LOW)

Hz (BCD)


680543 Country dial tone detection time

680544 Country dial tone reset time (LOW)

680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH)

If 680543 contains FF,the machine pauses forthe pause time (680548 /680549).

680546 Country dial tone continuous tonetime

680547 Country dial tone permissible drop

time680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)

680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)

20 ms

68054A Time between opening or closing theDO relay and opening the OHDIrelay

1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.Function 06-2 (parameter11).

68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.

Function 06-2 (parameter12).

68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.


68054D Time between final OHDI relayclosure and DO relay opening orclosing

1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.


This parameter is onlyvalid in Europe.

68054E Minimum pause between dialeddigits (pulse dial mode)

See Note 3 and 8.Function 06-2 (parameter15).

68054F Time waited when a pause isentered at the operation panel

20 ms

Function 06-2 (parameter16). See Note 3.

680550 DTMF tone on time Function 06-2 (parameter

17).680551 DTMF tone off time

1 ms


680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMFsignals while dialing

-N x 0.5 –3.5dBm


See Note 5.

680553 Tone attenuation value differencebetween high frequency tone andlow frequency tone in DTMF signals

-dBm x 0.5 Function 06-2 (parameter20).

The setting must be lessthan –5dBm, and shouldnot exceed the setting at680552h above.

See Note 5.

8/12/2019 2238c


NCU PARAMETERS

B603 78 SM


680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation levelafter dialling

-N x 0.5 –3.5dBm

Function 06-2 (parameter21). See Note 5.

680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation levelafter dialling

-dBm x 0.5 See Note 5

680556 Not used Do not change thesettings.

680557 Time between 68054Dh (NCUparameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCUparameter 15)

1 ms This parameter takeseffect when the countrycode is set to France.

680558 Not used Do not change thesetting.

680559 Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms The Gs relay is closed forthis interval.

68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is openfor this interval.

68055B International dial access code (High)68055C International dial access code (Low)

BCD For a code of 100:68055B - F168055C - 00

68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited foreach pause input afterthe PSTN access code. Ifthis address containsFF[H], the pause timestored in address 68054Fis used.

Do not set a numbermore than 7 in the UK.

68055E Progress tone detection level, andcadence detection enable flags

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm0 0 0 -25.00 0 1 -35.00 1 0 -30.01 0 0 -40.01 1 0 -49.0

Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

68055Fto

680564

Not used Do not change thesettings.

680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD

680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD

For a code of 0:

680565 - FF680566 - F0

680567to

680571


680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:range 1, upper limit

Function 06-2(parameter 02).

680573 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:range 1, lower limit


680574 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:range 2, upper limit


680575 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:

range 2, lower limit

1000/ N(Hz).

Function 06-2 (parameter

05).

8/12/2019 2238c


NCU PARAMETERS

SM 79 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


680576 Number of rings until a call isdetected

1 Function 06-2 (parameter06).

The setting must not bezero.

680577 Minimum required length of the firstring

20 ms See Note 4.


680578 Minimum required length of thesecond and subsequent rings

20 ms Function 06-2 (parameter06-2).

680579 Ringing signal detection reset time(LOW)


68057A Ringing signal detection reset time(HIGH)

20 ms


68057Bto

680580


680581 Interval between dialing the last digitand switching the Oh relay over tothe external telephone when dialingfrom the operation panel in handsetmode.

20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms

680582 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection timeBit 1 0 Setting

0 0 200 ms0 1 800 ms

Other Not used

Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection timeBit 3 2 Setting0 0 200 ms0 1 800 ms

Other Not used

Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

680583to

6805A0


6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequencyupper limit (high byte)

6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequencyupper limit (low byte)

BCD (Hz) If both addresses containFF(H), tone detection is

disabled.

6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequencylower limit (high byte)

6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequencylower limit (low byte)

BCD (Hz) If both addresses containFF(H), tone detection isdisabled.

6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms

± 20 ms

Factory setting: 200 ms

6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection frequencyupper limit (high byte)

6805A7 Acceptable CNG detection frequencyupper limit (low byte)


8/12/2019 2238c


NCU PARAMETERS

B603 80 SM


6805A8 Acceptable CNG detection frequencylower limit (high byte)

6805A9 Acceptable CNG detection frequencylower limit (low byte)


6805AA Not used Do not change thesetting.

6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms

6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms

6805AD Number of CNG cycles required fordetection

The data is coded in thesame way as address680533.

6805AE Not used Do not change thesettings.

6805AF Acceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequency upper

limit (high byte)6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone

(800Hz) detection frequency upperlimit (low byte)

Hz (BCD) If both addresses containFF(H), tone detection is

disabled.

6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequency lowerlimit (high byte)

6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequency lowerlimit (low byte)

Hz(BCD) If both addresses containFF(H), tone detection isdisabled.

6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI shortprotocol tone

20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms

6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm Function 06-2 (parameter01).

6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)

See Note 7.

6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)

See Note 7.

6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm

6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)

6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)

6805BA ISDN: Tx level from the modem(Japan Only)

- dBm The setting must bebetween -12dBm and -15dBm.

6805BB ISDN: 1100 Hz tone transmissionlevel (Japan Only)

- N 6805BA - 0.5N 6805BB (dB)

6805BC ISDN: 2100 Hz tone transmissionlevel (Japan Only)

- N 6805BA - 0.5N 6805BC (dB)

6805BD Modem turn-on level (incomingsignal detection level)

-37-0.5N(dBm)

8/12/2019 2238c


NCU PARAMETERS

SM 81 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


6805BEto

6805C6


6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 – Not used.

Bit 4 – V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)

Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.

6805C8to

6805D9


6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1 s

6805E0bit 3

Maximum wait time for postmessage

0: 12 s

1: 30 s

1: Maximum wait time forpost message(EOP/EOM/MPS) can bechanged to 30 s.

Change this bit to “1” if

communication errorsoccur frequently duringV.17 reception.

6805E4bit 2

Threshold for ring level Change bit 2 to 1

This will increase the threshold forringing level detection.

6805E4bit 3

On-Hook impedance level Change bit 3 0 to 1

This will decrease the on-hookimpedance level

⇒

⇒

Rev. 10/2006

8/12/2019 2238c


NCU PARAMETERS

B603 82 SM

NOTES:

1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.

2. Italy and Belgium only

RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)Bit 1 - Not usedBit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)

If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses arechanged.680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off stateduration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address680533.

68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)

3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.

4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the timespecified by this parameter.

5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:High frequency tone: – 0.5 x N680552/680554 –3.5 dBm

– 0.5 x N680555 dBmLow frequency tone: – 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm – 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm

NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)

6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Dsclosing and Di opening68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Dsopening and Di closing

7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI

short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higherthan 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.

8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is thesum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and68054E.

Rev. 10/2006

8/12/2019 2238c


DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

SM 83 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmableparameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience

problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, andadjust the parameters allocated to that number.

The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will bedescribed.

3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.

2. Press "Dest. Management" in the facsimile standby mode.

3. Press "Program/Change/Delete Quick Dial".

4. Select the destination key you want to program.

5. When the programmed dial number isdisplayed, press "Start".Make sure that the LED of the Startbutton is lit as green.

6. The settings for the switch 01 are nowdisplayed. Press the bit number thatyou wish to change.

7. To scroll through the parameterswitches, either:

8. Select the next switch: press "Next"orSelect the previous switch: "Prev." until the correct switch is displayed.Then go back to step 6.

9. After the setting is changed, press "OK".

10. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.

B603S901.WMF

B603S902.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



B603 84 SM

3.4.2 PARAMETERS

The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters aredisabled.

Switch 00

FUNCTION AND COMMENTS

ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1second.Range: 0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.

Switch 01


0to4

Tx levelBit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 1 -10 0 0 1 0 -20 0 0 1 1 -30 0 1 0 0 -4

::

0 1 1 1 1 -151 1 1 1 1 Disabled

If communication with a particular remote terminaloften contains errors, the signal level may beinappropriate. Adjust the Tx level forcommunications with that terminal until the resultsare better.

If the setting is “Disabled”, the NCU parameter 01setting is used.

Note: Do not use settings other than listed on theleft.

5to7

Cable equalizerBit 7 6 5 Setting

0 0 0 None0 0 1 Low0 1 0 Medium0 1 1 High1 1 1 Disabled

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire betweenthe modem and the telephone exchange whencalling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.


• Communication error with error codes such as0-20, 0-23, etc.



If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting isused.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 85 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

Switch 02


0to

3

Initial Tx modem rateBit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)

0 0 0 0 Not used0 0 0 1 2,4000 0 1 0 4,8000 0 1 1 7,2000 1 0 0 9,6000 1 0 1 12,0000 1 1 0 14,4000 1 1 1 16,8001 0 0 0 19,2001 0 0 1 21,6001 0 1 0 24,0001 0 1 1 26,400

1 1 0 0 28,8001 1 0 1 31,2001 1 1 0 33,6001 1 1 1 Disabled

Other settings: Not used

If training with a particular remote terminal alwaystakes too long, the initial modem rate may be too

high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using thesebits.

For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4must be changed to 0.




6 AI short protocol0: Off

1: Disabled




Switch 03


0

to1

Inch-mm conversion before txBit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 Inch-mmconversionavailable

0 1 Inch only1 0 Not used1 1 Disabled

The machine uses inch-based resolutions forscanning. If “inch only” is selected, the printed copymay be slightly distorted at the other end if thatmachine uses mm-based resolutions.


2to3

DIS/NSF detection methodBit 3 Bit 2 Setting

0 0 First DIS orNSF

0 1 Second DIS orNSF

1 0 Not used1 1 Disabled

(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line areinterfering with the set-up protocol at the start oftransmission. The machine will then wait for thesecond DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.


8/12/2019 2238c



B603 86 SM

Switch 03


4 V.8 protocol0: Off1: Disabled

If transmissions to a specific destination always endat a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.

0: V.34 communication will not be possible.


5 Compression modes availablein transmit mode0: MH only1: Disabled

This bit determines the capabilities that are informedto the other terminal during transmission.If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting isused.

6to7

ECM during transmissionBit 7 Bit 6 Setting

0 0 Off0 1 On

1 0 Not used1 1 Disabled

For example, if ECM is switched on but is notwanted when sending to a particular terminal, usethe (0, 0) setting.

Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression

are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting isused.

Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Switch 06 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required - (Japan Only)


0

to3

Data rate

Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting0 0 0 0 64 kbps0 0 0 1 56 kbps1 1 1 1 Disabled

If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of G4

parameter switch 2 (bits 0 and 1) is used.



8/12/2019 2238c



SM 87 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3



0

to3

Layer 3 protocol

Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 ISO 82080 0 0 1 T.70 NULL1 1 1 1 Disabled

If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of G4

parameter switch 6 (bit 0) is used.

4to7

Packet modulusBits 3 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 Modulo 80 0 0 1 Modulo 1281 1 1 1 Disabled

If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of G4parameter switch 6 (bit 4) is used.


No FUNCTION COMMENTS0to1

Attachment of the Higher LayerCapabilities

This bit determines whether Higher LayerCapabilities are informed in the [SETUP] signal ornot.

2to3

ISDN G3 information transfercapability0: 3.1 kHz audio1: Speech

In tx mode, this determines the information transfercapability informed in the [SETUP] messages.In rx mode, this determines the information transfercapability that the machine can use to receive a call.Set this bit to 1 if the ISDN does not support 3.1 kHzaudio.


8/12/2019 2238c


SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

B603 88 SM

3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

!CAUTION Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”

680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only) 680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)680002(H) - Year (BCD)680003(H) - Month (BCD)680004(H) - Day (BCD)

680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)

680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)

680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches680040 to 68004F(H) - Scanner bit switches680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches

6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used

6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02) Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 1: Center mark printing on received copies(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 2: Reception time printing(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 4: Checkered mark printing(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 5: CIL printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled (Japan Only) Bit 6: TID printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled (Japan Only) Bit 7: Not used

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 89 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic reportprintout) Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Not used

Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: OnBit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On

6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic reportprintout) Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: OnBits 1 to 6: Not used

Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05) Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition0: Enabled, 1: DisabledBits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)

Bit 2 1 Setting0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.1 1 The machine does not receive anything.

Bit 3: Not usedBit 4: Not usedBit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: OnBit 6: Not usedBit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On

6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06) Bits 0 to 5: Not usedBit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission

0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left pageBit 7: Not used

6800D7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07) Bits 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: OnBits 3 to 7: Not used

8/12/2019 2238c



B603 90 SM

6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08) Bits 0 and 1: Not used.Bit 2: Authorized reception

0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature

are accepted.1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature

are accepted.Bits 3 to 7: Not used.

6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used

6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A) Bit 0: Not usedBit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: OnBit 2: Not usedBit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On

Bits 4 to 7: Not used

6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B) Bit 0: Not usedBit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the “Tone” mark over an ISDN line

0: UUI, 1: Tone (Japan Only) Bits 2 to 5: Not usedBit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station

0: Off, 1: OnBit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit

6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used

6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D) (Japan Only) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)Bits 0 to 4: Not usedBit 5: Action when receiving a SETUP signal containing no called number and theG4 subscriber number was programmed in this machine.

0: Respond to the call, 1: Do not respond to the callBit 6: Action when the received HLC (Higher Level Capabilities) is Tel or BC(Bearer Capabilities) is Speech.

0: Do not respond to the call, 1: Respond to the callThis switch determines which information transfer capabilities the machine can

accept when receiving a call.1: When the received HLC is Tel (digital telephone) or BC is Speech (voice), themachine responds to the call. In short, the machine receives every call.This switch is useful for communication problems when the other terminal informsthe above transfer capabilities although it is a fax machine.Bit 7: ISDN SPID programming (used only in the USA)

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 91 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E) Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: OffBit 1: Maximum document length detection

0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) – up to 1,200 mm

Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is pressed

0: Not cleared, 1: ClearedBits 4 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)

0: Off, 1: On

6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F) Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout

Bit 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 1 1st paper feed station0 1 0 2nd paper feed station0 1 1 3rd paper feed station1 0 0 4th paper feed station1 0 1 LCT

Other settings Not usedBits 3 and 4: Not usedBit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: OffBits 6 and 7: Not used

6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

Bits 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size

paper is not available.0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority


6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11) Bits 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials isselected for broadcasting

0:Not needed, 1: Needed

Bits 3 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Press “Start” key without an original when using the on hook dial or theexternal telephone,

0: displays “Cannot detect original size”.1: Receives fax messages.

6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12) Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: OnBit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 4 to 7: Not used

8/12/2019 2238c



B603 92 SM

6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13) Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheetfinisher)

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 1: Journal format0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications

Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassetteselection feature becomes empty.(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not

specified by this feature.

Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Off, 1: OnBit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reductionBit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Off, 1: OnBits 6 and 7: Not used

6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14)Bit 0: Automatic printing of the PC FAX error report

0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Reprint the documents fail to print from PC Fax driver

0: Off, 1: OnBits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC Faxdriver

Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting0 0 0 0 0 min.0 0 0 1 1 min.

↓ ↓ 1 1 1 0 14 min.1 1 1 1 15 min.

Bits 6 and 7: Not used.

6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15) : Not used6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16): Not used6800E7(H) – User Parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 93 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18) Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)

Bit 1 0 Setting0 0 File retention impossible

0 1 24 hours1 0 File retention impossible1 1 72 hours


6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19) Bits 0 to 3: Not usedBit 4: RDS operation

0: Not acceptable1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03

NOTE: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user

(see system switch 02).Bits 5 to 7: Not used

6800EA to 6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 29 (SWUSR_1A to 1D) : Not used

680EE(H) - User parameter switch 30 (SWUSR_1E)Bits 0 to 6: Not usedBit7: On hook dialing

0: PSTN, 1: ISDN (Japan Only)

NOTE: If this bit set to 1, the on hook dialing is available on the ISDN line. But, themachine cannot use the G3 standard analog line for detecting the ringing

and on hook dialing.6800F0 to 6800FF(H) - G4 Parameter Switches (Japan Only) 680100 to 68011F(H) - G4 Internal Switches (Japan Only)

680180 to 68019F(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)See 68036C(H) for the type of network used for this number .

6801A0 to 6801A3(H) - Own fax PABX extension number 6801AA to 6801B3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) 6801B4 to 6801C7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) (Japan Only) 6801C8 to 6801D3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) (Japan Only)6801D4 to 6801DF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) (Japan Only)6801E0 to 6801EB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) (Japan Only) 6801EC to 6801F7(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) (Japan Only)

6801F8 to 68020B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See thenote below.

68020C to 68021F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the notebelow.

680220 to 680233(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the notebelow.

680237 to 680276(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the note below.680277 to 6802B6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the note below.

6802B7 to 6802F6(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following

8/12/2019 2238c



B603 94 SM

6802F7 to 68030A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)68030B to 68031E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)68031F to 680332(H) – PSTN-3 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)680333(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)

680334(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex)680335(H) - Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)

NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 forTTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.

680340 to 680342(H) - PSTN-1 line settings680340Bits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX.

Bit 1 0 Setting0 0 Loop start0 1 Ground start1 0 Flash start1 1 Not used

Bit 2: Telephone line type.0: PSTN, 1: PABX

Bits 3 and 4: Dialing type.Bit 4 3 Setting

0 0 Pulse dialing0 1 Not used1 0 Tone dialing1 1 Not used


680341: PSTN access number for loop start Access number Hex value to program (BCD)

0 F0

↓ ↓ 9 F900 00

↓ ↓ 99 99

680342Bit 0: Transmission disabled

0: Tx and Rx, 1: Rx onlyBit 1: Memory Lock reception

0: Enabled, 1: DisabledBits 2 to 7: Not used

680348 to 68034A(H) - PSTN-2 line settings680350 to 680352(H) - PSTN-3 line settings680358 to 68035A(H) - ISDN line settings (Japan Only)

680360(H) - ID code (low - Hex)680361(H) - ID code (high - Hex)

680362(H) - Confidential ID (low - BCD)680363(H) - Confidential ID (high - BCD)

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 95 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

680364(H) - Memory Lock ID (low - BCD)680365(H) - Memory Lock ID (high - BCD)

68036C(H) - Network type used for the service station number0 1 (H) - PSTN-1

0 2 (H) - PSTN-21 0 (H) - G4 (Japan Only) 0 7 (H) - G3 auto selection

680370 to 680377(H) - Last power off time (Read only)680370(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),

02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)680371(H) - Year (BCD)680372(H) - Month (BCD)680373(H) - Day (BCD)680374(H) - Hour

680375(H) - Minute680376(H) - Second680377(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday

680384(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)Bit 0 to 3: Not usedBit 4: Function Upgrade unit 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 5 to 7: Not used

680385(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)Bit 0: Function Upgrade unit 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 1 to 3: Not used

Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 5: Not usedBit 6: ISDN unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed (Japan Only) Bit 7: Not used

6803B8 to 6803CF(H) - G4 terminal ID (ASCII - Max. 24 characters) (Japan Only) 6803D0 to 6803E3(H) - ISDN CSI (Japan Only) 6803E4(H) - Number of ISDN CSI characters (Hex) (Japan Only) 6803E9 to 6803EC(H) - ISDN G3 sub-address (Japan Only) 6803ED to 6803F0(H) - ISDN G4 sub-address (Japan Only) 6803F1 to 6803F5(H) - SiG4 board ROM information (Read only) (Japan Only)

6803F1(H) - Suffix6803F2(H) - Version (BCD)6803F3(H) - Year (BCD)6803F4(H) - Month (BCD)6803F5(H) - Day (BCD)

6803F6 to 6803FA(H) – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)6803F6(H) - Suffix (BCD)6803F7(H) - Version (BCD)6803F8(H) - Year (BCD)6803F9(H) - Month (BCD)6803FA(H) - Day (BCD)

680402(H) - Option G3 board (G3-2) modem ROM version (Read only)

8/12/2019 2238c



B603 96 SM

680406 to 68040B(H) - Modem ROM version (Read only)680406(H) - Part number (low)680407(H) - Part number (high)680408(H) - Control (low)

680409(H) - Control (high)68040A(H) - DSP (low)68040B(H) - DSP (high)

680464(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)680465(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)

680482(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)680483(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)680484(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)680485(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)680486(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)

6BA000 – 6BA1FF(H) – Latest 64 error codes (Read only)

6BE988 – 6BF35F(H) – Latest 20 error communication records

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERVIEW

SM 97 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3


4.1 OVERVIEW

The basic fax unit consists of three PCBs: an FCU, an MBU and an NCU.

The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation withthe controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. The NCU switchesthe analog line between the fax unit and the external telephone.

Fax Options:

1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This

allows full dual access. Only one extra G3 interface option can be installed. Theoptional G3 unit consists of three PCBs: G3 board, NCU, and CCUIF.

2. Fax Function Upgrade Unit: JBIG compression becomes available. In addition,this expands the system’s SRAM capacity to hold programmed telephonenumbers, memory files, etc.

3. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not bigenough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.

FCU

CCUIF

Expansion

Memory

NCU

Fax Function

Upgrade

MBU Controller

G3NCU

B603D901.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


BOARDS

B603 98 SM

4.2 BOARDS

4.2.1 FCU

The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interfaceto the base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.

FACE2 (Fax Application Control Engine)

• CPU

• Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)

• DMA control

• Clock generation

• DRAM backup control

• Ringing signal/tone detection

FBI (FACE Bridge Interface)

• Interface between the PCI bus and the FACE

• DMA control

Modem (Panasonic MN195006-E)

• V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8

RingDetection

Circuit

OHDISW

TIP

RING

T1

T2

TRXD

CurrentSensor

Hook1

Hook0

OHDI SW.

NCU

JP7

JP8

ExRing

CMLRelay

NoiseFilter

Surge

Protection

Over-

currentProtection Surge

Protection

DC Loop L-

Transformer

CMLSW

Noise

Filter

DB1

B603D902.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


BOARDS

SM 99 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

DRAM

• The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.SAF memory : 4 MBWorking memory : 4 MB

Page memory : 8 MB• The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.

Memory back-up

• A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.

Switches

Item Description

SW1 Reset switch, to reboot the FCU board

4.2.2 MBU

On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM containsthe system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the systemdata and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.

ROM

• 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)

SRAM

• The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by alithium battery.

Memory back-up

• A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items inthe SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.

Switches

Item DescriptionSW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.

8/12/2019 2238c


BOARDS

B603 100 SM

4.2.3 NCU (US)

Jumpers

Item Description

JP7

JP8

These jumpers should be shorted when the machine is connected to a dryline.

DB1 Also remove DB1 when the machine is connected to a dry line.

Ring

Detection

Circuit

OHDISW

TIP

RING

T1

T2

TRXD

Current

Sensor

Hook1

Hook0

OHDI SW.

NCU

JP7

JP8

ExRing

CMLRelay

NoiseFilter

Surge

Protection

Over-current

Protection Surge

Protection

DC LoopL-

Transformer

CMLSW

Noise

Filter

DB1

B603D903.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


BOARDS

SM 101 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

4.2.4 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA)

Control Signals and Jumpers

CSEL1 RSEL

Country CN2-5 CN1-13

CTR21 H H

Australia H H

South Africa H H

Malaysia H H

Hong Kong L L

New Zealand L L

Singapore L L

Asia L L

L: Low, H: High

CTR21 (Common Technical Regulation 21):France, Germany, UK, Italy, Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, Ireland, Norway,Sweden, Switzerland, Portugal, Holland, Spain, Israel, Greece

TIP

RING

SHUNT

GS

T1

R1

TRXD

TIP

R1

SHUNT

GS

T1

OHDISW

Hook0

RSEL

DOSW

DCLSW

Hook1

ExRing

CSELRing

Detection

Circuit

Current

Sensor

CML Relay

DO Sw.

GSSW

OHDI Sw.

GS Sw.

DC-

Loop

CMLLSW

Noise

Filter

B603D904.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


BOARDS

B603 102 SM

4.2.5 SG3-D BOARD

The SG3-D board allows up to two simultaneous communications when used withthe the FCU.

NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)

• Controls the SG3-D board

• CPU (RU30)

• Modem (V.34)• JBIG

Flash ROM

• 8 MB flash ROM shared between the SG3 software and modem softare.

SDRAM

• 16 MB DRAM shared between the ECM buffer, line buffer, and work memory.

CODEC

• Converts analog data to binary data.

• Converts binary data to analog data.

AFE (Analog Front End)

• Analog circuit

• Data transfer

FCUNCCP

CPU

(RU30)Modem JBIG

Flash

ROMSDRAM

DATA/ADDRESS BUS

CODEC AFE NCU

SG3-D

B603D905.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


ADDRESS BOOK

SM 103 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

4.3 ADDRESS BOOK

The address book (directory) for this machine combines under one user name thefax address and mail address.

With Printer Scanner Unit

All the address data is stored on the HDD. Up to a maximum of 2,000 items can bestored for addresses.

Without Optional Printer Scanner Unit (Asia Model Only)

All the address data is stored in the FCU.

• Standard: 500 items

• With Expansion Memory: 500 items

• With Fax Function Upgrade Unit: 1,200 items• With Expansion Memory and Fax Function Upgrade Unit: 1,200

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

B603 104 SM

SPECIFICATIONS

1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Type: Desktop type transceiver

Circuit: PSTN (max. 2ch.)PABX

Connection: Direct couple

Original Size: Book (Face down)Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]

ARDF (Face up)(single sided document)

Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]

(double sided document)Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]

Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD

Resolution: G38 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note116 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note.

200 x 100 dpi (Standard)200 x 200 dpi (Detail)400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note.

Note 1: Optional Expansion Memory required

Transmission Time: G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM usingmemory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) atstandard resolution

Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR

JBIG (optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit required)Protocol: Group 3 with ECM

Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)

Data Rate: G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps Automatic fallback

I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/lineWithout ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 105 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

Memory Capacity: ECM: 128 KB

SAFStandard: 4 MBWith optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)

Page MemoryStandard: 8 MB (Print: 4 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)With optional Expansion Memory: 16 MB (8 MB + 8 MB)

(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 8 MB)

2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item willchange after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.

Item StandardWith Fax Function

Upgrade Unit

Quick Dial 500 1200 (2000*)

Groups 100 100

Destination per Group 500 500

Boxes(Information/Personal/Transfer)

150 400

Destinations dialed from theten-key pad overall

500 2,000

Programs 100 200

Auto Document 6 18

Communication records forJournal stored in the memory

200 1,000

Specific Senders 30 50

*: With the Printer/Scanner Option

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

B603 106 SM

The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory willchange after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memoryare installed.

Without theExpansion Memory

With theExpansionMemory

MemoryTransmission file

400 400

Maximum number ofpage for memorytransmission

1,000 3,000

Memory capacity formemory transmission

(Note1)

Without the FaxFunction Upgrade

Unit

320 2,280

Memory

Transmission file 800 800Maximum number ofpage for memorytransmission

1,000 3,000

Memory capacity formemory transmission

(Note1)

With the FaxFunction Upgrade

Unit

320 2,280

NOTE: 1) Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at thestandard resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 107 B603

F a x O p t i o n

B 6 0 3

3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION

ComponentMachine

CodeRemarks

Fax Unit B603 [A]

Interface Board [B]

G3 Board [C]

NCU

B604

[D]

Included in the optional G3unit.

Fax Function Upgrade Unit A892 [E]

Expansion Memory G578 [F]

Handset B433 [E] For USA model only.

B603V901.WMF

[A] [B]

[D][E]

[F]

[G]

[C]

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM i IFAX

IFAX

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1

1.1 IFAX INSTALLATION...................................................................................11.2 INITIAL SETTINGS ...................................................................................... 1

2. TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................................2

2.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 22.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES .......................................................7

3. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES........................................9

3.1 ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES.............................................................93.2 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH............................................................................... 103.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE......................................................... 163.4 IFAX RAM ADDRESSES............................................................................ 17

4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS.........................................18

4.1 INTERNET FAX.......................................................................................... 184.1.1 INTERNET FAX FEATURES............................................................. 184.1.2 DNS SERVICE ..................................................................................19

4.2 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ........................................................20

4.2.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION...................................................................... 20Procedure ..............................................................................................20Data Formats .........................................................................................20Errors.....................................................................................................20Results...................................................................................................21Selectable Options.................................................................................21Secure Internet Transmission ................................................................22

4.2.2 MAIL RECEPTION ............................................................................ 23POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure ............................................... 23Characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 Reception............................................ 24SMTP Reception....................................................................................24

SMTP Reception Characteristics ........................................................... 25Delivery: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP

(Off Ramp Gateway).......................................................................26Overview................................................................................................26Handling Mail Reception Errors .............................................................29Printing Received Mail ...........................................................................30Multi-part Messages...............................................................................30Manual e-mail reception......................................................................... 30Secure Internet Reception .....................................................................30

4.2.3 MAIL BROADCASTING (E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARE COMBINED)...314.2.4 TRANSFER REQUEST.....................................................................32

Operation at the Transfer Requester .....................................................32

8/12/2019 2238c


IFAX ii SM

Operation at the Transfer Station........................................................... 344.2.5 AUTOROUTING................................................................................ 364.2.6 TRANSFER BOX............................................................................... 36

4.3 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) .......................................................... 37

4.3.1 SUBJECT AND LEVEL OF IMPORTANCE....................................... 37How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................... 37Subjects Displayed on the PC ...............................................................37

4.3.2 E-MAIL MESSAGES.......................................................................... 384.3.3 MESSAGE DISPOSITION NOTIFICATION (MDN) ........................... 39

Handling Mail .........................................................................................40Setting up the Receiving Party............................................................... 41Handling Reports ...................................................................................41

SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................42

1. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................. 42

8/12/2019 2238c


IFAX INSTALLATION

SM 1 IFAX

I F A X

1. INSTALLATION

1.1 IFAX INSTALLATION

IFAX requires the installation of the Fax Unit and the Printer/Scanner Controllers.For details about installation, please refer to the main machine and the Fax Unitmanuals for the machine.

1.2 INITIAL SETTINGS

Users can set the IFAX initial settings. Please refer to the Network Guide OperatingInstructions.

Make sure that the following items are registered in the mail server before machine

installation.• IP address

• Host name

• Mail account and the password

CAUTION: The initial settings include items related to user security, such as thelogin password and IP addresses. So, please ask the user to input theinitial settings of the IFAX. If the user asks you to input the initialsettings, be sure to keep the settings confidential.

To enable IFAX functions, do the following procedure in the User Tools mode:

User Tools > Facsimile Features > E-Mail Settings > Internet Fax Settings

8/12/2019 2238c


ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION

IFAX 2 SM

2. TROUBLESHOOTING

2.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION

If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try tosolve the problem as suggested below.

Code Meaning Cause Action

14-00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to theSMTP server. Occurs for any errorother than 14-01 to 16. For example,the mail address of the systemadministrator is not registered.

• Register the address of thesystem administrator.

• Set the User Parameter Switch21 (15[H]) Bit 4 to “Off”.

14-01 SMTP ConnectionFailed

Failed to connect to the SMTP server(timeout) because the server couldnot be found.

• The IP address for the SMTPserver is not stored in themachine.

• The DNS IP address is notregistered.

• Network not operating correctly.

• Check the IP address of theSMTP/DNS server.

• Check the traffic on the LAN.

•

Check the machine settingssuch as the SMTP port setting,DNS server setting, and so on.

14-02 No Service by SMTPService (421)

SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact the networkadministrator. Confirm correctSMTP server settings andoperation.

14-03 Access to SMTPServer Denied (450)

SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the networkadministrator. Confirm correctSMTP server settings and

operation.14-04 Access to SMTP

Server Denied (550)SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the network

administrator. Confirm correctSMTP server settings andoperation.

14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full(452)

SMTP Server hard disk full. Contact the networkadministrator. Free space on theHDD of the SMTP server.

14-06 User Not Found onSMTP Server (551)

The user does not exist locally. • Check that the mail address iscorrect.

• Contact the networkadministrator. Check that thee-mail the user intended tosend exists on the SMTP

server.14-07 Data Send to SMTP

Server Failed (4XX)SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the network

administrator. Confirm correctSMTP server settings andoperation.

14-08 Data Send to SMTPServer Failed (5XX)

SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the networkadministrator. Confirm correctSMTP server settings andoperation.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 3 IFAX

I F A X


14-09 Authorization Failed forSending to SMTPServer

POP-Before-SMTP or SMTPauthorization failed.

POP-Before-SMTP:

• Check the IFAX user nameand password.

• Check that POP server is set

correctly.• Check the SMTP server

settings.

SMTP Authorization:

• Check the SMTP server username and password.

• Check the encryption settings.

• Check the SMTP serversettings.

14-10 Addresses Exceeded Number of broadcast addressesexceeded the limit for the SMTPserver.

The maximum number ofaddresses depends on the SMTPserver.

14-11 Buffer Full The send buffer is full so thetransmission could not be completed.Buffer is full due to using Scan-to-Email while the buffer is being usedsend mail at the same time.

No action required. Thetransmission will be recalled andsent as soon as buffer space isavailable.

14-12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled becausethe detected size of the file was toolarge.

• Divide the original into sectionsand send as separate files.

• Use G3 to send the original.

• Reduce the TX mail size.

14-13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted becausethe user pressed Stop.

No action required.

14-30 MCS File CreationFailed

Failed to create the MCS filebecause:

• The number of files created withother applications on the

Document Server has exceededthe limit.

• HDD is full or not operatingcorrectly.

• Software error.

• Delete unneeded files from theDocument Server.

• Initialize the HDD.

• If initialization fails to correct

the problem, replace the HDD.• Update the software.

14-31 UFS File CreationFailed

UFS file could not be created:

• Not enough space in UFS area tohandle both Scan-to-Email andIFAX transmission.

• HDD full or not operating correctly.

• Software error.

No action required. Once the jobcurrently using the UFS area isfinished sufficient space willbecome available. If this does notsolve the problem:

• Initialize the HDD.

• If initialization fails to correctthe problem, replace the HDD.

•

Update the software.14-32 Cancelled the Mail Dueto Error Detected byNFAX

Error detected with NFAX and sendwas cancelled due to a softwareerror.

Update the software.

14-33 No Mail Address Forthe Machine

Neither the mail address of themachine nor the mail address of thenetwork administrator is registered.

Contact the networkadministrator. Check that these e-mail addresses are registeredcorrectly.

14-50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error,the send was cancelled:

• Address book was being editedduring creation of the notificationmail.

• Software error.

No action required. If the problempersists, update the firmware.

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 4 SM


14-51 UCS DestinationDownload Error

Not even one return notification canbe downloaded:

• The address book was beingedited.

•

The number for the specifieddestination does not exist (it wasdeleted or edited after the job wascreated).

Check the address in the addressbook.

14-60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the userfailed to cancel the send operation.

No action required.

14-61 Notification Mail SendFailed for AllDestinations

All addresses for return notificationmail failed.

• Correct the mail address forthe PC.

• Contact the networkadministrator. Check the othererror codes to determine ifother errors occur at the sametime.

15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server

Not Registered

At startup, the system detected that

the IP address of the POP3/IMAP4server has not been registered in themachine.

Register the name of the

POP3/IMAP4 server.

15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account InformationNot Registered

The POP3/IMAP4 mail account hasnot been registered.

Register the e-mail account, username, and password.

15-03 Mail Address NotRegistered

The mail address has not beenregistered.

Register the e-mail account ande-mail address.

15-10 DCS Mail ReceiveError

Error other than 15-11 to 15-18. Update the firmware, update theserver software.

15-11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 servercould not be found:

• The IP address for DNS orPOP3/IMAP4 server is not storedin the machine.

• The DNS IP address is notregistered.

• Network not operating correctly.

Contact the networkadministrator.

• Check that the DNS address iscorrect.

• Check that the POP3/IMAP4IP addresses are correct.

• Confirm correct operation ofthe network.

15-12 Authorization Error POP3/IMAP4 send authorizationfailed:

• Incorrect IFAX user name orpassword.

• Access was attempted by anotherdevice, such as the PC.

• POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.

Contact the networkadministrator:

• Check that the IFAX username and password arecorrect.

• Determine whether anotherdevice of the same accountattempted access at sametime.

• Check that the POP/IMAP4settings are correct.

15-13 Receive Buffer Full Occurs only during manual reception.Transmission cannot be received dueto insufficient buffer space. Thebuffer is being used for mail send orScan-to-Email.

No action required. The nexttransmission can be received assoon as the other applicationreleases the buffer area.

15-14 Mail Header FormatError

The mail header is not standardformat. For example, the Date linedescription is incorrect.

Advise the sender to send e-mailsin the standard format.

15-15 Mail Divide Error The e-mail is not in standard format.There is no boundary between partsof the e-mail, including the header.

Advise the sender to send e-mailsin the standard format.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 5 IFAX

I F A X


15-16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received becauseit is too large.

• Increase the setting that limitsthe size of e-mail that can bereceived (in the User Tools>System Settings> File Transfermenu).

• Ask the sender to break the e-mail into smaller parts andsend them separately.

15-17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual receivingonly because the network is notoperating correctly.

Contact the network administratorand check that the network isoperating correctly.

15-18 Incomplete MailReceived

Only one portion of the mail wasreceived.

Ask the sender to send as onetransmission.

15-31 Final Destination forTransfer RequestReception Format Error

The format of the final destination forthe transfer request was incorrect.

Ask the sender to check the finaldestination.

15-39 Send/DeliveryDestination Error

The transmission cannot be deliveredto the final destination:

• Destination file format is incorrect.• Could not create the destination

for the file transmission.

• Delete the destination file toenable receiving.

• Ask the sender to check thetransfer destination and finaldestination.

15-41 SMTP Receive Error Reception rejected because thetransaction exceeded the limit for the“Auth. E-mail RX” setting.

• Check the content of the“From” entry in the mailheader.

• Check the “Auth. E-mail RX”setting.

15-42 Off Ramp GatewayError

The delivery destination address wasspecified with Off Ramp GatewayOFF.

• Enable the Off Ramp Gatewayfunction.

• Ask the sender not to specifythe Off Ramp Gatewayaddress.

15-43 Address Format Error Format error in the address of the OffRamp Gateway. Ask the sender to check the maildestination.

15-44 Addresses Over The number of addresses for the OffRamp Gateway exceeded the limit of30.

Ask the sender to check the maildestination.

15-61 Attachment File FormatError

The attached file is not TIFF format. Try to check the format of thesent mail, then ask the user touse TIFF format.

15-62 TIFF File CompatibilityError

Could not receive transmission dueto:

Resolution error

• Image of resolution greater than200 dpi without extended memory.

• Resolution is not supported.

Page size error

• The page size was larger than A3.

Compression error

• File was compressed with otherthan MH, MR, or MMR.

Ask the sender to check thefollowing:

• File was sent in TIFF format.

• Compatibility of the resolutionsetting.

• Size of the page.

• Method used to compress thefile.

15-63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachmentcould not be received because theTIFF header is incorrect:

• The TIFF file attachment is a typenot supported.

• The TIFF file attachment iscorrupted.

• Software error.

• Ask the sender to check thatthe attachment was sent incorrectTIFF format.

• If the problem persists, updatethe software.

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 6 SM


15-64 TIFF DecompressionError

The file received as an attachmentcaused the TIFF decompressionerror:

• The TIFF format of the attachment

is corrupted.• Software error.

• Ask the sender to check thatthe attachment was sent incorrect TIFF format.

• If the problem persists, update

the software.

15-71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be receivedbecause the attachment was notbinary image data.

Ask the sender to check thecontent of the attachment.

15-73 MDN Status Error Could not find the Disposition line inthe header of the Return Receipt, orthere is a problem with the firmware.

Ask the sender to resend themail. If the problem persists,update the firmware.

15-74 MSDN Message IDError

Could not find the Original MessageID line in the header of the ReturnReceipt, or there is a problem withthe firmware.

Ask the sender to resend themail. If the problem persists,update the firmware.

15-80 Mail Job Task ReadError

Could not receive the transmissionbecause the destination buffer is full

and the destination could not becreated (this error may occur whenreceiving a transfer request or arequest for notification of reception).

No action required. Whendestinations are used and a

space opens in the buffer, thetransmission will be received.

15-81 Repeated DestinationRegistration Error

Could not repeat receive thetransmission because the destinationbuffer is full and the destination couldnot be created (this error may occurwhen receiving a transfer request ora request for notification ofreception).

No action required. Whendestinations are used and aspace opens in the buffer, thetransmission will be received.

15-91 Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transferto the final destination:

• The format of the final destination

or the transfer destination isincorrect.

• Destinations are full so the finaland transfer destinations could notbe created.

• As the send to check both thetransfer destination and thefinal destination.

• When destinations open, thetransmission will be received.

15-92 Memory Overflow Transmission could not be receivedbecause memory overflowed duringthe transaction.

• Expand SAF memory.

• Ask the sender to break up thefile and send the partsseparately.

15-93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete dueto a malfunction of SAF memory.

Initialize memory. If the problempersists, replace the MBU.

15-94 Incorrect ID Code The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for transfer request, because theID code in the incoming e-mail didnot match the ID code registered inthe machine.

• Ask the sender to correct theID code.

•

Set IFAX SW03 Bit 3 to “1”.

15-95 Transfer StationFunction

The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for transfer because the transferfunction was unavailable.

Inform the transfer requester thatthis machine does not support thetransfer station function.

8/12/2019 2238c


TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

SM 7 IFAX

I F A X

2.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part ofthe network is causing the problem.

CommunicationRoute

Item Action Remarks

1. Connection with theLAN

• Check that the LAN cableis connected to themachine.

• Check that the LEDs onthe hub are lit.General LAN

2. LAN activity • Check that other devicesconnected to the LAN cancommunicate through theLAN.

1. Network settings on

the PC

• Check the network

settings on the PC.

• Is the IP address

registered in the TCP/IPproperties in the networksetup correct? Check theIP address with theadministrator of thenetwork.

2. Check that PC canconnect with themachine

• Use the “ping” commandon the PC to contact themachine.

• At the MS-DOS prompt,type ping then the IPaddress of the machine,then press Enter.

Between IFAX andPC

3. LAN settings in themachine

• Check the LANparameters

• Check if there is an IPaddress conflict with other

PCs.

• Use the “Network”function in the User Tools.

• If there is an IP addressconflict, inform the

administrator.1. LAN settings in the

machine• Check the LAN

parameters

• Check if there is an IPaddress conflict with otherPCs.

• Use the “Network”function in the User Tools.

• If there is an IP addressconflict, inform theadministrator.

Between machineand e-mail server

2. E-mail account on theserver

• Make sure that themachine can log into thee-mail server.

• Check that the accountand password stored inthe server are the sameas in the machine.

• Ask the administrator tocheck.

Between machineand e-mail server

3. E-mail server • Make sure that the clientdevices which have anaccount in the server cansend/receive e-mail.


• Send a test e-mail withthe machine’s ownnumber as thedestination. The machinereceives the returned e-mail if the communicationis performed successfully.

Between e-mailserver and internet

1. E-mail account on theServer

• Make sure that the PCcan log into the e-mailserver.

• Check that the accountand password stored in

the server are the sameas in the machine.


8/12/2019 2238c


TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

IFAX 8 SM

CommunicationRoute

Item Action Remarks

2. E-mail server • Make sure that the clientdevices which have anaccount in the server cansend/receive e-mail.


• Send a test e-mail with

the machine’s ownnumber as thedestination. The machinereceives the returned e-mail if the communicationis performed successfully.

3. Destination e-mailaddress

Make sure that the e-mailaddress is actually used.

Check that the e-mailaddress contains noincorrect characters such asspaces.

4. Router settings Use the “ping” command tocontact the router.

Check that other devicesconnected to the router cansent data over the router.

• Ask the administrator ofthe server to check.

Between e-mailserver and internet

1. Error message by e-mail from thenetwork of thedestination.

• Check whether e-mail canbe sent to anotheraddress on the samenetwork, using theapplication e-mailsoftware.

• Check the error e-mailmessage.

• Inform the administratorof the LAN.

8/12/2019 2238c


ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES

SM 9 IFAX

I F A X

3. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

3.1 ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES

1. Ensure that the machine is in standby mode.

2. Press!, enter" # $with the 10-key pad, then hold down% for morethan 3 seconds. The SP mode main menu opens.

3. Touch “Fax SP” on the touch-panel to enter the fax service mode.

4. Use SP1102 1~16 to set the bit switches for IFAX. For details, refer to theService Tables on the following pages.

&WARNING

Never adjust a bit switched marked “DFU” or “Japan Only," as this may

cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is notaccepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas,such as Japan.

NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to theSystem Parameter List print out.

8/12/2019 2238c


SP1102 IFAX SWITCH

IFAX 10 SM

3.2 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH

Only one SP number is used to access IFAX bit switches. These bit switches aredescribed in the tables below.

SP IFAX SW1102 1 00

Bits 0~6: Original Width of TX Attachment File

This setting sets the maximum size of the original that the destination can receive.(Bits 3~7 are reserved for future use or not used.)

0: On

1: Off

Note: If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the larger size has priority. Forexample, if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to “1” then the maximum size is “A3” (Bit 2).

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved A3 B4 A4

When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the

destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receivingcapabilities (original width setting) of the receiving machine. The original widthselected with this switch is used as the RX machine’s original width setting, and theoriginal is reduced to this size before sending. The default is A4.

If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can accept,the machine detects this and this causes an error.

Bit 7: Not Used.

8/12/2019 2238c


SP1102 IFAX SWITCH

SM 11 IFAX

I F A X

SP IFAX SW

1102 2 01

Bits 0~ 6: Original Line Resolution of TX Attachment File

This setting sets the maximum resolution of the original that the destination canreceive.

0: Not selected

1: Selected

Note: If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the higher resolution haspriority. For example, if both Bit 3 and Bit 2 are set to “1” then the resolution is set for"Reserve (300 x 300)" (Bit 3).

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Reserved Reserved 400 x 400Super Fine

Reserved 200x400Fine

200x200Detail

200x100Standard

When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at thedestination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receivingcapabilities (resolution setting) of the receiving machine.

The resolution selected with this switch is used as the RX machine’s resolutionsetting, and the original resolution is converted before sending.

The default is both 200 x 100 and 200 x 200 are selected.

If the resolution set with this switch is higher than the receiving fax can accept, themachine detects this and this causes an error.

Note: The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order tohave enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400resolution.

Bit 7: mm/inch

This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.

0: Off (No conversion)

1: On (Conversion)

When on (set to “1”), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.

Note: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiverto determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inchselection is determined by the sender fax.

Only two choices are available for transmission: inch statements and inch images, orinch statements and mm images.

When this switch is Off (0):

• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.

• Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.

• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.

• Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.When this switch is On (1):

• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.

• Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.

• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.

• Images received in mm are converted to inches.

8/12/2019 2238c


SP1102 IFAX SWITCH

IFAX 12 SM

SP IFAX SW

1102 3 02

Bit 0: RX Text Mail Header Processing

This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mailswhen they are received.

0: Prints only text mail.

1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.

• When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the “From” address and“Subject” address are printed as header information.

• When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), thissetting is ignored and no header is printed.

Bit 1: Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error

This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail attachmentare printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This allows thecustomer to see which documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent

to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.

0: Prints 1st page only.

1: Prints all pages.

Bits 2~3: Text String for Return Receipt

This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms thetransmission was received normally at the destination.

00: “Dispatched” Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives theReturn Receipt with “dispatched” in the 2nd part:

Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched

The “dispatched” string is included in the Subject string.

01: “Displayed” Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives theReturn Receipt with “displayed” in the 2nd part:

Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed

The “displayed” string is included in the Subject string.

10: Reserved

11: Reserved

Note: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to “00”(for “dispatched”) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If anysetting other than “displayed” (01) causes a problem, change the setting to “01” toenable normal sending of the Return Receipt.

Bits 4~6: Not Used.

Bit 7: Image Resolution of RX Text Mail

This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.

0: 200 x 200

1: 400 x 400

Note: The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order tohave enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400resolution.

8/12/2019 2238c


SP1102 IFAX SWITCH

SM 13 IFAX

I F A X

SP IFAX SW

1102 4 03

Bit 0: Original Output at Transfer Station

This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it isreceived from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is thesame as for G3 transfer transmissions.

0: Received original not output at the transfer station.

1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station hastransferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has beentransferred.

Bit 1: Transfer Result Report

This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned tothe transfer requestor.

0: Returns the report after each transfer.

1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer.

Bit 2: Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request

This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations arecorrect or not.

0: The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only (addresses with noerrors in them).

1: If any address has an error in it, the transfer station transfers no transmissionsand returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated thetransfer.

There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station todetermine whether the final destination addresses are correct or not. This settingdetermines whether or not the transfer station transfers the transmissions if there is amistake in even one of the final destination addresses.

Bit 3: Polling ID Check for Reception of Transfer Request

This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions arechecked to ensure that the polling IDs match.

0: Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs.

1: Receives and transfers all messages, even if the polling IDs do not match.

Bits 4~7: Not Used

SP IFAX SW

1102 5 04

Bit 0: Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer

This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSIof the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.

0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTIor CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.

1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.

When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in theSubject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determineautomatically the destination folder for each e-mail.

Bits 1~7: Not Used

8/12/2019 2238c


SP1102 IFAX SWITCH

IFAX 14 SM

SP IFAX SW

1102 6 05

Bit 0: Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients

Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receivetransmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.

For example:

"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9"

in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9 destinations.

0: Not recorded

1: Recorded

Bits 1~7: Not Used

SP IFAX SW

061102 7

Not Used

SP IFAX SW

1102 8 07

Not Used

SP IFAX SW

1102 9 08

Bits 0~7: Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception

This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF storesfax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds

incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memoryavailable falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is thenstored on the mail server.

00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)

Note: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine theamount of memory.

SP IFAX SW

1102 10 09

Bits 0~3: Not Used

Bits 4~7: Restrict TX Retries

This setting determines the number of retries when connection and transmission fails

due to errors.01-F (1-15 Hex)

SP IFAX SW

1102 11 0A

Not Used.

SP IFAX SW

1102 12 0B

Not Used.

8/12/2019 2238c


SP1102 IFAX SWITCH

SM 15 IFAX

I F A X

SP IFAX SW

1102 13 0C

Not Used.

SP IFAX SW

1102 14 0D

Not Used

SP IFAX SW

1102 15 0E

Not Used

SP IFAX SW1102 16 0F

Bit 0: Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files

This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered oroutput immediately.

0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.

1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.

Bits 1~7: Not Used

8/12/2019 2238c


FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

IFAX 16 SM

3.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

When you need to update the firmware for IFAX, follow the firmware updateprocedures described in the main machine Service Manual.

8/12/2019 2238c


IFAX RAM ADDRESSES

SM 17 IFAX

I F A X

3.4 IFAX RAM ADDRESSES

Parameter Function Data Format Address Comments

Mail Address Mail address of thefax account.

ASC: 128 bytes 69FEAE 128 x 3 areaprovided, but onlythe first is used.

User Name User name of the faxaccount.

ASC: 64 bytes 6A002E 64 x 3 areaprovided, but onlythe first is used.

Password Password of the faxaccount.

ASC: 64 bytes 6A00EE 64 x 3 areaprovided, but onlythe first is used.

RX Mail Capacity --- 4 Bytes 6A01AE 64-1024 Kbytes

SMTP RXPermission Address

Address or partialaddress that is usedto limit access to maildelivery (see pg. 4-11, “Auth E-MailRx”).

ASC: 128 bytes6A01B2

Doc. Svr. RXNotification No

Number of RXNotification Mails thathave been sent inorder to notify receiptof a fax message onthe document server.

2 bytes 6A0232

8/12/2019 2238c


INTERNET FAX

IFAX 18 SM


4.1 INTERNET FAX

4.1.1 INTERNET FAX FEATURES

The Internet fax produced by Ricoh is also known as IFAX.

An Internet fax converts fax hard copy document data to e-mail format andtransmits the data over the Internet. Another IFAX or a PC can receive the e-mailsent by an IFAX. Rather than inputting the telephone number of the destination, theuser inputs the applicable e-mail address.

Documents are sent as e-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image (thescanned original), so a MIME-compatible e-mail reader is required in order to viewdocuments received on a PC. To view an attached image, software capable of

displaying TIFF-F formatted images is required.

NOTE: The IFAX must be connected to a LAN and set up correctly in order to useits Internet fax functions.

The main IFAX features are:

• TCP/IP communication protocols that support connection to a LAN with e-mail.

• Easy-to-master operations that are identical to those of a standard fax machine.

• Fax transmission and reception over a telephone line.

• Using a browser (such as Netscape or Internet Explorer) to check the settingsand status of an IFAX from a PC This uses the Web Status Monitor application

built into the machine.• Transferring or mailing received faxes directly to a PC.

• Using the Internet to reduce communication costs.

• Reducing paper expenses by eliminating the use of paper for fax transmissionand reception.

• The IFAX communicates with a server over a LAN (it does not communicatedirectly with another party).

• If an error occurs, a mail error report is sent back to the sender.

Some minor restrictions of IFAX are:

• If an Internet related error occurs, the sender might not receive an error report.

• The level of security for Internet communications is low. The use of standardsubscriber lines is recommended for confidential communication.

• Voice communications are not supported over a LAN.

• Internet fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use standardfax communication whenever time is a crucial factor.

8/12/2019 2238c


INTERNET FAX

SM 19 IFAX

I F A X

The following functions are supported with standard fax transmission, but not withInternet faxing.

These functions are not supported by e-mail transmission:

•

Immediate Transmission• Confidential Transmission

• ID Transmission

• Polling Transmission

• Chain Dial

• Transmission by F-Code (SUB) - e-mail protocol cannot specify an F-Code

• On Hook Dial

• Manual Dial

• JBIG Transmission

• Batch Transmission

• ECM (Error Correction Mode)

These functions are not supported by e-mail reception:

• Confidential Reception

• Memory Lock Reception

• Polling Reception

• F-Code (SUB) Reception using Personal Box (e-mail protocol cannot specify anF-Code)

• Preventing nuisance faxes by destination

• Setting Reception Print by Destination

4.1.2 DNS SERVICE

IFAX supports DNS (Domain Name System). See the Core Technology Manual formore details (Facsimile Processes – Faxing From a PC – Internet/LAN Fax Boards – E-mail Basics).

The IFAX can use the Domain Names for the SMTP and POP3/IMAP4 serverinstead of the actual IP addresses, if there is a DNS server on the same LAN asthe SMTP server, POP3/IMAP4 server, and the IFAX.

With models that do not support DNS, the user has to input the actual IP addressesof the SMTP server and the POP3/IMAP4 server.

8/12/2019 2238c


INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

IFAX 20 SM

4.2 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

4.2.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION

Procedure

Scanned documents are sent as electronic mail (e-mail).

All messages are sent using memory transmission.

All e-mail transmissions are controlled using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)procedures. There must be an SMTP server on the same LAN as the sendingmachine, or the machine will not be able to send e-mail (it is not necessary to setup an SMTP account).

Data Formats

The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file (only MH compressioncan be used).

The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content

From Mail address of the sender

Reply To Destination requested for reply

To Mail address of the destination

Bcc Backup mail address

Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)

Content Type Multipart/mixed Attached files: image/tiff

Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

Message Body MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how filesare attached to e-mail messages)

Errors

An error report is generated if an error occurs during communication between themachine and the SMTP server. However, it is possible that the sender will not

IFAXSMTP

Server

E-mail

LAN

Router

Router

InternetIFAX

POP/IMAP

Server

E-mail

LAN

Sending Terminal

IFAXD601.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 21 IFAX

I F A X

receive reports of errors that occurred between the SMTP server and the receivingterminal.

The interval between attempts to resend mail to the same destination when anSMTP error occurs is the same as for G3 fax transmission.

To view what happens when an error occurs when the machine is receiving, referto the Mail Reception section.

Results

The transmission result is listed in the Journal. The file list for e-mail transmissionsis created in the same way as for G3 memory transmissions. The TTI for the mailmessage includes the word “Mail” at the head of the information in the TTI column.

Selectable Options

These options are available for selection:

• With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolutionwill be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabledwith IFAX SW01.

• The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memorycapacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.

• The default compression is TIFF-F format.

• IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending

• IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 22 SM

Secure Internet Transmission

To transmit e-mail via the Internet more securely, use SMTP authentication, andPOP before SMTP for IFAX.

•

SMTP Authentication. SMTP Authentication requires user authentication beforethey can access the server. This prevents unauthorized access to the server. Touse SMTP authentication, your server must support CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, orLOGIN. The account name and password specified in the “Mail Server” settingsare used for SMTP authentication. Other account names and passwords cannotbe specified.To set up SMTP Authentication:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication

• POP Before SMTP. Prevents unauthorized access to the SMTP server andrequires users to access and log onto the POP3 server before sending e-mail.To set up POP Before SMTP:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 23 IFAX

I F A X

4.2.2 MAIL RECEPTION

This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:• POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)

• IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)

• SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

In order for the fax machine to receive e-mail, 1) there must be a POP3/IMAP4server on the same LAN as the IFAX, and 2) an account must be set up for the faxmachine.

The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which isadjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval

When the arrival of new e-mail is detected, the IFAX receives the mail.

If the POP3/IMAP4 server is holding several e-mails for the IFAX, the machinepicks up the e-mails one at a time, in the order of arrival at the server.

After POP3 has picked up the mail from a POP3 server, it deletes it from the server.IMAP4 also picks up the mail from a server, but it does not delete the mail from theserver.

•

However, the server setting is given higher priority than the machine setting.E-mail reception conforms to POP3 (Post Office Protocol version 3.0) proceduresor IMAP4 (Internet Message Access Protocol).

IFAXSMTP

Server

E-mail

LAN

Router

Router

InternetIFAX

POP

Server

E-mail

LAN

Receiving

Terminal

IFAXD912.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 24 SM

Characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 Reception

Here are some general characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 receiving:

• No MX record registration. There is no need to register the machine in the MX

record of the DNS server.• Power can be switched off . As long as the machine is not receiving mail, mail

stored in the mail server is not lost when the power is switched off. With SMTPreception, if the machine is switched off, the SMTP server sends an error reportback to the sender, and the machine will not receive the mail unless the sendersends it again after the machine is switched on.

• Dial-up compliance. POP3/IMAP4 can be accessed spontaneously, making itideal for dial-up operation.

SMTP Reception

SMTP Mail Reception Procedure

By registering the IFAX as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server,you can enable direct receiving of mail from the SMTP server.

When mail is sent to the mail address specified for the IFAX, it is receivedimmediately without checking the server for the arrival of new mail (as is done inthe POP/IMAP protocol). Also, with SMTP, the received mail can be routed toanother fax (this is known as “delivery”).

Setting Method

The following settings are required for SMTP receiving:

• The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNSserver, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.

• Enable SMTP reception:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol

Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot bereceived with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:

However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in theMX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending onthe setting:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 25 IFAX

I F A X

SMTP Reception Characteristics

• Expanded RX mail delivery. The Off Ramp Gateway feature allows expansionfor RX mail delivery to a G3 fax. The machine transfers incoming mail is sent tothe G3 fax specified by the local part. For example, in a destination address

specified as:[email protected]

the “local part” is 0454778907.

• A POP3/IMAP4 server is not required. For example, in an environment wherethere is only a UNIX server or in an intranet environment where Notes is used formail, mail received from outside is handled via the SMTP gateway.

• Immediacy of response is slightly better . There is no interval in the acquisitionof mail as with POP3/IMAP4, thus slightly improving the response time.

• Easier error handling. When an error occurs with POP3/IMAP4, the receivingterminal sends an error mail back to the sender in order to inform them that anerror has occurred. With SMTP mail reception, however, in almost all cases theSMTP server sends the error mail to the sender.

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 26 SM

Delivery: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP (Off Ramp Gateway)

Overview

If the address of the mail received with SMTP contains the following information, it

can be delivered to another G3 fax:Fax = “ Delivery Number”@”IFAX Host Name.Domain”

IFAX

Router

IFAX

DNS SMTP

SMTP

Router

SMTP

SMTP

Telephone Line

Transmission

Switching

Station

Switching

Station

IFAX

R

R

PSTN

DNS

(SMTP Receive Setting:

[email protected])

(Address:

fax = 045477459@ Cl01.dom1g.ricoh.co.jp)

Internet/

Intranet

IFAXD901.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 27 IFAX

I F A X

How to Set Up Mail Delivery

The sender must set the mail address in the following format:

1) When dialing using a fax number

fax=<Delivery Destination Fax Number>@<IFAX Host Name>.<Domain Name>Example:

[email protected]

! Delivers to fax number 0454771459

2) When dialing using a Quick dial destination

fax=<# Quick Dial Number>@<IFAX Host Name>.<Domain Name>

Example:

fax=#[email protected] ! Delivers to the number registered for Quickdial key 001.

3) When dialing using a Group dial destination

fax=<#**Group Dial Number>@<IFAX Host Name>.<Domain Name>

Example:

fax=#**[email protected] ! Delivers to numbers registered for Groupdial key 05.

Mail Delivery Conditions

1) The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:

User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File DeliverySettings

2) If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only delivermail from designated senders, the machine’s “Auth. E-mail RX” feature mustbe set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX FileDelivery Settings).

3) If the “SMTP RX File Delivery Setting” is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving,and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds withan error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX FileDelivery Settings)

4) The “fax=” setting does not distinguish between upper and lower caseletters.

5) More than one destination cannot be specified in the mail address. A Group

counts as 1 destination.6) If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail

transmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server andoutputs an error report.

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 28 SM

Auth. E-mail RX

In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders mustbe limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.

1) Access Limit EntryFor example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:

[email protected] Matches and is delivered.

[email protected] Does not match and is not delivered.

[email protected] Does not match and is not delivered.

2) Conditions

• The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.

• If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming

mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, andthe SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an errorreport is not output.

• If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incomingmail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is deliveredunconditionally.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 29 IFAX

I F A X

Handling Mail Reception Errors

Errors during POP3/IMAP4 procedures

When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and the message

stays in the server. An error report is output. After a prescribed interval, themachine calls the server and starts to receive, starting with the interruptedmessage. If there is an incomplete received message in memory, it will be erased.

Abnormal files

When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands theserver to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sendsinformation about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the “From”or “Reply-to” field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message inthe machine memory, it will be erased.

The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive errornotification after a certain number of attempts.

The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of thefollowing are detected:

1. Unsupported MIME headers.

Supported types of MIME header

Header Supported Types

Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff

Charset US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled,and some garbage may appear in the data.

Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format

4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted

Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAFcapacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-mail will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after

substitute reception files have been printed). The error handling method for thistype of error is the same as for “Abnormal files”.

If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machineoperates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to “Abnormalfiles” above).

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 30 SM

Printing Received Mail

To print received e-mail:

• The machine detects whether it has received a TIFF-F format image, then prints

it.• Text in US ASCII or ISO 8859 X format can also be printed. When a line of text is

longer than the paper width, the excess data will be truncated and lost.

Multi-part Messages

When a multi-part e-mail message contains several text parts and binary files, themessage will be divided by boundaries, and each portion will be printed separately.If the machine cannot determine where the boundary is, it will print an error report,and then send error information e-mail back to the sender.

Manual e-mail reception

The manual e-mail reception function can be stored in a Quick Operation Key.When the key is pressed, the machine calls the POP3/IMAP4 server immediately.

The timer for automatic e-mail reception is not reset when the machine calls thePOP3/IMAP4 server manually.

Here is an example of the sequence

1. Automatic e-mail reception interval: 30 minutes.

2. The machine calls the POP3 server (automatic e-mail reception)

3. 10 minutes later, the user calls the POP3 server (manual e-mail reception)

4. The machine will call the POP3 server again automatically after 20 minutes.

Secure Internet Reception

APOP: Passwords are encrypted when e-mail is received, making it safer thanPOP3 authentication (clear text), which is not encrypted. APOP requires a POPserver that supports APOP.

IMAP-AUTH (Mail Reception): If the IMAP Server supports the AUTHENTICATEcommand (CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, or LOGIN confirmation), then higher-level securityconfirmation can be implemented for users logging in.

To enable password encryption and higher level security:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption(set to “On”)

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 31 IFAX

I F A X

4.2.3 MAIL BROADCASTING (E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARECOMBINED)

The machine can send the same message to several destinations in one operation.Some destinations can be G3 faxes and others can be e-mail. For the G3 faxtransmissions, each address has to be dialed separately. However, all e-mailaddresses can be sent with the message to the SMTP server in one transmission.The SMTP server then sends the message to each destination.

The following example for broadcasting to three e-mail destinations and two G3 faxdestinations shows how G3 fax messages are each sent individually. However, thee-mail destinations are all sent to the server at the same time.

• Order of inputting the addresses at the operation panel

G3 fax (1) - mail (1) - G3 fax (2) - mail (2) - mail (3)• Order of transmission

G3 fax (1) - mail (1), (2), (3) - G3 fax (2)

The SMTP server cannot broadcast the message if the message contents includedindividual information for each terminal in the transmitted data (such as a labelinsertion). If this type of feature is used, the machine sends the e-mails to theserver one by one.

With the default settings, up to 500 destinations (including both e-mail and G3 fax)

can be dialed for one broadcast. The maximum number of e-mail destinations in abroadcast depends on the limitations of the mail server.

E-mail

transmission

LAN

G3 Transmissions

(PSTN)

IFAX

E-mail Transmissions

(LAN/Internet)

SMTP

Server

IFAXD913.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 32 SM

4.2.4 TRANSFER REQUEST

Operation at the Transfer Requester

Request by Mail

The requesting terminal dials the Transfer Station, and requests it to transfer themessage to end receivers stored as quick dials, speed dials, and group dials in theTransfer Station.

• A quick dial number is indicated by a “#” and 1 to 5 digits.

• A group dial is indicated by “#**” and 1 to 5 digits.

The machine can request transfer to a maximum of 30 end receivers for eachTransfer Station. The end receivers can be a mixture of e-mail and G3 faxaddresses.

The transfer request goes to the SMTP server as an e-mail message. The dialingcodes (Quick, Speed, Group) and the ID code are included in the mail body field ofthe e-mail as text. The message arrives at the POP3/IMAP4 server of the TransferStation.

The Transfer Station sends the message to the end receivers.

The Transfer Station sends back a transfer result report. The original may beattached to the transfer result report, depending on the G3 settings of the faxmachine. For transmissions to e-mail end receivers, the transfer result report onlyindicates whether the message was successfully transmitted from the TransferStation to its SMTP server.

SMTP

Server

E-mail

LA NR

POP

Server

E-mail

E-mail

LAN

Individual G3

Transmissions

(PSTN)

Transfer Station

IFAX

Transfer

Requester

G3 End Receivers

IFAX

SMTPServer

Individual E-mail

Transmissions

E-mail End

ReceiversR

(several destinations,

one transmission)

R: Router

E-mail (one transmission

for each destination)

IFAXD914.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 33 IFAX

I F A X

The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content

From E-mail address of the requesting terminal

To Destination address (Transfer Station address)

Bcc Backup mail addressSubject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)

Content-Type Multipart/mixedText/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)

Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)RELAY: #01#*X#**01….

Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.

Request by G3 Fax

The procedures are the same as for a normal G3 fax machine.

The requesting terminal dials the Transfer Station, and requests it to transfer themessage to end receivers stored as quick dials, speed dials, and group dials in theTransfer Station.

The machine uses NSF to send an ID code and the machine telephone number.Up to 30 end receivers can be requested.

End receiver destinations can also be selected using tone signals, in the same wayas for other recent fax models. An e-mail address can also be selected in this way,as end receivers and as the destinations for receiving the transfer result report.

The receiving IFAX machine receives the transfer request on the PSTNconnection. It then handles the transfer request in the same way as explained in“Request by Mail”.

LA N

Transfer Station

E-mail

PSTN

G3 Transmission (Transfer Request)

Requesting

Terminal

G3 Transmission (Report)

G3 End Receivers

SMTP

Server

E-mail End

Receivers

IFAX

IFAX

IFAXD915.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 34 SM

Operation at the Transfer Station

Request by Mail

The IFAX polls the POP3/IMAP4 server at regular intervals. If a transfer requesthas come in, it receives the e-mail from the server, then sends the message to theend receivers by G3 fax or e-mail, depending on the type of end receiver address.

The IFAX sends each G3 fax as an individual transmission. However, for the e-

mail, the IFAX sends the message to the SMTP server once, and the serverbroadcasts the message to the e-mail end receivers one at a time.

The Transfer Station sends back a transfer result report to the address in the“From” field of the received e-mail. If an administrator address is registered, theresult report is also sent to that address. The original may also be attached to thetransfer result report, depending on the G3 settings of the fax machine.

For transmission to e-mail end receivers, the transfer result report only indicateswhether the message was successfully transmitted from the Transfer Station to itsSMTP server. The Transfer Station does not know what happens to the messageson the way to the end receivers.

If a communication error occurs between the machine and the SMTP server duringresult report transmission, the machine prints the result report.

SMTP

Server

E-mail

LANR

POP/IMAP

Server

E-mail

E-mail

LAN

Individual G3

Transmissions

(PSTN)Transfer Station

IFAX

Transfer

Requester

G3 End Receivers

IFAX

SMTP

Server Individual E-mail

Transmissions

E-mail End

ReceiversR

(several destinations,

one transmission)

R: Router

E-mail (one transmission

for each destination)

IFAXD605.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 35 IFAX

I F A X

Request by Fax

When the machine receives a transfer request by G3 fax, it sends the message tothe e-mail and G3 end receivers in the same way as for a request by mail.

The machine sends back the transfer result report to the telephone number of therequesting terminal, which it specified in the NSF signal. The machine prints theresult report if it cannot be sent.

The IFAX can accept end receiver destinations and transfer result report

destinations that were sent from the requester as DTMF tones. This applies to e-mail or PSTN G3 addresses.

LA N

Transfer Station

E-mail

PSTN

G3 Transmission (Transfer Request)

Requesting

Terminal

G3 Transmission (Report)

G3 End Receivers

SMTP

Server

E-mail End

Receivers

G3 FAX

IFAX

IFAXD916.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 36 SM

4.2.5 AUTOROUTING

When a G3 fax message is received with a SUB code (max. 20 digits), the machinecompares this SUB code with the Personal Box SUB codes stored in the machinewith e-mail addresses. If there is a match, the machine routes the message to thate-mail address by e-mail.

There can be only one destination. If there is no destination attached to the SUBcode of the personal box, the incoming message is kept in the fax machine’s SAFmemory.

A communication failure report will be printed if a transmission error occursbetween the machine and the SMTP server.

The RTI or CSI of the forwarding machine is indicated in the subject field of theforwarded e-mail. The format is “From RTI (or CSI) (Fax Message No.xxxx)”.

4.2.6 TRANSFER BOX

When a G3 fax message is received with a SUB code, the machine compares thisSUB code with the Transfer Box SUB codes stored in the machine with e-mailaddresses. If there is a match, the machine uses e-mail to transfer the message tothe e-mail addresses specified in the Transfer Box.

Up to 5 destinations, including both e-mail and G3 fax addresses, can be stored in

one Transfer Box. There must be at least one destination.

G3 Fax

LAN

IFAXSMTP

Server

e-mail

PSTN

G3 Transmission

SUB code: 1111

Client

PC

E-mail address:

[email protected]

Personal Code 1111:

[email protected]

IFAXD918.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE)

SM 37 IFAX

I F A X

4.3 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE)

The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject,designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.

4.3.1 SUBJECT AND LEVEL OF IMPORTANCE

You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options

The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subjectcan also be prefixed with an “Urgent” or “High” notation.

How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type

Mail Type # Subject Entry --- Entry Condition

1. “CSI” (“RTI”)

2. “RTI” CSI not registered

3. “CSI” RTI not registered

No SubjectEntry

4. None CSI, RTI not registered

Fax Message No.+

File No.

1. “CSI” (“RTI”)

2. “RTI” CSI not registered

Normal:Return Receipt(dispatched).You can select“displayed” with IFAXSW02 Bits 2 and 3.

3. “CSI” RTI not registered

Confirmationof Reception

From

4. None CSI, RTI not registered

Error:Return Receipt

(processed/error)RTI or CSI ofthe stationdesignated fordelivery

Mail delivery

RTI or CSI ofsender

Mail sending from G3memory

Mail addressof sender

Memory sending

Mail delivery,memorytransfer,SMTPreceiving anddelivery

From

Mail addressof sender

SMTP receiving anddelivery (Off RampGateway)

Fax Message No. + FileNumber

Mail errornotification

--- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)

Items! " # of the table above are in the Subject.

Subjects Displayed on the PC

IFAXD919.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c



SM 39 IFAX

I F A X

4.3.3 MESSAGE DISPOSITION NOTIFICATION (MDN)

The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has beenreceived correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps.

1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable thisrequest (known as MDN):

Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options

2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)3. Send confirmation of mail reception4. Receive confirmation of mail reception

The other party’s machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditionsbelow are met:

• The other party’s machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.

• The other party’s machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).

IFAX

Router

Server

Internet

RReception Confirmation

Optioin On

[email protected]

Server Server

ModemRouter

IFAX

[email protected]

RRMail (Request receive

respone)

IFAXIFAX

TX Management

Report

Confirm

Mail (Answer to Reception

Confirmation Request)

* * * JOURNAL * * *

10:17AM s_tadasi@ab cde.ne.jp MailS MQ 0'09" 2 - -

Time ADDRESS Mode Time PAGE RESULT

Confirmation

(TX Management

Report)

OK

$ %

&'

$

* * * JOURNAL * * *


10:18AM [email protected] MailSMA 0'09" 2 - -

* * * JOURNAL * * *

10:17AM s_tadasi@ab cde.ne.jp MailSMQ 0'09" 2 OK


&

'

IFAXD920.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 40 SM

Handling Mail

Handling Mail on the Send Side

When mail is sent, a “Disposition Notification To” notation is included in the header

as a request for confirmation that the mail was received.

X-Mozilla Status : 0001

X-Mozilla Status2 : 00000000

Message-ID : <[email protected]>

Disposition-Notification-To : T.Suzuki <[email protected]>

Date : Tue, 28 Nov 2000 13:4203 +0900

From : T.Suzuki <[email protected]>

X-Mailer : Mozilla 4.73 [ja]C-CCK-MCD BDP jm-Sony 3(Win95: U)

X-Accept-Language : ja

MIME-Version : 1.0To : [email protected]

Subject : Mail Request for Reception Confirmation

Content-Type : text/plain: charset=iso-2022-jp

Content-Transfer-Encoding : 7bit

Handling Mail on the Receive Side

Return Path: <>

Received : From fuser_01 ([133.139.157.20]) by dom1g.ricoh.co.jp (postoffice MTA V1.9.3 ID# 0100110-37392) with SMTP id AAA163for<[email protected]>

Date : 28 Nov 2000 13:4236 +0900

X-Mailer : ICFAX Version 1.0

MIME-Version : 1.0

Content-Type : multipart/report: report-type=disposition-notification:boundary=”—ICFAX_000000EF48—“

To : T.Suzuki <[email protected]>

Message-ID : <[email protected]]>

From : [email protected]

Subject : From @81454771459”(“RICOH GTS)(Return Receipt)(dispatched)

X-Mozilla-status : 8001

X-Mozilla-Status2 : 00000000

X-UIDL : 20001128044713447.AAA163@fuser_01

This is a Return Receipt for the mail that you sent to “[email protected]”

Final Receipt: rfc822:fuser_01#dom1g.ricoh.co.jp

Original Message ID: <[email protected]

Disposition: automatic action/MDN-send-automatically: dispatched Respond Mail Text

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 41 IFAX

I F A X

Setting up the Receiving Party

The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:

1) The “Disposition Notification To” field is in the received mail header

(automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page,if MDN is enabled), and

2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User ParameterSetting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response isas follows:

Normal reception: “Return Receipt (dispatched)” in the Subject line

IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) “Return Receipt (displayed)” in the Subject line

Error: “Return Receipt (processed/error)” in the Subject line

Handling Reports

1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail

After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender’s journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a “Q” in theMode column.

2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail ReceiptResponse

After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, themail receiver’s journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column

and an “A” in the Mode column.

3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail

• After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mailsender’s journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal isannotated with “OK” in the Result column.

• When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an “E”in the Result column.

• The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separatecommunication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of “OK” or “E” inthe Result column.

• If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Groupdestination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See “Howto set up Mail Delivery”), the Result column of the Journal is updated everytime a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communicationwith the 5

th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4

destinations are not shown.Exceptions:If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,even if subsequent communications were OK.If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate thedestination for the first error only.

8/12/2019 2238c



IFAX 42 SM

Report Sample

DATE TIME ADDRESS MODE TIME PAGE RESULT

MAY. 5 10:15 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SM 0'09" 2 --

10:16 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'05" 1 --

10:17 s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09" 2 OK

10:19 m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05" 1 --

IFAXD921.WMF

8/12/2019 2238c


SPECIFICATIONS

SM 43 IFAX

I F A X

SPECIFICATIONS

1. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS

Type Fax Unit and Printer/Scanner Unit

Connectivity Local area networkEthernet 100base-Tx/10base-T

Connection 100base-Tx/10base-T directconnection

Resolution

Main scan: 200 dpiSub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi

NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit4 must be set to “1”.

Transmission Time 1 s (through a LAN to the server)Condition: ITU-T #1 test document

(Selerexe Letter)MTF correction: OFFTTI: None

Resolution: 200 x 100 dpiCommunication speed: 10 MbpsCorrespondent device: E-mail serverLine conditions: No terminal access

Document SizeMaximum message width is A4/LT.Note: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAXSW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3)must be set to “1”.

E-mail File Format

Single/multi-partMIME conversionImage: TIFF-F (MH) format only

Protocol(Supported by TCP/IP protocol)

Transmission: IETF RFC821 SMTP procedureReception: IETF RFC1725 POP3 procedureIETF RFC2026 IMAP4 procedure

Data rate 100 Mbps(100base-Tx)10 Mbps (10base-T)

Remark The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before installation. Anyclient PCs connected to the machinethrough a LAN must also be e-mailclients, or some features will not work(e.g. Autorouting).

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


DataOverwriteSecurity Unit

Type A/B694-01Type B/B692-01

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


SM i B692/B694

DataOverwriteSecurityUnitB692/B694

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INSTALLATION................................................................................11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 1

DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A ..............................................1DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type B ..............................................1

1.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN..................................................................................21.3 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL.................................................................... 2

1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................................3

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE........................................................5

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................63.1 HDD..............................................................................................................63.2 NVRAM ........................................................................................................ 73.3 DIMM OR SD CARD .................................................................................... 9

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................104.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................. 10

4.1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................104.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................. 11

4.2 OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED ......................................... 12

5. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................135.1 COPY SP SERVICE TABLES....................................................................145.2 PRINT SERVICE TABLE............................................................................ 15

6. DETAILS.........................................................................................16

SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................211. HARDWARE................................................................................................. 212. SOFTWARE.................................................................................................21

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


!IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.

2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.

3. Some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied withelectrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.

4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers offor open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrifiedor mechanically driven components.

5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands awayfrom the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier startsmaking copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.

6. The metal parts of the fusing unit and other internal components becomeextremely hot while the copier is operating. Avoid touching thosecomponents with your bare hands.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.

2. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyesby accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eyedrops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by acustomer service representative who has completed the training course onthe machines.

2. The NVRAM has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly.

Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturerrecommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Never attempt to recharge orincinerate this battery. Used NVRAMs must be handled in accordance withlocal regulations regarding the disposal of such items.s

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


What This Manual Contains

This manual describes the DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A/B for:

• B147/B149

•

B135/B138• B089/B093.

The DOS unit is an optional DIMM (or SD card) that contains special firmware. Atthe end of every job, this special firmware overwrites every cluster in temporarystorage on the HDD twice with random data. Then each cluster is once againoverwritten with a zero. This erases sensitive data on the disk which could beretrieved secretly.

Conventions in this Manual

This manual uses several symbols.

Symbol What it means! Refer to section number

! See Core Tech Manual for details

" Screw

# Connector

$ E-ring

% Clip ring

Long Edge Feed (LEF)Short Edge Feed (SEF)

8/12/2019 2238c


8/12/2019 2238c


ACCESSORY CHECK

SM 1 B692/B694

B

6 9 2 / B 6 9 4

D a t a

O

v e r w r i t e

S e

c u r i t y U n i t

1. INSTALLATION

1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:

DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A

This module is for B135/B138 and B089/B093.

Description Q'ty

1. DIMM .................................................................................. 1

2. Keytops for B089/B093 (Blank Covers) ............................... 2

3. Keytops for B135/B138 (Blank Covers) ............................... 2

4. Operation Instructions.......................................................... 1

DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type B

This module is for B147/B149.

Description Q'ty

1. SD Card............................................................................... 1

2. Keytop (Blank Covers)......................................................... 2

3. Operation Instructions.......................................................... 1

!CAUTION

The machine should always be switched off and its power corddisconnected before doing any of the following procedures.

8/12/2019 2238c


BEFORE YOU BEGIN

B692/B694 2 SM

1.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

1.2.1 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL

!CAUTION

Before you start the installation, you must check the box seals to confirmthat they have not been removed since the items were sealed in the box atthe factory.

1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.

• Confirm that a tape is attached to each corner.

• The surfaces of the tapes should be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapesSTOP, do not install the components, contact your superviser.

2. If the surfaces of the tapes are unmarked, remove from the corners of the box.

3. As you remove each seal, the “VOID” marks [B] appear. This prevents the tapefrom being reattached to the box.

4. Make sure that you have the correct security module for the machine. Themachine model requires either the DIMM type or the SD Card type.

Model Security Module Required

B135/B138 e/f DOS Unit Type A (DIMM)

B089/B093 DOS Unit Type A (DIMM)

B147/B149 DOS Unit Type B (SD Card)

B692I901.WMF

B692I903.WMF

[B]

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

SM 3 B692/B694

B

6 9 2 / B 6 9 4

D a t a

O

v e r w r i t e

S e

c u r i t y U n i t

1.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. If the machine is on, switch off the main power switch.

2. Disconnect the Network cable if the NIB is installed.

3. Disconnect the Fax module cable if the fax option is installed.

4. Switch the main power switch on.

5. Check that the following “Copy SPs” are set as indicated below:

SP No. SP Name Set To:

5871 001 HDD Function Disable 1 (On)

5967 001 Document Server Set Function 1 (Off)

5846 090 USC Settings - Plain Data Forbidden 1 (Check)

5836 001 Capture Settings – Capture Function 0 (Off)

HDD Formatting (ALL)

• B089/B093 OR B135/B138 Press # to Execute

5832 001

• B147/B149 Press “Execute” key

6. Check that the following “Printer SPs” are set as indicated below:


1006 001 Sample/Proof Print 1 (On)

7. Turn off the operation switch.

8. Turn off the main switch.

9. Disconnect the Fax cable (RJ11 connection) if installed

10. Disconnect the Network cable (RJ45 connection) if NIB is installed

11. Install either the DIMM [A] or the SD Card [B]:

• The DIMM is installed for B135/B138 or B089/B093.

• The SD Card is installed for B147/B149.

B692I902.WMF

[A]

[A]

B135/B138

[B]

B089/B093B147/B149

8/12/2019 2238c


INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

B692/B694 4 SM

Model B147/B149

• If the PostScript 3 option is not installed, install the DOS option SD card in Slot 2.

•

If the PostScript 3 option is installed, remove the Printer/Scanner card from Slot1 and install the DOS option SD card in Slot 1.

• Follow the procedure in the B147/B149 Service Manual, section 5.7 SD Card Appli Move, to move the Printer/Scanner application data to the DOS option card. (The Printer/Scanner software is now on the SD card with the DOS option.)

• Remove Printer/Scanner card from Slot 3

NOTE: After the SD Card Appli Move procedure is completed the Printer/Scannercard will no longer function

• After the procedure is completed, the DOS card, with Printer/Scannerapplication data, will be in Slot 1. The PS3 card will be in Slot 2 and Slot 3 will be

empty12. Connect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.

13. Connect the Fax cable if the fax option is installed.


15. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.

16. Make a Sample Copy.

17. Watch the overwrite erase icon.

• The bottom of the icon becomes thicker [B].

• “Next Copy” is displayed briefly below the icon.

• The icon returns to its normal appearance [C].

18. Remove the Document Server and Scanner keytops and replace them with theblank keytops provided.

B692I905.WMF

CopiesTotalOrigi.

0 1 0

09/09/2003 14:13

B692I904.WMF

[A]

[B] [C]

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 5 B692/B694

B

6 9 2 / B 6 9 4

D a t a

O

v e r w r i t e

S e

c u r i t y U n i t

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

There are no preventive maintenance checks or procedures for theDataOverwriteSecurity Unit.

8/12/2019 2238c


HDD

B692/B694 6 SM


3.1 HDD

1. Switch the operation power switch off.

2. Switch the main power switch off.

3. Disconnect the power cord from the power supply.

4. Replace the HDD. (Refer to the section “3. Replacement and Adjustment” inthe Service Manual of the appropriate machine.

5. Discard the used HDD

!CAUTION

The customer engineer must consult with the key operator or systemadministrator to decide how to handle the old HDD.

6. Connect the power cord to the power supply.

7. Switch on the main power switch.


9. Check the overwrite erase icon [A] in front of the date in the upper right cornerof the operation panel display.

10. Confirm that the icon has changed from the display for data on disk [B] to nodata on disk [C]

NOTE: No SP settings are required for replacement of a defective HDD.

B692R905.WMF

CopiesTotalOrigi.

0 1 0

09/09/2003 14:13

B692R906.WMF

[A]

[B] [C]

8/12/2019 2238c


NVRAM

SM 7 B692/B694

B 6 9 2 / B 6 9 4

D a t a

O

v e r w r i t e

S e c u r i t y U n i t

3.2 NVRAM

1. Switch the operation power switch off.

2. Switch the main power switch off.


4. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.

5. Disconnect the fax cable if the fax option is installed.

6. Insert a blank IC card or SD card into the controller slot:

• B135/B138, B089/B093 require the IC card.

• B147/B149 requires the SD card.

7. Connect the power cord to the power supply.

8. Switch the main switch on.


10. Do the following SPs.

SP No. Name Comment

5990 003 SMC Printout – SP Prints a list of all the current User Toolsettings

5990 002 SMC Printout – UserPrograms

Prints a list of all User Tool settings.

5824 NVRAM Data Upload Uploads all SP and UT settings to the card.

11. When the upload is finished, switch the main power switch off.

12. Disconnect the power cord from the power supply, and remove the card.

13. Replace the NVRAM. (For more details about how the replace the NVRAM,refer to section “3. Replacement and Adjustment” in the Service Manual for theappropriate machine.

14. Switch on the main power switch.

15. Do the following SPs:

SP No. Name Comment

5801 001 Memory Clear – All Clear Clears entire memory.

5832 002 HDD Formatting – IMH Initializes documents stored on the documentserver, stamp print data, scanner deliveryimages, fax delivery images.

8/12/2019 2238c


NVRAM

B692/B694 8 SM

16. Switch the main power switch off, then switch it on again.

17. Insert the IC card or SD card with the uploaded NVRAM data into the controllerslot.

18. Enter the SP mode and do SP5825 (NVRAM Data Download).

19. In the “Copy SP” mode, confirm the correct settings of the following SPs:

SP No. SP Name Correct Setting


5967 001 Copy Server Set Function 1 (Disable)


5836 001 Capture Settings – Capture Function 0 (Disable)

20. Exit the “Copy SP” mode and enter the “Print SP” mode.

21. Confirm the correct setting of SP1006.SP No. SP Name Correct Setting

1006 001 Sample/Locked Print 1 (Enable)

22. Connect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.

23. Connect the fax cable if the fax option is installed.

8/12/2019 2238c


DIMM OR SD CARD

SM 9 B692/B694

B 6 9 2 / B 6 9 4

D a t a

O

v e r w r i t e

S e c u r i t y U n i t

3.3 DIMM OR SD CARD

1. Switch the operation switch off.

2. Switch the main switch off.


4. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.

5. Disconnect the fax cable if the fax option is installed.

6. Make sure that you have the correct DOS unit for the machine.

7. The machine model requires the DIMM or the SD Card.

Model Security Module Required



B147/B149 DOS Unit Type B (SD card)

8. Install either the DIMM or the SD Card in the controller slot:

• B135/B138, B089/B093 require the DIMM.

• B147/B149 requires the SD card.

9. Connect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.

10. Connect the Fax cable if the fax option is installed.



13. Check the overwrite erase icon [A] in front of the date in the upper right cornerof the operation panel display.

14. Confirm that the icon has changed from the display for data on disk [B] to nodata on disk [C].

B692R907.WMF

CopiesTotalOrigi.

0 1 0

09/09/2003 14:13

B692R908.WMF

[A]

[B] [C]

8/12/2019 2238c



B692/B694 10 SM

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

!CAUTION

Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation powerswitch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and thenswitch the main power switch off.

NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF isopen, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or thenetwork server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memoryfor reading or writing data.

4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.1.1 SUMMARY

There are 4 levels of service call conditions.

Level Definition Reset Procedure

A

The LCD shows the SC code. Thecustomer cannot continue to usethe machine. The customer mustcall for service.

The customer engineer must:

• Enter the SP mode.

• Switch the main power switch off and on.

•

Troubleshoot the problem by followingthe procedures described in this section.

B

The LCD shows the SC code. Thecustomer cannot continue to usethe machine. This is a machineerror.

The customer must:

• Switch the operation switch off and on.

• If the error occurs again, switch the mainswitch off and on.

• If the error occurs again, user must callfor service.

C

The LCD shows the SC code.However, only the unit thatgenerated the error is disabled.

The customer must:

• Switch the operation switch off and on.

• If the error occurs again, switch the mainswitch off and on.

• After recovery, the user can continue touse any feature other than the disabledfunction. For example, if an error occursin Tray 1, the user can use other paperfeed trays.

• Customer should call for service if theaffected function continues to returnerrors.

DThe LCD shows no SC code. Thecustomer can continue to use themachine.

No action required. The machine updatesthe SC history.

8/12/2019 2238c



SM 11 B692/B694

B

6 9 2 / B 6 9 4

D a t a

O

v e r w r i t e

S e

c u r i t y U n i t

4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

Copy Countermeasure Error B135/B138, B089/B093 OnlySC828 B

A special chip on the ROM-DIMM installed in the machine isdesigned to prevent copying. After the command was sent tothis chip, the chip generated anunexpected response.

• ROM-DIMM

HDD Access Error B135/B138, B089/B093, B147/B149SC865 B

During operation, the HDDgenerated an error.

Hard Disk Failure

• Do SP5832 001 (HDD Formatting - All)

• Do SP5832 002 (HDD Formatting - IMH)

•

If normal operation of the HDD cannot berecovered after doing these two SPs,replace the HDD.

SD Card Recognition Error B147/B149 OnlySC866 B

The machine generated an errorwhen it attempted to detect theelectronic recognition license. An illegal program is on the SDcard.

• Use an approved SD card.

SD Card Removal Error B147/B149 OnlySC867 BThe SD card was removed fromits slot while an application wasexecuting.

• Never remove an SD card from thecontroller slot while a program isexecuting.

• Switch the main power switch off and on,then start again.

SD Card Access Error B147/B149 OnlySC868 B

The SC card controller returnedan error because the SD card isdefective or the SC cardcontroller is defective.

• Replace the SD card.

• Replace the SD card controller.

8/12/2019 2238c


OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED

B692/B694 12 SM

4.2 OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED

If the overwrite erase icon [A] is not displayed, check the following SPs and makesure that they are set correctly.

Copy SPs



5967 001 Copy Server Set Function 1 (Disable)


5836 001 Capture Settings – Capture Function 0 (Disable)

Print SP


1006 001 Sample/Locked Print 1 (Enable)

CopiesTotalOrigi.

0 1 0

09/09/2003 14:13

B692T901.WMF

[A]

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SP SERVICE TABLES

SM 13 B692/B694

B

6 9 2 / B 6 9 4

D a t a

O

v e r w r i t e

S e

c u r i t y U n i t

5. SERVICE TABLES

Service Table Key

Notation What it means[range / default / step] Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be

adjusted in the range ±9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAMreset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps witheach key press.

* Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value(factory setting) is restored.

1111 An SP number set in bold-italics denotes a “Special ServiceProgram” mode setting. To display the SSPs:


2. On the touch panel, press “Copy SP” and! together.

DFU Denotes “Design or Factory Use”. Do not change this value.

Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change thisvalue.

LEF Long Edge Feed

SEF Short Edge Feed

(!6.2 Image Processing) Refer to “6.2 Image Processing” in “6. Details”.Due to fundamental changes in how image processingadjustment is done with Group 4 SP codes, more details areprovided in Section 6.

8/12/2019 2238c


COPY SP SERVICE TABLES

B692/B694 14 SM

5.1 COPY SP SERVICE TABLES

5801 1 Memory Clear - All Clear

Resets all data for process control and all software counters, and restores allmodes and adjustments to their default values. To execute, hold down" forover 3 seconds, and then turn the copier off and on again.

Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the copier hasmalfunctioned due to a damaged NVRAM.

Clear DCS Settings5801 014

Initializes SP setting related to DCS. DCS (Delivery Control Service) manages

the Scan Router connection. To execute, hold down" for over 3 seconds,and then turn the copier off and on again.

NVRAM Data Upload 5824

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serialnumber) from NVRAM on the control board to a flash memory card.

While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover open. This prevents asoftware module accessing the NVRAM during the upload.

NVRAM Data Download 5825

Downloads the content of a flash memory card to the NVRAM on the controlboard.

5832 HDD Formatting

Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. Whenexecution ends, cycle the machine off and on.

5832 1 ALL Initializes entire content of the HDD.

5832 2 IMH Initializes 1) documents stored on the documentserver, 2) stamp print data, 3) scanner delivery images,4) fax delivery images.

5836* Capture Settings

Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable5836 1*0: With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature

cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected.

1: With this function enabled, the settings screen for the capture features anbe displayed.

8/12/2019 2238c


PRINT SERVICE TABLE

SM 15 B692/B694

B

6 9 2 / B 6 9 4

D a t a

O

v e r w r i t e

S e

c u r i t y U n i t

5846 UCS Settings

UCS (User Control Service) is the software that manages user codes, the faxaddress book, the scan-to-email address book, and the scan-to-folder address

book.5846 50* Initialize All Directory Info. Clears all directory information managed by UCS,

including all user codes

5871 HDD Function Disable [0~1 / 0 / 1] (0: OFF, 1: ON)

Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to theHDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on toenable the setting. This SP is used after the optional Security Module Type Ahas been installed on the machine. For more details about this installation, see“1. Installation”.

5872 HDD Overwrite Status Check

Determines whether the content of the hard disk has been overwritten.

Range: 0 to 65535

5967* Copy Server Set Function

Allows or denies access to the document server screen. After changing thissetting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.

0: Function enable. Pressing the Document Server button opens theDocument Server screen.

1: Function disable. Pressing the Document Server button does not displaythe Document Server screen. Free access to the document server is denied.However, files on the document server can still be accessed with the printerdriver.

5990 SP Print Mode (SMC Printout)

5990 1 All (Data List)

5990 2 SP (Mode Data List)

5990 3 User Program

5990 5 Diagnostic Report

Execute to print a list of the settings for the selecteditem.

5.2 PRINT SERVICE TABLE

1006 001 Sample/Locked Print

[0~1/0/1] 0: Linked, 1: On

Enables and disables the document server. When you select “0”, thedocument server is enabled according to the Copy Service Mode SP5967. Ifyou select “1”, the document server is enabled regardless of Copy ServiceMode SP5967.

Note: Set to “1” (On) for use of the Sample Copy and Locked Print features.

8/12/2019 2238c


B692/B694 16 SM

6. DETAILS

When an original is scanned or printed, the data for the job is stored temporarily onthe hard disk for jam recovery. After the copy or print job finishes, some of this

temporary data remains on the HDD at random locations until it is overwritten bythe next job.

At the end of every copy and print job, the DataOverwriteSecurity Unitautomatically writes over unneeded temporary data with random data twice andwith a zero (0) once. This is the method recommended by NSA.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28

29 30 31 32

Overwritten

Data present

No data present

B692D901A.WMF

[A]

[B]

Original Data

8/12/2019 2238c


SM 17 B692/B694

B

6 9 2 / B 6 9 4

D a t a

O

v e r w r i t e

S e

c u r i t y U n i t

A copy or print job always starts writing data to disk, starting with the clusters at theouter edge [A] and progressing toward the center.

The overwrite, on the other hand, always begins at the center cluster [B] andprogresses toward the edge.

Taking the first square as cluster 1 on the outermost track:

• A job starts writing from 1, 2, 3, and continues toward 32.

• At the end of the job , the Security module overwrite erase proceeds from theopposite direction, starting from 32, 31, 30 on the innermost track and continuesto 1.

NOTE: Each number in the illustration represents 1 cluster, the smallest unit theoperating system uses to handle data on the HDD.

If a copy or print job starts during data overwrite, the job has priority and theoverwriting stops, and the copy or print job begins.

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5 1 6

6

5

4

3

2 1

2 3

2 4

2 5

2 6

2 7

2 8

2 2 2 1

2 0

1 9

1 8

1 7

.

.

.

.

3 2 3 1

3 0

2 9

7 9 8

B692D902A.WMF[A]

[B]

HDD Data

Overwrite

8/12/2019 2238c


B692/B694 18 SM

1. A copy job writes data to the HDD as far as cluster 32 [A].

2. When the copy job is finished, the data overwrite starts at cluster 32 [B] cancontinues to overwrite each cluster twice with random data and once with a “0”.

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5 1 6

6

5

4

3

2 1

2 3

2 4

2 5

2 6

2 7

2 8

2 2 2 1

2 0

1 9

1 8

1 7

.

.

.

.

3 2 3 1

3 0

2 9

7 9 8 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28

29 30 31 32

B692D903A.WMF

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 89 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28

9 8

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5 1 6

7

6

5

4

3

2 1

2 3 2 4

2 5

2 6

2 7

2 8

2 2 2

1 2 0

1 9

1 8

1 7

.

.

.

.

3 2 3 1

3 0

2 9

29 30 31 32

B692D904A.WMF

HDD Data Original Data[A]

[B]